Primavera Pro User

Oracle
Primavera Cloud
Professional User Guide
March 2023
Contents
About This Guide............................................................................................................................. 17
Oracle Primavera Professional Overview ........................................................................................ 17
Download and Install Primavera Professional .................................................................................... 17
What's New ........................................................................................................................................... 18
About Consent Notices in Primavera Professional ............................................................................. 18
Viewing Your PI Data in Primavera Professional ...................................................................... 19
Cookies Policy in Oracle Primavera Cloud ................................................................................ 19
About Your Login Credentials .............................................................................................................. 19
Password Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 19
Product Accessibility in Primavera Professional................................................................................. 20
Assistive Technology .................................................................................................................. 20
Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................... 20
Common Symbols, Icons, and Tabs: What to Expect ............................................................... 21
Navigation Overview (Primavera Professional)................................................................................... 22
Working with Navigation (Primavera Professional) .................................................................. 22
Get Started with Primavera Professional.................................................................................. 24
Access Primavera Cloud Training Center .......................................................................... 24
Working with the Help Panel ..................................................................................................... 25
Pages Overview .......................................................................................................................... 26
Common Tasks ........................................................................................................................... 29
Undo Changes in Primavera Professional ......................................................................... 29
Switch a Company Instance in Primavera Professional ................................................... 30
Customize a Detail Window ............................................................................................... 30
Download a Table ............................................................................................................... 30
Run a Report ....................................................................................................................... 31
Add a Discussion ................................................................................................................ 32
Print a Page to PDF ............................................................................................................ 32
Share a Page ...................................................................................................................... 35
Configure View Settings ..................................................................................................... 35
Views Overview ................................................................................................................... 36
Add a View .......................................................................................................................... 36
Apply a View ........................................................................................................................ 37
Configure a Column ............................................................................................................ 37
Configure a Saved Filter ..................................................................................................... 38
Apply a Saved Filter ............................................................................................................ 40
Configure and Apply Filtering ............................................................................................. 41
Configure Grouping Options ............................................................................................... 43
Configure Sorting Options .................................................................................................. 44
Configure Gantt Bars .......................................................................................................... 45
Configure Gantt Chart Settings .......................................................................................... 46
3
Configure Network Settings ............................................................................................... 48

Configure Quick Filters ....................................................................................................... 48
Apply a Quick Filter ............................................................................................................. 49
Configure Task Counts ....................................................................................................... 49
Configure a Timescale ........................................................................................................ 50
Configure Spreadsheet Rows ............................................................................................ 51
Configure Currency Settings .............................................................................................. 52
Configure Formatting ......................................................................................................... 53
Navigating Using a Keyboard (Primavera Professional) .......................................................... 54
Assistive Technology .................................................................................................................. 62
Integrated Objects ...................................................................................................................... 62
Preferences........................................................................................................................................... 63
User Preferences Overview ........................................................................................................ 63
Add a Profile Picture................................................................................................................... 63
Edit the User Details .................................................................................................................. 63
Configure Name and ID Display Format ................................................................................... 64
Configure the Number Format................................................................................................... 64
Configure the Currency Format ................................................................................................. 65
Configure the Date Format ........................................................................................................ 66
Configure Time Units .................................................................................................................. 66
Configure the Assignment Settings Dialog Preference ............................................................ 67
Configure Activity Date Indicators ............................................................................................. 68
Configure Save Views................................................................................................................. 69
Reset Do Not Show Again Dialog Boxes ................................................................................... 70
Enable Feature Previews ........................................................................................................... 70
Configure Searches .................................................................................................................... 71
Notifications .......................................................................................................................................... 71
Notifications Overview ............................................................................................................... 71
Working with Notifications (Primavera Professional) ............................................................... 72
Access Notifications ................................................................................................................... 73
Remove Notifications ................................................................................................................. 74
Manage Services .................................................................................................................................. 75
Monitor Service Status............................................................................................................... 75
Configure Recurring Services .................................................................................................... 76
Manage Services Filters............................................................................................................. 77
Main Object Configuration .............................................................................................................. 78
Projects ................................................................................................................................................. 78
Projects Overview ....................................................................................................................... 78
Create a Project .......................................................................................................................... 79
Add a Project....................................................................................................................... 79
Add a Project Proposal ....................................................................................................... 81
Project Copy Dependencies ............................................................................................... 82
Project Templates Overview............................................................................................... 86
4
Contents
Add a Project Template ...................................................................................................... 86

Import or Export a Project .......................................................................................................... 88
Import/Export to P6 Overview............................................................................................ 88
Import P6 XML/XER Data into Oracle Primavera Cloud ................................................... 89
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to P6 XML or XER ................................................... 91
Import or Export Log ........................................................................................................... 92
Create Projects by Excel Import ......................................................................................... 93
Download an Import Template for Importing Projects ..................................................... 93
Import Projects from Microsoft Excel ................................................................................ 94
Microsoft Project Import/Export Overview ........................................................................ 94
Import Microsoft Project Data into Oracle Primavera Cloud ............................................ 95
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to Microsoft Project XML ....................................... 96
Open a Project in Primavera Professional ................................................................................ 97
Configure Project Details ........................................................................................................... 97
Assign a User or User Group Access to a Project ............................................................. 98
Assign a Code to a Project ................................................................................................. 99
Set the Data Date for a Project........................................................................................ 100
Assign a Project Calendar ................................................................................................ 100
Modify a Project Currency ................................................................................................ 101
Add an Image to a Project ................................................................................................ 102
Assign a Location to a Project ......................................................................................... 103
Assign a Manager to a Project ......................................................................................... 103
Set the Reporting Cycle for a Project .............................................................................. 104
Configure Schedule Settings for a Project ...................................................................... 105
Change the Status of a Project ........................................................................................ 106
View the Construction Value ............................................................................................ 106
Considerations When Moving a Project to a Different Workspace ................................ 107
Move a Project to a Different Workspace ....................................................................... 112
Delete a Project ................................................................................................................ 113
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to Microsoft Project XML.............................................114
Recalculate Project Measures On Demand............................................................................115
View the P6 EPS for Projects Synchronized with P6 EPPM ...................................................115
Programs .............................................................................................................................................116
Programs Overview ..................................................................................................................116
Add a Program ..........................................................................................................................116
Open a Program in Primavera Professional............................................................................117
Add a Project to a Program ......................................................................................................117
Remove a Project from a Program ..........................................................................................118
Recalculate Program Measures On Demand .........................................................................119
Delete a Program .....................................................................................................................120
Comparing Workspaces, Portfolios, and Programs ..........................................................................120
Pages ............................................................................................................................................ 123
WBS .....................................................................................................................................................123
WBS Overview...........................................................................................................................123
5
Create a WBS............................................................................................................................123
Add a WBS ........................................................................................................................ 124
Add a WBS from a Template or Other Project................................................................. 124
Create a WBS by Import ................................................................................................... 125
Download an Import Template for Importing a WBS ...................................................... 125
Import a WBS from Microsoft Excel ................................................................................. 125
WBS Fields ........................................................................................................................ 126
General................................................................................................................................................126
Assign a Manager to a WBS ............................................................................................. 128
Add a File in a Files Detail Window ................................................................................. 128
Copy and Paste a WBS Node ........................................................................................... 129
Milestone Summary ...........................................................................................................................130
Activities ..............................................................................................................................................130
Activities Overview....................................................................................................................131
Working With the Activities Page .............................................................................................131
Configure the Table from the List Page........................................................................... 133
Use Find and Replace on the List Page .......................................................................... 134
Filter Activities by Configured Fields and Codes ............................................................. 135
Auto Reorganize Activities................................................................................................ 135
View the Activities Grid ..................................................................................................... 136
View the Activities Gantt Chart ........................................................................................ 136
View the Progress Spotlight ............................................................................................. 137
View the Activity Network ................................................................................................. 138
Create an Activity......................................................................................................................139
Add an Activity .................................................................................................................. 139
Create an Activity by Import ............................................................................................. 140
Download an Import Template for Importing Activities .................................................. 140
Import Activities from Microsoft Excel ............................................................................. 140
Cut or Copy and Paste an Activity .................................................................................... 141
Modify Activity Details ..............................................................................................................142
Assign an Owner to an Activity ......................................................................................... 144
Assign an Activity to a WBS .............................................................................................. 145
Assign a Calendar to an Activity....................................................................................... 145
Assign an Activity Type to an Activity ............................................................................... 146
Assign a Duration Type to an Activity .............................................................................. 147
Assign a Percent Complete Type to Activity .................................................................... 147
Enter Activity Status Information ..................................................................................... 148
Enter Activity Duration Information ................................................................................. 148
Enter Activity Units............................................................................................................ 149
Enter Activity Costs ........................................................................................................... 150
Add a Constraint to an Activity ......................................................................................... 151
Assign a Role to an Activity .............................................................................................. 152
Staff a Role Assignment ................................................................................................... 154
Assign a Resource to an Activity ...................................................................................... 155
Replace a Resource Assigned to an Activity ................................................................... 157
Configure Assignment Calculation Options ..................................................................... 158
6
Contents
Assign a Curve to a Resource or a Role Assignment ...................................................... 159

Link a File to an Object .................................................................................................... 161
Add a Relationship to an Activity ..................................................................................... 162
View Relationships Using Trace Logic ............................................................................. 164
Assign a Risk to an Activity .............................................................................................. 165
Apply Activity Uncertainty ................................................................................................. 165
Add a Task to an Activity .................................................................................................. 167
Associating Activities with Scope Assignments and Work Packages for Scope Management
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 168
Link a Work Package to an Activity.................................................................................. 168
Link a Scope Assignment to an Activity........................................................................... 169
Assign a Code to an Activity ............................................................................................. 170
Modify Activity Details in the Gantt Chart ....................................................................... 170
Renumber Activity IDs ...................................................................................................... 171
Dissolve an Activity ........................................................................................................... 172
Delete an Activity .............................................................................................................. 173
Activities Page Tools.................................................................................................................173
Activity Usage Overview.................................................................................................... 174
Configure Activity Usage Settings .................................................................................... 174
View the Activity Usage Histogram .................................................................................. 175
Print Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource Usage Histogram .................................. 176
Baselines Overview .......................................................................................................... 178
Add a Baseline .................................................................................................................. 180
Open a Baseline ............................................................................................................... 182
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Baseline .............................................. 182
Set a Baseline as the Current Schedule ......................................................................... 183
Set User Baseline Preferences ........................................................................................ 184
Earned Value Overview .................................................................................................... 184
Configure the Earned Value Baseline ............................................................................. 185
Understanding Earned Value Fields ................................................................................ 186
View Earned Value Metrics .............................................................................................. 191
Global Change Overview .................................................................................................. 192
Add a Global Change ........................................................................................................ 193
Copy a Global Change from Another Project................................................................... 194
Run a Global Change ....................................................................................................... 195
Global Change Log ........................................................................................................... 195
Leveling Overview ............................................................................................................. 196
Configure the Leveling Priority ......................................................................................... 196
Level a Resource or Role ................................................................................................. 196
Scheduling/Leveling Log .................................................................................................. 198
Program Milestones Overview ......................................................................................... 198
View Program Milestones on the Activities Page ............................................................ 198
Recalculate Costs Overview ............................................................................................. 199
Recalculate Activity Costs ................................................................................................ 201
Recalculate Costs Log (Activities Page) .......................................................................... 201
7
Resource and Role Usage Overview ................................................................................ 202

Configure Resource and Role Usage Settings ................................................................ 203
View the Resource and Role Histograms and Spreadsheets ........................................ 205
Print Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource Usage Histogram .................................. 206
Resource-Loaded Scheduling Overview .......................................................................... 209
Understanding Activity Units and Costs .......................................................................... 212
Activity Unit and Cost Fields ............................................................................................. 212
Entering Activity and Assignment Units and Costs ......................................................... 212
Valid Activity Unit and Cost Values .................................................................................. 215
Resource Assignment Detail Window Fields ................................................................... 217
Schedule Health Score Overview..................................................................................... 220
Configure Schedule Health Score Settings ..................................................................... 220
View the Schedule Health Score Results ........................................................................ 221
Schedule Health Score Reference .................................................................................. 222
Schedule Scenarios Overview.......................................................................................... 228
Add a Scenario ................................................................................................................. 228
Open a Scenario ............................................................................................................... 229
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Scenario .............................................. 230
Manage a Scenario .......................................................................................................... 231
Set a Scenario as the Current Schedule ......................................................................... 231
Scheduling Overview ........................................................................................................ 232
Schedule a Project ........................................................................................................... 234
Scheduling Log ................................................................................................................. 236
Store Period Performance Overview ............................................................................... 237
Set Up Store Period Performance ................................................................................... 238
Store Period Performance................................................................................................ 239
View Stored Period Performance Values ........................................................................ 240
Store Period Performance Log......................................................................................... 240
Activities Fields .........................................................................................................................240
Baselines ............................................................................................................................................259
Baselines Overview ..................................................................................................................259
Add a Baseline..........................................................................................................................262
Open a Baseline .......................................................................................................................263
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Baseline ......................................................264
Set a Baseline as the Current Schedule .................................................................................265
Set User Baseline Preferences ................................................................................................266
Schedule Comparison ........................................................................................................................266
Schedule Comparison Overview ..............................................................................................266
Working with the Schedule Comparison Page .......................................................................268
Export the Schedule Comparison Page ..................................................................................270
Configure the Schedule Variance Analysis Panel ...................................................................270
Compare Two Versions of a Project Schedule ........................................................................271
Resource List Overview ......................................................................................................................272
Workspace Resource List ........................................................................................................273
Create a Workspace Resource ........................................................................................ 273
8
Contents
Add a Workspace Resource ............................................................................................. 273

Assign a Parent Workspace Resource to a Workspace ................................................. 274
Create a Resource by Import ........................................................................................... 275
Download an Import Template for Importing Resources ............................................... 275
Import Resource Data from Microsoft Excel ................................................................... 275
Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Workspace ........................................................... 275
Promote a Workspace Resource to the Parent Workspace ........................................... 276
Remove a Resource from a Workspace .......................................................................... 277
Delete a Workspace Resource ........................................................................................ 277
Modify Workspace Resource Details............................................................................... 277
Add Contact Information for a Workspace Resource ..................................................... 278
Associate a User with a Workspace Resource ................................................................ 278
Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Workspace Resource ............................................... 279
Assign a Unit of Measure to a Workspace Material Resource....................................... 279
Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Resource ................................................................. 279
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Resource ...................................... 280
Synchronize Resource Availability and Rates ................................................................. 281
Assign a Code to a Workspace Resource........................................................................ 281
Assign a Location to a Workspace Resource .................................................................. 282
Associate a Workspace Resource with a Role ................................................................ 283
Project Resource List ...............................................................................................................283
Create a Project Resource ............................................................................................... 283
Add a Project Resource .................................................................................................... 284
Assign a Workspace Resource to a Project .................................................................... 285
Create a Resource by Import ........................................................................................... 285
Download an Import Template for Importing Resources ............................................... 285
Import Resource Data from Microsoft Excel ................................................................... 286
Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Project .................................................................. 286
Promote a Project Resource to a Workspace ................................................................. 287
Remove a Resource from a Project ................................................................................. 287
Delete a Project Resource ............................................................................................... 287
Modify Project Resource Details...................................................................................... 288
Add Contact Information for a Project Resource ............................................................ 288
Associate a User with a Project Resource....................................................................... 289
Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Project Resource ...................................................... 289
Assign a Unit of Measure to a Project Material Resource.............................................. 290
Assign a Calendar to a Project Resource ........................................................................ 290
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Resource ............................................. 291
Assign a Code to a Project Resource .............................................................................. 292
Assign a Location to a Project Resource ......................................................................... 292
Associate a Project Resource with a Role ....................................................................... 293
Understanding Resource Availability and Rates ....................................................................294
Role List Overview ..............................................................................................................................294
Workspace Role List.................................................................................................................295
Create a Workspace Role ................................................................................................ 296
Add a Workspace Role ..................................................................................................... 296
9
Assign a Parent Workspace Role to a Workspace .......................................................... 297

Create a Role by Import ................................................................................................... 297
Download an Import Template for Importing Roles ....................................................... 297
Import Role Data from Microsoft Excel ........................................................................... 298
Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Workspace ................................................................... 298
Promote a Workspace Role to a Parent Workspace ...................................................... 298
Remove a Role from a Workspace .................................................................................. 299
Delete a Workspace Role ................................................................................................. 299
Modify Workspace Role Details ....................................................................................... 299
Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Role ......................................................................... 300
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Role .............................................. 300
Synchronize Role Availability and Rates ......................................................................... 301
Assign a Code to a Workspace Role ................................................................................ 302
Associate a Workspace Role with a Resource ................................................................ 302
Project Role List........................................................................................................................303
Create a Project Role ....................................................................................................... 303
Add a Project Role ............................................................................................................ 303
Assign a Workspace Role to a Project ............................................................................. 304
Create a Role by Import ................................................................................................... 305
Download an Import Template for Importing Roles ....................................................... 305
Import Role Data from Microsoft Excel ........................................................................... 305
Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Project .......................................................................... 305
Promote a Project Role to a Workspace ......................................................................... 306
Remove a Role from a Project ......................................................................................... 306
Delete a Project Role........................................................................................................ 307
Modify Project Role Details .............................................................................................. 307
Assign a Calendar to a Project Role ................................................................................ 308
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Role ..................................................... 308
Assign a Code to a Project Role ....................................................................................... 309
Associate a Project Role with a Resource ....................................................................... 310
Understanding Role Availability and Rates .............................................................................310
Assignment List Overview ..................................................................................................................311
Configure the Table from the List Page ..................................................................................312
Use Find and Replace on the List Page ..................................................................................313
Workspace Assignment List ....................................................................................................314
Review Resource Assignments in a Workspace ............................................................. 314
Assignment List Fields ..................................................................................................... 316
Project Assignment List ...........................................................................................................319
Review Resource Assignments in a Project or Program ................................................ 319
Assignment List Fields ..................................................................................................... 321
Analysis Overview ...............................................................................................................................324
Workspace Analysis .................................................................................................................326
Analyze Resource and Role Allocation in a Workspace ................................................. 327
Project Analysis ........................................................................................................................328
Analyze Resource and Role Allocation in a Project or Program ..................................... 328
10
Contents
Files Overview .....................................................................................................................................330

Accessing Files .........................................................................................................................330
Access the File List Page.................................................................................................. 331
Access a Files Detail Window .......................................................................................... 331
File List ......................................................................................................................................332
Adding Files....................................................................................................................... 332
Add a File to the File List .................................................................................................. 332
Link a File to an Object .................................................................................................... 334
Add a Folder ...................................................................................................................... 335
Cut and Paste a Folder or File ......................................................................................... 335
Apply a Folder Template................................................................................................... 335
Preview a File .................................................................................................................... 336
Check Out a File ............................................................................................................... 336
Check In a File .................................................................................................................. 337
Download a File ................................................................................................................ 337
Assign a User or User Group Access to Folders and Files .............................................. 337
View a File Version ........................................................................................................... 338
Assign a Location to a File ............................................................................................... 338
Annotating Files ................................................................................................................ 339
Add a File Annotation ....................................................................................................... 339
View a File Annotation ...................................................................................................... 340
View a File Reference ....................................................................................................... 341
Assign a Code to a File ..................................................................................................... 341
Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 341
Shared Data Overview........................................................................................................................341
Edit the Dictionary Sharing Method ........................................................................................343
Manage Shared Dictionaries ...................................................................................................344
Update the Owning Workspace of Dictionary Items...............................................................344
Update the Owning Workspace of a Code ..............................................................................345
Update the Owning Workspace of a Calendar........................................................................346
Update the Owning Workspace of a Currency ........................................................................347
Dictionaries (Project) ..........................................................................................................................347
Calendars (Project-level) ..........................................................................................................347
Add a Holiday List to a Project-level Calendar ................................................................ 348
Add a Project-level Calendar ............................................................................................ 349
Configure Project-level Calendar Time Period Settings .................................................. 350
Specify Project-level Calendar Availability for Assignment............................................. 351
Set Project-level Calendar Exception Time ..................................................................... 352
Promote a Project-level Calendar to the Parent Workspace .......................................... 354
Codes (Project-level) ................................................................................................................355
Add a Project-level Code .................................................................................................. 355
Add a Value to a Project-level Code................................................................................. 356
Dictionaries (Workspace) ...................................................................................................................356
Calendars..................................................................................................................................356
11
Calendars Overview .......................................................................................................... 357

Add a Holiday List ............................................................................................................. 357
Add a Calendar ................................................................................................................. 358
Configure Calendar Time Period Settings ....................................................................... 360
Specify Calendar Availability for Assignment .................................................................. 360
Set Calendar Exception Time ........................................................................................... 361
Set the Default Calendar ................................................................................................. 364
Codes ........................................................................................................................................365
Codes Overview ................................................................................................................ 365
Add a Code ........................................................................................................................ 366
Add a Value to a Code ...................................................................................................... 367
Curve Profiles ...........................................................................................................................368
Curve Profiles Overview.................................................................................................... 368
Define a Curve Profile ...................................................................................................... 369
Units of Measure ......................................................................................................................370
Units of Measure Overview .............................................................................................. 370
Add a Unit of Measure...................................................................................................... 370
Locations ..................................................................................................................................371
Locations Overview .......................................................................................................... 371
Add a Location .................................................................................................................. 371
Download an Import Template for Importing Locations................................................. 372
Import Locations ............................................................................................................... 373
Currencies.................................................................................................................................374
Currencies Overview ......................................................................................................... 374
Add a Currency ................................................................................................................. 375
Add a Custom Currency .................................................................................................... 375
Add an Exchange Rate ..................................................................................................... 376
Configuration ......................................................................................................................................377
Common Object Settings .........................................................................................................377
Field Labels Overview....................................................................................................... 378
Access a Standard Field Description............................................................................... 378
Change a Standard Field Label ....................................................................................... 379
Configured Fields Overview.............................................................................................. 380
Change a Configured Field Label .................................................................................... 380
Add a Formula-Based Configured Field: Example .......................................................... 381
Update the Owning Workspace of a Configured Field .................................................... 382
Activity .......................................................................................................................................383
Configure Default Activity Settings for a Workspace ...................................................... 383
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for an Activity ........................................................ 385
Configure Default Activity Calculation Settings for a Workspace .................................. 386
Add an Activity Field ......................................................................................................... 387
Activity Relationship .................................................................................................................389
File .............................................................................................................................................389
Add a File Field ................................................................................................................. 389
Project .......................................................................................................................................390
12
Contents
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Scope Change Request ............................... 390
Set the Default My Activities Settings ............................................................................. 391
Add a Project Field............................................................................................................ 392
Measures Overview .......................................................................................................... 394
Add a Project Measure ..................................................................................................... 395
Set a Threshold for a Project Measure ........................................................................... 397
Configure Project Field Mappings.................................................................................... 398
Set the Add Project Proposal Form ................................................................................. 399
Set the Details Page for Projects ..................................................................................... 400
Assign a Custom Workflow at the Workspace Level ...................................................... 401
Program ....................................................................................................................................402
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for Programs ......................................................... 402
Set the Add and Edit Program Forms .............................................................................. 402
Add a Program Field ......................................................................................................... 403
Measures Overview .......................................................................................................... 404
Add a Program Measure .................................................................................................. 405
Set a Threshold for a Program Measure ......................................................................... 407
Resource/Role .........................................................................................................................408
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Resource or Role ......................................... 408
Resource Assignment ..............................................................................................................409
Add a Resource Assignment Field ................................................................................... 409
WBS ...........................................................................................................................................411
Add a WBS Field ............................................................................................................... 411
Project .................................................................................................................................................412
Details .......................................................................................................................................412
Add an Image to a Project ................................................................................................ 413
Change the Status of a Project ........................................................................................ 413
Assign a Manager to a Project ......................................................................................... 414
Assign a Project Calendar ................................................................................................ 415
Set the Data Date for a Project........................................................................................ 415
Set the Reporting Cycle for a Project .............................................................................. 416
View the Construction Value ............................................................................................ 417
Assign a Location to a Project ......................................................................................... 417
Configure Schedule Settings for a Project ...................................................................... 418
Modify a Project Currency ................................................................................................ 419
Settings .....................................................................................................................................420
Configure Activity Defaults for a Project.......................................................................... 420
Configure the Task Time Zone Setting ............................................................................ 422
Configure Task Summary Settings .................................................................................. 422
Configure Task Color at the Project-level ........................................................................ 423
Configure Calculation Settings for a Project ................................................................... 424
Configure the Earned Value Baseline ............................................................................. 425
Configure My Activities Settings for a Project ................................................................. 426
Project Activity Prerequisites ........................................................................................... 427
Configure the Auto Numbering Defaults for a Project .................................................... 427
Configure Payment Application Settings for Projects (Deprecated) .............................. 428
13
Configure the Submittal Settings for a Project (Deprecated) ........................................ 428

Assign a Custom Workflow at the Project Level ............................................................. 429
Set the Default Print Layout for a Workspace or Project (Deprecated)......................... 430
Assign a Custom Risk Form at the Project Level ............................................................ 431
Configure Schedule Health Score Settings ..................................................................... 431
Assign a Timesheet Supervisor to a Project ................................................................... 432
Link Timesheet Actual Hours and Assignment Actual Units .......................................... 433
Allow Resources to Assign Themselves to Activities ...................................................... 433
Program...............................................................................................................................................433
Details .......................................................................................................................................434
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Program ........................................................ 434
Assign a Custom Risk Form at the Program Level.......................................................... 434
Codes ........................................................................................................................................435
Assign a Code to a Program ............................................................................................. 435
Appendix of Referenced Navigation Steps ................................................................................... 437
Navigate to the WBS page .................................................................................................................437
Navigate to the Activities page ..........................................................................................................437
Navigate to the project Activities page..............................................................................................437
Navigate to the Baselines page.........................................................................................................437
Navigate to the Baselines or Activities page ....................................................................................438
Navigate to the Schedule Comparison page ....................................................................................438
Navigate to the workspace resource page .......................................................................................438
Navigate to the project resources page ............................................................................................439
Navigate to the workspace or project resources page ....................................................................439
Navigate to the workspace role page................................................................................................439
Navigate to the project roles page ....................................................................................................439
Navigate to the workspace or project roles page .............................................................................440
Navigate to the workspace resource assignments page .................................................................440
Navigate to the project or program resource assignments page ....................................................440
Navigate to the workspace resource analysis page .........................................................................440
Navigate to the project or program resource analysis page............................................................441
Navigate to the files page ..................................................................................................................441
Navigate to the project files page .....................................................................................................441
Navigate to the project or portfolio files page ..................................................................................442
Navigate to the project Details page .................................................................................................442
Navigate to the project settings page ...............................................................................................442
Navigate to the program settings page.............................................................................................442
Navigate to the program codes page ................................................................................................443
Navigate to a dictionary page ............................................................................................................443
Navigate to the Calendars dictionary page .......................................................................................443
Navigate to the Codes dictionary page .............................................................................................444
Navigate to the Curve Profiles dictionary page ................................................................................444
Navigate to the Units of Measure dictionary page ...........................................................................444
14
Contents
Navigate to the Locations dictionary page .......................................................................................445

Navigate to the Currencies dictionary page......................................................................................445
Navigate to the project Calendars dictionary page ..........................................................................445
Navigate to the project Codes dictionary page.................................................................................445
Navigate to an object configuration page .........................................................................................446
Navigate to the Activity configuration page ......................................................................................446
Navigate to the File configuration page ............................................................................................446
Navigate to the Project configuration page ......................................................................................447
Navigate to the Program configuration page....................................................................................447
Navigate to the Resource/Role configuration page .........................................................................447
Navigate to the Resource Assignment configuration page..............................................................448
Navigate to the WBS configuration page ..........................................................................................448
Navigate to the Manage Services page ............................................................................................448
Navigate to the Preferences page .....................................................................................................448
Copyright ....................................................................................................................................... 450
15
About This Guide
This guide explains how to use Primavera Professional to develop and manage your project's
schedule.
Schedule and resource managers should read this guide.
Oracle Primavera Professional Overview

Primavera Professional is a desktop application built specifically for schedule and resource
managers, focusing on the most important aspects of managing your project schedule. Using
Primavera Professional, you can create projects, schedule activities, manage resources, and run
reports. Use programs to manage groups of related projects. The data you work with in
Primavera Professional is automatically shared with Oracle Primavera Cloud, so there is no
need to sync between the two applications.
Primavera Professional is designed with efficiency in mind. A condensed user interface makes it
easier to view large amounts of data. The application-wide menu bar allows you to access your
pages from anywhere in the application. You can use tabbed browsing to switch between pages
without reloading. Perform common actions with a wide range of keyboard shortcuts. With
auto-save functionality, all changes are automatically saved to the database.
Download and Install Primavera Professional

Oracle Primavera Cloud provides the ability to download the Primavera Professional desktop
application for a Windows or macOS operating system. The Get Oracle Primavera Professional
page contains instructions for selecting your operating system and downloading the application
installation file.
When downloading, installing, and using Primavera Professional, consider the following:
 Access to Primavera Professional must be enabled before you can download and install it.
See Configure Boundary Security Settings for more information (Oracle Primavera Cloud
Help only).
 For Windows systems, the application is available in .zip format. For macOS systems, the
format is .dmg.
 You must have the proper privileges to install applications on your operating system. If not,
contact your administrator.
 Primavera Professional saves the previously used project and program information, as well
as the server name, to the user's local directory, the location of which varies by operating
system. Additional information that is stored includes, but may not be limited to, cache files
and cookies.
 An activation code can be copied from the download page and pasted into Primavera
Professional. The code ensures that your instance of Primavera Professional connects to the
appropriate data center for your organization.
17
 You can use the same credentials to log in to both Primavera Cloud and Primavera
Professional.
 If login fails, it means that a connection to the Primavera Cloud service cannot be
established. This may be due to network connectivity issues or because you are behind a
corporate firewall. You can configure proxy URL settings from the login screen by doing the
following:
 On Windows systems, press Alt to display the menu toolbar. Select Help, and then
select Advanced Settings to configure proxy URL settings.
 On macOS systems, the application menu is displayed at the top of the screen. Select
Help, and then select Advanced Settings to configure proxy URL settings.
To download and install Primavera Professional:
1) In Primavera Cloud, in the header, select your username.
2) On the User menu, select Get Primavera Professional.
3) Select the  Copy icon next to the displayed activation code to copy the code to your
clipboard.
4) In the Select an operating system list, select your operating system.
5) Select  Download to begin the file download.
6) When the download is complete, open the file to begin the installation process.
7) After Primavera Professional is installed, paste the activation code into the field, and then
select Continue.
8) Enter your login credentials, and then select Sign In.
What's New
To learn about recent enhancements, visit us monthly at the Oracle Primavera Cloud Oracle
Help Center.
About Consent Notices in Primavera Professional

Consent notices alert you to the need to protect personal information (PI). You and your
organization might be collecting, processing, storing, and transmitting PI while using Primavera
Professional. When you accept a consent notice, your consent covers the collection, processing,
storing and transmission of PI data in all areas of Primavera Professional and means of
retrieving data from Primavera Professional including but not limited to project export,
downloaded tables, reports, documents, web services, API, and mobile apps.
You may be asked to provide consent to show that you understand the need to treat PI as
secure data. You may also be asked to provide consent for your organization to collect, process,
store and transmit your PI. If you refuse consent, you will be denied access to Primavera
Professional.
You can withdraw your consent at any time by contacting your administrator.
18
Viewing Your PI Data in Primavera Professional

To see your PI in Primavera Professional:
1) On the User menu, select Preferences.
Cookies Policy in Oracle Primavera Cloud

Oracle might use cookies for authentication, session management, remembering application
behavior preferences and performance characteristics, and to provide documentation support.
Also, Oracle might use cookies to remember your log-in details, collect statistics to optimize site
functionality, and deliver marketing based on your interests.
For more information on Oracle's data collection processes and privacy commitments, see:
 Oracle Cloud Services Agreement
http://www.oracle.com/us/corporate/contracts/saas-online-csa-us-1894130.pdf
 Oracle Privacy Policy
https://www.oracle.com/legal/privacy/services-privacy-policy.html
 Oracle Data Processing Agreement
https://www.oracle.com/corporate/contracts/cloud-services/
About Your Login Credentials

New customers receive an initial email from no-reply@oracle.com to activate their Oracle Cloud
account. The link has an expiration date mentioned at the bottom of the email. Make sure to
activate your account before the link expires.
You will receive a separate welcome email from noreply@primavera.oraclecloud.com that
includes the URL to access Primavera Cloud and Primavera Professional.
All other email communications coming from your Primavera Cloud environment will be sent
from noreply@primavera.oraclecloud.com.
Tips
 If you do not receive either email, check the spam or junk folder in your email account, or
reach out to your customer success manager or application administrator.
 In case you miss the activation window to activate your Primavera Cloud or Primavera
Professional account, reach out to your customer success manager or application
administrator.
 Add no-reply@oracle.com and noreply@primavera.oraclecloud.com to your address book or
list of approved contacts.
Password Requirements
When you access your account for the first time, you must create a new password. Create a
complex password to keep your access to Oracle Primavera Cloud and Primavera Professional
secure.
19
Note: The following requirements are suggested default options. The

administrator is able to modify the password policy to match an
organization's requirements. Additionally, these requirements do not
apply to users that are configured with corporate single sign-on
credentials.
In order to meet the password requirements, your password must meet the following standards:
1) The password is at least six characters.
2) The password contains characters from at least three of the following categories:
a. English uppercase characters (A-Z)
b. English lowercase characters (a-z)
c. Base 10 digits (0-9)
d. Non-alphanumeric (for example: !, @, $, #, or ^)
e. Unicode characters (Unicode is a universal encoded character set that supports storage
of information from most languages in a single character set.)
3) The password does not contain any of the user ID, first name, or last name when their length
is larger than two.
Note: If you are added to an instance of Primavera Cloud hosted in the

Oracle Cloud Infrastructure, when you select Activate Your Account in
your welcome email for the first time, you will be redirected to an Identity
Cloud Service page where you can create a new password for your
account. Your password must meet the criteria specified on the page.
Product Accessibility in Primavera Professional

Primavera Professional is an accessible application. This topic includes guidelines and tips
regarding accessible product usage.
Oracle has also published an Accessibility Conformance Report (ACR) for the Oracle Primavera
Cloud product. The latest version of the Oracle Primavera Cloud Accessibility Conformance
Report can be accessed from Oracle's Accessibility Program Website at this link:
https://www.oracle.com/corporate/accessibility/vpats.html#acrs-tab
(https://www.oracle.com/corporate/accessibility/vpats.html#acrs-tab).
Assistive Technology
Users can use assistive technology, such as screen readers, with Primavera Professional. To
learn more about using Assistive Technology with these products, visit the documentation topic
Assistive Technology (on page 62).
Keyboard Shortcuts
The list of keyboard shortcuts for Primavera Professional, including page-specific keyboard
shortcuts, can be accessed from the following topic:
 Navigating Using a Keyboard (Primavera Professional) (on page 54)
20
The following topics also include information about feature-specific keyboard navigations:
Note: All tips in the following topics are also included in the Keyboard
Shortcuts topics linked above.
 Undo Changes in Primavera Professional (on page 29)

 Use Find and Replace on the Activities Page (see "Use Find and Replace on the
List Page" on page 134)
Common Symbols, Icons, and Tabs: What to Expect

The following are common symbols, icons, and tabs in the application and what they signify for
the user.
Asterisks
An asterisk (*) after a column or field name indicates that the field is required. The field must be
populated with valid information or users will encounter an error.
Settings
The  Settings icon will open either the Settings or the Manage Views panel. In these panels, a
user can determine the view settings for the page or detail window that the settings icon
corresponds with. A view is a configured visual layout of a page or detail window, including
elements such as the columns appearing on a table, formatting for charts or graphs, grouping
and sorting of table information, settings for page-specific information, and more.
The title of the settings icon may or may not be specific to the grid or detail window that the icon
pertains to. Options for settings will vary depending on what is available for each page or detail
window in the application.
Some pages support Named Views, which are configured views that can be applied to the page
at any time. They are configured from the Manage Views panel.
Visit the Configure View Settings (on page 35) section of the documentation to learn more
about the configuration options for views on pages and detail windows.
General Tabs
General tabs appear in several places throughout the application, and they provide additional
information about a particular object.
Detail Windows
Detail windows contain additional details about a table row that is selected on a page. Some
detail windows have General tabs that provide users with another location to access general
details and information about an object. Fields that are available on the General tab on detail
windows are also available as columns in the main grid on the page.
Manage Services
The General tab for a background or recurring service on the Manage Services page provides
general information and details about the service selected in the list.
21
For background services initiated by a user on the Service Status tab, the General tab for a
service includes the following fields: Job ID, Type, Started, Completed, Status, Added By, and
Context. The General tab could also include additional fields for information specific to the type
of background service run.
For recurring services on the Recurring Services tab, the General tab will include the following
fields: Name, Enabled, Type, and Next Run. The General Tab could also include additional
fields for the user who added the service, the status of the service, the last run date, the
frequency of the recurring service, and more.
Navigation Overview (Primavera Professional)

Primavera Professional provides a condensed user interface that enables you to focus on
managing your projects or programs. Complete your work in a variety of pages. A top-level
menu bar allows you to access all of your pages from anywhere in the application. Use tabs to
switch between pages without reloading your data. The sidebar provides quick links to
project-level or program-level pages, as well as user preferences and notifications.
Working with Navigation (Primavera Professional)

You can use a variety of navigation techniques within Primavera Professional. The Menu toolbar
contains links to every page in the application. The sidebar contains links to project- or
program-related pages, settings, user preferences, and notifications.
22
Table of Screen Highlights
Item Description
Menu Toolbar: Use the Menu toolbar to access all available pages in the
application. The toolbar contains the following menus:
 File: Create new projects, open existing projects or programs, open recent
projects or programs, close all tabs, print the current page, or close the
application.
 Edit: The Edit menu contains options to modify data on the current page,
such as Add, Copy, and Paste.
 View: Adjust the zoom of the current page. Refresh the data on the current
page.
 Project: Access project-level pages.
 Program: Access program-level pages.
Note: The Project or Program menu is displayed depending on the currently
open object.
 Dictionaries: Access workspace-level and project-level dictionaries.
1  Workspace: Access workspace-level pages and object configuration
settings.
 User: Access notifications, manage services, and user preferences. Switch
to a different company instance.
 Tabs: Navigate or close tabs in the application window.
 Help: Access the full Help site, troubleshooting settings, advanced settings,
and About Oracle Primavera Professional.
 Troubleshooting: Select Clear Cache and Restart to clear Primavera
Professional's internal cache and local storage, and then restart the
application. Select Reset App Data to reset Primavera Professional
back to its default state. On application restart, you will be prompted for
your activation code and project and tab history will be forgotten.
 Advanced Settings: Configure Primavera Professional to connect to
Oracle Primavera Cloud through a proxy. You only need to set this if
your organization uses a web proxy to connect to the internet.
Tabs: Each page you open appears as a tab. You can navigate between open
tabs or select X on a tab to close it. Tabs are displayed in the order in which
2
you opened them. To change the order of your tabs, select a tab, then drag it to
the appropriate location.
23
Item Description
Save: Changes to the user's primary pages are saved automatically. Some
settings pages require you to save changes to your page after you have
modified data.
Undo and Redo: Revert certain actions or fields to a previous value. Available
on the WBS, Activities, Baselines, Resources, and Roles pages. Object
deletions can not be undone.
3
Schedule Health Score: Run a heath check on your project schedule.
Available on the project Activities page.
Run Reports: Run reports on the data displayed in the page.
Share: Send a direct link of the current page to team members.
Help: Receive context-sensitive help on any page of the application.
4
Sidebar: The sidebar navigation contains links to project- or program-level
pages, project settings, user preferences, and notifications.
Detail Windows: Detail windows show more details about a row that is
5
selected.
Get Started with Primavera Professional

The Getting Started page is your starting point for Primavera Professional. You can access this
page at any time by selecting the Oracle logo.
Use the Getting Started page to:
 Open a project or program.
 Add a project.
 Access the training center.
 Watch the See How Primavera Professional Works video.
Tips
 Select the  Favorite icon to display only favorite projects or programs.
Access Primavera Cloud Training Center

The training center is your central location to access videos for features in the current release of
Primavera Cloud.
Training content available will vary per app.
To access the Training Center:
1) Select  Help.
2) In the Help panel, select  Training Center.
24
The Oracle University MyLearn site opens displaying all the Primavera Cloud content.
Équation 1: mylearn.oracle.com/construction
The MyLearn website provides free video-based training for all Construction and Engineering
applications. On your first visit, create a free account with Oracle University and enjoy these
benefits:
 More than 300 videos
 Site remembers which videos you have watched
 Filter by product
 Earn badges to share on social media
 Video captions translated into 14 languages
 Searchable transcript in English
 Build your own home page based on your preferences and favorites
 Track your progress and achievement on a personal dashboard
A variety of training is offered. (Not all training types offered for all products)
 Get Started: New user? These courses will get you up and running.
 What's New: Learn about the new features introduced in the latest release.
 Video Training: Single-topic, short duration videos provide instruction on basic functions
and common tasks.
 Crash Courses: Longer-duration videos (narrated by an instructor) guide you step-by-step
through processes like planning a project, or take a deep-dive into a single subject.
 Full Virtual Courses: Do hands-on exercises in the software and view training manuals in
these comprehensive instructor-led recorded courses. Requires fee.
Working with the Help Panel

The Help panel provides a comprehensive overview of Primavera Cloud and Primavera
Professional. Receive context-sensitive help on any page of the application by selecting  Help.
Use the following in the Help panel:
25
  Help home: The top level of the Help. From here, you can view Help content for
Primavera Cloud and Primavera Professional application overviews, Global Admin topics,
main object configuration, Summary & Settings configuration, Help for individual apps, and
the data dictionary.
  Help for current page: Refreshes the Help panel to display help for the current page.
  Training Center: Access the Training Center for overview and instructional videos.
  More Help: Use More Help to print the help topic or send the link for the current help topic
to any email address. Access keyboard shortcuts, the Primavera Cloud library, support
services and resources, summary of new features in the current release of Primavera Cloud,
or Primavera Cloud Get Started page.
You can also navigate the Help panel by entering search terms in the Help panel search field.
Refine your search results by selecting whether to search All words, Any words, or Exact
phrase. Access the search page by selecting Revise search in your search results.
Select  Open topic in new window to view the current topic in a new browser window.
Some tasks contain  Show Me videos which show you how to complete the task. Content in
these videos is explained in the task text.
You can resize the Help panel by selecting the left edge of the panel and dragging to the desired
size.
Pages Overview
Depending on your privileges, you can work with the following pages. The Project menu or
Programs menu displays depending on the currently open object. Submenus are listed in
parentheses.
Project Menu:
WBS: Create the project's work breakdown structure hierarchy to group work activities into
discrete levels, phases, or layers.
Activities: Create, schedule, and monitor the activities required to complete your project
deliverables.
Baselines: Save baselines to record project data during the project lifecycle to review how
projects are progressing over time.
Schedule Comparison: Compare two versions of a project schedule, and review the variances
between them.
Resources: Create or define labor, nonlabor, and material resources to assign to activities.
Roles: Create or define a standard set of roles that you can assign to labor and nonlabor
resources and activities.
Resource Assignments: Review resource assignments and status for a project.
26
Resource Analysis: Analyze project resource and role allocations to identify resources and
roles that are overallocated or underallocated and determine which resources and roles need to
be staffed.
Files: Upload and manage files related to your projects. You can add, delete, preview, check in,
and check out files. Keep track of your files and maintain a single portal where your team can
find the latest versions of your files.
Details: Add or update project details.
Project Settings: Configure settings depending on your needs for schedule management,
activity status, calculations, etc.
Program Menu:
Milestone Summary: Selecting the Milestone Summary option from the menu will redirect you
to the program-level Activities page. Use the Program Milestones view to track the milestones of
each project in the program.
Activities: Create, schedule, and monitor the activities required to complete the deliverables for
each project in your program. Monitor the project milestones and track the high-level progress of
projects in your program.
Resource Assignments: Review resource assignments and status for the projects in your
program.
Resource Analysis: Analyze resource and role allocations for the projects in your program to
identify resources and roles that are overallocated or underallocated and determine which
resources and roles need to be staffed.
Files: Upload and manage files related to your programs. You can add, delete, preview, check
in, and check out files. Keep track of your files and maintain a single portal where your team can
find the latest versions of your files.
Details: Modify auto numbering settings for program-related objects. Choose a custom form to
use when proposing new risks.
Program Codes: Assign codes to programs to track specific information about a program. Using
codes enables you to group and filter on the program codes in other areas of the application.
Dictionaries Menu (Project):

Calendars: Create calendars to identify work and nonwork days and hours for the project and
activities within the project. Project-level calendars are only available to the project.
Codes: Create project-level codes and code values that will only be available to the current
project. If a code and its values should be available to more objects, you can promote them to
the parent workspace. Project-level codes can be assigned to activities within the project.
Dictionaries Menu (Workspace):

Calendars: Create calendars to identify work and nonwork days and hours for projects,
resources, and roles.
27
Codes: Create and configure workspace-level codes to help you track different objects based on
characteristics they share. Workspace-level codes are available to be assigned to a variety of
objects within the workspace.
Curve Profiles: Create and modify curves that can be applied to resources for time phase
distribution.
Units of Measure: Define a standardized set of unit measurements. These measurements can
be assigned to material resources, scope items, and actuals line items to evaluate quantity.
Locations: Assign locations to projects so you can later filter and report based on geographical
location. For example, you can filter the Projects inventory panel by location to allow managers
to focus on the projects in their region.
Currencies: Define a base currency and workspace currencies which are used at the
project-level.
Workspace Menu:
Resources: Create labor, nonlabor, and material resources to assign to activities on any of the
projects in your workspace.
Roles: Create a standard set of roles that you can assign to labor and nonlabor resources and
activities on projects in the workspace.
Resource Assignments: Review resource assignments and status for projects within a
workspace.
Resource Analysis: Analyze workspace resource and role allocations to identify resources and
roles that are overallocated or underallocated and determine which resources and roles need to
be staffed. Max availability values reflect workspace-level resource or role availability.
Projects: Create and manage projects in your organization from proposal through completion.
Programs: Create programs to manage a group of projects associated with the same
workspace and child workspaces.
Workspace Menu (Configuration):

Activity: Create and customize field labels, set activity defaults, and create codes to assign to
activities and other objects.
Activity Relationships: Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the
needs of your organization. Localize names and column labels for supported languages.
Files: Create new configured fields to meet the needs of your organization. Localize names and
column labels for supported languages.
Project: Create and customize field labels, create project measures, add project codes, and set
project defaults including calendars, update progress, and auto numbering.
Program: Set auto numbering defaults, create and customize field labels, add program codes,
assign custom program forms, and create program measures.
Resource/Role: Set auto numbering defaults, relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your
organization, localize names and column labels for supported languages, and create new codes.
28
Resource Assignment: Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the
needs of your organization. Localize names and column labels for supported languages.
WBS: Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your
organization, localize names and column labels for supported languages, and create new codes.
Common Tasks
This section describes common tasks - such as downloading tables, configuring views, and
running reports - that can be performed throughout the application.
Undo Changes in Primavera Professional

Primavera Professional supports Undo and Redo functionality on several pages throughout the
application. Undo is a powerful tool that enables you to revert certain actions and field values to
a pre-modified state. For example, if you entered a new duration value for an activity, you can
use Undo to revert to the previous value. To reinstate an action or value that was undone, you
can use Redo. Up to 50 items are stored in the Undo history. The Undo history is unique to each
page that supports Undo.
The following pages support Undo functionality in Primavera Professional:
 Activities
 Baselines
 Project and Program Resources Assignment List
 Project and Program Schedule Assignment List
 WBS
 Workspace and Project Resource
 Workspace and Project Roles
To use Undo or Redo, do any of the following:
 Select the Edit menu, and then select Undo or Redo.
 Select  Undo or  Redo.
 Use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + Z to undo an action and Ctrl + Y to redo an action.
Note: If an action is not supported by Undo or Redo, the Edit menu item
will be disabled. A confirmation message appears if a proposed action
cannot be undone.
Certain actions will clear the Undo history in Primavera Professional, including:
 Refreshing the page
 Deleting an object
 Applying view settings on a page
 Downloading or importing templates
 Scheduling or leveling the project
 Dissolving an activity relationship
 Applying activity uncertainty
29
 Selecting the Activity Network view

 Pasting a WBS
 Adding or navigating to a scenario
 Setting a scenario as the current schedule
 Promoting or assigning resources or roles
 Exiting the application
Switch a Company Instance in Primavera Professional

As a user, you may have access to projects owned by multiple companies who own Oracle
Primavera Cloud. The Switch Company Instance dialog box displays all companies to which you
have access using your current username and allows you to switch between instances from
within the application. After logging in to Primavera Professional once, you do not need to enter
your credentials again.
To switch from one company instance to another:
1) On User menu, select Switch Company Instance.
2) In the Switch Company Instance dialog box, select a company instance, and then select
Switch.
Customize a Detail Window

Some tables in the application contain detail windows. You can choose to show or hide detail
windows, or you can rearrange the order for quick access to the data you use the most.
To show or hide detail windows:
1) In the detail window section, select the  Show/Hide Tabs menu.

2) Select  Hide or  Show next to a detail window name.
To organize detail windows:
1) Select a detail window.
2) Drag and drop the detail window to a new location.
3) Continue dragging and dropping detail windows until you reach your desired layout.
Download a Table
Some tables in the application can be downloaded. You should configure the table settings and
rearrange the columns before you download the table to ensure you get the view you want. Not
every table is available for download.
To download tables:
1) Select  Settings, and add or remove columns.

2) Select Apply.
3) Click and drag the column headers to arrange the columns.
4) Select  Download.
30
5) Save or open the file.
Tips
 The download is created as a Microsoft Excel file.
Run a Report
You can run reports on relevant data without navigating away from the page. This feature is
available on pages where the data can be used to create reports, including projects, portfolios,
programs, activities, and tasks. The specific reports available to you on a page depends on each
report's subject area. For example, you can run a report with a projects subject area on multiple
pages in multiple apps, but you can only run a report with a Scope Assignment subject area in
the Scope app. If there are no reports to display, you can create a new report. Before you run a
report, you can choose the output format, switch the page orientation between portrait and
landscape, and include child workspaces in the report.
To run a report:
1) Select  Run Report.

2) In the Select Report to Run menu, do the following:
a. In the View list, display all reports or reports that have been recently run.
b. Enter search criteria to narrow the list of reports.
c. Hover over a report. Select Run to run the report immediately, or select  Edit to edit the
report's output format and other settings, and then select Run.
Note: If the Accessible option was enabled during report creation, the
output format is set to HTML to increase accessibility for users using
assistive technology. You can change the output format, but if you run
the report you will be alerted that the report may not meet accessibility
standards if the output format is not set to HTML. If the Accessible
option is disabled, you will not receive an alert.
Tips
 Select Create New Report to create a new report and edit it in the Reports app.
 You can also run any reports to which you have access from the Report List page in the
Reports app.
 If Prompt at run is selected in the Filter Fields tab during report creation, you are prompted
to configure the filter values when running the report.
 You will receive a system notification when your report is generated.
Note: The time zone will be in GMT for all dates and times configured on
a report.
31
Add a Discussion
Discussions provide a way for team members to communicate and exchange information on a
wide variety of objects including activities, costs, resources, risks, scope assignments, tasks,
and more. Comments are saved with the object and are available to all team members with the
required security privileges. You can use the Discussion feature to collaborate throughout the
application.
To add a discussion:
 Select  Discuss to open the Discussion panel.
Note: If no comments have been posted to the Discussion panel, the 

Discuss icon is empty.
To post a new comment:

 In the Post a comment field, enter a comment, and select Post.
To reply to a comment:
 Select Comment.
 In the Post a reply field, enter a reply, and select Reply.
Tips
 A user mention sends a notification to the user inviting them to join the discussion. To
mention a user, enter @<FirstNameLastName> or @<username> and select the user.
 You can resize the Discussion panel by selecting the left edge of the panel and dragging to
the desired size.
 You cannot edit or delete a posted comment.
 Select Like to show that you approve or support a comment. Select Unlike to remove your
Like.
 You can choose to show or hide the discussion icon in a table. Select the  Settings icon
and, in the Standard Column Options section, select the Show Discussion Indicator
option.
Print a Page to PDF

Oracle Primavera Cloud allows you to create a customized layout of a page and print the result
as a PDF. The Print Options interface displays a print preview, a Settings panel, and a thumbnail
selector. The print preview displays your page layout with the current configuration of print
options. In the print preview, you can select the header, footer, or main content area to enter the
edit mode for that area. While in edit mode, use the Settings panel to edit configuration options
for the selected print area. Outside of edit mode, use the Settings panel to configure page
settings for the entire printout. Select a page in the thumbnail selector to display that page in the
print preview. The number of pages to be printed is determined by the selections in the Settings
panel.
Before you modify printing options, you should configure the view of the page to include adding
columns, filtering, grouping, sorting, and other layout settings.
32
Notes:
 To use this functionality in Primavera Cloud, Enhanced Printing
must be enabled in the User Preferences. Enhanced Printing is
always enabled in Primavera Professional. See Enable Feature
Previews (on page 70) for more information.
 Enhanced Printing is always enabled for the Activities, Work Plan,
and Task List pages. To print the planning board on the Work Plan
page, see Print the Planning Board to PDF (Primavera Cloud only).
Use the steps below to print the Activities or Task List pages.
 To display colors and ensure that your Gantt charts print correctly,
enable the background graphics and colors options in your browser's
print settings.
To print a page to a PDF:
1) In Primavera Cloud or Primavera Professional, open a page with a  Print icon in the
page toolbar.
2) Configure the page view according to your needs, and then select  Print to open the Print
Options panel.
3) In the Settings panel, configure the following page-level options:
 Paper Size: Select a standard paper size or enter custom print dimensions.
 Orientation: Select a Landscape or Portrait page orientation.
 Margins: select the length of the top, left, right, and bottom margins of the layout.
Note: You can also click and drag the borders in the print preview to
adjust each margin.
 Show Watermark: Select this option, and then enter text to appear as a watermark on
each page.
 Pages: Print all pages or a specific range of pages.
 Scaling: Select the number of horizontal pages by which to constrain the layout.
Note: The Scaling option Fit to number of Pages wide should only be
used when printing a Gantt chart. This option and does not scale other
layouts to the width of the page. Some columns of data may not display
when printing to a single page.
 Page Layout: Choose the print order of the pages.

 Page Break on Group: Select this option to start a new page for each grouping band in
the table.
 Repeat Column Headers: Select this option to display column headers on each page.
When disabled, column headers only show for the first horizontal row of pages.
 Show Row Numbers: Select this option to display the row number for each row in the
table.
33
4) To modify the layout of the content section, hover over the print preview, and select Edit
Content :
 In the Settings panel, on the Options tab, select the settings that you want to appear in
the Gantt chart.
 On the Columns tab, toggle the display of individual columns to include in the printout.
Select Show all columns to enable the display of all columns. To add columns, exit the
print preview and add columns in the view settings.
 On the Timescale tab, select a timescale interval, and then select a start and finish date
for the timescale. Select Use rolling dates to configure rolling start and end dates.
Note: The Options and Timescale tabs are only available on pages
with the Gantt view enabled.
Select Return to Preview to exit the edit mode.

5) To modify the print header or footer settings, hover over the print preview, and select Edit
Header  or Edit Footer .
6) In edit mode, use the floating toolbar to configure the following header and footer options:
 Apply bold, italics, or underline formatting, and change the size and color of text.
 Alignment: Align each line of text to the left, center, or right side of a section.
 Insert Link: Add link text and a URL. Choose to open the link in a new browser tab or
window, or open the link in the current browser tab.
 Legend: Add a Gantt chart legend to the selected section of the header or footer.
Notes:
 The Legend option is only available on pages with the Gantt view
enabled.
 The Color Legend option on the Task List page adds a color legend
to the header or footer.
 Add Image: Insert the company logo, the image for the current project, or the image for
the current workspace.
 Add Revision Box: Add a revision box to the selected section. To edit the content in the
revision box, select Open Revision Box Editor from the Settings panel. In the
Revisions dialog, you can enter text, rearrange and resize columns, and modify the
alignment of text in the columns. Select Add to add more rows to the table. Deselect the
Print checkbox for a row if you do not want that row to be printed on the PDF (the row is
still saved in the Revisions dialog box). When you are finished editing the Revision Box,
select Save.
You can only have one unique revision box per named view. If you add multiple revision
boxes to the printout, they will all have the same configuration.
 Add Field: Add field variables to the selected section.
34
Note: Field variable text that is only partially formatted may not display
properly. Ensure the entire variable is formatted correctly.
 Toggle Dividers: Toggle the display of section divider lines in the printout.
 Sections: Display up to five separate sections in the header or footer.
7) In the Settings panel, configure separate options to show the header and footer on all
pages, only the first page, or only the last page of the print layout.
8) Select Return to Preview to exit the edit mode.
9) In the thumbnail selector, select individual page thumbnails to review the order, number, and
appearance of the pages in the print layout. Continue to modify print settings according to
your needs.
10) When you are finished, select Print to print the layout to a PDF file. You can then view the
layout or print it to a physical format.
Tips
 Use the floating toolbar to adjust the zoom settings of the print preview. Select 
Continuous to enable continuous scrolling of the print preview.
Share a Page
Share pages with your team members to communicate information without leaving the
application. You can only share pages that contain data. For example, you cannot send a project
cost sheet which does not have any data.
Sharing enables you to send users a direct link to the page, making navigation easier for the
recipient. Any user that does not have the required security privileges on an object will not be
able to access it. Instead, they will receive a notification that a page from a restricted project has
been shared.
To share a page:
1) Select  Share this page.

2) In the Share dialog box, in the To field:
a. Enter part or all of a user's login name, personal name, or email address into the Search
field.
b. Select a user.
3) (Optional) In the Add a message field, enter a message.
4) Select Share.
Configure View Settings

A view is a configured visual layout of a page.
The following section contains view options common throughout Oracle Primavera Cloud.
Available options will vary by page.
Note: Certain page view settings are not maintained when the page is
35
refreshed using the Safari browser.
Views Overview
A view is a configured visual layout of a page. Views allow you to customize content and layout
choices such as column selection, filtering, grouping, and sorting. Some pages support
additional view options, such as Gantt charts, Gantt bars, and spreadsheet rows. Selecting the
best view for your needs can facilitate the process of managing data in Primavera Cloud and
Primavera Professional.
Some pages support the ability to save named views. Named views can be saved as one of the
three following types: Personal, Project, and Workspace. Personal views are private and only
accessible to the user who created them. Project views are saved at the project level and can be
accessed by other members of the project. Likewise, workspace views are saved at the
workspace level and are available to all users in the workspace. Available view types may vary
by page. A fourth named view type, standard, can be found on the Activities page. Standard
views are views that come with Primavera Cloud and contain pre-configured view options. They
are read-only, but you can modify the view options and save the modifications as a new view.
On pages that support named views, you can create any number of views necessary to display
your layouts. Personal, project, and workspace named views can be added, modified, and
deleted in the Manage Views panel on a page. On pages without named views, available view
options are configured in the Settings panel and are applied and saved to the page.
For pages that support named views and autosave, you can configure if view changes to those
pages are saved manually or automatically by configuring the Save Views options in
Preferences (see "Configure Save Views" on page 69).
Available view options will vary by page. The title of the  Settings icon may be specific to the
grid or detail window that the icon pertains to. For example, the title of the icon for the Activities
grid is Activities Grid Settings.
Add a View
Some pages support the ability to add and save named views. Named views can be configured
and applied at any time. Add multiple views to display different layouts.
There are four types of named views:
 Standard: Accessible by all users. Only available on the Activities page. You cannot add,
edit, or delete standard views, but you can modify the view and save the changes as a new
view of another type.
 Project: Accessible by other members of the project.
 Workspace: Accessible by all members of the workspace.
 Personal: Only accessible to the user who created them.
36
Notes:
 Your security privileges determine your ability to create project and
workspace views.
 View options may vary per page.
To add a view:
1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

2) In the Manage Views panel, select a view type, select the  Context menu, and then select
Add.
3) Enter a name for the new view.
4) Add the view:
In the Manage Views panel:
a. Select Save.
b. Select Apply. When selected, you are returned to the grid. The grid displays any
changes you have made; however, those changes are not saved. To save the view select
Save in the View list.
c. Select Reset. Reset deletes the view that was previously added.
Tips
 On the  Context menu next to an existing view, you can cut, copy, and paste the view into
any of the view types. Select Delete to delete the view. Select Set Active to apply the view
to the page.
Apply a View
Select a view to apply its display settings to a page.
Note: You can only apply a view on pages that support named views.
To apply a view:

2) In the Manage Views panel, select a view.
3) Select the  Context menu, and then select Set Active.
Tips
 For quicker selection, the View list displays a list of the five most recently applied views.
Select a view to apply it.
 When edits are made to a view and the Save Views preference is set to manual, a warning
icon is displayed in the View list and you will have the option to reset the view, save the
view, or save the changes as a new view directly from the View list.
Configure a Column
Configure columns to select and position the columns of data that appear on a page.
37
Note: View options may vary per page. The title of the  Settings icon
may be specific to the grid or detail window that the icon pertains to.
To configure a column:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Columns tab.
3) In the Available Columns section, select columns and select Add Column to Selected
Columns to add them to the Selected Columns section.
4) To position the columns in the Selected Columns section by:
a. Using the up and down arrows to change the positioning of the columns.
b. Dragging columns between the pinned and unpinned sections or by dragging the Pinned
Columns Above slider up or down. Pinned columns are displayed in a section at the
beginning of the table and will not move when the rest of the table is scrolled horizontally.
Pinned columns are not available on every page.
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
b. Select Save As. When selected, you can create a new Personal, Project, or Workspace
view with a new name in the Save View as window.
c. Select Apply. When selected, you are returned to the grid. The grid displays any
changes you have made; however, those changes are not saved. To save changes
select Save or Save As in the View list.
d. Select Reset.
e. Select  Close.
In the Settings panel:
 Select Save.
Tips
 You can choose to show or hide the discussion icon in a table. Select the  Settings icon
and, in the Standard Column Options section, select the Show Discussion Indicator
option.
Configure a Saved Filter
Filters reduce the data displayed on a page without deleting or otherwise removing it. Data that
has been filtered out is still used for all calculations and reports. Some pages offer saved filters,
which enable you to create multiple filters and apply them later.
38
Filters can be saved as one of three types: Workspace, Project, or Personal. Workspace filters
are accessible to all users in the workspace. Project filters are accessible to all users in a
project. Personal filters are private and only accessible to the user who created them. Users can
view and edit all visible filters for a page, but can only apply a filter if it is accessible by the
current view. For example, workspace views can only apply workspace filters, but personal
views can apply workspace, project, and personal filters. Project views can apply project and
personal views, if applicable. To apply a filter that is not accessible by the current view, you can
cut or copy it to a type that is accessible to the view. A fourth filter type, standard, contains
read-only filters that come with Primavera Cloud. Standard filters cannot be added, edited, or
deleted, but then can be copied to a different type of filter and then modified.
Applied filters are saved to the selected view. On a page without named views, saved filters are
saved and applied to the page.
To configure a saved filter:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Saved Filters tab, and then select
Manage Filters.
3) In the Manage Filters panel, in the navigation tree, select a filter type, select the  Context
menu, and then select Add.
Note: Filters applied in the Manage Filters panel are applied to the
currently active view. To change the active view, in the Manage Views
panel, select the  Context menu next to a view, and then select Set
Active.
4) Enter a name for the new filter.

5) Do the following to define the filter criteria:
a. In the Match list, select an option to define the filter conditions:
 All of the following: Data is filtered only if it matches all the specified rules.
 Any of the following: Data is filtered if it matches any of the specified rules.
b. Select  Add a filter condition.
c. In the first empty row, use the following fields to define a filter rule:
 Field: The data field to which the rule is applied.
 Operator: The comparison operation for the rule.
 Value: The value against which the rule compares the data field.
d. Add rows for each filter rule you want to define.
e. Add filter groups to define additional sets of conditions.
6) Apply the view:
39
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
7) Select Save.
Tips
 On the page, select  Filters to open the Manage Filters panel, apply a recently used filter,
or clear filters currently in use.
 For information on applying a saved filter, see Apply a Saved Filter (on page 40).
Apply a Saved Filter
Apply a filter to reduce the data displayed on a page without deleting or otherwise removing it.
Data that has been filtered out is still used for all calculations and reports. Saved filters enable
you to create multiple filters and apply them later.
Applied filters are saved to the selected view. On a page without named views, applied filters are
saved to the page. For information on configuring a saved filter, see Configure a Saved Filter
(on page 38).
To apply a saved filter:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Saved Filters tab.
3) In the Manage Views panel, select the view to which you want to apply the filter.
Note: In the Settings panel, applied filters are saved directly to the
page.
4) In the Match field, select an option to define the filter application conditions:
 All applied: Data is filtered only if it matches all of the selected filters.
 Any applied: Data is filtered if it matches any of the selected filters.
5) In the filters tree, select the filters to apply to the view.
Note: If you want to edit a filter before you apply it, select Manage
Filters. Any filter in the Manage Filters panel can be edited, but you can
only apply a filter if it is accessible by the currently active view. To
40
change the active view, in the Manage Views panel, select the 
Context menu next to a view, and then select Set Active.
6) Apply the view:

a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Tips
 Some pages include several standard filters, preconfigured for your use. You can apply them
to your view at any time.
 On the page, select  Filters to open the Manage Filters panel, apply a recently used filter,
or clear filters currently in use.
 When you apply a filter to a view, the filter icon changes to indicate that the data on the page
has a filter applied.
Configure and Apply Filtering
On pages without saved filters, you can configure and apply filtering options as part of the
current view. Filters reduce the data displayed on a page without deleting or otherwise removing
it. Data that has been filtered out is still used for all calculations and reports.
On pages with named views, you can configure a different set of filtering options for each view.
On pages without named views, filtering options are applied to the page.
Notes:
 For information on configuring a saved filter, see Configure a Saved
Filter (on page 38).
To configure and apply filtering options:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Filtering tab.
3) In the Manage Views panel, select the view to which you want to apply the filter.
41
Note: In the Settings panel, filtering options are configured and applied
directly to the page.
4) Add a filter:
a. In the Match list, select an option to define the filter conditions:
 All of the following: Data is filtered only if it matches all the specified rules.
 Any of the following: Data is filtered if it matches any of the specified rules.
b. Select  Add a filter condition.
c. In the first row, use the following fields to define a filter rule:
 Field: The data field to which the rule is applied.
 Operator: The comparison operation for the rule.
 Value: The value against which the rule compares the data field.
d. Add rows for each filter rule you want to define.
e. Add filter groups to define additional sets of conditions.
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
In addition to the standard filtering options, the Work Plan, Hand-offs, Task List, and Constraints
pages in the Tasks app also support the ability to configure and apply planning period options
from the Filtering tab. On the Work Plan, Hand-offs, and Task List pages, you are filtering
activities and tasks based on their start and finish dates. On the Constraints page, you are
filtering task constraints based on their dates needed, promised dates, and assigned task start
and finish dates.
To configure planning period filtering options:
1) On the Filtering tab, in the Planning Period section, select one of the following:
 All Weeks: Select to display all objects regardless of their dates.
 Rolling Time Frame: Select to filter objects according to a planning period:
 Weeks Before: Display any object whose dates occur within the specified number
of weeks before the current date.
 Weeks After: Display any object whose dates occur within the specified number
of weeks after the current date.
42
Tips
 Tasks that fall outside the planning period may still be visible if any of the following are true:
 Any of its dates occur within the period.
 Assigned activity dates occur within the period.
 It is part of a hand-off chain that occurs within the period.
 Depending on the fields selected in the standard filtering options, the Work Plan, Hand-offs,
and Task List pages support the filtering of tasks by a variety of task values, including the
activities and WBS nodes with which the tasks may be associated.
Configure Grouping Options
Configure grouping options for views to specify how data is grouped on a page. You can
customize the color and appearance of your grouping bands by level.
To configure grouping:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Grouping tab.
3) To configure the grouping options, select the Configure tab and do the following:
a. In the Group By section, select your grouping options:
 Group By: Defines how data is grouped together on the page.
 Sort Order: Defines how data is sorted within groupings.
 Grouping Interval: Specifies an interval by which to separate your groupings.
This field is only available when grouping by hierarchical fields.
Note: To add grouping rows, select the  Context menu, and select
Add Above or Add Below.
b. In the Band Options section, select view options:

 Show field title: Displays the title of the field by which data is grouped in a band.
 Show field rollups: Displays the calculated total of all data in a grouping band.
 Hide if empty: Hides grouping bands that do not contain any data.
 In the Display text in band using field, select an option to specify the text to
appear in the band.
Note: This field only applies to group by fields that have both an ID and
name.
4) To configure grouping band color options, select the Theme tab and do the following:
a. In the Style list, select a grouping style.
b. In the Colors list, select a default or custom color theme.
43
c. To add a custom theme, select Add Custom Colors, and then choose up to six colors
for the custom theme. Each color corresponds to a grouping band level. You can create
multiple custom color themes and select them in the Colors list. After choosing a custom
theme from the list, you can edit its individual colors or select  Remove Custom
Colors to delete the theme.
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Configure Sorting Options

Configure sorting options to specify how data is arranged on a page.
To configure sorting options on a page:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Sorting tab.
3) Complete the following fields to define a sort order:
 Sort By: Select a column by which to order the data.
 Order: Select a direction in which to arrange the sorted data.
4) To define additional levels of sorting, select the  Context menu, and then select Add
Above or Add Below.
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
44
 Select Save.
Configure Gantt Bars

To visually distinguish the different bars displayed in the Gantt chart, you can configure bar
settings for the Gantt chart view on a page. Some bars, such as the Current bar, have additional
configuration options.
You can configure Gantt bars on the following pages:
 Activities
To configure Gantt chart bars:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Bars tab.
3) To add a new bar, do the following:
a. Select  Add , and then select Bar.
b. In the Bar Type list, select one of the available bar types.
c. In the Height list, specify a bar height.
d. In the Bar Color list, use the color picker to select a color for the bar. Optionally you can
select a theme from the Theme list to apply a pre-configured color theme for all bars in
the Gantt chart.
e. Click and drag one or more bars to change the order in which they appear.
4) To configure the Current bar, select the bar and do any of the following:
 Select Show Progress to show activity progress as a separate bar color. Select a
Progress Color from the list.
 If you want to color your activities according to their assigned code values, select the
check box next to Color by Activity Code, and then select a workspace-level or
project-level activity code. The code's values and their associated colors are shown
below the list. Select Configure to configure the code value colors in the corresponding
Codes dictionary. If Show Progress is enabled, you can configure the same options for
Progress Color by Activity Code. Other bars also support the ability to color by activity
code.
 Select Swap Colors to switch the positions of the bar and progress colors or the bar
and progress activity codes.
 In the Progress Style list, select a progress style.
 Select Show Critical to represent critical activities with a red bar instead of the colors
selected for the Current bar.
5) To configure labels for a bar, do the following:
a. Select the bar, select  Add , and then select Label.
b. In the Label Field list, select a label for the bar.
c. In the Color list, use the color selector to select a font color.
45
d. In the Height list, select a font height.

e. Click and drag the label to position it next to or inside the bar.
6) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Tips
 Select the Summary Bar. Enable Show Expanded Summary Bars to show summary bars
for each expanded and collapsed grouping band in the Gantt view. When this option is
disabled, a summary bar will only be displayed if its corresponding grouping band is
collapsed.
 To preview how your Gantt chart bars will look, select Preview.
 To reset your Gantt chart settings to the default configuration, select Reset.
Configure Gantt Chart Settings
Configure Gantt chart settings to determine how the chart will display.
You can configure Gantt chart settings on the following pages:
 Activities
 Task List
To configure Gantt chart settings:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Gantt tab.
3) In the Show section, define your chart display options:
 Data date line: Determines whether to show the project data date in the Gantt chart.
 Relationship lines: Determines whether to show activity relationship lines in the Gantt
chart.
 Critical relationships: Determines whether to show relationships for activities that
must start or finish on time to ensure the project completes on schedule.
46
 Non-driving relationships: Determines whether to show relationships for

activities not on the longest path to project completion.
 Sight Lines: Determines whether to show lines of demarcation for the selected
timescale.
 Non-working time shading: Determines whether to gray out time periods in which no
work will be performed, as defined by the project calendar.
 Progress Spotlight: Enables the Progress Spotlight highlighting feature in the Gantt
chart.
4) In the Timescale section, define your timescale options:
 In the Timescale list, select a timescale for the Gantt chart:
 Week/Day: The Gantt chart is divided into weeks which are then divided into days.
 Month/Week: The Gantt chart is divided into months which are then divided into
weeks.
 Quarter/Month: The Gantt chart is divided into quarters which are then divided
into months.
 Year/Month: The Gantt chart is divided into years which are then divided into
months.
 Year/Quarter: The Gantt chart is divided into years which are then divided into
quarters.
 Reporting Period: The Gantt chart is divided into the units set by the reporting
cycle. This option is only available in a project view on the Activities page, and a
reporting cycle must be defined for the project.
 (Reporting Period timescale only) For the Reporting Period Label option, select
Custom label only to display the reporting period as the label on the Gantt chart (such
as WK3). When deselected, the label uses the dates (such as Sat 24 - Fri 30).
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Tips
 You can also enable some or all of these options by selecting  Gantt Settings under the
Gantt chart.
 Tasks bars are colored by specific attributes. Go to Project Settings (see "Configure Task
Color at the Project-level" on page 423) to modify this option.
47
Configure Network Settings

The Activity Network is a view that displays a full diagram of the activities and relationships in
your project. Configure the number of activity-related fields to display in each activity box.
You can configure network settings on the following pages:
 Activities
To configure Activity Network settings:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the view to configure.
3) Select the Network Setting tab.
4) In the Customize Activity Box Fields section, display up to eight additional fields across
two columns. Select One field per line to limit the display to a single column of four fields.
5) In the Preview section, you can preview the display of an activity box based on your
selected fields.
6) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Configure Quick Filters

You can use quick filters to reduce the number of visible items on a page.
Notes:
 Due to slight differences in functionality, some pages in the
application have their own set of help topics for quick filters.
To configure quick filters:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Quick Filters tab.
3) In the Show section, select up to three quick filters to apply to the view.
4) Apply the view:
48
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Apply a Quick Filter

You can use quick filters to refine the data displayed on a page. In a filter list, select one or more
values on which to filter. Use multiple quick filters to further reduce how much data is displayed.
Clear a filter to show more results. Quick filter selections are not saved with the view.
Notes:
 Due to slight differences in functionality, some pages in the
application have their own set of help topics for quick filters.
To apply a quick filter to a page:

1) In the Quick Filters list, select applicable filter values.
2) To remove a filter, expand a filter list, and select Clear Filter.
Configure Task Counts
Task counts display the number of tasks of a specific status that are assigned to an activity. Use
the Task Counts tab to configure which task counts are displayed in the activity details popover.
Activity details provide additional information about the activities in your project, including
associated WBS, start and finish dates, and activity percent complete. All task counts are
enabled by default. Task counts are for public tasks only and do not include private tasks.
You can configure task counts on the following pages:
 Work Plan
 Hand-offs
 Task List
To configure task counts:
49
2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Task Counts tab.
3) Select the task counts that you want to display:
 Total Tasks: The total number of tasks assigned to the activity.
 Unplanned tasks: Tasks without a due date.
 Planned tasks, not completed: Tasks with a due date or committed date that are not
complete.
 Planned tasks, completed: Tasks with a due date or committed date that are marked as
complete.
 Planned tasks outside of activity dates: Tasks with a due date before the activity start
date or after the activity finish date.
 Tasks hidden by filters and security: Tasks that are not visible due to the planning
period, enabled task filters or quick filters, or due to the current user's security settings.
Tasks with assigned activities that occur within the planning period dates are visible.
Note: The Unplanned tasks; Planned tasks, not completed; and

Planned tasks, completed task counts contain the total number of
tasks associated with the selected activity. The Planned tasks outside
of activity dates and Tasks hidden by filters and security task counts
contain tasks already counted in the other categories.
4) Apply the view:

a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Configure a Timescale
Configure the timescale interval for a page.
To configure a timescale:

2) On the Manage Views or Settings panel, select Timescale.
3) In the Timescale Standards Settings section, select a timescale interval.
50
4) Apply the view:

a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Note: If you are changing the timescale on the Time Phase view of the
Fund Sources page, remember this: You can only distribute quantities
for a time-phased fund if the Timescale setting you choose here
matches that fund's Distribution Type value. For example, if you want
to distribute quantities for a fund that has a Distribution Type value of
Yearly, you must first set the Timescale value to Yearly.
Tips
 You can also change the timescale interval by right-clicking on the timescale on a page and
selecting an option.
Configure Spreadsheet Rows
Configure spreadsheet rows to show summary and spread values for each item in a table. For
example, a resource spreadsheet lists all of the available resources in a project. Each resource
may display separate rows for demand hours, commitment hours, demand costs, and
commitment costs. Each field row can show values across a timescale and rolled up to a
summary level.
To configure a spreadsheet row:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Spreadsheet Rows tab.
3) In the Available Spreadsheet Rows section, select rows and select Add Row to Selected
Rows to add them to the Selected Spreadsheet Rows section.
4) Use the up and down arrows to change the positioning of the columns in the Selected
Spreadsheet Rows section.
5) Apply the view:
51
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Configure Currency Settings

Configure the currency display settings on a page. Currency settings are user-specific and are
saved across views.
On project-level pages that support currencies, you can choose to view your costs in terms of
the application's base currency, the workspace currency, or the project currency.
To configure a currency view:

2) On the Manage Views or Settings panel, select Currency.
3) Configure the following settings:
 Select Show currency symbols to display the symbol of the currency.
Note: This option is only enabled if the Show currency symbol option
is also enabled in the user preferences. See Configure the Currency
Format (on page 65) for more information.
 Select Show currency banner to display the chosen currency in the page toolbar.
 In the In what currency do you want to view costs? section, choose which currency to
view costs. If all available currencies are the same, this field is disabled. Currencies that
can be edited are labeled Editable.
Note: If workspace currency is selected but is not supported, cost data

will display in the base currency. For more information on workspace
currency, see Workspace Currency Overview.
4) Apply the view:

a. Select Save.
52
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Configure Formatting
Configure the formatting on a page.
The Work Plan page in the Tasks app contains additional page formatting options.
To configure the formatting:

2) In the Manage Views or Settings panel, select the Formatting tab.
3) In the Read-only Styling section, select Highlight Read-only cells to highlight read-only
cells on the page.
4) (Work Plan page only) Do any of the following:
 In the Band Options section, select Hide if empty on Hopper or Hide if empty on
Planning Board to hide empty grouping bands in the hopper or planning board for
activities that have not been assigned any tasks.
 In the Planning Board Options section, select Show Info Bar to display details for the
selected task or activity below the planning board.
5) Apply the view:
a. Select Save.
d. Select Reset.
 Select Save.
Tips
Configure formatting specific to list table elements by navigating to the Activities or Task List
page. See Configure Cell, Column, and Row Formatting.
53
Navigating Using a Keyboard (Primavera Professional)

You can use the keyboard to navigate throughout Primavera Professional and access frequently
used or important functionality. Use the Tab key to cycle through elements within the application,
and press Enter or Spacebar to access them.
The following shortcuts are for Windows. The shortcuts are separated into four sections: Menu
Toolbar, Main Content Area, Common Page Elements, and Page-specific Elements.
Menu Toolbar
The shortcuts in this section apply to the toolbar menu items found at the top of the application
window. The Project menu or Programs menu displays depending on the currently open object.
File Menu
 Ctrl + N: New
 Ctrl + O: Open
 Alt + F, R, #: Open Recent
 Ctrl + W: Close current tab
 Ctrl + Shift + W: Close All
 Ctrl + P: Print
 Alt + F4: Exit
Edit Menu
 Ctrl + Z: Undo
 Ctrl + Y: Redo
 Ctrl + X: Cut
 Ctrl + C: Copy
 Ctrl + V: Paste
 Insert: Add
 Delete: Delete
View Menu
 Ctrl + 0: Actual Size
 Ctrl + =: Zoom In
 Ctrl + -: Zoom Out
 F5: Refresh
 Alt + V, T: Show Gantt (Activities page only)
 Alt + V, G: Show Grid (Activities page only)
 Alt + V, N: Show Activity Network (Activities page only)
 Alt + V, R: Resources (Resource Analysis page only)
 Alt + V, O: Roles (Resource Analysis page only)
Project Menu
 Alt + R, W: WBS
 Alt + R, A: Activities
54
 Alt + R, B: Baselines
 Alt + R, R: Resources
 Alt + R, O: Roles
 Alt + R, S: Resource Assignments
 Alt + R, N: Resource Analysis
 Alt + R, F: Files
 Alt + R, D: Details
 Alt + R, C: Project Codes
 Alt + R, P: Project Settings
Program Menu
 Alt + R, M: Milestone Summary
 Alt + R, A: Activities
 Alt + R, S: Resource Assignments
 Alt + R, N: Resource Analysis
 Alt + R, F: Files
 Alt + R, G: General
 Alt + R, C: Project Codes
Dictionaries Menu
 Alt + D, C: Calendars
 Alt + D, O: Codes
 Alt + D, U: Curve Profiles
 Alt + D, M: Units of Measure
 Alt + D, L: Locations
 Alt + D, R: Currencies
Workspace Menu
 Alt + W, R: Resources
 Alt + W, O: Roles
 Alt + W, A: Resource Assignments
 Alt + W, N: Resource Analysis
 Alt + W, P: Projects
 Alt + W, P, P: Programs
Workspace Menu (Configuration)
 Alt + W, C, A: Activity
 Alt + W, C, R: Activity Relationships
 Alt + W, C, F: Files
 Alt + W, C, P: Project
 Alt + W, C, P: Program
 Alt + W, C, E: Resource/Role
 Alt + W, C, S: Resource Assignment
 Alt + W, C, W: WBS
55
User Menu
 Alt + U, N: Notifications
 Alt + U, M: Manage Services
 Alt + U, P: Preferences
 Alt + U, S: Switch Company Instance
Tabs Menu
 Ctrl + Shift + T: Reopen Last Tab
 Ctrl + Tab: Next Tab
 Ctrl + Shift + Tab: Previous Tab
 Ctrl + W: Close Tab
 Ctrl + Shift, W: Close All Tabs
Help Menu
 Alt + L, O: Online Help
 Troubleshooting
Alt + L, T, C: Clear Cache and Restart
 Alt + L, T, R: Reset App Data
 Alt + L, S: Advanced Settings
 Alt + L, A: About Oracle Primavera Professional
Main Content Area

The shortcuts in this section apply to the main elements found on most pages of the application.
Available elements will vary by page.
Tab Selector
 Press Tab to navigate to the tab you want to open and press Enter.
Sidebar Navigation
 Press Tab to navigate to the page you want to open and press Enter.
Table
 All tables have a similar method of interaction.
 Only the rows that are visible are rendered. As you navigate up and down the table more
items will be visible.
 To enter the table, Tab to it. Tabbing to the table will cause an overlay to be displayed with
the message Press tab to skip over this grid widget. Press Enter, Escape, or click to
enter the grid.
 Use Arrows or Tab and Shift + Tab to navigate through the table.
 Press Home to move to the first cell of the row, End to move to the last cell of the row, Page
Up to move to the first cell of the current column, Page Down to move to the last cell of the
current column, Ctrl + Home to move to the first cell of the table, Ctrl + End to move to the
last cell of the table.
 Press F2 or Enter to put the cell in edit mode.
 Press Spacebar to activate cells with special actions such as links or buttons.
56
 Press Shift and Up or Down Arrows to select sequential rows. To select nonsequential
rows, navigate through the table while holding Ctrl, and press Ctrl + Spacebar to select a
row.
 To use the context menu, select one or more rows, and then press Alt + G. Use Up and
Down Arrows to highlight an option. Press Enter to select the option.
 If the table is a hierarchical table, view and hide children by navigating to the first cell of a
row and pressing Ctrl + Right Arrow or Ctrl + Left Arrow.
 Press Insert to enter a new row. The currently selected field will be selected in the new row.
Detail Windows
 Detail windows contain additional details about the table row that is selected. To access a
detail window, press Esc to leave the table and Tab to the detail window. Often, there is
more than one tab in the detail window. Each tab has its own set of information.
 Use the Right and Left Arrows to highlight a tab, and then press Enter to open it.
 When on a tab, navigate through the fields of that tab by pressing Tab.
Zoom
 Use Ctrl + + or - to zoom in and zoom out anywhere in the application. Use Ctrl + 0 to reset
zoom settings.
Common Page Elements

The shortcuts in this section apply to elements found on a variety of pages throughout the
application. Available elements will vary by page.
Chart
To view and change the focus of the chart:
1) Tab to the chart.
2) Press the Right Arrow or Left Arrow to move the chart right or left.
Color or Icon Picker
 Enter: Shows the picker if it is currently hidden or selects the currently active tile if it is
visible.
 Escape: Closes an open picker.
 Left Arrow: Moves focus to the tile to the left.
 Right Arrow: Moves focus to the tile to the right.
 Up Arrow: Moves focus to the tile above.
 Down Arrow: Moves focus to the tile below.
Combo Box
 Enter your choice or press Up and Down Arrows to highlight choice.
 Enter: Select your choice.
Context Menu
The shortcuts below are commonly found within the context menu on various pages throughout
the application. Available elements will vary by page. Context menu shortcuts found on specific
pages are listed in the Page-specific Elements section.
57
 Alt + G: Display the context menu.

 Alt + Insert: Add Above.
 Insert: Add Below.
 Ctrl + Insert: Add Child.
 Ctrl + X: Cut Row.
 Ctrl + C: Copy Row.
 Ctrl + V: Paste Row.
 Shift + Delete: Clear Cell.
 Ctrl + Alt + X: Cut Cell.
 Ctrl + Alt + C: Copy Cell.
 Ctrl + V: Paste Cell.
 Multi-edit cells: Select multiple cells in the same column, and then enter your desired value.
Press Enter to fill the selected cells with the value.
 Fill down: Select multiple cells in the same column, and then press Ctrl + E.
 Alt + Up Arrow: Move Up.
 Alt + Down Arrow: Move Down.
 Alt + Right Arrow: Move Right.
 Alt + Left Arrow: Move Left.
 Ctrl + Shift + Right Arrow: Expand All.
 Ctrl + Shift + Left Arrow: Collapse All.
Date Picker
 Press F2 or Enter to activate edit mode.
 Press F2 to display date picker.
 Up Arrow: Goes to the same day of the week in the previous week.
 Down Arrow: Goes to the same day of the week in the next week.
 Left Arrow: Goes back one day previous.
 Right Arrow: Advances one day.
 Alt + Page Up: Goes back one year previous.
 Alt + Page Down: Advances one year.
 Home: Moves to the first day of the current month.
 End: Moves to the last day of the current month.
 Page Up: Moves to the same date in the previous month.
 Page Down: Moves to the same date in the next month.
 Enter: If the calendar is a date picker, pressing Enter closes the date picker and the date is
show in the field. If the type is date time, the focus will be moved.
 Escape: Closes the picker without any action.
Detail Popover
 Tab to a link for a project, portfolio, program, workspace, idea, or user.
 Press Alt + M to access the detail popover for the object or user.
Double Picker
 To add an item, Tab to the available or source picker.
58
Use Up and Down Arrows to highlight item. If needed, use Right and Left Arrows to
expand and collapse groupings.
 Press Spacebar to select item.
 Tab to the right arrow button.
 Press Spacebar to move item to the selected or destination picker.
 Tab to the Apply or Select button.
 Press Spacebar to activate and close dialog.
 To remove an item, Tab to the selected or destination picker.
 Use Up and Down Arrows to highlight item. If needed, use Right and Left Arrows to
 Shift + Tab to the left arrow button.
 Press Spacebar to move item to the available or source picker.
 Tab to the Apply or Select button.
 Press Spacebar to activate and close dialog.
Editor
 Ctrl + B: Bolds the text.
 Ctrl + I: Italicizes the text.
 Ctrl + U: Underlines the text.
 Ctrl + A: Selects all the text.
Picker
 You may need to press F2 or Enter to activate edit mode if the element is in a table.
 Tab to the search field and enter your choice.
 Tab to the selected list.
 Press Up and Down Arrows to highlight item. If needed, use Right and Left Arrows to
 Press Enter to close the picker, or Tab to the confirmation button and press Spacebar to
close the picker.
Slider
 Down Arrow: Decrements the slider by a step.
 Left Arrow: Decrements the slider by a step.
 Up Arrow: Increments the slider by a step.
 Right Arrow: Increments the slider by a step.
Spinner
 You may need to press F2 or Enter to activate edit mode if the element is in a table.
 Up Arrow: Increments the number by a step.
 Down Arrow: Decrements the number by a step.
 Home: Increments the number to the maximum, if provided.
 End: Decrements the number to the minimum, if provided.
59
Toolbar Items
 Ctrl + F: Search.
 Ctrl + Alt + E: Settings.
 Ctrl + Alt + W: Views.
Tree Panel
 Up Arrow: Changes the focus to the node above.
 Down Arrow: Changes the focus to the node below.
 Left Arrow: Collapses group node (will collapse if expanded, otherwise will change the
focused node to the parent).
 Right Arrow: Expands group node (will expand if collapsed, otherwise will change the
focused node to the first child).
 Home: Marks first node in tree as focused.
 End: Marks last visible node in tree as focused.
 Escape: Removes current filter from tree.
 Spacebar: Selects the currently focused node.
 Shift + Up Arrow: Extends the selection up by 1.
 Shift + Down Arrow: Extends the selection down by 1.
 Ctrl + Shift + Up Arrow: Moves the currently selected nodes (or focused node if there are
no selected nodes) up by 1.
 Ctrl + Shift + Down Arrow: Moves the currently selected nodes (or focused node if there
are no selected nodes) down by 1.
 Ctrl + Spacebar: Toggles selection of currently focused node.
Type Ahead
 Down Arrow: Highlights the menu item below the currently highlighted item.
 Up Arrow: Highlights the menu item above the currently highlighted item.
 Enter: Selects the highlighted item.
 Escape: Closes the drop down menu. In some elements, Escape also clears the selection.
Undo and Redo
 Ctrl + Z: Undo.
 Ctrl + Y: Redo.
Page-specific Elements
The shortcuts in this section apply specifically to the pages listed.
Activities Page
 Ctrl + Alt + M: Grid View.
 Ctrl + Alt + G: Gantt View.
 Ctrl + Alt + N: Activity Network View.
 Alt + A: Actions menu.
 F9: Schedule.
 Shift + F9: Level.
60
 Ctrl + Alt + T: Apply Activity Uncertainty.

 Alt + A, C: Recalculate Costs.
 Shift + F12: Auto Reorganize
 Ctrl + Alt + Y: Add Scenario.
 Ctrl + Alt + J: Manage Scenarios.
 Ctrl + Alt + B: Manage Baselines.
 Alt + A, P: Set User Baseline Preferences.
 Ctrl + Alt + Z: Global Change.
 Ctrl + I: Import.
 Alt + A, O: Store Period Performance
 Ctrl + Alt + O: Assign Roles.
 Ctrl + Alt + R: Assign Resources.
 Ctrl + Alt + D: Assign Codes.
 Ctrl + Alt + P: Assign Predecessors.
 Ctrl + Alt + S: Assign Successors.
 Ctrl + Alt + K: Assign Risks.
 Ctrl + Alt + L: Link Activities.
 Ctrl + Alt + U: Unlink Activities.
Activities Page: Find and Replace
 In the table, select a string field, and then do one of the following:
 Ctrl + F: Open the Find popover.
 Ctrl + H or Ctrl + R: Open the Find and Replace popover.
 In the Find and Replace popover or Find popover, do any of the following:
 Enter a string in the Find what? field. Press Enter or the Up and Down Arrows to
highlight the next result.
 Enter a string in the Replace field. Press Alt + R to replace the currently selected result.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Enter to replace all results.
 Esc: Close the popover.
Calendars Dictionary
 1: Switch to the first view available (such as Day).
 2: Switch to the first view available (such as Week).
 3: Switch to the first view available (such as Month).
 4: Switch to the first view available (such as Year).
 K or P: Previous date range (view dependent).
 J or N: Next date range (view dependent).
 Left Arrow: Highlight previous event in the collections of events (shown).
 Right Arrow: Highlight next event in the collections of events (shown).
 Delete: Delete highlighted event.
 Ctrl + Up Arrow: Shift the end time of the event (earlier).
 Ctrl + Down Arrow: Shift the end time of the event (later).
61
 Shift + Up Arrow: Shift the start time of the event (earlier).

 Shift + Down Arrow: Shift the start time of the event (later).
 Up: Move entire event (start and end times) earlier.
 Down: Move entire event (start and end times) later.
 C: Create event (activates dialog).
 E: Edit selected event (activates dialog).
Files Page
 Ctrl + Alt + I: Add File.
 Ctrl + Alt + O: Add Folder.
 Alt + G, T: Apply Template.
Resources Page and Roles Page
 Ctrl + Alt + A: Assign.
 Ctrl + Alt + P: Promote.
 Ctrl + Delete: Remove.
WBS Page
 Ctrl + Alt + P: Add WBS from Project.
Assistive Technology
It is expected that users who use assistive technology (AT) will have a high level of proficiency
with the AT that they are using, especially screen readers.
JAWS from Freedom Scientific

It is generally recommended that you use the newest version of JAWS.
A user may navigate the Oracle Primavera Cloud or Primavera Professional application using
the native JAWS link functionality. Pressing Insert+F7 will give a list of all links including
navigation links (visible and hidden), Favorites links, User Control panel, Announcements,
Notifications, Help and other on-page links.
A user may navigate a page using native JAWS Landmark (Regions) functionality. Ctrl+Insert+r
will bring up a list of ARIA Regions. Pressing Shift+r will navigate between regions.
Integrated Objects
 Objects integrated using the application REST API can only be

modified using the REST API and cannot be updated using the user
interface. The  Imported Object icon indicates objects that follow
these restrictions.
 To learn more about which objects can be integrated using the REST
API, consult the REST API documentation on Oracle Help Center
(https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E80480_01/index.htm).
62
Preferences
Create a working environment that suits your needs. The preferences you select affect only your
interaction with the application. Other users are not affected by your changes.
User Preferences Overview

The Preferences page enables you to customize data display formats and personal details. The
options you customize are exclusively yours. You can alter global preferences, including formats
for time units, dates, currencies, and search parameters. You can also change your avatar
(profile picture) that other users will see on your posts in discussions. Proxy users do not have
access to change your personal preferences.
Add a Profile Picture

Your avatar is shown with your username in some areas of the application, such as discussions.
You cannot upload an image with a CMYK color format.
To add a profile picture:
1) Navigate to the Preferences page (see page 448).
2) On the Preferences page, select the Settings tab.
3) In the User Details section, select  Choose Avatar Image.
4) In the Choose Avatar Image dialog box, select  Browse, select the picture to upload, and
then select Upload.
5) Save your changes:
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
b. In the Preferences panel, select  Close.
In Primavera Professional:
a. Select  Save.
b. On the Preferences page, select  Close.
Edit the User Details

You can edit your personal details such as name, title, phone number, and locale. You can also
determine the display density for grids across the application.
To edit user details:
3) In the User Details section, complete any of the following fields:
a. First Name: Enter your preferred first name.
b. Last Name: Enter your last name.
63
c. Title: Enter your job title.

d. Locale: Select your locale. If no Locale is selected, the locale set in the administration
settings is used.
e. Phone: Enter your phone number.
f. Mobile: Enter your mobile phone number.
g. Display Density: Select the display density of page grids from the following options:
 Compact: Provides the least amount of space in grids to fit the maximum number
of rows on the screen.
 Cozy: Provides a moderate amount of space in grids.
 Comfortable: Provides the most space in grids for a less condensed view.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure Name and ID Display Format

You can select whether you would prefer to see only IDs for objects, such as workspaces and
projects (for example to save screen space) or the ID and Name (to be able to identify objects
more easily). The choices you make here are used for areas of the application that do not give
you an option to configure these settings.
To configure name and ID display format:
3) In the Name and ID Display Format section, select either ID only or ID - Name.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure the Number Format

You can select how you would prefer to see numbers throughout the application.
64
To configure the format for numbers:

3) In the Number Format section:
 Select Show decimal places if you want to see decimal digits.
If you selected Show decimal places, select whether to show 1 or 2 decimal places.
 Select a Decimal Separator.
 Select a Digit Grouping Separator.
 Select a Digit Grouping Style.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure the Currency Format

You can select how you would prefer to see currency fields throughout the application.
To configure the format for currency:
3) In the Currency section, modify the following fields:
 Show currency symbol: If you want to see the symbol representing the currency for
costs.
 Negative Format: Select a format to use for negative currency values.
 Positive Format: Select a format to use for positive currency values.
Note: For each format option, a "#" symbol denotes where in the
currency value the currency symbol will be placed.

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
65
Tips
 The number of decimal places that display for cost fields is configured by an application
administrator.
Configure the Date Format

You can select how you would prefer to see dates throughout the application.
To configure the format for dates:
3) In the Date section:
a. Select a Date Format from the list.
b. Select Four digit year if you want to see four digits for the year instead of two.
c. Select Month name if you want to see a three-letter abbreviation of the month name
rather than the number of the month in dates.
d. Select Leading zeros if you would like to make all single date and month numbers two
digits.
e. Select a Separator from the list.
f. Select a Time Format from the list.
g. Select Show minutes if you want to see minutes with times.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure Time Units

You can configure how you see time units in the application.
To configure time units:
3) In the Time Units section:
 Select a format to Display Units in.
 Select show Sub units if you want to show sub units.
 Select show Units label if you want to show the unit labels.
66
 Select Decimal places if you want to see decimal digits for your units. If selected,
use the Show decimal places list to choose whether to show 1 or 2 decimal
places.
 Select a format to Display Durations in.
 Select show Sub units if you want to show sub units.
 Select show Duration label if you want to show the unit labels.
 Select Decimal places if you want to see decimal digits for your durations. If
selected, use the Show decimal places list to choose whether to show 1 or 2
decimal places.
 Select a Units/Time Format. Units/Time values can be entered as a ratio or percentage
and will be automatically converted to the chosen format.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure the Assignment Settings Dialog Preference

Resources and roles both support Units/Time values to indicate work availability and Price/Unit
values to indicate pay rate. On any activity, whenever a role assignment is staffed with a
resource or an existing resource assignment is replaced with a different resource, you must
choose whether to use the current assignment's Units/Time and Price/Unit values or use the
values of the new resource. Options for each value can be chosen from the Assignment Settings
dialog box on the Activities page, but you can configure default selections on the Preferences
page.
The option for choosing a specific assignment's Units/Time value occurs when you select a
resource to staff a role assignment or you replace a current resource assignment with a different
resource. The current resource may be assigned with or without an associated role. Depending
on your preference, the assignment will use the new resource's Units/Time value or the current
assignment's Units/Time value, or you will be prompted to choose.
An assignment's Price/Unit value is determined by the assignment Rate Source and the Rate
Type associated with the Rate Source. The option for using a specific assignment's Rate Source
and Price/Unit value occurs when you select a resource to staff a role assignment or replace the
current resource on an assignment that is already staffed. Depending on your preference, the
assignment will use the new resource's Price/Unit value and set the Rate Source value to
Resource, use the current assignment's Rate Source value and set the Price/Unit value
according to the rate source, or you will be prompted to choose. You will only be prompted to
choose if the assignment's current Rate Source value is Role or Override. If the assignment's
Rate Source value is set to Resource, and your preference is to be prompted, then the
Price/Unit value will be set to the new resource's value, but you will not be prompted to choose.
67
If either option is set to prompt you for a selection, you can choose to not be asked again and
make the current choice your new default option. If both options are set to prompt you for a
selection, a single dialog box will contain both prompts. Your preference settings can be
changed again at any time from the Preferences page. Changes to your preferences will only
affect assignments updated after the changes were made.
To configure the Assignment Settings dialog preferences:
3) In the Resources section, configure the following options:
 When assigning a resource to existing activity assignment:
 Use new resource's Units/Time: The new resource's Units/Time value will be
applied to the assignment.
 Use current assignment's Units/Time: The current assignment's Units/Time
value will stay the same.
 Ask: You will be prompted to either apply the new resource's Units/Time value or
keep the current assignment's Units/Time value.
 When a resource and role share an activity assignment:
 Use new resource's Rate Source and Price/Unit: The new resource's Price/Unit
value will be applied to the assignment and the Rate Source will be changed to
Resource.
 Use current assignment's Rate Source and Price/Unit: If the Rate Source is
Role or Override, the current assignment's Price/Unit value will stay the same. If
the Rate Source is Resource, the Rate Source will remain Resource, but the
Price/Unit value will change to the new resource's value.
 Ask: You will be prompted to either apply the new resource's Rate Source and
Price/Unit values or keep the current assignment's Rate Source and Price/Unit
values. If the Rate Source is set to Resource, you will not be prompted.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure Activity Date Indicators

You can configure the use of activity date indicators for the Start and Finish dates of activities
that have actual dates or assigned constraints. Activity Date Indicators are enabled by default.
To configure indicators:
68

3) In the Activity Date Indicators section, select one or all of the following:
 Show Actuals: The Actuals indicator specifies if an activity's Start or Finish date is an
Actual Start or Actual Finish.
 Show Constraints: The Constraints indicator specifies if an activity's Start or Finish date
is impacted by an assigned constraint.
Note: When enabled, hover over the indicator to reveal the type of
constraint assigned and its effective date. Activities with two assigned
constraints will either have an indicator on Start and Finish, or both
constraints will impact the same field. Indicators may be shown on
activities in the current schedule, in baselines, and in scenarios.

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
Configure Save Views

The Save Views setting allows you to choose if named view changes are saved manually or
automatically for pages where data changes are saved automatically. These pages include all
types of views, such as workspace, project, and personal. You have the option to Save, Save
As, and Reset changes made to a view by using the View menu.
To configure the views preferences:
1) Navigate to the Preferences page (see page 448)
3) In the Save Views section, select either Save views automatically or Save views
manually.
Note: Changing this setting to Save views manually will require you to
manually save your view changes. This is recommended for
organizations that use Project or Workspace views.

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
69
a. Select  Save.
Reset Do Not Show Again Dialog Boxes

Some notification dialog boxes in the application contain a Do Not Show Again check box. In
user preferences, you can reset these dialog boxes so that all notifications that you selected not
to see are shown to you again. You can only reset this if you have selected a Do Not Show
Again check box at any time in the application.
To reset the do not show again dialog options:
3) In the Dialogs section, select the Reset "Do Not Show Again" Dialogs.
Enable Feature Previews

Oracle Primavera Cloud enables you to turn on upcoming features via User Preferences.
Functionality listed in the Preview Features section is fully functional, but is not yet turned on
permanently in the application. These features are turned off by default.
To enable feature previews:
3) In the Preview Features section, select any of the following:
 Enhanced Printing: Enables improved printing functionality on all pages in the
application with a  Print icon in the page toolbar. When this option is disabled,
standard browser printing functionality is used. On pages with Gantt charts, Gantt printing
functionality is used.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
a. Select  Save.
70
Configure Searches
You can customize how you want global and spatial search to work within the application.
Specify the types of objects you want to search and the distance from your location. The choices
you make here are used for areas of the application which do not give you an option to configure
these settings.
To configure searches:
2) On the Preferences page, select the Search tab.
3) Select a Maximum Number of Results Per Page.
4) In the Spatial Search section:
a. Select Default Distance Units.
b. Enter a Default Distance.
5) Select Save.
6) In the Preferences panel, select  Close.
Notifications
View personal notifications to stay up to date with your work within the application. You can
choose to view all of your notifications, or only those that are unread. Notifications are arranged
by status of unread or read and the time and date on which they were received. Use the All
Notifications page to read your notifications, access relevant pages through notification links,
and remove notifications from your list.
Notifications Overview
Notifications are brief updates about your work within the application. You receive notifications
when you and your team members complete specific actions or processes. Notifications contain
information about many types of content, including your workflows, portfolio budget plan
scenarios, fields, reports, schedules, risk analysis, XML imports, and Primavera Gateway
integration completion. Many notifications contain action links to pages related to their contents,
such as workflow forms, budget reviews, or shared pages. Use notifications to ensure you and
your team stay connected and complete tasks on time.
The following are some situations in which notifications are used:
Baselines and Scope Assignment Spread

You will receive notifications detailing whether your baseline and scope assignment spread
operation was successful.
71
Portfolio Budget Plan Approval Processes

As a portfolio budget plan is being defined, the planner typically sends the unapproved plan
scenario out for review to stakeholders, sends proposed project allocations to project managers
for budget negotiations, and sends the final plan scenario out for approval. When the planner
initiates each of these processes, a notification is sent to the people responsible for reviewing or
approving that process. For example, when a planner sends a budget plan out for review, all
reviewers receive a notification and are provided with a direct link to the Scenario Comparison
page on which they conduct the review.
Custom Workflow Tasks

If you are assigned as the performer of a workflow task, you are notified when the task must be
completed. Notifications provide links to current workflow tasks that you are assigned. Using
notifications, you can quickly access any forms, field updates, or sub-workflows you need, and
bring your budget plan reviews, approvals, and processes to an efficient conclusion.
Field Creation
You can create a field and customize the data you want it to measure. You can use fields in
projects and portfolios to capture important information. You receive a notification when a field
you created is ready for use.
Discussion Mentions
You will receive a notification if another user mentions you in a discussion. The notification
includes a direct link to the discussion so you can easily review the conversation and reply as
appropriate.
Working with Notifications (Primavera Professional)

You can view your notifications by navigating to the All Notifications page. Use the Show list to
view the Unread Notifications or the All Notifications list. Select a notification on the All
Notifications page to complete an action on them or remove them.
72
Item Description
1 Show List: The Show List allows you to view the Unread Notifications list or All
Notifications list.
2 Context Menu: On the All Notifications page, the context menu allows you to
complete relevant actions on notifications.
3
 Clear: Remove this notification from the All Notifications page.
4 Notification: Select a notification on the All Notifications page to mark it as

read. Notifications on the All Notifications page contain the time at which they
were received, a message, and, depending on the type of notification, a link to
relevant pages.
Access Notifications
You can access notifications through the Notifications Panel. In the User Control Panel, the
Notifications link indicates the number of unread notifications you currently have and enables
you to open the Notifications Panel. The Notifications Panel enables you to view your five most
recent notifications.
A preview of the notification will pop up in the user interface as they are received. You can select
the notification to view it or let it fade out.
To view a complete list of your notifications, access the All Notifications page.
73
To access your notifications in Oracle Primavera Cloud:
1) In the header, select  View notifications.

2) Select  Refresh to populate the Notifications Panel with your five most recent
notifications.
3) In the Notifications Panel, select a notification.
 Select  Clear to remove the notification from your notifications list.
4) In the Notifications Panel, select View All in Inbox.
5) In the sidebar, select  All Notifications.
6) On the All Notifications page, in the Show list, select All Notifications.
To access your notifications in Primavera Professional:
1) On the User menu, select Notifications.
3) Select the  Context menu to complete actions on the notification.
Remove Notifications
You can clear notifications to remove them from your notifications list permanently.
To clear a notification in Oracle Primavera Cloud:
1) In the header, select  View notifications.

2) In the Notifications panel, select View All in Inbox.
3) In the sidebar, select  All Notifications.
5) Select the notification you want to remove, and select  Clear.
To clear notifications in Primavera Professional:
1) On the User menu, select Notifications.
3) Select the notification you want to remove, select the  Context menu, and then select 
Clear.
Tips
 In Primavera Cloud, remove notifications in the Notifications Panel by selecting the
notification and then selecting  Clear. This will also remove the notification from the All
Notifications page.
74
Manage Services
The Manage Services page lists the user-initiated processes in the application that are in
progress or have completed. This page consists of the Service Status and Recurring Services
tabs. The Service Status tab shows the status of the background services triggered manually
from various contexts or triggered automatically as recurring services and the workflow instance
details. The Recurring Services tab enables you to configure services that need to run at regular
intervals.
Monitor Service Status

The Service Status tab on the Manage Services page provides a summary of the progress and
completion of background services initiated by the users. It also provides the summary of
recurring services configured to run automatically in the background. Background services
include schedule, level, risk analysis, global change, set as current schedule, import, export,
measures, recalculate cost, and integration service types. You can filter for a service type using
the pre-defined filters in the filter panel or specify additional filtering criteria in the Filter By
section. View a quick summary of the selected service type, context, start and end date, and the
status in the grid. Use the preview panel to view additional details about the service, such as its
frequency, or to terminate a running service.
To monitor the service status:
1) Navigate to the Manage Services page (see page 448).
2) Select the Service Status tab, and then select a service.
Note: You can apply filters to reduce the number of services displayed
on the page. For more information, see Manage Services Filters (on
page 77).
Tips
 To terminate a service while it is still running, select a service that is in progress, select
Terminate in the preview panel, and then select Yes in the confirmation dialog box. You can
terminate the following services: import, export, level, risk analysis, measures, and schedule.
 Application administrators can view all background services that all users have initiated.
Users who are not application administrators can only view the background services they
have initiated.
 Many background services that are complete include a log you can view to see additional
details about the service. To view the details of the completed service, select View Log or
View Details in the preview panel .
 To quickly set up a recurring service, select Set up recurring schedule in the Schedule
field in the preview panel, or select  Edit to edit the recurring service schedule if it was
scheduled already.
75
Configure Recurring Services

Select the Recurring Services tab on the Manage Services page to configure recurring services
that need to run at regular intervals for schedule, level, and risk analysis. You can configure
schedule recurring services and level and risk analysis services for projects. You can define the
frequency of the service and view the run history and log on this page.
You can also view recurring service details for measures on the Recurring Services tab,
including general service information and job history. The configuration of measure recurring
services must be done in the workspace Measures dictionary.
To configure a recurring service:
1) Navigate to the Manage Services page (see page 448).
2) Select the Recurring Services tab.
3) Select  Add.
4) In the Add Recurring Service wizard, complete the following steps:
 In the General step, enter general information for the service type, such as name and
frequency, including the day and time of recurrence, and then select Next.
 In the Assign Projects step, select the projects on which the service is scheduled to run,
and then select Next.
 In the Options step:
 For schedule service type, specify the Schedule Settings and Data Date options,
and then select Add.
 For level service type, specify the Schedule Settings, and then select Add.
Note: The Options step is only available for schedule and level service
types.
Tips
 Use the preview panel to view the details for the selected recurring service. The following
tabs are available:
 General: Use this tab to view general information about the service, such as its schedule
and recurrence settings.
 Projects: Use this tab to view the project on which the service type is scheduled to run.
 Service Details: Use this tab to view the service details, such as the Schedule Settings
and the Data Date of the scheduled service type.
 Job History: Use this tab to view the run history and log of the service type.
 To terminate a recurring service while it is still running, navigate to the Job History tab of
the preview panel, select the  Context menu for a service that is in progress, select
Terminate, and then select Yes in the confirmation dialog box. You can terminate the
following services: import, export, level, risk analysis, and schedule.
 You can apply filters to reduce the number of recurring services displayed on the page. For
more information, see Manage Services Filters (on page 77).
76
Manage Services Filters

Filter for a service type on the Manage Services page using the filter panel on the Service Status
or Recurring Services tabs. You can use a pre-defined filter or specify additional filtering criteria
in the Filter By section.
Filtering options for Service Status:
a) Pre-defined filters:
 All: Shows all the available services. This is selected by default.
 In Progress: Shows the services that are currently running.
 Completed: Shows the services that are completed.
 Global Change: Shows all global change services.
 Export: Shows all project export services. You can also download a project export
service.
 Evaluation: Shows all evaluation score services.
Note: If you are using the Safari browser, before you download, you
should first access your browser preferences and deselect the option to
open safe files after downloading.
 Import: Shows all import services for a project or other objects.

 Integration: Provides a list of running, complete, or failed integration jobs for each
integration type, such as P6 EPPM or Microsoft Project. You can also download an
integration job.
Note: If you are using the Safari browser, before you download, you
should first access your browser preferences and deselect the option to
open safe files after downloading.
 Level: Shows all level services.

 Measures: Shows all measure services.
 Recalculate Cost: Shows all recalculate cost services.
 Risk Analysis: Shows all the risk analysis services.
 Schedule: Shows all schedule services.
 Set as Current Schedule: Shows all the set as current schedule services.
b) Filter By options:
 Project: Applies to the services in the project context and shows all projects to which the
user has access.
 Portfolio: Applies to the services that have the context field value of a portfolio and
shows all portfolios to which the user has access.
 Subject Area: Applies to imports. Shows all entities that support Microsoft Excel and P6
XML import.
 Business Flow: Applies to integration jobs. Shows all business flows available for P6
EPPM or Microsoft Project integrations.
77
 Integration: Applies to integration type services. Choose either P6 EPPM or Microsoft

Project.
Filtering options for Recurring Services:
a) Pre-defined filters:
 All: Shows all services that are configured to occur periodically. This is selected by
default.
 Enabled: Shows all the enabled services.
 Schedule: Shows all schedule services.
 Level: Shows all level services.
 Risk Analysis: Shows all risk analysis services.
 Measures: Shows all measure services.
 Evaluation: Shows all evaluation score services.
b) Filter By options:
 Project: Shows all projects to which the user has access.
 Added By: Shows all users who added the services.
Main Object Configuration

Create and manage projects in your organization from proposal through completion.
Most of your work in Primavera Professional is performed within the context of a project or
program. Each project or program contains a selection of pages that offer functionality specific to
that object. Project management functionality includes scheduling and resource management.
You can use programs to manage a group of related projects that collectively contribute to the
achievement of a program's outcomes and intended benefits.
Use the following topics to add and configure your projects or programs.
Projects
Create and manage projects in your organization from proposal through completion.
Configure View Settings (on page 35)
Projects Overview
A project is a formalized plan undertaken to create a service, product, or result. Project
examples include building a structure, performing maintenance, creating software, and
conducting research. Projects have defined start and end dates, and may consist of activities,
costs, resource assignments, scope items, risks, codes, reports, files, and a variety of other
details. In a typical project management scenario, a project manager creates and manages a
schedule that defines the work to be performed on a project.
78
Organizations can manage hundreds of projects at a time or even just one. Projects are
organized into workspaces according to how the organization structures its work. Groups of
related projects can be managed at a high level using portfolios to conduct budget and resource
planning.
Project access is controlled by setting up user groups, which allow one or more users to be
granted the same level of project permissions. Users can be assigned to different user groups
depending on their role in the organization. You can also assign security permissions directly to
individual users.
Create a Project
Create projects to define, plan, and manage your organization's work. Projects can be added
directly, moved from project proposal to an approved project via a workflow process, copied from
a project template, or imported into Oracle Primavera Cloud from a variety of external
applications. To import projects, see Import or Export a Project (on page 88).
To create a project, do any of the following:
Add a Project
Use the Add Project wizard to add details, user and group access, permissions, and companies
to a project. You can create a project without data, or you can copy data from an existing project
or template. Data stored at the workspace level and relationships between projects are not
available to copy.
To add a project:
1) In Primavera Cloud:
 In the object selector, select Projects, select  Add, and then select Project.
 On the File menu, select New, and then select Project.
2) In the Add Project panel, complete the following steps:
 In the Project Details step, enter general details about your project, and then select
Next.
Note: The default currency is the parent workspace currency. You can
select a different currency if needed.
 In the What's Included step, select information to copy from an existing project or
template, and then select Next.
Notes:
 The What's Included step appears if you choose to copy data from
an existing project or template in the Project Details step. By
default, all project data that is supported when copying a project will
be copied by default. Data types that are not listed are not supported
when copying a project. Clear the Select All check box if you want to
choose from predefined groupings of app and settings data. When
79
you select a group to copy, additional object dependencies are

automatically included. For example, when you copy Activities, WBS
data is automatically included. Select the  Help icon next to a
dependency for more information or see Project Copy
Dependencies (on page 82) for a full list of dependencies.
 When activities are copied from another project, all of their progress
data is removed. It is recommended that you reschedule the project
and recalculate activity costs after the project data is copied so that
activity dates and costs are properly reset.
 In the User and Group Access step, select users and user groups who need to access
the project, and then select Next.
Note: The user who adds the project is automatically assigned access to
the project with the Administrator permission set assigned. Access
cannot be removed during the project creation process.
 In the Permission Sets step, assign permissions to the users and groups who can
access the project, and then select Next.
Note: By default, the user adding the project will be assigned the
Administrator permission set for the Project, File, Custom Log, and
Report permission sets for the project. The permission sets for the user
adding the project can only be changed after the project is created.
 In the Companies step, select the companies who are responsible for the work on your
project, and then select Next.
Note: The owning company is added to the project by default and is not
available to be selected. After the project is created, you can verify its
company associations on the Companies page in the  Project Team
app.
 In the Summary step, review and edit your selections, and then select Add Project.
You can also perform this task from the Projects inventory panel:
 In the object selector, select  Projects, and then select View All Projects.
a. On the File menu, select Open.
b. In the Open dialog box, select the Projects or Programs tab, select a project or
program, and then select Open.
c. On the Workspace menu, select Projects.
2) In the table, select the group where you want to store the project.
Note: The group may be the workspace name or another grouping name
if a Group By option is selected for the table. If the table is organized by
80
a group other than workspace, then the new project will inherit the
attribute for that group. For example, if the table is grouped by a project
code, the new project will inherit the project code for that group.
3) Select the  Add  menu, and then select Project.
Tips
 At any step of the Add Project panel, you can select Finish to add the project without
completing the remaining steps. If you choose to copy data from an existing project or
template, you must proceed to the What's Included step before you can select Finish.
 You can also add a project from a Workspace Home page or the Get Started page.
 The project is set to Active by default, but this can be changed in the Project Details step.
Add a Project Proposal

Add project proposals when new projects are required to go through a formal workflow process
to move from the proposal stage to become approved projects in the planning stage.
Note: A workflow must be available to add project proposals. The

workflow process will determine if the projects will be approved and put
in a planning state or rejected.
 In the object selector, select Projects, select  Add, and then select Proposal.
 On the File menu, select New, and then select Proposal.
2) In the Add Project Proposal panel, enter general project proposal information, and then
select Add Project Proposal.
2) In the table, select the group where you want to store the project.
81
Note: The group may be the workspace name, or another grouping

name if a Group By option is selected for the table. If the table is
organized by a group other than workspace, then the new project will
inherit the attribute for that group. For example, if the table is grouped by
Location, then the new project will inherit the location for that group.
3) Select the  Add  menu, and select Proposal.
Tips
 The user who adds the project proposal is automatically assigned access to the proposal
with the Administrator permission set assigned. Access cannot be removed during the
project proposal creation process.
Project Copy Dependencies

When copying a project from an existing project or template, all project data is copied by default,
but you can also choose the data you want to copy. Certain data has dependent data, meaning
that when you select to copy it, other options are selected as well. This topic lists the data
options you can select and their dependent data.
When copying a project, you will select the data that you want to copy by moving the data sets
to the Selected list on the What's Included step of the Add Project Wizard. Data on this step is
organized by main category titles that have subcategories of data. You can move a main
category title to the Selected list to move all of its subcategories over. If you move all of the
subcategories in a main category to the Selected list, then the main category title will also be
moved to the Selected list.
The title of each table in this topic is a main category title. The Subcategory columns are the
subcategories in the main category. The Included Data columns include the application data that
is included in each subcategory. The Dependent Subcategories column includes the
subcategories that are automatically moved to the Selected list when you select the subcategory
in the Subcategory column on that row. The Dependent Subcategories can't be removed from
the Selected list unless you first remove the subcategory it is dependent on. The Included Data
will also be copied for a dependent subcategory and the category it is dependent on.
For example, if you move Activities to the Selected list, then Calendars (Project) and WBS will
also be moved to the Selected list and can't be removed unless you first remove Activities. All
data for the Activities subcategory in the Included Data column (activities, activity default
settings, calendar assignments, code assignments, configured field assignments and file
assignments) will be copied, and so will the data for project-level Calendars (all project-level
calendars) and WBS (WBS, code assignments and configured field assignments).
Note: There is certain data that will always be included in project copy
and isn't dependent on your choices on the What's Included step. That
data includes project files and their code assignments, project-level risk
fields, project settings (located on the Settings page of the project
Summary & Settings), codes, configured fields, and user and user
groups associated with the source project and their permission sets
(although you can update these options on the Permission Sets step of
82
the Add Project wizard).
Schedule
Subcategory Included Data Dependent Subcategories

Activities Activities, activity default Calendars (Project), WBS
settings, calendar
assignments, code
assignments, configured
fields assignments, file
assignments
Activity Relationships Activity relationships Activities, Calendars
(Project), WBS
Resource Assignments Resource assignments, Activities, Calendars
calendar assignments, roles (Project), WBS
and resources assigned to
activities, schedule settings,
curves, configured field
assignments
Notes:
 If both Activities and Tasks are selected, then any Task Activity
associations will be copied.
 If both Activities and Risks are selected, then any Risk Activity
associations will be copied.
Resources & Roles
All Project Resources Resources, resource and All Project Roles, Units of
role associations, calendar Measure, Calendars
assignments, code (Project)
assignments
All Project Roles Roles, work rates, calendar Unit of Measure, Calendars
assignments, code (Project)
assignments
83
Note: Resource and role associations are copied when All Project
Resources and All Project Roles are both copied.
Risks
Risks Risks (threats, Activities, Matrix, Calendars

opportunities, weather), (Project), WBS
Monte Carlo Analysis
settings, risk and activity
associations, risk response
actions, risk quantified
impacts, contingencies,
configured field
assignments, code
assignments, project-level
risk fields generated as a
result of running a risk
analysis, file assignments
Matrix Matrix assigned to the None
project, Monte Carlo
Analysis Settings, matrix
and threshold data if a
matrix is assigned to the
project
Activity Uncertainty Activity uncertainty, Monte Activities, Calendars
Carlo Analysis Settings (Project), WBS
Note: The Period Start and Period Finish year for weather risk data will
be updated to match the new project's start date. For example, if your
Period Start date for a weather risk is June 1st, 2015, and your new
project's Start date is January 15th, 2020, then the Period Start date for
the weather risk will be June 1st, 2020 when it is copied.
Tasks
84
Tasks Tasks, calendar assigned to None

the project, owning
company (all tasks will be
reassigned to the project
owning company),
configured fields
assignments, code
assignments
Task Hand-offs Task hand-offs Tasks
Note: If both Activities and Tasks are selected, then any Task Activity
associations will be copied over.
Settings
Autonumbering Autonumbering None
Structures
Calendars (Project) Project-level calendars None
Codes (Project) Project-level codes and None

code values
Units of Measure Units of measure None
WBS WBS, code assignments, None

configured field
assignments
Custom Logs
85
The subcategories for Custom log configuration None

custom logs will be any settings, code assignments,
existing custom log types in configured field
the project being copied. If assignments
the project being copied
contains no custom logs,
then there will be no
options for them in the Add
Project wizard.
Note: Custom log items will not be included in copy.
Project Templates Overview

Project templates are reusable models of projects you can store and use later to save time and
standardize your operations.
A template includes all the details, best practices, and de facto standards your organization
associates with projects of a particular type. Use project templates to create a library of
predefined project structures that can later be used as starting points for new projects.
For example, say your organization is responsible for managing the construction of store Smith
Wholesale in multiple states. The WBSs and resources are essentially the same. A template in
this situation enables you to quickly create the project and add any unique requirements for the
projects in the different states.
When creating a template, you can choose to copy data from an existing project or template.
When a template is created from an existing project, all the actual values, including dates, units,
durations, and location fields are cleared. Projects or templates can be copied into the same
workspace or a child workspace. If a project or template is copied to a child workspace that does
not share data with the parent workspace, then data is pulled down and made available in the
child workspace. This data includes resources, roles, configured fields, dashboards, units of
measure, calendars, and curves.
Add a Project Template

Project templates are created when the organization manages similar, repeatable projects.
When creating a template, you can choose to copy data from an existing project or template.
Data stored at the workspace-level and relationships between projects are not available to copy.
After a project template has been added, see Add a Project (on page 79) for instructions on
how to copy data from the template.
To add a project template:
 In the object selector, select Projects, select  Add, and then select Template.
 On the File menu, select New, and then select Template.
2) In the Create New Project Template panel, complete the following steps:
86
 In the Project Template Details step, enter general details about your project template,
and then select Next.
Note: The default currency is the parent workspace currency. You can
select a different currency if needed.
 In the What's Included step, select the information to copy from an existing project or
template, and then select Next.
Note: The What's Included step appears if you choose to copy data
from an existing project or template in the Project Template Details
step. By default, all project data will be copied. Clear the Select All
check box if you want to choose from predefined groupings of app and
settings data. When you select a group to copy, additional object
dependencies are automatically included. For example, when you copy
Activities, WBS data is automatically included. Select the  Help icon
next to a dependency for more information.
 In the User and Group Access step, select users and user groups who need to access
the project template, and then select Next.
Note: The user who adds the project template is automatically assigned
access to the template with the Administrator permission set assigned.
Access cannot be removed during the project template creation process.
 In the Permission Sets step, assign permissions to the users and groups who can
access the project template, and then select Next.
Note: By default, the user adding the project template will be assigned
the Administrator permission set for the Project, File, Custom Log, and
Report permission sets for the project template. The permission sets for
the user adding the project template can only be changed after the
project template is created.
 In the Companies step, select the companies who are responsible for the work on your
project template, and then select Next.
 In the Summary step, review and edit your selections, and then select Add Project
Template.
87
2) In the Projects inventory panel, select the group where you want to store the project.
Note: The group may be the workspace name or another grouping name
if a Group By option is selected for the table. If the table is organized by
a group other than workspace, then the new project template will inherit
the attribute for that group. For example, if the table is grouped by a
project code, the new project template will inherit the project code for
that group.
3) Select the  Add  menu, and select Template.
Tips
 At any step of the Create New Project Template panel, you can select Finish or Add
Project Template to add the project template without completing the remaining steps. If you
choose to copy data from an existing project or template, you must proceed to the What's
Included step before you can select Finish or Add Project Template.
Import or Export a Project

Projects in Oracle Primavera Cloud can be imported from or exported to a variety of external
applications.
Import/Export to P6 Overview
The Import from P6 and Export to P6 features in Oracle Primavera Cloud enable you to share
data across applications and environments. Import P6 projects into your Primavera Cloud
environment and export Primavera Cloud projects and their baselines and scenarios to P6 or a
different Primavera Cloud environment.
Primavera Cloud supports importing or exporting P6 XML or XER files to transfer project data.
However, baselines are not supported in P6 XER format, so they are not imported or exported
with project data in the XER file.
You can import a valid P6 XML or XER file; or, for faster performance, import a .zip file
containing the P6 XML or XER file. Uploading multiple P6 XML or XER files within a .zip file is
not supported. The maximum file size that you can import is 1 GB.
When exporting data from Primavera Cloud, you can export multiple projects from the same
workspace and choose to export them as an XML or XER file or a compressed XML or XER file.
Download the exported file from the export log when the export process completes.
You can access the Import or Export logs from the notifications panel or the Manage Services
page. Use the log to view information about any errors encountered during the import or export
process or general statistics and data about the completed process.
88
Notes:
 After importing P6 EPPM project data into Primavera Cloud, you must
reschedule the project and recalculate costs before making any
project updates.
 The Download link for the exported file is available for up to 30 days
after the export job is complete. The exported file will not be available
beyond 30 days from the Download link.
Import P6 XML/XER Data into Oracle Primavera Cloud

Import P6 data from a P6 XML or XER file into your Oracle Primavera Cloud environment. For
each project included in the file, you can create a new project, update an existing project, or
ignore the project and not import it. For projects you choose to import, you can specify how
individual workspace and project object types are imported into the application. When the import
is complete, you can view a log file to see the results of the process.
The P6 XML/XER import process supports a variety of P6 data objects and import actions for
transferring your data to Primavera Cloud. Each import action has its own set of rules to
describe how your data is impacted during the process. This topic describes the process and its
options at a high level.
Watch the Importing Projects from Primavera P6
(https://players.brightcove.net/2985902027001/default_default/index.html?videoId=631469
3485112) video to get a brief overview of importing P6 project data to Primavera Cloud.
You must have the required workspace security privileges to import projects and add new
projects. You must have the required project security privilege to edit existing projects.
Notes:
 After importing P6 EPPM project data into Primavera Cloud, you must
reschedule the project and recalculate costs before making any
project updates.
 Before importing an XER file into Primavera Cloud, ensure the
decimal symbol setting for currency values in P6 is set to dot(.)
instead of comma(,).
 Before importing an XER file into Primavera Cloud, ensure that the
file is exported from P6 with the display currency same as Primavera
Cloud's base currency.
To import project data from a P6 XML or XER file:

89
Note: In Primavera Professional, open a project or program that belongs

to the workspace where you want to import the projects.
2) (Primavera Cloud only) In the Projects inventory panel, in the workspace tree, select a
destination workspace for the imported project.
Note: You must be within the context of the workspace where you want
to import the file. Selecting a workspace name in the grid will not change
the workspace context.
3) Select Actions , and then select Import from P6.

4) In the Import from P6 panel, in the Select XML or XER File field, select a P6 XML or XER
file to import.
Note: You can upload a valid P6 XML or XER file, or, for faster
performance, upload a .zip file containing the P6 XML or XER file.
Uploading multiple P6 XML or XER files within a .zip file is not
supported. The maximum file size that you can import is 1 GB.
5) In the Project Import Actions section, specify an Import Action for each project.
6) (Optional) In the Baseline field, select up to three baselines for each project.
Notes:
 Project baselines are imported only during the P6 XML import.
Baselines are not supported in P6 XER format, so they are not
imported with project data in the XER file.
 Because of differences in how data is managed in P6 and Primavera
Cloud, you cannot revert changes made to a baseline if that baseline
was imported from a P6 XML file.
7) Select Next.
8) In the Workspace Data section, specify the following for each item:
 Import Action: Select an import action for each workspace item.
 Conflict Action: Select an alternate action to take when multiple matches are found in
the application.
Notes:
 Because configured fields must be unique across the application for
each object type, they do not support promotion or conflict actions.
The conflict action is set to Not Applicable for configured fields.
 Because workspace-level codes can be associated with multiple
object types, importing code types with different import actions may
interfere with new and existing codes. For example, assume an
existing code is associated with both activities and resources.
Choosing to insert new activity codes and update existing resource
codes may cause unintended changes to the existing code. To
90
prevent these unintended changes, all workspace-level code import

actions and conflict actions are synchronized during the import
process. This ensures that all codes are imported consistently.
 Conflict action options are available for workspace data items with an
import action of Update Existing or Keep Existing.
9) In the Project Data section, specify the following for each item:
 Import Action: Select an import action for each project item.
 Remove from Projects: Select this option to remove objects in Oracle Primavera Cloud
that do not exist in the P6 XML or XER file. This option is available for the activities,
relationships, and resources and roles project data items.
10) (Optional) Select Save Configuration to retain these settings for future use.
11) Start the import process:
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Finish.
b. In the inventory panel, select  Close.
 Select Finish.
Tips
 After the import process completes, you can review the import log to view data and statistics
about the process, as well as any errors encountered that need to be resolved. You can
access the import log from the system notification you receive when the process is complete
or from the Manage Services page.
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to P6 XML or XER
Export one or more projects and their baselines or scenarios from Primavera Cloud to a single
P6 XML or XER file. You must have the required global privilege to use the export functionality.
The list of projects available for export depends on the workspace or project selected in the
table.
To export project data to a P6 XML or XER file:
2) In the table, select a workspace or project row.
3) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Export to P6.
4) In the Export to P6 dialog box, in the Select Project field, select one or more projects.
5) From the Export As list, select Compressed XML, XML, Compressed XER, or XER file
type.
91
Note: The project IDs and the project names of the selected projects are
entered by default in the Project ID and Project Name columns.
6) (Optional for XML) Select the Baseline column, and then select  Select.
 In the Select Baseline dialog box, select one or more baselines, and then select  Add
from Available to add them to the Selected section.
Note: Baselines can only be exported to a P6 XML file. Baselines are

not exported during the P6 XER export since P6 Professional does not
support baselines in XER format.
7) (Optional) Select the Scenario column, and then select  Select.

 In the Select Scenario dialog box, select one or more scenarios, and then select  Add
from Available to add them to the Selected section.
Note: You can export up to 20 baselines and scenarios. By default, the

Supplementary, Original, and Current baseline are already selected. You
can move baselines or scenarios back to the Available list if you don't
want to export them.
8) Start the export process:

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Export.
 Select Export.
9) When the export process is complete, you will receive a system notification. Select
Download File in the notification to download the P6 XML or XER file. You can also
download the P6 XML or XER file from the Inbox or Manage Services pages.
Note: The Download link for the exported file is available for up to 30
days after the export job is complete. The exported file will not be
available beyond 30 days from the Download link.
Tips
 You can export multiple projects from the same workspace. When the export process
completes, you can download the P6 XML or XER file that is generated. The file is named
after the first project in the export list.
 You can also export project data to an XML or XER file for an individual project by selecting
the  Context menu next to the project, and then selecting Export to P6.
Import or Export Log
The Import or Export log shows details and statistics from the P6 XML or XER import or export
process. You can access the logs from the notifications panel or from the Manage Services
page.
92
Use the Import log to select a workspace or project item in the list and view the number of
objects that were created, updated, not imported, or removed during the import. For a selected
item, the details pane shows the individual objects and their details separated by import action. If
any errors were encountered, you can view the error details and take the recommended steps to
resolve them.
Use the Export log to select a workspace or project item in the list to view the number of
exported projects and their details in the details pane.
Manage Services (https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E80480_01/help/en/user/151899.htm)
Import/Export to P6 Overview (on page 88)
Create Projects by Excel Import

You can bulk import a group of projects into the application using Microsoft Excel. Download a
pre-formatted template, follow the instructions in the spreadsheet, and then import the
completed template into Oracle Primavera Cloud. Using data from an outside system can save
you time from manual entry. The same template can also be used to update the data of existing
projects.
Download an Import Template for Importing Projects

Download a pre-formatted Microsoft Excel template to use when importing projects. The
template contains all project codes and configured fields that are available to the workspace
where you downloaded the template. After you download the template, enter the name, ID, and
details of each project you want to import. When you are finished, you can import the updated
template to create the projects in Oracle Primavera Cloud. The template can also be used to
update data in projects that already exist in Primavera Cloud.
To download an import template:
2) Select Actions  menu, and then select Download Import Template.
Tips
 The import template is downloaded as a Microsoft Excel file with the default file name
ProjectsImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of each worksheet are required when importing data from a spreadsheet.
You can delete unused optional columns, but do not change the data in these rows.
 Review the Instructions worksheet for helpful tips on populating the import template.
93
Import Projects from Microsoft Excel

You can bulk import projects into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file. After
downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update projects in the
spreadsheet. The import will fail if there are any invalid values in the spreadsheet. You can
download the spreadsheet file to view and fix the errors indicated in the error column at the end
of each worksheet, and then import the file again.
You must have sufficient workspace privileges to import projects from Microsoft Excel.
To import projects from Microsoft Excel:

to the workspace where you want to import the projects.
2) (Primavera Cloud only) In the workspace tree, select a destination workspace for the
imported project.
Note: You must be within the context of the workspace where you want
to import the file. Selecting a workspace name in the grid will not change
the workspace context.
3) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Import.

4) In the Import Projects dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Tips
 You will receive a notification when the process is complete.
 Projects are imported with the workspace currency by default.
Microsoft Project Import/Export Overview

You can import Microsoft Project projects into your Oracle Primavera Cloud environment and
export Primavera Cloud projects for use in Microsoft Project. An integration connection to
Microsoft Project is required for importing or exporting Microsoft Project data.
During the import process, you have the option to create a new project using the data in the
Microsoft Project XML, update an existing project, or automatically detect which action to take
based on the XML filename. Imported data includes project configuration and setting data
associated with the project, such as activities, calendars, relationships, resource assignments,
and WBS. Microsoft Project external dependencies are not imported by Primavera Cloud.
94
During the export process, you can select a project from the workspace where you chose to
export. The full list of data imported or exported between Primavera Cloud and Microsoft Project
can be reviewed in the Microsoft Project Default Business Flow Reference (Oracle Primavera
Cloud Help only).
To run the import process, you must have the required workspace security privileges to import
and add new projects, and the required project security privilege to edit projects. To export a
project from the application, you must have the Export Projects global security privilege
enabled.
When the import process is complete, you can review the integration details on the Manage
Services page. When the export process completes, you can download the Microsoft Project
XML file that is generated from the system notification.
Only one project can be imported at a time.
Import Microsoft Project Data into Oracle Primavera Cloud

Import a Microsoft Project XML file to create a project in Oracle Primavera Cloud containing
Microsoft Project activity, resource assignment, and general project data. Only one project can
be imported at a time.
Note: The parent workspace for the project must have a Microsoft
Project connection to enable importing Microsoft Project data.
To import data from a Microsoft Project XML file:


to the workspace where you want to import the project.
2) (Primavera Cloud only) Configure the view settings to group by workspace.

a. Select  Settings.
b. In the Manage Views panel, select the Grouping tab.
c. In the Group By list, select Workspace.
d. Select Save.
e. In the Manage Views panel, select  Close.
3) (Primavera Cloud only) In the workspace tree, select a destination workspace for the
imported project.
95
4) Select Actions , and then select Import/Export - Microsoft Project.

5) In the Import/Export - Microsoft Project dialog box, select the Import tab.
6) In the Select File field, select a Microsoft Project XML file.
7) In the Import Action field, select one of the following options:
 Auto-Detect: Select to allow the application to detect whether a new project should be
created or an existing project should be updated.
Notes:
 The XML file name is the project ID. This ID is used to determine
which action to take.
 If you want to update a project that has a different project ID, then
select the Update Existing option.
 Create New: Select to create a new project in Primavera Cloud using the data from the
Microsoft Project XML file.
In the New Project ID field, enter a unique ID for the project.
 Update Existing: Select to update an existing project.
In the Import To field, select the project to update.
Caution: Ensure you choose the correct project. Selecting a non-related

project may corrupt the data in your existing project.
8) Start the import process:

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Import.
 Select Import.
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to Microsoft Project XML

Export a project and its data from Oracle Primavera Cloud for use in Microsoft Project. The data
is exported as a Microsoft Project XML file. You must have the required global privilege to use
the export functionality. The list of projects available for export depends on the workspace or
project selected in the table.
To export project data to Microsoft Project XML:
96

4) In the Import/Export - Microsoft Project dialog box, select the Export tab.
5) In the Select Project field, select a project, and then select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Export.
 Select Export.
Tips
 When the export process is complete, you will receive a system notification. Select
Download MSP File in the notification to download the Microsoft Project XML file. You can
also download the XML file from the Manage Services page.
 You can also export project data to Microsoft Project XML file for an individual project by
selecting the  Context menu next to the project, and then selecting Export to MSP.

Open a Project in Primavera Professional

You must open a project in Primavera Professional before you can begin using it.
To open a project in Primavera Professional:
1) On the File menu, select Open.
2) In the Open dialog box, select the Projects tab, select a project, and then select Open.
The tabs that were open the last time the project was open are displayed. Projects opened
for the first time display the Activities page.
Note: A project can be open in Primavera Professional even if no tabs

are open.
Tips
 You can also open a project from the Projects - Workspace page.
 Select Open Recent on the File menu to view or open up to ten recently opened projects or
programs.
Configure Project Details

Configure project details to add important details to your project, such as codes, project location,
and project manager. Some of these details are provided during the project creation process,
but can be modified later.
To configure project details:
97
 Assign a User or User Group Access to a Project (on page 98)

 Assign a Code to a Project (on page 99)
 Set the Data Date for a Project (on page 100)
 Assign a Project Calendar (on page 100)
 Modify a Project Currency (on page 101)
 Add an Image to a Project (on page 102)
 Assign a Location to a Project (on page 103)
 Assign a Manager to a Project (on page 103)
 Set the Reporting Cycle for a Project (on page 104)
 Configure Schedule Settings for a Project (on page 105)
 Change the Status of a Project (on page 106)
 View the Construction Value (on page 106)
 Move a Project to a Different Workspace (on page 112)
 Considerations When Moving a Project to a Different Workspace (on page 107)
 Delete a Project (on page 113)
Assign a User or User Group Access to a Project

Users can be assigned to projects individually or through user groups. To access a project, each
user or user group must be assigned a project permission set. A user or user group may have
been configured with a default permission set. This permission set can be changed for the
project assignment at any time.
To assign user access to a project:
1) In the object selector, select a project.
2) In the sidebar, hover over  Project Team, and select Security.
3) Select the Assign  menu, and then select User or Group.
4) In the Assign User or Assign Group dialog box, enter the user or group name.
5) Select the name, and select Next.
6) In each Permission Set column, select a permission set for each permission type.
Note: If you assigned a user or user group that is configured with a

default permission set, you can keep the default or select another if
necessary.
7) Add any other optional permission sets applicable to that user or group.
8) Select Assign.
9) Select Save.
You can also do this in the Projects inventory panel.
98
2) In the table, select a project, and then select the Security detail window.
Tips
 There are two permission sets provided by the application that you can assign to users and
user groups:
 The Administrator (System) permission set has all privileges assigned. It grants all
functionality for an object as well as access to all of the object's data. It also grants the
ability to edit the user and user group security for that object.
 The View Only (System) permission set provides read-only access to objects and their
data. The View Only (System) permission set does not include access to cost or financial
information.
 If you added the project in the application, you are automatically assigned access to the
project with the Administrator (System) permission set assigned.
 The Search feature searches the entire list of users for matches. During that initial search, it
will stop after finding 500 results, then filter out those who have already been assigned. For
this reason, your maximum number of search results might vary. To limit the number of
results, be as specific as possible when entering a name in the search field. For example,
enter the first and last name of the user.
Assign a Code to a Project

Assign codes to projects to help track projects based on attributes they share. When managing
a large number of projects, project codes enable you to filter and group information across the
organization.
To assign a code to a project:
2) In the table, select a project, and then select the Codes detail window.
3) Select Assign.
4) In the Select Code dialog box, expand the code, and select the code value.
5) Select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
99
 Select  Save.
Set the Data Date for a Project

The data date is the progress point, or "as-of date," for activities in the project. Project status is
up-to-date as of the data date.
The data date is also used for updating the dates of scope assignments and work packages
when they are not linked to activities.
Note: Dates will not change after the Data Date is updated for activities
or scope assignments unless you run the Scheduler or Modify Dates
feature, respectively.
To set the project data date:

1) Navigate to the project Details page (see page 442).
2) In the Details section, in the Data Date field, select the date.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
b. In the Summary & Settings panel, select  Close.
This setting is used in the following apps:

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Assign a Project Calendar

Each project must have a calendar assigned. The project calendar determines valid work and
nonwork times during the project. The project calendar is automatically assigned to all new
activities within the project. Existing activity calendar assignments are not affected. An activity's
calendar can be updated at any time.
100
The default calendar in the parent workspace is automatically assigned as the project calendar
when the project is created, but this can be changed to suit the needs of the project. When
assigning a project calendar, you can select workspace-level or project-level calendars that have
been made available to the project object.
To assign a project calendar:
2) In the Details section, in the Calendar field, select a calendar.
3) In the Select Calendar dialog box, in the Filter By list, select Project to view calendars
available at the project level, or Workspace to view calendars available at the workspace
level.
4) Select a calendar, and then select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Modify a Project Currency

Projects inherit the base or workspace currency by default, but you can set a custom project
currency. A workspace currency must have an exchange rate defined to appear in the list of
currencies available to the project. A project can be viewed in the project, workspace, or the
base currency. For information on pages that support workspace currency, see Workspace
Currency Overview.
The currency exchange rate will be set for the life of the project at the project creation date. For
example, if the project is created on Jan 5, 2022, the project exchange rate will be set to the
exchange rate for that date and will not reflect changes to the workspace exchange rate. The
exchange rate can be modified on the project (under project details), but only if no cost data has
been entered.
The project currency cannot be changed if costs exist for a project.
To modify a project currency:
2) In the Currency section, in the Project Currency field, select the project currency.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
101
The Exchange Rate field is automatically populated with the exchange rate defined at the
workspace level. You can change it if costs are not already defined for the project.

 Cost and Funds
 Portfolio Analysis
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Strategic Alignment
 Tasks
Add an Image to a Project

A project image is shown in some areas of the application, such as the Project Home page. You
can upload your own image or choose from existing images. You cannot upload an image with a
CMYK color format.
To add an image to a project:
2) Select  Select Image.
3) In the Select Image for Project dialog box, choose one of the following:
 Under the Upload New Image section, in the Image field, select  Browse, and then
select an image.
 Under the Choose from Existing section, select Gallery or Uploaded, and then select
an existing image.
4) Select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 To restore the default project image, select Reset to Default in the Select Image for
Project dialog box.
102
Assign a Location to a Project

You can assign locations to projects to produce reports based on geographical location, and to
group and filter projects by a variety of location details. Locations are also used in the spatial
search feature and required to configure companies. Locations can be chosen from an existing
entry in the Locations dictionary at the workspace level or created and stored directly at the
object level. When creating a new location at the object level, you can optionally save it to the
Locations dictionary for future use.
To assign a location to a project:
2) In the Location section, complete the following fields:
3) Choose an existing location, or enter a new location.
4) To choose an existing location:
a. In the Name field, select  Select.
b. In the Select Location dialog box, choose a location, and select OK.
5) To add a new location:
a. In the Name field, enter a name for the new location.
b. Enter the address, and select Locate. Alternatively, you can enter the Latitude and
Longitude and select Locate.
Notes:
 Input longitude and latitude in the format that is appropriate for your
geolocation service. Enter longitude and latitude in decimal degrees
or directional designators.
 Select a country when locating using longitude and latitude to
improve results.
c. To save this location to the Locations dictionary at the workspace level, select Save
location for future use.
6) (Optional) In the Description field, enter a description of the location. The location must be
saved for future use to enter a description.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Assign a Manager to a Project

Assign managers to projects to identify the project manager or person responsible for managing
the project.
The user who created the project is automatically assigned as the manager.
103
To assign a manager to a project:

2) In the Details section, in the Manager field, select a manager.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
2) In the table, select a project, and then add a manger in the Manager field.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Set the Reporting Cycle for a Project

Set the reporting cycle to be used in your project. Reporting cycles are used to enable users to
plan, status, and report project status on scope assignments or to store period performance of
activities.
Note: If a default reporting cycle is set for the workspace, all new
projects will inherit this reporting cycle. You can change or remove the
default reporting cycle.
To set a reporting cycle:

104
2) In the Details section, in the Reporting Cycle field, select the reporting cycle.
3) In the Frequency for Resetting Period Names list, choose when period names are reset.
The options available are based on the selection for Reporting Cycle. The standard calendar
start and end dates are used as boundaries for resetting periods.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
 Scope
Configure Schedule Settings for a Project

Configure project schedule settings to set planned project start and finish dates, as well as a
date by which the project must finish. These dates are also used to drive the project scheduler
during the scheduling process.
To configure schedule settings for your project:
2) In the Schedule section, in the Project Planned Start field, select the start date.
3) In the Project Planned Finish field, select a planned finish date.
4) In the Schedule Must Finish By Date field, select the date the project must finish by.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
105
Change the Status of a Project

The current status of a project determines how the project is handled within the application.
Project status can be set manually or through a workflow, depending on the status type. A new
project is set to Active by default.
To change the status of a project:
2) In the Details section, in the Status list, select the appropriate status:
 Proposal: The project is a project proposal and has not been extensively planned nor
accrued any costs. A project proposal can only be created using a workflow and a
change in status must also be performed through a workflow.
 Rejected: The project proposal has been rejected and will not be executed as a project.
A project can only be marked as Rejected through the use of a workflow.
 Planned: The project is currently planned for execution. Project managers input expected
project costs and other project data during this stage. A change in status can be
performed manually or through a workflow.
 Active: The project is currently active and being executed. A change in status can be
 Inactive: The project has been rendered inactive and will temporarily accrue no costs. A
change in status can be performed manually or through a workflow.
 Complete: The project has been successfully completed and will no longer accrue costs.
A change in status can be performed manually or through a workflow.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
View the Construction Value

You can review construction values to projects to help track the total cost of a project over the
construction period. Construction values can include the cost of materials, subcontractor totals,
overhead costs, general conditions, and taxes.
To view a construction value to a project:
2) In the Details section, in the Construction Value field, review the total cost for the project.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
106
Considerations When Moving a Project to a Different Workspace

Depending on the type, some data items will be automatically removed from the project, moved
and renamed if the same ID exists, or removed. The table in this topic describes some of the
scenarios that could prevent you from moving a project to another workspace, describes the
automatically handled items, and describes data items that are not impacted by the Move
Project process.
The scenarios for the workspace data listed in the table below must be resolved using Primavera
Cloud.
Scenarios and their Resolution by Workspace Data
Workspace Scenario Outcome and Resolution

Data
Activity As a result of the Copy workspace New and updated configured field
Configured data option, new formula formulas are only recalculated in
Fields configured fields are created in the the current schedule or the open
destination workspace. New scenario. Run the scheduler in
formula configured fields are only baselines or other scenarios to
automatically calculated for the recalculate configured fields.
current schedule. Baselines and
scenarios will not automatically
recalculate their formula
configured fields.
CBS The project contains a workspace If the project has a workspace CBS,
CBS. it will be copied to the project as a
project CBS during the move. After
the move, you can synchronize the
project CBS with the destination
workspace's CBS from the project
Cost Sheet page.
Configured The project contains specific  Configured fields with a type of
Fields configured fields. "Boolean" are only copied or
moved if at least one True value
exists for the field in the project.
 File configured fields are only
supported for the Move
workspace data option.
107
Cost The project move fails when the Do one of the following:
Categories project is used by any cost  Move the cost categories to the
categories not available in the destination workspace. To do
destination workspace. this, first update the owning
workspace of the cost
categories to a parent
workspace that is common to
the current and destination
workspace. Then, assign the
cost categories down the
workspace hierarchy until they
are in the destination
workspace.
 Remove the cost categories
from the project. To do this, you
will need to delete all cost
category assignments to objects
in the project.
Currencies The project contains currencies  Currencies used by the project
which may not be in the are automatically moved to the
destination workspace. destination workspace if they
are not already available.
 The new target workspace may
have a different workspace
currency or exchange rate.
Costs are recalculated based
on the new workspace, so there
may be some discrepancies
between the original and
updated costs of the project.
For more information on
workspace currency, see
Workspace Currency Overview.
Custom Logs A project-level custom logs ID Custom Logs will move with the
matches the ID of custom logs in project, but a customs log's ID may
the destination workspace be changed if it matches an existing
hierarchy. custom log's ID in the project's
destination workspace hierarchy.
Custom Log The project move fails when the Remove the custom log type from
Types project is used by any custom log the project and try again.
types not available in the
destination workspace.
108
Dashboards A project-level dashboard ID Project dashboards always move

matches the ID of a dashboard's with the project, but a project
data item in the destination dashboard's ID may be changed if it
workspace hierarchy. matches an existing dashboard's ID
in the project's destination
workspace hierarchy.
Evaluation The project's evaluation matrix is The project's evaluation matrix will
Matrix not used by the destination be automatically removed from the
workspace. project if the same matrix is not
used by the destination workspace.
Folder The project's current workspace Folder templates from the project's
Templates contains Folder Templates which previous owning workspace will no
are not available in the destination longer be available to use if they
workspace. are not available in the destination
workspace. Folder templates
applied to the project before it is
moved are not impacted.
Forms The project's current workspace Project-level form assignments will
contains project-level Forms which be automatically removed from the
are not available in the destination project if the form is not available in
workspace. the destination workspace.
Funds Workspace-level & portfolio-level Projects with assigned
funding sources have been portfolio-level funds and
allocated to the project. workspace-level funds cannot be
moved.
If funds have been allocated to the
project but not consumed by the
project (for example, they are not
yet assigned to Actuals), then
delete the allocation to the project
on the Fund Sources page in the
project's workspace.
If funds have been allocated and
consumed by the project (for
example, by being assigned to
Actuals), each individual fund
assignment would need to be
deleted before you can move the
project.
109
Locations The project uses locations which Locations from the project's
are not available in the destination previous workspace will no longer
workspace. be available to use if they are not
available in the destination
workspace. Locations used by the
project before it is moved are not
impacted.
Measures Project measures reference the Project measures that reference the
project you have moved into a new moved project may not return a
destination workspace. value if the project is no longer
available to the measure.
Portfolio The project is moved to a The project will be removed from
Association destination outside of the the portfolio's project list the next
portfolio's owning workspace time it is manually or automatically
hierarchy. refreshed.
Print Layouts Print Layouts are associated with The Print Layouts that are
the project being moved. associated with the project being
moved are automatically removed
from the project if they are not
already available in the destination
workspace.
Program The project is moved to a The project will be removed from
Association destination workspace outside of the program's project list the next
the program's owning workspace. time it is manually or automatically
refreshed.
Reports Project-level reports are Project reports are automatically
automatically moved with the moved with the project. In the log,
project. the reports owning workspace is
changed to the destination
workspace.
Resources Project-level resources are Project resources automatically

(Project) automatically moved with the moved with the project, but a
project. resource's ID may be changed if it
matches an existing resource's ID
in the project's destination
Risk Matrix The project's owning workspace The risk matrix templates will not be
Templates contains risk matrix templates. available for use if the project is
moved to a destination workplace
where those templates are not
already available.
110
Risk The owning workspace contains The risk threshold templates will not
Threshold risk threshold templates. be available for use if the project is
Templates moved to a destination workplace
where those templates are not
already available.
Roles Project-level roles are Project roles automatically moved

(Project) automatically moved with the with the project, but a role's ID may
project. change if it matches an existing
role's ID in the project's destination
Rules of The Project move fails when the Do one of the following:
Credit project is used by any rules of  Move the rule of credit to the
credit not available in the destination workspace. To do
destination workspace. this, first update the owning
workspace of the rule of credit
to a parent workspace that is
common to the current and
destination workspace. Then,
assign the rule of credit down
the workspace hierarchy until
they are in the destination
workspace.
 Remove the rule of credit from
the project. To do this, you will
need to delete all rule of credit
assignments to objects in the
project.
Strategies The project contains strategies. Strategy associations are
automatically removed from the
project.
User Groups The project in the owning Do one of the following:
workspace contains project-level  Project-level user groups are
user groups or the owning disabled during project move.
workspace contains After the move is completed,
workspace-level user groups you can enable the user groups
which are not available in the again.
destination workspace.  If a workspace user group is not
available to the destination, all
its project-level assignments will
be removed and must added
again.
111
Workflow The project's owning workspace Project-level workflow action

Actions uses workflow actions which are assignments are automatically
not available in the destination removed from the project if the
workspace. Workflow Action is not available in
the destination workspace.
Workflow The Project move fails when the Make the workflow configuration
Configuration project is used by any workflow available to the destination
configuration not available in the workspace or delete all versions of
destination workspace. the configuration using the project
and its data, and then try moving
the project again.
Move a Project to a Different Workspace

You can move a project to a different workspace in the Projects inventory panel.
Moving a project to a different workspace can affect shared data. Some inherited shared data
may have to be promoted to the designated workspace before you can move the project. Some
shared data cannot be moved, which means the project cannot be moved. See Considerations
When Moving a Project to a Different Workspace (on page 107) for more details.
To move a project:
2) In the Projects list, locate the project being moved. Select the  Context menu, and select
Move Project.
3) In the Move Project wizard, complete the following:
 Select a destination workspace and update the Project ID field if there is a project with
the same ID in the destination workspace. Select Next.
 In the Data Actions step, select one of the following options to define how data is
handled.
 Copy workspace data: All workspace data items that are not available in the
destination workspace will be copied and pasted to the destination. Copied items
with the same ID as an existing item will be appended with the next available ID
number. Assignments for each workspace data item will be reassigned to the
copied workspace data item.
112
 Move workspace data: Workspace data items that are not available in the
destination workspace will be promoted or assigned to a level available to the
destination. Promoted items with the same ID as an existing item will be appended
with the next available ID number. This option may change an item's owning
workspace, making the item available to more workspaces.
Note: The selections in Data Actions determine how data that is

assigned to the project, but not available in the destination, is handled.
4) Select Move Project.
Tips
 When the project is successfully moved to a new workspace, or if the move project action
fails, a Move Project Log is created. For more information on the details of the log review
the Move Project Log.
Delete a Project
Deleting a project will remove relationships with other items, such as project dependencies and
portfolios, and will also delete files added to the project.
If you delete a project that is synchronized with P6 EPPM, the setting in P6 EPPM that indicates
a project is synchronized with Oracle Primavera Cloud is cleared. The project is not deleted from
P6 EPPM.
You cannot delete a project that is included on a portfolio budget planning scenario. You must
delete it from the scenario first.
After a project has been deleted, all rolled up values are recalculated.
To delete a project:
2) In the table, select the project row or rows.
3) Select the  Context menu, and select Delete.
4) In the Delete dialog box, choose to delete the project permanently or mark the project as
inactive, and then select OK.
5) In the Confirm dialog box, select Yes.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
113
Tip
 The application will run the deletion process in the background while you continue to work,
and you will receive a notification when the process is complete.
Export Oracle Primavera Cloud Data to Microsoft Project XML

Export a project and its data from Oracle Primavera Cloud for use in Microsoft Project. The data
is exported as a Microsoft Project XML file. You must have the required global privilege to use
the export functionality. The list of projects available for export depends on the workspace or
project selected in the table.
To export project data to Microsoft Project XML:
4) In the Import/Export - Microsoft Project dialog box, select the Export tab.
5) In the Select Project field, select a project, and then select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Export.
 Select Export.
Tips
 When the export process is complete, you will receive a system notification. Select
Download MSP File in the notification to download the Microsoft Project XML file. You can
also download the XML file from the Manage Services page.
 You can also export project data to Microsoft Project XML file for an individual project by
selecting the  Context menu next to the project, and then selecting Export to MSP.

114
Recalculate Project Measures On Demand

Project measures are automatically computed according to the tracking frequency set during
measure creation, but you can also recalculate project measures on demand. When a project
measure is automatically computed according to the set tracking frequency, its values are
recalculated in all workspaces where the measure is owned or inherited. For example, if a
project measure is shared between the Root, Production, and child workspaces, then when the
recalculations run on a set schedule, the values are updated in all workspaces where the
measure is shared. However, when you recalculate project measures on demand, the values of
all measures are recalculated, but only in the workspace from where the process was run.
To recalculate project measures:
2) Select the workspace whose measures you want to recalculate.
3) Select Actions , and then select Recalculate Measures.
You will receive a notification when the process completes.
Tips
 You can also recalculate project measures on other pages where measures are available to
be displayed. See Measures Overview (on page 394) for more information.
View the P6 EPS for Projects Synchronized with P6 EPPM

The enterprise project structure (EPS) to which the project belongs in P6 EPPM is stored in
Oracle Primavera Cloud as a project code value for the EPS project code.
To view the EPS associated with a project synchronized with P6 EPPM:
2) In the table, select the project.
3) Select the Codes detail window.
115
Tips
 You can group the projects listed in the table by EPS code.
Programs
Programs include projects that are related and collectively contribute to the achievement of a
program's outcomes and intended benefits. Create programs to manage projects associated
with the same workspace and child workspaces. Update the scope, problem description, codes,
and fields at the program level to provide sorting, classification, and reporting options for each
program and across multiple programs.
Comparing Workspaces, Portfolios, and Programs (on page 120)
Programs Overview
Programs provide an umbrella structure for managing projects associated with the same
workspace and child workspaces. Programs include projects that are related through a common
business objective, outcome, and delivery. Create programs to manage related projects to
obtain benefits not available from managing them individually. Projects can belong to multiple
programs.
Programs enable you to monitor and manage project costs, performance, and milestones during
the program lifecycle. Programs provide execution level tracking or grouping of projects. Create
program measures to quantitatively track project-level attributes for the projects that belong to
each program.
Add a Program
Use the Programs wizard to add program details, projects, user and group access, and
permissions to a program.
To add a program:
 In the object selector, select  Programs, and then select View All Programs.
c. On the Workspace menu, select Programs.
Note: To add a program in Primavera Professional, an existing project or

program must be open.
2) In the Programs inventory panel, select  Add.

3) In the Add Program wizard, complete the following fields:
116
 In the Program Details step, select the workspace and enter general details about the
program, and then select Next.
Note: The fields available in the Program Details step may change
based on the form configured for the selected workspace.
 In the Projects step, select one of the following options to define how projects are added
to the program, and then select Next:
 Manual Selection: Manually add projects from the Available section to the
Selected section.
 Filter: Specify the filtering criteria for including projects in the program.
 In the User and Group Access step, select users and user groups who need access to
the program, and then select Next.
 In the Permissions Sets step, assign permissions to the users and groups who can
access the program, and then select Next.
 In the Summary step, review and edit your selections.
4) Select Add Program to save the program.
You can also add a program directly from the object selector in Primavera Cloud:
 In the object selector, select Programs, and then select  Add Program.
Open a Program in Primavera Professional

You must open a program in Primavera Professional before you can begin using it.
To open a program in Primavera Professional:
1) On the File menu, select Open.
2) In the Open dialog box, select the Programs tab, select a program, and then select Open.
The tabs that were open the last time the program was open are displayed. Programs
opened for the first time display the Activities page.
Note: A program can be open in Primavera Professional even if no tabs

are open.
Tips
 You can also open a program from the Programs - Workspace page.
 Select Open Recent on the File menu to view up to ten recently opened projects or
programs. Select a project or program to open it.
Add a Project to a Program

You can view the projects currently added to a program or add a new project to the program. A
project can belong to multiple programs at a time.
Note: You can only add projects to a program that belong to the same
117
workspace as the program or a child workspace.
To add a project to a program:

1) In the object selector, select a program.
2) In the sidebar, select  Summary & Settings.
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Details.
4) In the Project List detail window, select Manage Projects.
5) In the Manage Projects dialog box, select one of the following options to define how
projects are added to the program:
 Manual Selection: Manually add projects from the Available section to the Selected
section.
 Filter: Specify the filtering criteria for including projects in the program.
6) In the Manage Projects dialog box, select Save.
7) Select Save.
8) In the Summary & Settings panel, select  Close.
You can also perform this task from the Programs inventory panel:
2) Select a program from the list of programs in the Programs inventory panel.
Tips
 To remove a project that was manually added, select a project, select the  Context menu,
and then select Remove.
 You can also add a project to a program on the Program Home page.
 The project list can be manually refreshed by selecting  Refresh Program, or it can be set
to refresh automatically. The list also updates when the filter is modified.
 You can view and edit the primary program of a project in the Programs inventory panel
Project List detail window.
Remove a Project from a Program

Remove a project from a program if it is no longer required to be a part of the program.
To remove a project from a program:
118
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Details.

4) In the Project List section, select Manage Projects.
 To remove a project that was manually added, remove the project from the Selected list.
To remove all projects, select Remove. Select Save.
 To remove a project added using filter criteria, modify the filter criteria, and then select
Save.
5) Select Save.
You can also perform this task from the Programs inventory panel:
2) Select a program from the list of programs in Programs inventory panel.
Tips
 For a manually added project, you can also select the project row, select the  Context
menu, and then select Remove.
 You can also remove a project from a program on the Program Home page.
Recalculate Program Measures On Demand

Program measures are automatically computed according to the tracking frequency set during
measure creation, but you can also run program measure recalculations on demand. When the
service is run, the values for all owned and inherited program measures in the workspace are
recalculated.
To recalculate program measures:
2) Select the workspace where the program measures belong.
119
3) Select Actions , and then select Recalculate Measures.

You will receive a notification when the process completes.
Delete a Program
You can delete a program even if it contains projects. After the program is deleted, the
associated projects will no longer be part of the program. Deleting a program will also delete the
files added to the program.
To delete a program:
2) In the table, select the program row or rows.
3) Select the  Context menu, and then select Delete.
4) In the Confirm dialog box, select Yes.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Comparing Workspaces, Portfolios, and Programs

In Primavera Cloud, workspaces, portfolios, and programs are used to manage sets of related
projects. This enables users to monitor the status of the projects, view their data at the same
time, facilitate budget or resource planning, and achieve benefits that are not available from
managing the projects individually. The table below highlights the key similarities and differences
between workspaces, portfolios, and programs. To view a list of pages that you can access for
each object, see the Primavera Cloud Site Map (Oracle Primavera Cloud only).
Workspaces Portfolios Programs
120
What are these? Workspaces A group of related A group of projects

represent the projects and that are related
hierarchical programs whose through a common
structure of an health and status business objective,
organization's you want to monitor. outcome, and
businesses, Portfolios are used delivery.
projects, or to: Programs are used
processes. Each to:
 Monitor the
workspace except
health and  Manage related
the workspace at
status of related projects to obtain
the highest level,
projects and benefits not
known as the root
programs. available from
workspace, can
 Facilitate managing them
have additional child
multi-year individually.
workspaces and
projects with custom budget and  Break-up a very
data sets and resource large, long
security. You can planning for duration project
customize your projects in the into smaller,
workspace hierarchy portfolio. more
with as many  Track the manageable
workspaces as respective projects that are
necessary to suit the projects against managed and
needs of your high-level scheduled
organization. metrics based collectively.
Workspaces are
on measures  Provide
mostly aligned execution level
used to:
with the grouping and
 Store dictionary business tracking of
items that can strategy. projects.
be used in
 Ensure the right  Ensure projects
projects,
projects or are executed
portfolios,
programs are correctly.
programs, ideas,
executed.
and child
workspaces.
 Specify default
configuration
settings for each
object in the
workspace.
 Manage user
groups,
permission sets,
and security.
121
What objects can  Projects  Projects Projects

they contain?  Portfolios  Programs
 Programs  Existing
 Ideas portfolios
 Child  A combination of
Workspaces projects,
programs, and
portfolios
Which workspaces  Root workspace Projects, programs, Projects in a
can the objects represents the and portfolios in a program must belong
belong to? overall portfolio must to the same
organization. belong to the same workspace as the
 Production and workspace as the program or a child
Non-Production portfolio or a child workspace.
workspaces workspace.
belong to root
workspace.
 All other child
workspaces can
either belong to
production or
non-production
workspaces.
How are the objects Projects, portfolios, Projects are added Projects can be
added? programs, ideas, to portfolios using added to programs
and child filters, which can be manually or by using
workspaces can be set to refresh filters.
added to any manually or
workspace that is automatically.
created at the Programs can be
production or added to portfolios
non-production either manually or
level. by using filters.
Existing portfolios
are added to
portfolios manually.
Can an object Projects, portfolios, Projects, programs, A project can belong
belong to more than programs, ideas, and portfolios can to multiple programs
one workspace, and child belong to more than at a time.
portfolio, or workspaces can one portfolio at a
program? only belong to one time.
workspace at a time.
122
Pages
Who can view? Workspaces can be Portfolios can be Programs can be

accessed by any accessed by any accessed by any
user with user with user with permission.
permission. permission. A user
with access to a
project or program
within the portfolio
can view the project
or program data.
Pages
Pages contain data relating to an object. Use a page to create, manage, and perform functions
specific to that object.
WBS
Create a WBS to represent a hierarchical arrangement of work for a project. In scope
management, the WBS typically represents how the product represented in the PBS is to be
built. The WBS is always sorted hierarchically.
WBS Overview
A WBS, or work breakdown structure, is a hierarchical arrangement of work activities that
divides a project into discrete levels, phases, or layers. The WBS is structured in levels of work
detail, beginning with the deliverable and separated into identifiable work elements.
Create a WBS
Create a work breakdown structure (WBS) to define a hierarchical arrangement of work.
To create a WBS:
1) Add a WBS
 Add a WBS (on page 124)
 Add a WBS from a Template or Other Project (on page 124)
 Create a WBS by Import (on page 125)
 WBS Fields (on page 126)
2) Assign a Manager to a WBS (on page 128)
3) Add a File in a Files Detail Window (on page 128)
4) Copy and Paste a WBS Node (on page 129)
123
Add a WBS
Add a work breakdown structure (WBS) to represent a hierarchical arrangement of work. You
can create sibling WBSs to represent WBSs that are hierarchically equal, or child WBSs to
represent WBSs that are subordinate to other WBSs.
The WBS structure is pre-populated with one root node that is the name of the project. It cannot
be deleted. The root WBS can only have child nodes.
Each level in the WBS hierarchy is separated by a period. When entering a new WBS node, the
parent hierarchy is automatically prefixed, and the current node is incremented with the next
number in the sequence. For example, a new sibling of WBS 1.1 will be automatically named
WBS 1.2, and a child will automatically be named WBS 1.1.1. These values can be changed at
any time. When updating a WBS Code or Name field, only the current level needs to be entered.
To add a WBS:
1) Navigate to the WBS page (see page 437).
2) On the WBS page, select a WBS row.
3) To add a sibling WBS node, select  Add or select the  Context menu, and then select
Add Sibling WBS. To add a child WBS node, select the  Context menu, and then select
Add Child WBS.
The new WBS node will automatically be assigned a name based on its sequence in the
WBS, but it can be changed at any time.
4) All changes made to this page are saved automatically.
Tips
 To add a WBS from a project template or project, select a WBS row, select the  Context
menu, and then select Add WBS from project. Use the Add WBS from Projects dialog
box to select a WBS node and the specific activity data that you want to copy. The new
WBSs are added as children of the selected row.
 To make an existing WBS node a child of the node above it, select the  Context menu,
and then select Move Right. Select Move Left to change a child node to a sibling node. The
name of the node is automatically updated based on its new sequence in the WBS.
 Primavera Cloud supports WBS hierarchies up to 50 levels.
Add a WBS from a Template or Other Project

If your organization uses templates or a standardized structure across projects, you can save
time when adding WBSs by copying them from a project template or another project in your
workspace or parent workspaces. You can choose objects within the WBS that you would like to
copy into your project, including activities, relationships, project-level codes, workspace-level
codes, configured fields, and assignments. The chosen WBS and any child WBSs are copied as
children of the WBS you selected on the page.
You can perform this task from the project Activities page or WBS page. To do so, the page
must be grouped by WBS. You must have the required security privileges to add a WBS from a
template or other project.
124
Pages
To add a WBS from a template or other project:

2) In the table, select a WBS row, select the  Context menu, and then select Add WBS from
Project.
3) In the Add WBS from Projects dialog box, in the Filter By field, filter the display of WBSs
by templates or projects.
4) Expand the hierarchy of project templates or projects, and then select a WBS.
5) Select Show Activity Details to view a list of activities associated with the selected WBS.
6) Select Add WBS to add the selected WBS immediately, or select Next to choose the items
you would like to copy, and then select Add WBS.
Create a WBS by Import

Creating a WBS using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside system which
can save you time from manual entry.
To create a WBS:
1) Download an Import Template for Importing a WBS (on page 125)
2) Import a WBS from Microsoft Excel (on page 125)
Download an Import Template for Importing a WBS
Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing a WBS and related data, such as
WBS codes and configured fields.
2) Select Actions , select Download Import Template, and then select one of the following:
 Empty Template: Use this template to create data.
 Template with Data: Use this template to update the data that exists in the table.
Tips
 The top two rows of the worksheet are required when importing a WBS from a spreadsheet.
You can delete unused columns, but do not change the data in these rows.
Import a WBS from Microsoft Excel
You can import a WBS and WBS data into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx)
file. After downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update a WBS in
the spreadsheet. The import will fail if there are any invalid values in the spreadsheet. You can
You must have sufficient privileges to perform this task.
To import a WBS from Microsoft Excel:
125

2) On the WBS page, select the Actions  menu, and then select Import.
3) In the Import WBS dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
WBS Fields
Depending on your settings, the following fields might appear on the page as table columns,
spreadsheet rows, or in detail windows. Fields that are generic across the application, such as
Name, may not be included here.
General
Added By
The username of the user that added the item.
Completed Activities
Total number of Completed activities for the WBS element in the current schedule. The
number includes all activities which are part of any child WBS.
Current BL Completed Activities
Total number of activities associated with the WBS in the current baseline. The number
includes all activities which are part of any child WBS.
Current BL In Progress Activities
Total number of in progress activities associated with the current baseline. The number
Current BL Not Started Activities
Total number of not started activities associated with the WBS in the current baseline. The
Current BL Total Activities
The total number of activities associated with the WBS in the current baseline. The number
Date Added
The date the activity was added.
Date Last Modified
The date when the activity was last modified.
Description
A brief description of the activity.
In Progress Activities
The total number of in progress activities associated with the WBS in the current schedule.
The number includes all activities which are part of any child WBS.
Last Modified By
126
Pages
The last user who modified the activity.

Manager
The user name of the user set as the manager or contact for the WBS. The user who created
the WBS is set as the owner by default.
Not Started Activities
The total number of not started activities associated with the WBS in the current schedule.
The number includes all activities which are part of any child WBS.
Original BL Completed Activities
The total number of completed activities under the WBS in the original baseline. The number
Original BL In Progress Activities
The total number of in progress activities under the WBS in the original baseline. The
Original BL Not Started Activities
The total number of not started activities under the WBS in the original baseline. The number
Original BL Total Activities
The total number of activities under the WBS in the original baseline. The number includes
all activities which are part of any child WBS.
Supplementary BL Completed Activities
The total number of completed activities under the WBS in the supplementary baseline. The
Supplementary BL In Progress Activities
The total number of in progress activities under the WBS in the supplementary baseline. The
Supplementary BL Not Started Activities
The total number of not started activities under the WBS in the supplementary baseline. The
Supplementary BL Total Activities
The total number of activities under the WBS in the supplementary baseline. The number
Total Activities
The total number of activities under the WBS in the current schedule. The total number
127
Assign a Manager to a WBS

Assign managers to WBS elements to identify the project manager or person responsible for
managing the WBS.
The person who created the project is automatically assigned as the manager. The person who
is assigned to a parent WBS node is automatically assigned as the manager to child WBS
nodes.
To assign a manager to a WBS:
2) In the table, select a WBS, and then select the General detail window.
3) In the Manager field, select a manager.
Add a File in a Files Detail Window

Use the Files detail window to add relevant files that support your data. For example, you might
add architectural drawings, pictures, or product specifications to activities on the Activities page.
The following objects support the Files detail window:
 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
 Scope Assignments
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 Task Constraints
 WBSs
 Work Packages
To add a file in a Files detail window:
1) Navigate to a page whose object supports files.
2) In the table, select an object row, and then select the Files detail window.
128
Pages
Note: A screen reader will read the Files detail window as File
Attachments.
3) In the Files detail window, select  Add.

4) In the Add File dialog box, in the Select Folder section, select a folder in the project library.
5) In the File field, select  Browse, and then select one or more files.
6) Select Upload.
Tips
 Use the projects inventory panel to add files at the project level. This enables you to link a
file to one or more objects in the project, such as activities, WBSs, or risks.
 Files that you add in the Files detail window can also be accessed from the project File List
page.
 Built-in virus scanning functionality automatically scans your files during upload and check in.
If an issue is detected with a file, you are notified and the contents of the file are deleted from
the database. You can upload another version of the file that is not corrupted. You can't
preview a file until virus scanning is completed and you refresh the page.
Copy and Paste a WBS Node

You can save time when building the work breakdown structure by copying existing WBS nodes.
Copy one or more nodes to duplicate their hierarchical structure. You can also copy all of the
activities assigned to the selected WBS and their associated activity data. This is useful if your
project repeats the same type of work, such as constructing each floor of a building.
If you include activities in the copied WBS nodes, you can configure the renumbering options for
the activity IDs that are copied. If the pattern you choose results in duplicate activity IDs, you will
be prompted to enter a new activity ID for each conflicting activity.
To copy and paste WBS nodes:
2) In the table, select one or more WBS nodes, select the  Context menu, and then select
Copy.
3) Select the row in the table where you want to paste the node, select the  Context menu,
and then select Paste.
4) In the Paste WBS Options dialog box, select Include Activities if you want to also copy the
activities in the selected nodes. Choose what activity data you want to copy.
5) (If Include Activities is selected) In the Renumbering Options section, in the Renumber
Activity IDs list, select one of the following options, and then configure the option's settings:
 Increment Activity ID based on selected activities: Enter a value that each pasted
activity will be incremented by.
129
Each pasted activity ID is incremented with an ID that begins after the largest existing ID
with a matching prefix. For example, in a project with activity IDs A10, A30, and B50,
copying all three activities and pasting them with an increment value of 10 will result in
new activities with IDs A40, A50, and B60 because A30 and B50 were the largest existing
IDs with matching prefixes.
 Auto-number: Enter a prefix value, starting number, and increment value. The pasted
activities will be numbered in the order that the copied activities appeared in the table.
copying all three activities and pasting them with a prefix value of A, starting number of 1,
and increment value of 1 will result in new activities with IDs A31, A32, and A33 because
A30 was the largest existing ID with a matching prefix.
 Replace beginning characters: Enter the number of characters to replace starting from
the beginning of the ID, and then enter the value that will replace the characters.
 For example, in a project with activity IDs A10, A30, and B50, copying all three activities
and pasting them with the first character replaced by the letter C will result in new
activities with IDs C10, C30, and C50.
6) Select Paste.
Tips
 Your security privileges control which activity data objects you can copy over to new
activities.
 This feature only applies to the data in the current schedule.
Milestone Summary
Selecting the Milestone Summary page from the sidebar will redirect you to the program-level
Activities page, where the Program Milestones view will be automatically applied to the page.
You can use this view to monitor the project milestones and track the high-level progress of
projects in your program.
See Program Milestones Overview (on page 198) for more information.
Activities
Use the Activities page to create, schedule, and monitor the activities required to complete your
project deliverables. You can also open this page in the context of a program to manage the
activities assigned to the projects within the program.
130
Pages
Activities Overview
During the project planning process, you define the activities that must be completed to
accomplish your project's objectives. Activities typically have durations, resource or role
requirements, and logical relationships with other project activities. Unit and cost values may be
defined at the activity level or on individual resource and role assignments. Milestone activities
have no duration or assignments, but they do support activity-level cost values.
Use the Activities page to manage all project activities and their associated details. This includes
all general information, activity status, resource assignments, risks, and other details. At the
program level, manage the activities for the projects within the program.
Working With the Activities Page

The Activities page enables you to manage your project schedule using a variety of tools. In
addition to the standard view settings (see "Configure View Settings" on page 35) available
across Oracle Primavera Cloud, the Activities page offers several enhanced interface options.
Item Description
Activities Table: Create activities to define the work to be done on your
1 project. Add dates, durations, units, costs, and relationships, then run the
scheduler to sequence the activities along a timeline.
131
Item Description
Column Options: You can modify column options (see "Configure the
Table from the List Page" on page 133) directly from the Activities table
without opening the view settings. From the menu, sort, align, group by, hide,
pin, adjust to fit the content in the column, rename a column, and format
column and row.
2
You can also rename string field values in the table using find and replace
(see "Use Find and Replace on the List Page" on page 134). Search for a
string in a column and replace a single instance or all instances with a new
string. Find and replace enables you to rename many values at the same time,
such as activity names, code values, or configured field values.
Layout Menu: Toggle between three layout options depending on your project
management needs:
 Grid: The Activities table extends the full width of the page, enabling you to
display a large number of columns of activity data.
 Gantt: The Gantt chart is synchronized with the Activities table to show
your activities as horizontal bars along a timescale. With the Gantt view
3 enabled, use the Progress Spotlight to highlight activities that fall within a
specific update period.
 Activity Network: Activity tiles are grouped by their WBS nodes, providing
a high-level look at your activities, their most important details, and the
relationships between them.
You can also use the Layout menu to toggle between activity details and
project usage tools in the form of resource and role histograms.
Detail Windows: Modify details for the selected activity, including dates,
durations, units, costs, resource assignments, associated files, risks, tasks, and
4 codes. View the activity usage histogram for a time-phased view of your activity
usage. View resource and role usage across your project's timeline using
histograms and data spreadsheets.
Save: Changes made on the Activities page are saved automatically.
Undo and Redo: Revert certain actions or fields to a previous value.
Schedule Health Score: Evaluate the quality of your project schedule using
predefined metrics. For more information on this and other tools, see Activities
Page Tools (on page 173).
5 Other tools, such as Run Report, Share this page, and Toggle Full Screen,
are available on pages throughout the application.
In the page toolbar, select the Refresh button to reload the data on the page
without reloading the entire page, which may take longer. This button is also
useful when multiple users are modifying the same project and you want to see
the most current data.
132
Pages
Configure the Table from the List Page

You can add, sort, align, group by, hide, pin, adjust to fit the content in columns, and rename a
column directly from the list table without opening the view settings. Each column in the table
supports a menu with several options that vary depending on the column. Pinned columns are
located in a section at the beginning of the table. They do not move when the rest of the table is
scrolled horizontally. This makes it easier to see the most important fields, such as Name or ID,
when a large number of columns are displayed.
Columns that support grouping can be grouped from the menu. Additional grouping options,
such as grouping interval and sort order, or codes, for example, must be modified from the
Manage Views panel. All of the column configured header options, except for the adjust to fit
and alignment options, will be saved to the Named View currently set for the page.
The column menu also supports find and replace functionality, which is described in Use Find
and Replace on the List Page (on page 134).
You can configure a list table from the following pages:
 Activities
 Assignments
To configure a table from a list page:
1) Navigate to the list page table.
2) To add columns to the table:
a. Select the  Open Column Selector icon.
b. In the column selector dropdown, beside a column name, select  View to add or 
Hide to remove the column from the table.
3) To configure an existing column, right-click a column title or select  Open Column Menu,
and then select any of the following:
 Sort: Hover over the Sort option and then select to sort the column by Ascending or
Descending. Use Ctrl + click to add the column to an existing sort sequence.
 Align Column: Hover over Align Column and then select from Align Left, Align
Center, and Align Right to determine the alignment of the content in your columns.
 Group By Column: Group activities by the selected column. You can also group by
multiple columns or turn off a column grouping. This option is only available for fields that
support grouping.
 Hide Column: Remove the column from the table.
 Adjust to fit content: Expand or shrink the width of the column to fit its contents. You
can also double-click a column's right edge to adjust it.
 Find and Replace: Displays the Find and Replace popover. If the column is read-only,
then only Find is displayed. This option is only available for string fields.
 Pin Column: Adds the column to the pinned section of the Activities table. You can also
click and drag columns between the pinned and unpinned sections.
133
 Rename Column: Displays the Rename a Column popover. If a new column name is
not entered in the Rename Column popover and Rename is selected, the column name
field will be blank. After a column is renamed, the custom name can be reset to the
original name by selecting Reset in the Rename Column popover. Any changes to the
column name are saved to your current view.
Tips
 Select  Settings to manage all page view settings. See Configure View Settings (on
page 35) for more information.
 The Name and ID fields can be unpinned, but they cannot be hidden.
 Click and drag a column title to change the column order.
Use Find and Replace on the List Page

The Find and Replace tool enables you to perform a search in a table column and optionally
replace the highlighted result with a new value. You can also replace all instances of the result
at the same time. This tool is useful if you want to search for a term in a column, replace a value
in a single cell, or replace many values at the same time, such as names, code values, or
configured field values.
You can use the Find and Replace tool to search any field for a specific value, but you cannot
replace the results in fields that are read-only. For read-only fields, the popover becomes the
Find tool.
You can use Find and Replace on the following pages:
 Activities
 Assignments
To use Find and Replace:
2) In the table, right-click a column title or select  Open Column Menu.
3) In the column menu, select Find and Replace. If the column is read-only, the  Find icon is
displayed.
4) In the popover menu for the Find and Replace tool, do the following:
a. Find:
1. In the Find what? field, enter your search term.
2. (Optional) In the Options section, select search options:
 Match whole word: When enabled, only returns whole words that match the
search term. If the search term is part of a larger string, it will not be included in
the results.
 Match case: When enabled, results must match the exact case of the search
term.
3. Select Find or press Enter to search for the entered value.
134
Pages
Note: The Find button is only displayed in the Find popover.
b. Replace:
1. In the Replace with field, enter the string that will replace the search term.
2. Select Replace to replace the currently selected result, or select Replace All to
replace all results.
Tips
 You can also access Find and Replace using the following keyboard shortcuts:
 In the table, select a field, and then press Ctrl + F to open the Find popover. Press Ctrl +
H or Ctrl + R to open the Find and Replace popover.
 Enter a search value in the Find what? field. Press Enter or the Up and Down Arrows
to highlight the next result.
 Enter a search value in the Replace field. Press Alt + R to replace the currently selected
result. Press Ctrl + Alt + Enter to replace all results.
 Press Esc to close the tool.
Filter Activities by Configured Fields and Codes

Each of your activities can contain configured fields and codes. You can view and edit the
specific fields and codes associated with an activity in the My Activities window.
To view and edit configured fields and codes:
1) In the header, select your username, and then select My Activities.
2) Select Grid to enter the Grid view or List to enter the List view.
3) In the activity list, select an activity.
4) In the Codes and Configured Fields panel, view and update the values for previously
configured codes and fields.
5) Select Save.
Auto Reorganize Activities

Use the Auto Reorganize feature on the Activities page to automatically organize new and
modified activities according to the page's current grouping and sorting settings.
By default, new and modified activities remain in the table on the row they were added until you
refresh the page, schedule the project, or modify the view settings. When enabled, Auto
Reorganize groups and sorts the activity as soon as the value in the grouped or sorted field is
entered. This applies to the main table as well as tables in the detail windows.
You can enable or disable Auto Reorganize from the Actions menu. The setting is saved per
user and is disabled by default.
To enable or disable Auto Reorganize functionality:
1) Navigate to the Activities page (see page 437).
135
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Auto Reorganize.
Note: A  check mark icon next to the menu item indicates that Auto
Reorganize is enabled. If there is no icon, the feature is disabled.
Tips
 You can also toggle Auto Reorganize on and off by pressing Shift + F12.
View the Activities Grid

The Grid view on the Activities page provides the largest possible view of the Activities table.
Use the Grid view to display a large number of columns of activities data. Save multiple views of
column, grouping, and filtering configurations depending on your needs. For example, you might
want separate views to focus on activity scheduling, resource assignments, configured fields, or
associated tasks.
To view the Activities grid:
2) On the Layout  menu, select the  Grid icon.
Tips
 The view option you select on the Layout  menu can be saved as part of a view.
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the Activities Grid displays indicators for the Start
and Finish dates of activities that have actual dates or assigned constraints. When the As
Late As Possible constraint is selected, the constraint indicator is not displayed. See
Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
View the Activities Gantt Chart

The Gantt chart on the Activities page provides a graphical representation of the duration and
sequence of activities across a timeline. When you view the Gantt chart, the Activities page is
divided into two regions, one displaying the Gantt chart data in a table, and the other displaying
the Gantt chart data graphically with a resizable divider between the two regions. The table and
chart regions share the same data and selection model, supporting and synchronizing scrolling,
and expanding and collapsing of rows between the two regions.
In a project, the Gantt chart shows a line for the data date chosen during scheduling. In a
program, the earliest project data date is shown. It is recommended that you schedule all
projects in a program using the same data date so they are aligned along the Gantt chart
timeline.
Hover your cursor over activity bars to view tooltip information about each activity. Hover your
cursor over relationship lines to view tooltip information about predecessor and successor
activities.
To view the Gantt chart:
136
Pages
2) On the Layout  menu, select the  Gantt icon.

3) In the Gantt chart, select  Gantt Settings to toggle a variety of Gantt chart settings without
opening the Manage Views panel.
Tips
 You can edit a variety of activity details directly from the Gantt chart. See Modify Activity
Details in the Gantt Chart (on page 170) for more information.
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the activities Gantt chart displays indicators for
the Start and Finish dates of activities that have actual dates or assigned constraints. When
the As Late As Possible constraint is selected, the constraint indicator is not displayed. See
Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
 Double-click an activity row in the Gantt chart to move the timescale display to the beginning
of that activity.
 The Gantt chart is printed when you print the Activities page. To display colors and ensure
that your Gantt charts print correctly, enable the background graphics and colors options in
your browser's print settings. See Print a Page to PDF (on page 32) for more details on
printing.
View the Progress Spotlight

The Progress Spotlight tool is useful when you are progressing your activities and need to know
which activities fall within your update period. When enabled, the spotlight highlights a time
period in the Gantt chart. Any activity whose start or finish date falls within the period is also
highlighted in the table.
The default spotlight interval is determined by the current timescale interval. For example, if the
timescale is set to weekly intervals, the default spotlight interval highlights one week from the
data date. If a monthly timescale is selected, then the spotlight highlights one month from the
data date. You can drag the edge of the spotlight to highlight any period of time after the data
date. Disable and then enable the spotlight to view the default interval.
To view the Progress Spotlight:
2) On the Layout  menu, select the  Gantt icon, and then select  Gantt Settings.
3) On the menu, select Progress Spotlight.
4) Click and drag the edge of the spotlight to highlight a custom time period.
Tips
 You can also enable the spotlight by selecting the data date and dragging it to a future date.
Turn off the spotlight by dragging it back to the data date.
 If the spotlight is enabled while scheduling your project, the spotlight start date will change to
reflect the new data date and the spotlight end date will remain the same. If the new data
date is later than the spotlight end date, the spotlight is turned off.
 Your Progress Spotlight configuration can be saved as part of a view.
137
View the Activity Network

The Activity Network on the Activities page is a view that displays a full diagram of the activities
and relationships in your project, organized by their WBS nodes. Use the Activity Network to
view activity and relationship information, track the sequence of activities in your project, and
focus on driving relationships and critical activities. Select individual WBS nodes to break down
the Activity Network into smaller segments.
To view the Activity Network:
2) On the Layout  menu, select the  Activity Network View icon.
3) In the Activity Network, select an activity or relationship line to view its details. Select the
project name or an individual WBS node in the table to view its associated activities in the
view.
4) Use the following tools to configure the Activity Network display:
  Zoom In: Zoom in on the displayed sequence of activities.
  Zoom Out: Zoom out of the displayed sequence of activities.
  Zoom to Fit: Reset the display to the default magnification.
  Show Driving Relationships: Toggle the display of non-driving relationship lines.
  Show Critical Activities: Dim non-critical activities and relationship lines so critical
activities are displayed more prominently.
Tips
 Select  Settings to configure the Activity Network settings.
 The following indicators are used in the Activity Network view:
 Critical activities and relationships are represented using red tiles, red borders, and red
lines. Activity tiles on the critical path display an exclamation point icon.
 Non-critical activity tiles are white, and non-critical relationship lines are black.
 Solid lines indicate a driving relationship, while dotted lines indicate a non-driving
relationship.
 Completed activities display a completed icon in their tiles. Start or finish milestones
display a diamond in their tiles.
 Select  Download beneath the diagram to download the displayed sequence as a .png
file.
 You can temporarily add a filtered activity to the current view by selecting the activity name
in the Activity Network. A tooltip provides more information about the filtered activity when
you place your cursor above the activity name. Refreshing the page reapplies all current
filters and removes filtered activities from view.
138
Pages
Create an Activity
Create activities to define the work to be accomplished for a project.
To create an activity, do any of the following:
 Add an Activity (on page 139)
 Create an Activity by Import (on page 140)
 Cut or Copy and Paste an Activity (on page 141)
Add an Activity
Use the Activities page to add activities to a project. New activities are added with the default
values configured in the project settings.
To add an activity to a project:
2) You can add an activity using any of the following methods:
 On the toolbar, select  Add. A new activity is added with the Name field in edit mode. If
the Name column is not displayed, the first column will be in edit mode.
 Press Insert. A new activity is added with the previously selected field selected in the
new row. This makes it easy to quickly modify a specific field for each new activity.
 In the table, right-click a selection of one or more activities or select the  Context menu
next to an activity in your selection, and then select Add Above or Add Below. This is
useful if you want to add activities to a specific group.
Notes:
 If one or more activities are selected, an equal number of new
activities are added. If no activities are selected, one new activity is
added.
 At the program level, the Add button is only available when the page
is grouped by Project or WBS.
 Copy and paste existing activities. See Cut or Copy and Paste an Activity (on page
141) for more information.
3) For each new activity, enter Name and ID values.
Tips
 An option (see "Configure Activity Defaults for a Project" on page 420) in the project
settings controls the numbering of new activity IDs. When this setting is disabled, new
activity IDs follow the activity auto numbering rules set in the project settings. When this
setting is enabled, new activity IDs are numbered based on the following:
 New IDs are given the same prefix as the activities selected when the new activities are
added.
139
 The starting number for new IDs begins after the largest existing ID with a matching
prefix.
 The increment value of new IDs is the value set for activities in the project auto
numbering settings.
For example, in a project with activity IDs A10, A30, and B50, and an auto numbering
increment value of 10, a new activity added under A10 will result in an activity ID of A40
because A30 was the largest existing ID with a matching prefix. If no activity is selected, the
new ID will follow the auto numbering rules. The setting is disabled by default.
 You cannot add an activity in an open baseline.
Create an Activity by Import

Creating activities using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside system which
can save you time from manual entry.
To create or update an activity:
1) Download an Import Template for Importing Activities (on page 140)
2) Import Activities from Microsoft Excel (on page 140)
Download an Import Template for Importing Activities
Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing activities and related data, such as
activity relationships and resource assignments.
1) Navigate to the project Activities page (see page 437).
2) Select Actions , select Download Import Template, and then select one of the following:
 Empty Template: Use this template to create data.
 Template with Data: Use this template to update the data that exists in the table.
Tips
 Import functionality is only available for the current schedule.
 The top two rows of the worksheet are required when importing activities from a
spreadsheet. You can delete unused columns, but do not change the data in these rows.
Import Activities from Microsoft Excel
You can import activities and activity data into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or
.xlsx) file. After downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update
activities in the spreadsheet. The import will fail if there are any invalid values in the
spreadsheet. You can download the spreadsheet file to view and fix the errors indicated in the
error column at the end of each worksheet, and then import the file again.
To import activities from Microsoft Excel:
140
Pages
2) On the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then select Import.
3) In the Import Activities dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Tips
 Import functionality is only available for the current schedule.
Cut or Copy and Paste an Activity

To save time entering activity data, the Activities table supports cut, copy, and paste operations.
The cut operation enables you to easily move activities around in the table. This is useful for
moving activities from one group to another, such as WBS or Code, or across projects in a
program. Use the copy operation to duplicate activities in the table. You can cut or copy one or
more activities at a time.
When you copy and paste activities, you can select the types of data to copy over to the new
activities. You can also choose to renumber IDs of the pasted activities based on a configurable
pattern. If the pattern you choose results in duplicate activity IDs, you will be prompted to enter a
new activity ID for each conflicting activity. In a program, if you are cut or copy and pasting
activities across projects, shared data that does not exist in the target project or its workspace
will not be copied with the activity.
Note: Activity and assignment costs may be included with your copied
activities. It is recommended that you recalculate activity costs (on
page 201) after copying activities to ensure all costs are up to date.
To cut or copy and paste activities:

2) (Programs only) Group the Activities table (see "Configure Grouping Options" on page
43) by WBS or Project.
3) In the table, select one or more activity rows, select the  Context menu, and then select
Cut or Copy.
4) Select the row in the table where you want to paste the activity, select the  Context menu,
and then select Paste.
If you cut activities, they will be pasted immediately. If you copied activities, the Paste
Activity Options dialog box will open.
5) In the Paste Activity Options dialog box, select the activity data to be pasted.
6) In the Renumbering Options section, in the Renumber Activity IDs list, select one of the
following options, and then configure the option's settings:
 Increment Activity ID based on selected activities: Enter a value that each pasted
activity will be incremented by.
copying all three activities and pasting them with an increment value of 10 will result in
new activities with IDs A40, A50, and B60 because A30 and B50 were the largest existing
IDs with matching prefixes.
141
 Auto-number: Enter a prefix value, starting number, and increment value. The pasted
activities will be numbered in the order that the copied activities appeared in the table.
copying all three activities and pasting them with a prefix value of A, starting number of 1,
and increment value of 1 will result in new activities with IDs A31, A32, and A33 because
A30 was the largest existing ID with a matching prefix.
For example, in a project with activity IDs A10, A30, and B50, copying all three activities
and pasting them with the first character replaced by the letter C will result in new
activities with IDs C10, C30, and C50.
7) Select Paste.
Tips
 Copy functionality is disabled while in a baseline.
 When pasting activities across group bands in a view, the new activity will assume the
attribute of the group band into which it is pasted. For example, if an activity is copied or cut
from a WBS1 grouping and pasted in a WBS2 grouping, the WBS attribute of the new
activity will be changed to WBS2.
 To enter the same value in more than one field, select multiple fields in the same column,
select the  Context menu, and then select Fill Down. Every field is filled with the first
selected field value.
 Your security privileges control which attributes you can copy over to new activities.
 You can copy and paste up to 500 activities at the same time.
 When you copy and paste an activity with an assignment to a different project with different
rates defined for the same resource or role, you must recalculate costs to update the rates
for the assignment.
Modify Activity Details

Activities represent the work to be performed in a project's schedule, but they also can be
associated with many of the other objects that belong to the project, including files, resources,
risks, roles, scope assignments, tasks, and work packages. In addition to the standard details
that characterize an activity, you can modify details for the objects connected to the activity.
142
Pages
Note: For Level of Effort and WBS Summary type activities, weather
risks are ignored and not included in the risk analysis. The schedule
impact of a risk mapped to Level of Effort and WBS Summary type
activities is ignored and not included in the risk analysis. However, the
cost impact of weather risks and risks with a schedule impact is still
included in the risk analysis for Level of Effort and WBS Summary type
activities.
Activity details can be modified in a variety of areas on the Activities page, including the Activity
table, detail windows, the Actions menu, the Gantt chart, and the context menu.
The following is a comprehensive list, grouped by subject area, of editable activity details. Many
of the topics below are optional depending on your needs. Some of the topics can also be found
in the Resource-Loaded Scheduling Overview (on page 209) procedure, which contains all of
the necessary topics for using resource units and costs on the activities in your schedule.
General
 Assign an Owner to an Activity (on page 144)
 Assign an Activity to a WBS (on page 145)
 Assign a Calendar to an Activity (on page 145)
 Assign an Activity Type to an Activity (on page 146)
 Assign a Duration Type to an Activity (on page 147)
 Assign a Percent Complete Type to Activity (on page 147)
Status
 Enter Activity Status Information (on page 148)
 Enter Activity Duration Information (on page 148)
 Enter Activity Units (on page 149)
 Enter Activity Costs (on page 150)
 Add a Constraint to an Activity (on page 151)
Resource Assignments
 Assign a Role to an Activity (on page 152)
 Staff a Role Assignment (on page 154)
 Assign a Resource to an Activity (on page 155)
 Replace a Resource Assigned to an Activity (on page 157)
 Configure Assignment Calculation Options (on page 158)
 Assign a Curve to a Resource or a Role Assignment (on page 159)
Files
 Add a File in a Files Detail Window (on page 128)
 Link a File to an Object (on page 161)
Relationships
 Add a Relationship to an Activity (on page 162)
 View Relationships Using Trace Logic (on page 164)
143
Risks
 Assign a Risk to an Activity (on page 165)
 Apply Activity Uncertainty (on page 165)
Tasks
 Add a Task to an Activity (on page 167)
Scope
 Associating Activities with Scope Assignments and Work Packages for Scope
Management Overview (on page 168)
 Link a Work Package to an Activity (on page 168)
 Link a Scope Assignment to an Activity (on page 169)
Codes
 Assign a Code to an Activity (on page 170)
Gantt Chart
 Modify Activity Details in the Gantt Chart (on page 170)
Renumber Activity IDs
 Renumber Activity IDs (on page 171)
Activity Deletion
 Dissolve an Activity (on page 172)
 Delete an Activity (on page 173)
Assign an Owner to an Activity

You can assign an owner to an activity to designate the user responsible for the activity.
The user who created the activity is automatically assigned as the owner.
To assign an owner to an activity:
2) In the table, select the activity.
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the General detail window.
4) In the Owner field, select a user to designate as the activity owner.
Tips
 If your project is configured to enable status updates by activity owners, users who are
assigned as owners to in-progress activities can use the My Activities page to update the
status of activities.
144
Pages
Assign an Activity to a WBS

All activities must be assigned to a WBS. Assign activities to a WBS to group work by level,
phase, or layer. In scope management, you cannot assign activities to work packages or scope
assignments unless the activity is assigned to the WBS that contains the component. If a
specific WBS node is not selected when an activity is created, the activity is assigned to the
project-level WBS node by default.
To assign an activity to a WBS:
4) In the WBS Name field, select a WBS.
Tips
 From the Activities page or WBS page, you can copy WBS nodes from a project template
or another project to your current project. See Add a WBS from a Template or Other
Project (on page 124) for more information.
 On the Program Activities page, you can assign an activity to a WBS in a different project.
This action will move the activity and its data to the destination project.
 An alternative method of assigning activities to a WBS is by applying a view to the page that
groups activities by WBS and entering activity data under the appropriate grouping. All
activities entered under a WBS grouping are automatically assigned to the WBS.
Assign a Calendar to an Activity

The activity calendar controls the available workdays and daily work hours for an individual
activity. New activities are assigned the default project calendar, but an activity's calendar can
be changed to suit the needs of the activity.
If an activity's type is Resource Dependent, the activity's dates are calculated using the
calendars associated with each resource or role assignment. Role assignments staffed with a
resource use the resource's calendar. If the activity is any other activity type, or if there are no
resource or role assignments on the activity, its dates are calculated using its assigned calendar.
To assign a calendar to an activity:
4) In the Calendar field, select a calendar to designate as the activity calendar.
level.
145
Tips
 In the Select Calendar dialog box, select Manage Calendars to open the workspace or
project Calendars dictionary page, depending on the value selected in the Filter By list.
Assign an Activity Type to an Activity

An activity's type determines which assigned calendar will be used to calculate its start and
finish dates during the scheduling process. Calendars specify valid working periods and
nonworking periods such as weekends, holidays, and exception time.
If an activity's type is Resource Dependent, the activity's dates are calculated using the
calendars associated with each resource or role assignment. Role assignments staffed with a
resource use the resource's calendar. If the activity is any other activity type, or if there are no
resource or role assignments on the activity, its dates are calculated using its assigned calendar.
To assign an activity type to an activity:
2) In the table, select an activity.
4) In the Type list, select an activity type:
 Activity Dependent: Indicates the activity will be scheduled based on its calendar, rather
than the calendars of any assigned resources or roles.
 Resource Dependent: Indicates the activity will be scheduled based on the calendars of
its resource and role assignments. Use this type when the activity duration may be
affected by resource availability.
 Level of Effort: Indicates the activity is ongoing with a duration determined by its
dependent activities. The duration is calculated based on the schedule dates of its
predecessors and successors. Administrative and support activities are typically
designated as Level of Effort.
 Start Milestone: Indicates the beginning of an important project phase. Activities of this
type have a duration of zero and no resource assignments.
 Finish Milestone: Indicates the end of an important project phase. Activities of this type
have a duration of zero and no resource assignments.
 WBS Summary: This type of activity comprises a group of activities that share a
common WBS level. The duration is calculated based on its assigned calendar (the
earliest and latest dates summarized from its activities).
Note: WBS Summary type activities cannot have tasks, constraints, or

expected finish dates. These fields will be read-only. If you change an
existing activity type to WBS Summary, data in these fields will be
removed.
Tips
 With a milestone type selected, select Program Milestone to display the milestone in the
Program Milestones (see "Program Milestones Overview" on page 198) view.
146
Pages
Assign a Duration Type to an Activity

Activity duration types determine how remaining duration, units, and units/time are calculated
when an activity with resource assignments is updated.
To assign a duration type to an activity:
4) In the Duration Type list, select an option:
 Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the activity duration or
units are changed. Use this duration type when an activity has fixed resources with fixed
productivity output per time period.
 Fixed Units: The activity units are constant when the duration or resource units per time
are changed. Use this duration type when the total amount of work is fixed, and
increasing the resources can decrease the activity duration.
 Fixed Duration & Units: The duration and units remain constant as the units/time is
changed. Use this duration type when the activity must be completed within a fixed time
period and the total amount of work is fixed.
 Fixed Duration & Units/Time: The activity duration is constant as the units or resource
units per time are changed. Use this duration type when the activity must be completed
within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.
Tips
 Resource or role curves are not supported by activities with the Fixed Units or Fixed
Units/Time duration type. If you choose either of these duration types on an activity with
curves, the curves will be automatically removed from the activity's assignments.
Assign a Percent Complete Type to Activity

The percent complete type determines the way in which the application calculates the percent
complete for an activity. Use the General detail window to assign percent complete types to
activities.
To assign a percent complete type to an activity:
4) In the Percent Complete Type list, select an option:
 Physical: Percent complete is manually entered by a user based on the amount of
physical work completed on the activity.
 Duration: Percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining duration.
 Units: Percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining units.
147
Scope: The percent complete for the activity is derived from the scope percent complete
of the linked scope assignments.
Enter Activity Status Information

Use the Status detail window to designate activities as in progress or completed, update start
and finish dates, and update an activity's expected finish date.
To configure activity status information:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Status detail window.
4) In the Activity Status section, complete the following fields:
 Start: To enter or update the activity's start date, enter a date. To designate the activity
as in progress, select the check box. The start date is now considered the actual start
date, and the activity status is In Progress.
 Finish: To enter the activity's finish date, enter a date. To designate the activity as
completed, select the check box. The finish date is now considered the actual finish date,
and the activity status is Completed. If an activity is marked complete, you cannot
update the activity percent complete or expected finish fields.
 Activity Percent Complete: Enter the percentage of work performed on the activity. If
the activity's percent complete type is Duration, Units, or Scope, updating this field will
also modify the corresponding duration, unit, or scope values. If the type is Physical, the
percent complete can only be modified using this field.
 Expected Finish: Set the date on which you anticipate work on the activity will finish.
Tip
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the Gantt chart and the Activities Table
displays indicators for the Start and Finish dates of activities that have an actual start
date, actual finish date, or assigned constraints. See Configure Activity Date
Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
Enter Activity Duration Information

Activity durations are automatically calculated using the activity start and end dates and the
project calendar. You can also manually enter activity duration information using the Status
detail window.
To configure activity duration information:
4) Set the activity durations by completing the following fields:
 Planned Duration: The expected amount of time required to complete the activity.
148
Pages
 Remaining Duration: The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the
remaining finish date.
 At Completion Duration: The total working time from the activity's current start date to
the current finish date.
Tips
 The Actual Duration is automatically computed and cannot be manually adjusted. It is
calculated as the total working time from the Start date to the current date for in-progress
activities. For completed activities, it is calculated as the total working time from the activity
Start date to the Finish date.
 If the activity's percent complete type is Duration and the activity is in progress, modifying the
duration information will also change the Activity Percent Complete value.
Enter Activity Units

Units entered on an activity indicate the amount of effort that will be required to complete the
work on the activity. Units can be defined at the activity level if you do not plan to assign
resources or roles to your schedule, or you can enter units on individual resource and role
assignments for each activity. If assignments exist on the activity, units entered at the activity
level are distributed among assignments with the same type (Labor or Nonlabor) as the activity
field. Units entered on assignments roll up to activity fields of the same type as the assignment.
In general, the work performed on any activity has a cost. The cost of your activities is
determined by multiplying work units by the rate price of each work unit. Entering units on an
activity or assignment may affect corresponding costs, and entering costs on an activity may
affect its units. For a detailed explanation of unit and cost fields and the rules for entering values
on these fields, see Understanding Activity Units and Costs (on page 212).
To enter activity units:
2) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select an activity in the table.
3) To enter units at the activity level, do either of the following:
 In the table, enter cost, unit, or duration values in the appropriate fields. To add columns
to the view, select the  Open Column Selector icon in the column header or the 
Settings icon in the page toolbar.
 Select the Status detail window. In the header of the Units or Costs column, select the
unit or cost type that you want to edit. To edit actual values, the activity must be In
Progress or Completed. To edit duration values, update the values in the Duration
column of the detail window.
4) To enter units at the assignment level, do the following:
a. Select the Resource Assignments detail window, and then select a resource or role
assignment.
b. Modify cost, unit, duration, or units/time values for the assignment.
149
Tips
 If the activity's percent complete type is Units and the activity is in progress, modifying unit
information will also change the Activity Percent Complete value.
Enter Activity Costs

Activity costs enable project managers and other stakeholders to track the cost of a schedule as
it progresses. Cost tracking is critical for billing and budgeting purposes to ensure that individual
activities and the project as a whole are accurately cost loaded and meeting all cost
requirements.
Depending on your organization's preferences, you may only be entering costs directly on the
activity, or you may be entering costs for individual resource and role assignments. Where
assignments exist, activity field values are distributed among its assignments of the same type
(Labor, Nonlabor, Material) as the activity field. All assignment values roll up to the
corresponding activity fields.
The cost of your activities is determined by multiplying work units by the rate price of each work
unit. The Calculate Costs from Units setting controls the link between corresponding unit and
cost fields. When enabled, costs and units are linked. When disabled, costs and unit values can
be edited independent of each other. This setting can be set for each resource and role
assignment. For a detailed explanation of unit and cost fields and the rules for entering values
on these fields, see Understanding Activity Units and Costs (on page 212).
To enter activity costs:
2) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select an activity in the table.
3) To enter costs at the activity level, do either of the following:
 In the table, enter cost, unit, or duration values in the appropriate fields. To add columns
to the view, select the  Open Column Selector icon in the column header or the 
Settings icon in the page toolbar.
 Select the Status detail window. In the header of the Units or Costs column, select the
unit or cost type that you want to edit. To edit actual values, the activity must be In
Progress or Completed. To edit duration values, update the values in the Duration
column of the detail window.
Note: You must have a Default Price/Unit value greater than 0

configured before you can enter costs on an activity with no resource or
role assignments. This value is set at the project level (see "Configure
Calculation Settings for a Project" on page 424).
4) To enter costs at the assignment level, do the following:

a. Select the Resource Assignments detail window, and then select a resource or role
assignment.
b. Enable or disable the Calculate Costs from Units setting, and then modify cost, unit,
duration, or units/time values.
c. If you want to modify an assignment's Price/Unit value, ensure Rate Source is set to
Override.
150
Pages
Tips
 Editing unit or cost values may cause other cost values to automatically recalculate. If you
change an assignment's Rate Source or Rate Type, or enable its Calculate Cost from
Units setting, you will be prompted to recalculate all costs based on the given units. For
more information on recalculating costs, see Recalculate Costs Overview (on page 199).
Add a Constraint to an Activity

Constraints are used to impose external restrictions on project activities. They are used in the
scheduling process when calculating activity start and finish dates. You can use constraints for
situations where activity relationships are not adequate to provide the logic necessary to
properly schedule an activity. Constraints can also be used for an activity without a natural
predecessor or successor.
You can add up to two constraints to an activity — a primary constraint and a secondary
constraint. After a primary constraint is set on an activity, it determines the list of available
secondary constraints that you can set on the activity.
Note: You cannot set a secondary constraint on an activity if the primary

constraint is Start On, Finish On, Mandatory Start, or Mandatory Finish.
To add constraints to an activity:

4) In the Primary Constraint list, select a primary constraint:
 Start On: Imposes the specific start date you select. The Start On constraint can delay
an activity's early start or move forward an activity's late start to satisfy the constraint
date.
 Start On or Before: Defines the latest date an activity can start. This constraint only
affects late dates and can decrease total float. When calculating a schedule, the
application imposes the start on or before constraint in the backward pass only if the
calculated late start date will be later than the imposed date.
 Start On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can begin. This constraint affects
only early dates. When calculating a schedule, the application imposes the start on or
after constraint in the forward pass only if the calculated early start date will be earlier
than the imposed date.
 Finish On: Imposes the specific finish date you select. The Finish On constraint can
delay an activity's early finish or move forward an activity's late finish to satisfy the
constraint date.
 Finish On or Before: Defines the latest time an activity can finish. The finish on or before
constraint affects only late dates.
151
 Finish On or After: Defines the earliest date an activity can finish. The finish on or after
constraint reduces float to coordinate parallel activities, ensuring that the finish of an
activity is not scheduled before the specified date. It is usually applied to activities with
few predecessors that must finish before the next phase of a project.
 As Late As Possible: Imposes a restriction on an activity with positive float to enable it
to start as late as possible without delaying its successors. When calculating a schedule,
the application sets the activity's early dates as late as possible without affecting
successor activities. This option disables the calendar icon.
 Mandatory Start: Imposes the early and late start dates you select. A mandatory early
start date could affect the late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity
and all early dates for the activities that lead from the constrained activity.
 Mandatory Finish: Imposes the early and late finish dates you select. This constraint
affects the late dates for all activities that lead to the constrained activity and all early
dates for the activities that lead from the constrained activity.
5) In the Primary Constraint Date field, enter a date for the primary constraint.
6) If your primary constraint selection allows for a secondary constraint, do the following to set
a secondary constraint:
a. In the Secondary Constraint list, select a secondary constraint.
b. In the Secondary Constraint Date field, enter a date for the secondary constraint.
Tips
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the Gantt chart and the Activities table display
indicators for the Start and Finish dates of activities that have actual dates or assigned
constraints. When the As Late As Possible constraint is selected, the constraint indicator is
not displayed. See Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
 WBS Summary type activities cannot have tasks, constraints, or expected finish dates.
These fields will be read-only. If you change an existing activity type to WBS Summary, data
in these fields will be removed.
Assign a Role to an Activity

Assign one or more roles to an activity to designate the job titles or skills that are required to
complete the activity. You can assign workspace and project roles to activities. In long-range
planning, it may be advisable to first identify and assign the roles required to work on the activity
and then staff the roles (see "Staff a Role Assignment" on page 154) with the appropriate
project resources at a later time.
If a resource or role is assigned to an activity without existing assignments, and the activity has
unit and cost values, the values in fields of the same type as the new assignment will be
overwritten by the assignment's corresponding values. For example, assigning a nonlabor
resource will overwrite the activity's nonlabor unit and cost values. Depending on its type, an
assigned resource can overwrite labor, nonlabor, or material values. Assigned roles always
overwrite labor values. If a resource staffs a role, the values that are overwritten will depend on
the resource's type.
152
Pages
To assign a role to an activity:

3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Resource
Assignments detail window.
4) In the Role Name column, double-click the empty field.
5) In the Assign Roles dialog box, in the Filter By field, select Workspace to view workspace
roles or select Project to view project roles and workspace roles that have been assigned to
the project level.
Note: If a workspace role has not been assigned to the project level,
assigning it to an activity will make it and any associated resources
available at the project level. The role's workspace availability and rate
details will also be made available at the project level and used on the
assignment. After a workspace role is available at the project level, new
role assignments will always use the role's rate values set for the project.
6) Select a role.
7) To view the role's current allocation for the project, select Show Details.
8) Select Assign.
Tips
 You can assign roles to multiple activities at the same time. Select multiple activities, select
the  Context menu next to a selected activity, hover over Assign, and then select Roles.
 Quickly see the roles assigned to your activities by adding the Role Names or Role IDs
columns to the activity table. Double-click either of the fields to display up to 15 role
assignments for an activity. You can also filter, group, and sort by these fields. If you make
changes to a role's name or ID, or you add or delete role assignments using P6 XML import
or Excel import, changes to the Role Names and Role IDs fields may not be immediately
displayed. Refresh the Activities page to see your changes.
 To delete a role, select the  Context menu next to a role in the Resource Assignments
detail window, and then select Delete. If all labor or nonlabor assignments have been
deleted from an activity, you will be prompted to retain or delete all unit and cost values of
that assignment type. Select Yes to reset all activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values to
0. Select No to retain the activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values. After all material
resources have been removed, all activity material costs will be reset to 0.
 If an activity's type is Resource Dependent, the activity's dates are calculated using the
calendars associated with each resource or role assignment. Role assignments staffed with
a resource use the resource's calendar. If the activity is any other activity type, or if there are
no resource or role assignments on the activity, its dates are calculated using its assigned
calendar.
 Roles are assigned to activities with several configured default options for calculating
assignment costs. For more information on modifying these options, see Configure
Assignment Calculation Options (on page 158).
153
Staff a Role Assignment

Unstaffed roles are roles assigned to activities without an associated resource. This is often
done during the early stages of project planning when the job responsibilities for an activity are
known but not the specific resource who will perform the work. When you are ready to assign
specific resources to activity role assignments, you can staff the role with a resource who has
been associated with that role.
When staffing a role with a resource assignment, you may be prompted to choose which
Units/Time, Rate Source, and Price/Unit values you want to use on the assignment, or it may
occur automatically depending on your preferences. To configure or change these preferences,
see Configure the Assignment Settings Dialog Preference (on page 67).
To staff role assignments:
4) In the Resource Assignments detail window, select the  Context menu for a role, and
then select Staff Role.
5) In the Staff Role dialog box, select a resource, and select Select.
6) If you are prompted to choose which Units/Time, Rate Source, or Price/Unit values to use
on the assignment, make your selections from the options available, and then select Save.
Note: The selected options will use the corresponding resource or role
values set at the project level.
Tips
 You can staff a role with a labor or nonlabor resource. Material resources cannot be
associated with roles.
 To delete an assignment, select the  Context menu in the Resource Assignments detail
window, and then select Delete. If all labor or nonlabor assignments have been deleted from
an activity, you will be prompted to retain or delete all unit and cost values of that assignment
type. Select Yes to reset all activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values to 0. Select No to
retain the activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values. After all material resources have
been removed, all activity material costs will be reset to 0.
154
Pages
calendar.
 Resources are assigned to activities with several configured default options for calculating
Assign a Resource to an Activity

Assign one or more workspace and project resources to an activity to indicate the specific
resources required to complete the activity. Resource may include labor, non-labor items such
as equipment, and material items such as bricks. You can assign workspace and project
resources to activities. If a role that is associated with the resource you want to assign is already
assigned to the activity, you can choose to staff the role (see "Staff a Role Assignment" on
page 154) with that resource rather than create a new activity assignment.
If you are replacing a current resource assignment with a different resource, you may be
prompted to choose which Units/Time, Rate Source, and Price/Unit values you want to use on
the assignment, or it may occur automatically depending on your preferences. To configure or
change these preferences, see Configure the Assignment Settings Dialog Preference (on
page 67).
To assign a resource to an activity:
4) Select Assign to assign a new resource, or select the  Context menu next to an existing
resource, and then select Assign Resource to replace it.
5) In the Assign Resources dialog box, in the View By list, select a method to view the list of
resources.
6) In the Filter By field, select Workspace to view workspace resources or select Project to
view project resources and workspace resources that have been assigned to the project
level.
Note: If a workspace resource has not been assigned to the project

level, assigning it to an activity will make it and any associated roles
available at the project level. The resource's workspace availability and
155
rate details will also be made available at the project level and used on
the assignment. After a workspace resource is available at the project
level, new resource assignments will always use the resource's rate
values set for the project.
7) Select a resource.
8) To view the resource's current allocation for the project, select Show Details.
9) Select Assign.
Note: If the resource has an associated role marked as the primary role,
the role will also be assigned to the activity.
10) If you are prompted to choose which Units/Time, Rate Source, or Price/Unit values to use
on the assignment, make your selections from the options available, and then select Save.
Tips
 You can assign resources to multiple activities at the same time. Select multiple activities,
select the  Context menu next to a selected activity, hover over Assign, and then select
Resources.
 Quickly see the resources assigned to your activities by adding the Resource Names or
Resource IDs columns to the activity table. Double-click either of the fields to display up to
15 resource assignments for an activity. You can also filter, group, and sort by these fields. If
you make changes to a resource's name or ID, or you add or delete resource assignments
using P6 XML import or Excel import, changes to the Resource Names and Resource IDs
fields may not be immediately displayed. Refresh the Activities page to see your changes.
 To delete a resource, select the  Context menu next to a resource in the Resource
Assignments detail window, and then select Delete. If all labor or nonlabor assignments
have been deleted from an activity, you will be prompted to retain or delete all unit and cost
values of that assignment type. Select Yes to reset all activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost
values to 0. Select No to retain the activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values. After all
material resources have been removed, all activity material costs will be reset to 0.
 If your project is configured to enable status updates by resource assignments, users who
are assigned as resources to in-progress activities can use the My Activities page or
Timesheets page to update the status of their resource assignment.
calendar.
 Resources are assigned to activities with several configured default options for calculating
156
Pages
Replace a Resource Assigned to an Activity

Replace a resource assignment linked to an activity directly from the Activities page. If a
resource becomes unavailable and cannot complete an activity, you can use the Activities page
to select a new replacement resource and assign the new resource using the Replace Resource
window. When a replacement resource is selected, the resource replaces the previous resource
on selected activities. Replace resource is only available at the project level, and is not available
for completed activities or milestones.
To replace a resource assigned to an activity:
3) Select the  Context menu next to the activity, and then select Replace Resource.
4) In the Select Resource to Replace dialog box,choose the resource you want to replace,
and then click Select.
5) In the Replace Resource dialog box, to reduce the number of resources listed, use any of
the option listed to narrow your selection:
 View By: Select All Resources, Active Resources, Primary Role, or Resources -
Codes.
 Filter By: Select to view resources in the Workspace or Project.
 Search: Enter a name of a resource and select the resource form the list of results.
6) To review the availability of the resource, select a resource name, and then select Show
Details.
7) Select Assign.
8) In Assignment Settings dialog box, select Resource or Current assignment to use as the
units/time for the resource assignment. This option only displays if the resources assignment
setting is set to Ask.
9) In the Confirm dialog box, select Yes to replace the resource. You may need to refresh the
page and recalculate your project after the resource is replaced.
10) All changes made on this page are saved automatically.
Tips
 If you do not see the Replace Resource option in the  Context menu, you may not
have the correct security privileges and should contact your Application Administrator.
 You can replace resources for multiple activities at the same time. Select multiple
activities, select the  Context menu next to a selected activity, and then select
Replace Resource.
 If the resource assignment contains actuals, the replace resource process will complete
but the resource will not be replaced. The activity and resource information is displayed
in the Replace Resources Log in the Not Updated section of the Results.
 When a resource is replaced, you can select View Log in the notification or go to
and view the Replace Resources Log.
157
Configure Assignment Calculation Options

When an activity has resource and role assignments, the activity's costs are determined by the
rates and units associated with its assignments. Each activity assignment has a Price/Unit rate
value that is multiplied by the number of units on the assignment to determine the assignment's
cost. All assignment units and costs roll up to the activity level. Activities without assignments
use the default Price/Unit value set in the project settings to calculate activity costs.
There are a variety of options that you can configure to determine how an assignment's rate
value is calculated. Because a single assignment can be associated with a resource, role, or
both, you must choose which source the rate should come from. Because resources and roles
can have multiple rates, you must also choose which rate type to use. The rate type selected for
the assignment becomes the Price/Unit value. You can also choose to override the resource or
role's defined rate and manually enter your own rate.
An additional option, Calculate Costs from Units, controls whether the assignment's costs should
be calculated from its unit and rate values or whether units and costs should be calculated
separately.
To configure assignment calculation options:
4) Select a resource or role assignment, and then configure the following fields:
 Rate Source: Identifies which of the assignment's rate types can be chosen as the
Price/Unit value. If a resource or role with a defined availability period is directly assigned
to the activity, the rate source will be either Resource or Role. If a resource is being
used to staff an existing role assignment, or if you are replacing an existing resource
assignment with a different resource, you will be prompted to use the resource's rate or
keep the rate from the current assignment. Default options for this prompt can be
configured in the user preferences (see "Configure the Assignment Settings Dialog
Preference" on page 67).
You can switch between Resource and Role at any time as long as a resource or role is
associated with the assignment. You can also choose Override if you want to update the
Price/Unit value directly.
 Rate Type: Identifies which rate source rate, for the rate source's current availability
period, to use as the assignment's Price/Unit value. If the rate source is Resource or
Role, you can choose one of the rate source's five rate types. If the rate source is
Override, the rate type value will be set to Custom Rate and the Price/Unit value must
be updated directly.
 Price/Unit: The rate source's current rate based on its current availability period and
specified rate type. This value is used to calculate costs for the activity assignment when
Calculate Costs from Units is enabled.
158
Pages
If the rate source is Resource or Role, and a rate is not specified for the rate source's
current availability period and rate type, or if the rate source's earliest start date falls
before their earliest availability date, this value will be 0. If the rate source has multiple
availability dates that fall within the assignment dates, an asterisk next to the Price/Unit
value indicates that multiple rates will be applied during the duration of the activity.
If the rate source is Override, you can modify the Price/Unit value directly. If the
assignment does not have any availability periods defined, the value will default to the
project's default Price/Unit value.
 Calculate Costs from Units: When enabled, a change in activity units, assignment units,
or assignment rates will be used to calculate the assignment's cost values, which will be
read-only. When disabled, modifying units or rates will not affect assignment costs, and
you will be able to modify assignment cost values directly.
Notes:
 Default Rate Type, Price/Unit, and Calculate Costs from Units
values can be specified for all new assignments in the project
settings (see "Configure Calculation Settings for a Project" on
page 424).
 Modifying the Rate Source or Rate Type values will recalculate costs
if Calculate Costs from Units is enabled. Enabling Calculate Costs
from Units will also recalculate costs. See Recalculate Costs
Overview (on page 199) for more information on recalculating costs.
Tips
 The configuration of resource and role availability periods and rate types are configured in
the workspace or project where the resource or role is owned. See Resource List Overview
(on page 272) and Role List Overview (on page 294) for more information.
Assign a Curve to a Resource or a Role Assignment

A curve profile can be selected per activity assignment to allocate resource or role units over the
duration of an activity according to a specific curve. Units spread are Planned Units, Actual
Units, Remaining Units, and At Completion Units.
Note: Curves may cause an assignment's costs to be recalculated if the

assignment's Calculate Costs from Units setting is enabled.
A curve profile can be assigned to any resource or role assignment on activities with one of the
following duration types:
 Fixed Duration & Units/Time
 Fixed Duration & Units
To specify a curve profile:
159
4) In the Curve column for the resource assignment, select a curve.

 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 WBSs
 Work Packages
Attachments.

6) Select Upload.
160
Pages
Tips
page.
Link a File to an Object

You can link existing files to objects contained within a project instead of adding them to each
object. Linking ensures the same version of a file is used everywhere that it is linked. The
application enables you to associate files in the Files detail window of the object. The files are
still available from the File List page at the project level.
 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 WBSs
 Work Packages
To link a file to an object:
Attachments.
3) In the Files detail window, select  Link.
161
4) In the Link File dialog box, select a file, and select  Add from Available.
You can select one or more files to link.
5) Select OK.
Tips
 To remove a linked file, select the file, select the  Context menu, and select Unlink.
Add a Relationship to an Activity

An activity can have as many relationships as necessary to model the work that must be done.
Activities that are dependent on one another are known as predecessors and successors, where
the first activity is the predecessor and the second is the successor.
You can define cross-project relationships between activities in projects that are in the same
program. These are also called external relationships. The first time you assign an external
relationship between two projects, you must be on the program Activities page. After you've
created an external relationship between two projects, then the assigned activity from the
external project becomes available to be assigned on the project Activities page. If you remove
the external relationship assignment, then the activity from the other project that was assigned
will no longer be available on the project Activities page.
To add relationships to an activity:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Relationships detail
window.
4) To add activity predecessors, do the following:
a. In the Predecessors section, select Assign.
b. In the Assign Relationships panel, in the Assign Predecessors section, search or
browse for an activity, select the activity, and then select  Assign Predecessors. You
can also double click activities to assign them as predecessors. Assigning an activity as a
predecessor will add it to the Predecessors section of the Relationships detail window.
c. Select  Close in the Assign Relationships panel.
5) To add activity successors, do the following:
a. In the Successors section, select Assign.
b. In the Assign Relationships panel, in the Assign Successors section, search or
browse for an activity, select the activity, and then select  Assign Successors. You
can also double click activities to assign them as successors. Assigning an activity as a
successor will add it to the Successors section of the Relationships detail window.
c. Select  Close in the Assign Relationships panel.
162
Pages
6) In the Relationships detail window, in the Relationship Type field for a predecessor or
successor activity, choose the option that best defines how the selected activity relates to the
start or finish of the predecessor or successor activity.
7) In the Lag field, enter the amount of lag time needed between the two activities. Values can
be positive or negative.
Tips
 You can unassign a predecessor or successor activity by selecting an activity in the Assign
Relationships panel and selecting  Unassign Predecessors or  Unassign
Successors.
 In the Relationships detail window, in the Predecessors or Successors section, select an
activity name. This will select the activity in the table and display that activity's predecessors
and successors in the detail window. If an activity is hidden by a filter, select the  Help icon
next to an activity in the detail window, and then select Clear All Filters. If you select
Assign Predecessors or Assign Successors from the detail window, then the relationship
between the original activity and the selected activity will be highlighted in the Assign
Relationships panel.
 You can temporarily add a filtered activity to the current view by selecting its name in the
Predecessor or Successor panels in the Relationships detail window. The  Help icon
next to the activity provides a tooltip with more information about a filtered activity.
Refreshing the page reapplies all current filters and removes filtered activities from view.
 In the Relationships detail window, in the Predecessors or Successors section, you can
view important information for each activity such as Name, ID, Relationship Type, Start
date, Finish date, and Activity Status. When activity date indicators are enabled, the table
displays indicators for the Start and Finish dates of activities that have an actual start date,
actual finish date, or assigned constraints. To enable this feature, see Configure Activity
Date Indicators (on page 68).
 You can quickly create a sequence of activities by adding relationships to multiple activities
at one time. In the table, select multiple activities, select the  Context menu, and then
select Link Activities. Finish to Start relationships are created between selected activities in
the order that the activities were selected. To remove all relationships between activities,
select the activities, select the  Context menu, and then select Unlink Activities.
 You can assign the same predecessors or successors to multiple activities at the same time.
Select multiple activities, select the  Context menu, hover over Assign, and then select
Predecessors or Successors. This will open the Assign Relationships panel where you
can select predecessor or successor activities for the chosen activities.
 You can assign the same activity as a predecessor or successor more than once by
assigning it with a different Relationship Type.
 Click and drag the divider between the Assign Predecessors and Assign Successors
sections of the Assign Relationships panel to enlarge or decrease each section.
 Select the Trace Logic detail window to trace the relationship paths of individual activities.
163
View Relationships Using Trace Logic

In projects with complex sequences of activity relationships, you can use the Trace Logic detail
window to trace the path of relationships and view activity predecessor, successor, and other
relationship details. In the detail window, adjust the zoom and fit of the display, as well as the
number of activities shown. Select different activities in the detail window to trace the path of
their relationships.
To view relationships using Trace Logic:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Trace Logic detail
window.
4) In the Trace Logic detail window, configure the following settings:
  Pan: Depending on your predecessor and successor settings, selecting an activity
can change the trace logic display. Use Pan to move the display in any direction without
selecting an activity.
  Zoom Out: Zoom out of the displayed sequence of activities.
  Zoom In: Zoom in on the displayed sequence of activities.
  Zoom to Fit: Adjusts the view to display all activities in the sequence. Hover over an
activity to view it at normal size.
  Print: Displays the trace logic sequence in a browser print preview window.
 Predecessor Levels: The maximum number of predecessor levels to display before the
selected activity.
 Successor Levels: The maximum number of successor levels to display after the
selected activity.
5) Select activities to view their relationship sequences. Activities selected in the detail window
are also selected in the table. Select a relationship line to view its details.
Tips
 The following indicators are used in the Trace Logic detail window:
 Critical activities and relationships are represented using red tiles, red borders, and red
lines. Activity tiles on the critical path display an exclamation point icon.
 Non-critical activity tiles are white, and non-critical relationship lines are black.
 Solid lines indicate a driving relationship, while dotted lines indicate a non-driving
relationship.
 Completed activities display a completed icon in their tiles. Start or finish milestones
display a diamond in their tiles.
 Select  Download beneath the diagram to download the displayed sequence as a .png
file.
164
Pages
in the Trace Logic detail window. A tooltip provides more information about the filtered
activity when you place your cursor above the activity name. Refreshing the page reapplies
all current filters and removes filtered activities from view.
Assign a Risk to an Activity

If your project team has identified risks in the project risk register, you can use the Risks detail
window to assign risks to an activity. Assigning risks to an activity enables you to indicate where
in the project schedule a risk can potentially impact.
This information is also used during the risk analysis process to simulate the impact of risk on
project activities during the simulation runs. The risk analysis generates risk-related data for
each activity that is saved in the system. Risk data that are calculated for activities during the
analysis include pre-response and post-response activity dates and durations, as well as a
criticality index, which measures the probability that an activity will be part of the critical path.
This data can be displayed in the Activities view as fields or as bars in the Gantt chart to identify
activities that require special attention.
To assign risks to an activity:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Risks detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Select Risk dialog box, search or browse for the risk, select it, and then select Select.
Tips
 You can assign risks to multiple activities at the same time. Select multiple activities, select
the  Context menu, hover over Assign, and then select Risks.
Apply Activity Uncertainty

The application enables you to convey information about general uncertainty for each project
activity by defining two- or three-point duration estimates. This data is used during the risk
analysis process to simulate varying durations for each activity.
Uncertainty can be applied using the Apply Activity Uncertainty automated process or by
manually updating individual activity values in the table. For either method, first choose a
distribution shape that expresses the relative likelihood of outcomes within the range of your
duration estimates. A Uniform shape enables you to set minimum and maximum duration
estimates, while a Triangle duration shape enables you to set minimum, most likely, and
maximum duration estimates. You can also select None if you do not want to apply estimates.
This is the default option.
165
In the automated process, estimates are entered as a percentage of each activity's remaining
duration. The automated process enables you to apply these percentage values to all activities,
filtered activities, or selected activities. If you want to update activities individually, or if you want
to overwrite specific activity values after using the automated process, use the columns in the
table to choose a distribution shape for each activity, and then set duration estimate values
based on the chosen shape. In the table, duration estimates are entered as duration values, not
percentages. To update a selection of activities, add grouping bands to the view, and then
update the appropriate uncertainty columns within each group.
Applying activity uncertainty can be performed using either method from the project Activities
page. You can also run the automated process from the project Risk Register page. When you
run the automated process from the Risk Register page, you can only apply the percentage
values to all activities.
To apply activity uncertainty to project activities:
2) To apply activity uncertainty using the automated process, select the Actions menu, and
then select Apply Activity Uncertainty.
3) In the Apply Activity Uncertainty dialog box, complete the following steps:
a. In the Apply to Activities section, select one of the following:
 All: Apply the activity uncertainty to all activities in the schedule.
 Filtered: Apply the activity uncertainty only to the activities that are currently
filtered on the Activities page.
 Selected: Apply the activity uncertainty only to the activities you have selected on
the Activities page.
Note: Options for the Apply to Activities section may vary depending
on the filters and selections on the Activities page.
b. Select the Overwrite any existing values option to overwrite all estimate values that
currently exist for project activities. If this option is disabled, only activities with a
distribution shape of None will be updated.
c. In the Uncertainty Distribution list, select the shape of the distribution that best models
the estimates for activity durations. The duration fields available for you to edit depends
on the selected shape.
d. In the Percent of Remaining Duration section, complete the following fields:
 Minimum Duration: The percentage of the activity remaining duration that
represents the minimum duration for the activity.
 Most Likely Duration: The percentage of the activity remaining duration that
represents the most likely duration for the activity.
 Maximum Duration: The percentage of the activity remaining duration that
represents the maximum duration for the activity.
Note: Any duration set to 100% will be equal to an activity's remaining

duration.
e. Select Apply.
166
Pages
4) To apply or overwrite activity uncertainty for individual activities, update activity values using
the Uncertainty Distribution, Minimum Duration, Most Likely Duration, and Maximum
Duration columns in the table. A distribution shape of Uniform or Triangle must be chosen
before the duration estimate fields can be edited.
Tips
 The risk analysis process uses activity data from the current schedule. Although you can
apply activity uncertainty to activities in baselines and scenarios, this data is not used in the
risk analysis. The activity uncertainty values set in a baseline or scenario would be used if
you choose to set the baseline or scenario as the current schedule.
 Entering uncertainty estimates can be helpful for modeling general uncertainty for project
activities. However, it only plays a small part in assessing project uncertainty, as project risks
can be more impactful to the project schedule. Therefore, your project team should develop
an effective risk management strategy for assessing and controlling the risks for your project.
Add a Task to an Activity

Add tasks and task milestones to your activities to further enhance the level of detail of work
required to complete your project. Add tasks to activities with a Type of Activity Dependent or
Resource Dependent and assign the company responsible for completing work on the task.
Optionally, assign a task duration, due date, proposed due date, completed date, and a user
responsible for performing the task. When tasks are added, indicators show if task dates fall
outside of activity date ranges, if tasks are completed before their assigned activity, or if an
activity is completed before all of its assigned tasks.
Tasks added to your activities on the Activities page will also appear on pages in the Tasks app,
where you can choose to commit to work on the task or mark the task complete. Existing tasks
that have been assigned to activities in the Tasks app appear in the Tasks detail window for the
selected activity. Tasks that have hand-offs with other tasks cannot be edited in the Tasks detail
window.
To add a task to an activity:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Tasks detail window.
4) In the Tasks detail window, select  Add.
5) In the new row, complete the following required fields:
 Task Name: Enter a task name.
 Type: Select Task or Task Milestone.
 Company: Select a company.
 Duration: Enter a task duration.
Tips
 Data in the Tasks detail window can only be edited in the current schedule.
167
 WBS Summary type activities cannot have tasks, constraints, or expected finish dates.
These fields will be read-only. If you change an existing activity type to WBS Summary, data
in these fields will be removed.
Associating Activities with Scope Assignments and Work Packages for Scope
Management Overview
If you use the application to manage your schedule and manage scope assignments, you can
link your activities to scope assignments and work packages.
The activity and the work package must be associated with the same WBS. An activity can only
be assigned to one work package, but it can be assigned to multiple scope assignments within
the work package.
Note: Schedule costs and scope costs are calculated separately. Linking
a work package or scope assignment with an activity won't link the costs.
Scope assignments and work packages inherit dates from their associated activities. When
activities are linked to a work package or its associated scope assignments, the Original Start
and Original Finish dates are set to reflect the activity's Planned Start and Planned Finish dates
before the baseline is set. After the baseline is set, the Original Start and Original Finish dates
are set to read-only and the Planned Start and Planned Finish dates for the work package and
scope assignments are updated with the activity's Planned Start and Planned Finish dates. For
work packages that have scope assignments with activity links, this is the earliest start and finish
dates set for all scope assignments within the work package.
Note: The following dates do not inherit values from activities: Revised
Start/Finish, Effective Start/Finish, and Installed Start/Finish.
Unlinking activities from scope assignments or work packages will do the following:
 Reset the Original Start and Planned Start dates with the Data Date before the baseline is
set. Reset the Planned Start dates with the Data Date after the baseline is set.
 Reset the Original Finish and Planned Finish dates with the Data Date plus 4 days,
excluding holidays, before the baseline is set. Reset the Planned Finish dates with the Data
Date plus 4 days, excluding holidays, after the baseline is set.
Unlinking a scope assignment will not unlink its work package from the activity.
Link a Work Package to an Activity

Link work packages to activities when you want to manage work package dates using activity
dates.
To link an activity to a work package:

168
Pages
4) In the Work Package Name field, select a work package.
Note: You can only link an activity to a work package that belong to the
same WBS that is associated with the activity.

Link a Scope Assignment to an Activity
Link scope assignments to activities when you want to manage scope assignment dates using
activity dates. This enables you to more accurately manage the time phased distribution of
scope data for scope assignments.
To link an activity to a scope assignment:

3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Scope Assignments
detail window.
4) Select  Link.
5) In the Select Scope Assignments dialog box, select a scope assignment and select Link.
6) In the Scope Percent Complete Weight Method list, select a method to use to calculate
the scope percentage completion for scope assignments. The weight is calculated using
cost, quantity, hours, or manually entered values.
Cost, Quantity, and Hours are represented as n in the equations that follow:
The n weight is first calculated for each scope assignment linked to the activity as Revised n
multiplied by the scope assignment Scope Percent Complete.
Scope Percent Complete is calculated as Installed Quantity divided by At Completion
Quantity.
The sum of the scope assignments Revised n and the sum of the scope assignments
nWeight for all scope assignments linked to the activity are then used to compute the activity
Scope Percent Complete. This is calculated as the n Weight divided by Revised n.
Weight for the Manual option is calculated as Manual Weight Factor multiplied by Scope
Percent Complete.
Scope Percent Complete at the work package level for the manual option is calculated as
the sum of Manual Weight divided by the sum of Manual Weight Factors for all scope
assignments in the work package.
Tips
 You can link multiple scope assignments to a single activity. However, a scope assignment
can only be linked to a single activity.
 You can set a default scope percent complete method by configuring it in the project
settings.
169
Assign a Code to an Activity

Assign codes to activities to help track them based on attributes they share. When managing a
large number of activities, you can use views to filter and group activities by code. You can
assign workspace-level and project-level codes to activities.
To assign a code to an activity:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Codes detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Select Code dialog box, in the Filter By list, select Workspace to view activity codes
available at the workspace level, or Project to view activity codes available at the project
level.
6) In the Available section, select codes and select Add from Available to add them to the
Selected section.
7) Select Select.
Tips
 You can assign codes to multiple activities at the same time. Select multiple activities, select
the  Context menu, hover over Assign, and then select Codes.
 You can add new activity code values during code assignment. In the Select Code dialog
box, select a code value in the Available section, and then enter a New Code Value Name
and a New Code Value ID. Select the  Add  button to add the new code as a sibling to
the selected code value, or select the  Add  menu to add the code as a child to the
selected code value. To use this method, at least one code must already exist in the
Available section.
Depending on the value selected in the Filter By list, code values will be added to the
workspace or project Codes dictionary. Select Manage Codes to open the applicable
dictionary page.
Modify Activity Details in the Gantt Chart

You can modify a variety of activities and relationship details directly in the Activities page Gantt
chart. Create activities, adjust durations and dates, and establish relationships between
activities. Add lag to relationships, or modify the relationship type. Hover over an activity or
relationship line to view its details.
To modify activity details in the Gantt chart:
2) Select the  Gantt icon.
3) In the Gantt chart, you can make the following changes:
 To create an activity, right-click a row, and select Add Above or Add Below. Enter an
activity name.
170
Pages
 To modify an activity's start or finish date and its duration, select the left edge or right
edge of an activity bar and drag it to a new date. The new date and duration are shown
next to the bar as you drag it.
 To modify an activity's start and finish dates without changing its duration, select the
middle of the bar and drag it to a new date. The new start and finish dates are shown
next to the bar as you drag it.
 To delete an activity, right-click an activity bar, and select Delete Activity.
 To create a relationship, hover over the left edge or right edge of an activity bar. Select
the circle that appears and drag it to an edge of a different activity bar. A popover shows
the proposed relationship and its type.
 To edit an existing relationship, select a relationship line, and then select Edit
Relationship. In the popover, edit the relationship type and lag, and then select Apply.
 To delete an existing relationship, right-click a relationship line, and then select Delete
Relationship.
 Drag any activity bar past the data date line to set a Start On or After constraint.
Tips
 You cannot add an activity while in a baseline.
 You can select multiple activity bars and edit their durations or dates at the same time.
 Milestone start or finish dates cannot be modified in the Gantt chart.
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the Gantt chart displays indicators for the Start
and Finish dates of activities that have actual dates or if the activity has assigned
constraints. See Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
 For Level of Effort and WBS Summary type activities, weather risks are ignored and not
included in the risk analysis. Cost impact is still included.
 The schedule impact of a risk mapped to Level of Effort and WBS Summary type activities is
ignored and not included in the risk analysis. Cost impact is still included.
Renumber Activity IDs

You can quickly renumber a group of activity IDs based on a repeatable pattern. Choose to
increment individual IDs by a specific numeric value, auto-number IDs in sequence based on a
prefix and number pattern, or replace the beginning characters of all selected IDs with the same
value.
If the option you choose causes duplicate activity IDs, you will be prompted to enter a new
activity ID for each conflicting activity. You can also cancel the process and try again with a
different pattern that does not cause duplicates.
To maintain consistent activity IDs across baselines, you can choose to renumber the selected
IDs in the current schedule and all of your project's baselines. If renumbering the IDs will cause
duplicates in any baselines, you can either cancel the renumbering process or update the
current schedule and any baselines where duplicates will not occur.
To renumber activity IDs:
171

2) Select one or more activities, select the  Context menu, and then select Renumber
Activity IDs.
3) In the Renumber Activity IDs dialog box, choose one of the following options:
 Increment Activity ID based on selected activities: Enter a value that each selected
activity ID will be incremented by.
 Auto-number: Enter a prefix value, starting number, and increment value. The selected
activities will be updated in the order that they were selected.
4) Select Renumber selected activities in baselines if you want to also renumber the
selected IDs in any baselines where they appear. This option is only displayed if your project
has at least one baseline.
5) Select OK.
Tips
 In the context of a program, you can renumber a selection of activity IDs that belong to a
single project.
 You can also renumber activity IDs in a scenario.
 You can renumber up to 500 activity IDs at the same time.
Dissolve an Activity
Dissolving an activity enables you to delete the activity from your project schedule while
maintaining the activity's predecessor and successor relationships.
When you dissolve an activity, the following changes occur:
 The activity is deleted.
 Relationships are created from each of the activity's predecessors to each of the activity's
successors.
 The resulting relationship type consists of the first part of the predecessor relationship and
the second part of the successor relationship.
 Lag from the combined relationships is added together.
For example: Activity A forms a Finish to Start relationship with Activity B, with 1 day of lag.
Activity B forms a Finish to Finish relationship with Activity C, with 2 days of lag. If Activity B is
dissolved, then Activity A will form a Finish to Finish relationship with Activity C, with 3 days of
lag.
To dissolve an activity:
2) Select an activity, select the  Context menu, and then select Dissolve.
172
Pages
Tips
 To dissolve an activity, it must have at least one predecessor and one successor
relationship.
 To delete an activity and its relationships, see Delete an Activity (on page 173).
Delete an Activity
Delete an activity to remove it from your project schedule.
To delete an activity:
2) Select an activity, select the  Context menu, and then select Delete.
Tips
 Deleting an activity also deletes any predecessor or successor activity relationships. To
delete an activity while retaining its surrounding relationships, you can dissolve the activity.
See Dissolve an Activity (on page 172) for more information.
Activities Page Tools

The Activities page contains a collection of tools and features for monitoring, analyzing, and
scheduling your project.
 Activity Usage (see "Activity Usage Overview" on page 174): View the time-phased usage
of your project activities in the activity usage histogram.
 Baselines (see "Baselines Overview" on page 178): Capture your schedule at a given
point in time, evaluating performance at different phases of the project lifecycle.
 Earned Value (see "Earned Value Overview" on page 184): Measure schedule and budget
current progress and estimates to complete against an initial project plan.
 Global Change (see "Global Change Overview" on page 192): Create If/Then statements
to identify and update matching project activity values quicker than modifying activities
individually.
 Leveler (see "Leveling Overview" on page 196): Resolve resource and role assignment
over allocations.
 Program Milestones (see "Program Milestones Overview" on page 198): View how the
projects in your program are progressing according to their milestones.
 Recalculate Costs (see "Recalculate Costs Overview" on page 199): Update activity and
assignment cost values as your project progresses and data becomes outdated.
 Resource and Role Usage (see "Resource and Role Usage Overview" on page 202):
View resource and role units and costs across your project's timeline using histograms and
spreadsheet data.
 Resource-Loaded Scheduling (see "Resource-Loaded Scheduling Overview" on page
209): Plan your activity units and costs based on the resources and roles assigned to
perform the work on each activity. Assignment-level units and costs roll up to the activity
level.
173
 Schedule Health Score (see "Schedule Health Score Overview" on page 220): Evaluate
the quality of your project schedule using common schedule analysis metrics.
 Schedule Scenarios (see "Schedule Scenarios Overview" on page 228): Create what-if
versions of your project schedule to evaluate different outcomes without making permanent
changes to the actual schedule.
 Scheduler (see "Scheduling Overview" on page 232): Sequence your project's activities
along a timeline based on their constraints, relationships, and dates. The scheduler uses the
Critical Path Method scheduling algorithm.
 Store Period Performance (see "Store Period Performance Overview" on page 237):
Capture historical records to track actual units and costs to date allowing you to bill for work
completed and analyze schedule performance.
Activity Usage Overview

The project Activities page provides a time-phased view of activity usage in your current
schedule in the form of a histogram. The histogram can be configured to show the unit or cost
data across the timeline of your project. The data in the activity usage histogram is an
aggregated total from all activities.
The activity usage Not Stacked Histogram displays activity and earned value fields. In the
settings, configure whether you want your histogram to show unit (Labor or Nonlabor) or cost
(Labor, Nonlabor, Material, or Total) data. You can choose to display the actual, planned value,
and earned value bars and curves using period values or total values. Fields that are displayed
using period values will be spread according to the reporting periods in which the values were
stored during store period performance.
The Not Stacked Histogram displays cumulative usage values in an S-curve style chart. The
planned usage curve plots the progression of planned units or costs over time for all activities in
the project. The actual curve tracks actuals up to the latest day they exist, typically the data date,
using either total actuals or period values depending on settings. The remaining early, remaining
late, and estimate to complete curves begin where the actual curve ends, indicating the
remaining work to be performed. If the actual curve isn't plotted, then the remaining early,
remaining late, and estimate to complete curves begin at 0.
When an activity has resource assignments, then the resource assignment's dates are used for
the spreads and aggregations. When it doesn't have resource assignments, then the activity
dates are used. The activity usage histogram uses the same timescale that's set for your
Activities table.
Before viewing your activity usage chart, to get the latest spreads, you should first recalculate
costs with the option to recalculate project usage spreads.
Note: The activity usage histogram is not available in programs.
Configure Activity Usage Settings

Configure settings for the activity usage histogram on the Activities page.
To configure activity usage settings:
174
Pages

2) On the Activities page, in the Open menu, select Current Schedule.
3) Select the Layout  menu, and then select  Project Usage.
4) Select the Activity Usage detail window.
5) Select  Settings.
6) In the Settings panel, on the Histogram tab, configure the following sections:
 Not Stacked: This section contains settings for the Not Stacked histogram.
 Bars & Curves option: Select Show Units or Show Costs to display unit or cost
data in the histogram.
 Units Filter list: If you select to show units, select to display Labor or Nonlabor
units.
 Costs Filter list: If you select to show costs, select to display Labor, Nonlabor,
Material, or Total costs.
 In the chart options table, choose graph bars and cumulative curves to display for
each unit or cost field. Choose a color for each field's bar and curve.
 Display actuals and earned values using period values: Displays the stored
actual units, costs, and earned value amounts by reporting period. When
deselected, the total values are displayed.
 Graph: Select from the following graph options to include on the histogram.
 Legend: A legend for the histogram's bars and curves.
 Data date line: A line at the data date that was set for the project the last time that
the project usage spreads were recalculated when recalculating costs.
 Horizontal sight lines: A line for each Y-axis interval.
 Vertical sight lines: A line for each X-axis interval.
 Values on bars: The value of each bar is displayed on the bar.
 Values on curves: The value of each curve is displayed on the curve.
 Calendar: The calendar being used by the project is displayed next to the graph.
7) Select Apply.
View the Activity Usage Histogram
View the activity usage histogram for a time-phased view of your activity usage. The data in the
activity usage histogram is an aggregated total of all activities.
To view the activity usage histogram:
4) In the detail window, select the Activity Usage tab.
5) Before viewing your activity usage data, configure the usage settings (see "Configure
Activity Usage Settings" on page 174) to ensure the appropriate information is displayed,
such as units or costs, bars, curves, and legend details.
6) In the histogram, hover over a bar or a plot point on a curve to view its details.
175
Tips
 The activity usage histogram uses the same timescale that's set for your Activities table.
 You can increase the size of the usage chart by enlarging the detail window panel. Enlarging
the chart does not increase the amount of data shown, just the size of the currently displayed
data.
Print Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource Usage Histogram
You can print the Activity Usage, Resource Usage, or Role Usage histograms for a time-phased
view of your activity, resource, or role usage. The data in the histogram is an aggregated display
of usage data for roles, resources, or activities.
To print the Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource usage histogram:
1) Navigate to the project Activities page (see page 437)
2) In the Activities page, in the Open menu, select Current Schedule.
3) In the detail window, in the activity details/project usage menu select Project Usage, and
then select the Activity Usage, Resource Usage, or the Role Usage tab.
4) Before viewing your usage data, configure the resource and usage settings (see
"Configure Resource and Role Usage Settings" on page 203) or configure the activity
usage settings (see "Configure Activity Usage Settings" on page 174) to ensure the
appropriate information is displayed, such as units or costs, bars and curves, legend details,
and spreadsheet formatting.
5) When printing Resource Usage or Role Usage data, select one or more resources or roles
from the list whose data you want to display.
6) In the detail window toolbar, select  Not Stacked Histogram or  Stacked Histogram.
Note: The  Stacked Histogram option is only available when

printing Resource or Role Usage histograms.
7) Configure the page view according to your needs, and then select  Print to open the
Print Options panel.
adjust each margin.
each page.
Content :
 In the Settings panel, select the settings that you want to appear in the chart.
176
Pages
for the timescale. When Reporting Period is selected as the timescale interval you can
designate the use of custom labels for the reporting period by selecting Custom label
only.
Note: The Reporting Period timescale is only available in a Project view.
 Select Use rolling dates to configure rolling start and end dates. Enter a value in
Timescale units per page to define the number of timescale units displayed on each
page of the chart.
Note: The Edit Content option is only available when printing Activity
Usage.

Revisions dialog box, you can enter text, rearrange and resize columns, and modify the
select Save.
Note: The Revision Box editor is not available for Resource Usage or
Role usage printing.
177
your needs.
16) To reset your selection to the default settings, select Restore Default Settings.
Tips
Baselines Overview
A baseline is a copy of a project's schedule data at a given point in time. As a static
representation of the project plan, it can be used as a benchmark against which to measure
performance as the project progresses. Create multiple baselines to evaluate performance at
different phases of the project lifecycle.
When you create a baseline, you can set the baseline date to capture project data at any point
between the project creation date and the current date. This is useful if you want to add a
baseline for project data as it existed on a specific date in the past. If you forgot to add a
baseline on a specific date, select a past baseline date to use the data from that date.
Baselines can be opened on the Activities page to view the project data represented by the
baseline. When a baseline is open, baseline values are used to populate the standard schedule
fields. When the current schedule, a baseline, or a scenario is open, a baseline's values are
used to populate corresponding baseline fields. Baseline fields are used for comparison with the
current schedule or scenario fields. For example, if the original baseline is open, the baseline's
start values populate Start date fields. If the current schedule or a scenario is open, Start date
fields are populated with current schedule or current scenario values, and Original BL Start date
fields are populated with original baseline values. The baseline fields used for comparison in the
current schedule are empty when any baseline is open.
Baselines can also be opened so that they can be updated. While updating baseline data is not
a typical project management practice, there may be situations where minor adjustments to a
baseline need to be made by the project manager or scheduler. You can modify most of the data
in a baseline as you would the data in the current schedule. The data stored by a baseline is
unique to that baseline. For example, actions such as updating activity data, assigning
resources and roles, scheduling activities, leveling resources and roles, and using the schedule
health check tool do not affect the current schedule, other baselines, or schedule scenarios. You
cannot manually add new activities to a baseline, but you can add existing activities from the
current schedule to a baseline and update the data for existing baseline activities. If you need to
replace your current schedule with the data from a baseline, you can set the baseline as the
current schedule. If the changes you make to a baseline need to be undone, you can revert the
baseline back to its original state, as long as that baseline was created in Oracle Primavera
Cloud and not imported from P6. The baseline must be open before it can be updated or
reverted. See Open a Baseline (on page 182) for more information.
Note: Because of differences in how data is managed in P6 and Oracle Primavera Cloud, you cannot revert changes made to a baseline if that
baseline was imported from a P6 XML file.
178
Pages
There are four types of baselines in the application: original, current, supplementary, and
unofficial:
 An original baseline is an official baseline that is typically set when the project has been
approved. It may also be referred to as the Performance Measurement Baseline (PMB).
Setting an original baseline captures values in all original baseline fields. Original scope
values cannot be updated after the original baseline is set.
 A current baseline, also referred to as the active baseline, is an official baseline used to
measure differences between current project values and the original values. You can only
set a current baseline after an original baseline has been set.
 The supplementary baseline is an official baseline that can be used for any purpose. A
supplementary baseline might be created before a major schedule update to capture the
state of the project before the update.
 Unofficial baselines can be created to capture how the project is progressing or they can
come from previous official baselines. For example, a baseline that was previously set as
your official current baseline is not removed when you set a new current baseline. It instead
becomes an unofficial baseline that is retained for future reference.
At any point in time, you can have one original baseline, one current baseline, one
supplementary baseline, and an unlimited number of unofficial baselines. You can change the
types of existing baselines or remove a baseline's type to make it an unofficial baseline. Any
baseline can be opened for viewing or updating.
The distinction between official baselines and unofficial baselines is that official
baselines—original, current, and supplementary—have corresponding baseline fields while
unofficial baselines do not. To view the field values stored in an unofficial baseline, you can
either change its type to an official baseline or set it as a user baseline preference. You can set
up to three existing baselines as user baseline preferences, which typically indicate the
baselines that are most important to you. The baselines set as your preferences are used to
populate the values in user baseline fields. This is useful when you want to measure project
performance against baselines other than the official project baselines. Set on the Activities
page, user baseline preferences apply only to the user who set them. Official or unofficial
baselines can be set as user baselines.
Schedule Management
For schedule management, each baseline captures a complete set of data about the project
schedule, including activity dates, durations, units, costs, float, and percentages. After the
project schedule is developed, an original baseline should be set to establish points of reference
to monitor your schedule as it changes over time. When the current baseline is created, all of the
current baseline fields are updated to reflect the current project values.
To measure schedule performance, configure views that show baseline variance fields to identify
activities that are not progressing as planned. Baseline variance fields measure the differences
between your current project values and your baseline values. You can view variances for your
original, current, supplementary, and user baselines. Variances are useful in identifying the
activities with the greatest impact to your original project plan.
When activity date indicators are enabled, the baseline Start and Finish date fields will display
visual indicators when a constraint is configured for the activity or if an actual start date or actual
finish date is set. See Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
179
Official and user baselines can also be configured as bars to be displayed in the Gantt chart and
used to monitor activity progress visually on the project timeline.
Earned Value functionality is also supported for schedule management use cases. Designate
one of your existing baselines as the project's earned value baseline. This enables earned value
metrics to be calculated for the activities in your project. Activity earned value data is rolled up to
the WBS and project levels. Earned value metrics track current schedule and budget
performance against the designated baseline. There are a variety of supported fields that you
can use to monitor progress, including planned value, earned value, schedule and cost
variances, schedule and cost performance indexes, estimates to complete, and estimates at
completion. Most earned value metrics can be viewed in terms of costs or labor units. If you
already have a baseline that should be used for earned value, it is recommended that you open
the baseline to schedule it to a data date appropriate for that baseline, and then recalculate its
costs. These actions ensure that the baseline fields referenced in earned value calculations are
accurate and up to date.
Scope Management
For scope management, a current baseline is created to capture all approved changes since the
original baseline was created. When the current baseline is created, all the baseline fields are
updated to reflect the current values and are in turn used in certain calculations to measure
progress. The original values are not changed.
For a work package, there are four baseline attributes that the user can refer to after a baseline
has been set: Baseline Cost, Baseline Hours, Baseline Start, and Baseline Finish. For each
scope assignment, there are five baseline attributes: Baseline Start, Baseline Finish, Baseline
Cost, Baseline Hours, and Baseline Quantity. When the original baseline is set, these fields are
populated with the original values. After the original baseline is set, all changes needed for
scope items, work packages, and scope assignments must go through a review process, which
is initiated by submitting change and transfer requests.
Add a Baseline
Adding project baselines enables you to track progress throughout the project lifecycle. If no
baseline exists for a project, the first baseline must be an original or unofficial baseline. Any
subsequent baselines can be original, current, supplementary, or unofficial baselines. You can
also change the type of existing baselines. Only one original, current, and supplementary
baseline can exist at a time, but you can maintain an unlimited number of unofficial baselines.
You can add, edit, and delete project baselines from the Baselines page or Activities page.
To add a project baseline:
1) Navigate to the Baselines page (see page 437).
2) Select  Add.
3) In the Add Baseline dialog box, enter the following information:
 Name: The name of the baseline.
 Source: The source of the baseline data. Select Current Schedule, Scenario, Baseline,
or From History.
 If you selected Current Schedule as the source, continue to type selection.
180
Pages
 If you selected Baseline as the source, use the Baseline list to choose an existing
baseline with data you want to copy.
 If you selected Scenario as the source, use the Scenario list to choose an
existing scenario with data you want to copy.
 If you selected From History as the source, use the Baseline Date picker to
choose the date of the project data captured by the baseline. Select a date in the
past to use project data from that date. The default value is the current date and
time
 Type: The type of baseline. Select Original, Current, Supplementary, or leave the
value blank.
Notes:
 Unofficial baselines do not have a Type. Select the blank row in the
list to add an unofficial baseline.
 The dialog box displays the baseline type selected as the earned
value baseline. This can be changed in the project settings (see
"Configure the Earned Value Baseline" on page 185).
4) (Optional) Enter a description for the new scenario.
5) Select Add.
Tips
 To access your baselines from the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then
select Manage Baselines. You can also add baselines from the Manage Baselines dialog
box. Baselines added in this manner automatically set the current schedule as the scenario
source.
 To add baselines directly from the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then
select Add Baseline.
 If you do not see a newly added baseline on the Activities page or in the Manage
Baselines dialog box, select  Refresh.
 The Data Date field shows the data date value as of the Baseline Date. This is useful when
determining the progress point of your project at the time represented by the baseline.
 The Baseline for Earned Value field shows which baseline is being used as the project's
earned value baseline.
 To delete a baseline, on the Baselines page, in the Manage Baselines dialog box, or on the
Activities page, select the  Context menu, and then select Delete. You cannot delete an
original baseline if a current or supplementary baseline exists. If you delete the baseline
designated as the earned value baseline, all earned value calculations will be reset when
you recalculate costs.
 You cannot remove or change the original baseline if you have any scope changes, installed
or actual scope quantities, or at least one closed reporting period.
 When a new scenario is created, a notification message is displayed and you can review the
full message in the Inbox.
181
Open a Baseline
Open a baseline if you need to view or update the activity data stored by the baseline. When a
baseline is open, baseline values are used to populate the standard schedule fields, and the
designated baseline fields are empty.
While updating a baseline is not a typical project management practice, there may be situations
where minor adjustments to a baseline need to be made by the project manager or scheduler.
You cannot manually add activities in a baseline, but you can update existing activity data. If the
changes you make to a baseline need to be undone, you can revert the baseline back to its
original state. The baseline must be open before it can be updated or reverted.
Use the Open menu in the page toolbar to switch between your current schedule, schedule
scenarios, and schedule baselines. The list contains your official baselines, any baselines set as
a user baseline preference, and the open baseline. Each official baseline in the list displays the
name of the baseline and its baseline type.
When a baseline is open, a banner appears above the page toolbar to inform you that you are
currently making changes to a baseline. This message is to remind you of the object in which
you are currently working and that any changes made to the baseline do not directly impact your
current schedule, but are reflected in the corresponding baseline fields visible in your current
schedule. The banner can be dismissed for your current session and will reappear when you
reload the page.
To open a baseline:
2) In the Open menu, in the Baselines section, select a baseline to open.
Tips
 The Open menu also contains the following items:
 Current Schedule: Select to open the project's current schedule.
 Scenarios section: Select View All to open the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
 Baselines section: Select View All to open the Manage Baselines dialog box.
 You can open any available baseline from the Manage Baselines dialog box, including
those not listed in the Open menu.
 To revert a baseline, select the Actions  menu, and then select Revert Baseline. This
action cannot be undone.
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Baseline
As your project progresses, new activities may need to be added to the project. These new
activities will not automatically appear in existing baselines. However, if a baseline requires
these activities, you can add them from the current schedule to the baseline. This feature
enables you to update an existing baseline with new activities without having to create a new
baseline that would reflect current progress.
182
Pages
The Get Activities dialog box displays activities that exist in your current schedule but do not
exist in the baseline. The activities that you select in the dialog box will be added to your
baseline. All of an activity's data will also be added, including dates, durations, units, costs,
relationships, resource, role, and scope assignments, risks, codes, and configured fields.
Activities in the selection with the same ID as an activity already in the baseline will not be
added. When activity date indicators are enabled, visual indicators are displayed when a
constraint is configured for the activity or if an actual start date or actual finish date is set.
You can add up to 100 activities from the current schedule to a baseline at one time. You must
have the required security privileges to add and edit activity data for a baseline.
To add activities from the current schedule to a baseline:
2) On the Activities page, open a baseline.
3) Select Actions , and then select Get Activities.
4) In the Get Activities dialog box, select one or more activities to add to your baseline.
5) Select Get.
Tips
 In the Get Activities dialog box, select Display log upon completion to view details from
the Get Activities process.
Set a Baseline as the Current Schedule
Baselines capture the progress of your project at a specific point in time. Baselines are created
for a number of reasons, including at the beginning of the project or before a major schedule
update. If you need to replace your current schedule with the data from a baseline, you can set
the baseline as the current schedule. When a baseline is set as the new current schedule,
baseline details such as dates, durations, units, costs, assignments, and relationships overwrite
the details in the previous current schedule, including any progress updates made to the current
schedule.
Note: Setting a baseline as the current schedule overwrites all current

schedule data except for stored period data for activities that are present
in both the current schedule and the baseline, and that are also started
in the baseline. This action cannot be undone. The process runs in the
background, and you will receive a notification when the process
completes. It is recommended that all users not make changes to the
schedule until the process is complete.
You must have the required security privileges to set a baseline as the current schedule.
To set a baseline as the current schedule:
3) Select Actions , and then select Set as Current Schedule.
4) In the Set as Current Schedule dialog box, select Set.
183
Tips
 After your schedule has been successfully replaced, you may want to run the scheduler and
recalculate costs to ensure that all data is consistent with the current schedule's data date.
 When a baseline is set as the current schedule, the previous current schedule is converted
to a retired schedule scenario. If needed, you can make the previous schedule visible as a
scenario in the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
 Use the Open menu in the Activities page toolbar to switch between baselines. Select View
All in the list to open the Manage Baselines dialog box.
Set User Baseline Preferences
Set up to three baselines as user baseline preferences on the Activities page. User baseline
preferences are typically the baselines that are most important to you. They can be official or
unofficial baselines and can be changed at any time. User baseline fields are populated with the
values stored in the corresponding baseline and can be used as part of your view settings,
including columns, filtering, grouping, and Gantt bars.
Baseline preferences are specific to each user. The baseline preferences you set are only
visible to you. The same baselines can be set as preferences by multiple users.
To set user baseline preferences:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Set User Baseline Preferences.
3) In the Set User Baseline Preferences dialog box, do the following to set your user
baselines:
a. Select Project Baselines to view which baselines are currently set as the current,
original, and supplementary baselines.
b. In the Baseline 1, Baseline 2, and Baseline 3 lists, select the baselines that you want to
set as your user baselines.
c. Select Save.
4) Your user baseline fields are updated with your selections.
Tips
 Deleting a baseline removes it as a baseline preference, but removing a baseline's type does
not remove it as a baseline preference.
Earned Value Overview

Primavera Cloud provides the necessary tools to practice earned value management, a project
management technique to measure project performance against a project plan. As your project
progresses, activities may be delayed, additional resources may be required, and labor costs
may increase. Conversely, there are times when activities are completed ahead of schedule,
with fewer resource hours, and for less money than initially planned. Earned value management
enables you to track, at the project and activity levels, whether you are ahead of or behind
schedule and under or over budget. Use earned value to identify the areas of your project that
did or did not progress according to the project plan, assess the current state of your project in
terms of schedule and cost, and estimate future performance based on your progress so far.
184
Pages
Project progress is measured by comparing values in the current schedule to corresponding

baseline values. To track earned value, you must designate an existing baseline as your earned
value baseline. This will enable earned value calculations to be performed. Earned value is
calculated for individual resource assignments and rolls up to the activity level. Activities without
assignments use activity-level units and costs to calculate earned value. Activity-level earned
value data also rolls up and is displayed at the WBS and project levels.
The following fields form the basis of all other earned value fields and their calculations:
 Planned Value: The budgeted cost of work that is scheduled to be performed by a specified
date, which is typically the project's data date. You can think of this as the approved budget,
which is captured by the earned value baseline.
 Earned Value: The budgeted cost of work that has actually been performed by a specified
date. You can think of this as the portion of the approved budget that has been completed.
 Actual Cost: The actual cost of work that has actually been performed by a specified date.
Whereas the Earned Value field measures how much of the approved budget has been
performed, Actual Cost indicates the total cost required to actually perform the work.
These fields are used in many earned value calculations and can be combined with other project
data to track schedule and cost variances, performance indexes, estimates to complete the
remaining work, and the estimates at completion of all work. Consult Understanding Earned
Value Fields (on page 186) for a detailed breakdown of all earned value fields and calculations
in Primavera Cloud. Incremental and total earned value metrics are also captured when using
store period performance (see "Store Period Performance Overview" on page 237)
capabilities for your schedule, and some can be viewed in the activity usage histogram (see
"Activity Usage Overview" on page 174).
Before getting started with earned value, you should build out your project's schedule, run the
scheduler to set the dates, recalculate your costs to update activity cost fields, and then set
project baselines to establish initial values before work begins. Next, you should designate a
baseline as your earned value baseline so that you can generate earned value metrics. Then,
recalculate costs to set the initial Budget at Completion values for your current schedule to begin
tracking earned value metrics.
Configure the Earned Value Baseline

The earned value baseline is used to calculate the numerous fields used for earned value
management. Before you can view earned value data, you must designate an existing original,
current, or supplementary baseline as the earned value baseline. Designating a particular
baseline as the baseline used in earned value calculations enables you to measure project
progress against other baselines without affecting your existing earned value data.
The original baseline is selected as the default earned value baseline, but this can be changed
at any time. If the selected baseline does not exist in the project, all earned value fields will be
set to 0. It is recommended that you reschedule your project and recalculate project costs on the
Activities page any time you designate a new earned value baseline, update the current earned
value baseline, or create a new baseline with the same type as the current earned value
baseline. This ensures all earned value fields are up-to-date. If you delete the earned value
baseline, all earned value calculations will be reset when you recalculate costs.
To configure the earned value baseline:
1) Navigate to the project settings page (see page 442).
185
2) Select the Earned Value tab.

3) In the Analyze Earned Value Using list, select Original Baseline, Current Baseline, or
Supplementary Baseline.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Understanding Earned Value Fields
Earned value is a project management technique to measure project performance against a
project plan. It consists of calculations that build on each other to allow you to see if you are on
schedule and within budget. It also helps you predict the work left to be finished and how much
your project is expected to cost. This topic will help you better understand how earned value
metrics are calculated and how to use them to analyze your schedule's progress.
Earned value fields are either calculated at the activity level or at the resource assignment level
and then aggregated to the activity level. Activity-level earned value data also rolls up and is
displayed at the WBS and project levels if you have a cost-loaded schedule with an earned
value baseline set. Earned value fields can be added to to your Activities page as columns, bars,
or values on the Gantt chart. You can also monitor earned value changes over time by capturing
the data using Store Period Performance (see "Store Period Performance Overview" on
page 237) and viewing the data over time in the activity usage histogram (see "Activity
Usage Overview" on page 174).
The full definitions of the fields below can be found in Activities Fields (on page 240).
Note: If there is no earned value baseline set, certain fields might use
planned dates instead of baseline data as part of the calculations.
However, it is recommended that you set an earned value baseline
before starting earned value management, and the content in this topic
assumes that an earned value baseline has been set. It is also
recommended that you do not change your earned value baseline after
you begin your earned value analysis, as this could skew your data.
Budget at Completion
Budget at Completion, Budget at Completion Labor Units
Budget at Completion (BAC) and BAC Labor Units reflect the total planned budget and
planned labor units at activity completion. These values are derived from the baseline. BAC
is the sum of your Planned Labor Cost, Planned Nonlabor Cost, and Planned Material Cost.
BAC Labor Units equals the Baseline Planned Labor Units. This is set when you run the
recalculate costs process, and the total costs and units will be pulled from the earned value
baseline.
186
Pages
Percent Complete Fields

Performance Percent Complete, Schedule Percent Complete
The next fields calculated in earned value management are the percent complete fields.
The Performance Percent Complete is the percentage of the activity that has been
completed for the activity up to the data date. The Performance Percent Complete equals the
Activity Percent Complete, which uses the Activity Percent Complete type for the activity to
calculate the percentage.
The Schedule Percent Complete field reflects the percentage of the activity that should be
completed based on the data date. It is calculated as (Data Date - Baseline Start Date) /
(Baseline Finish Date - Baseline Start Date). It is calculated using the updated data date
when the project is scheduled.
Compare your Schedule Percent Complete to your Performance Percent Complete to get an
idea of how your activity is progressing. For example, if you schedule your project and the
activity has a Performance Percent Complete of 25% but a Schedule Percent Complete of
33%, this discrepancy indicates that the percentage of work completed on the activity does
not match the work that was supposed to be completed and the activity has fallen behind.
Note: Although most earned value fields reflect the aggregated totals
when they are rolled up to the project level, Performance Percent
Complete and Schedule Percent Complete use different calculations for
their summary calculations. The summary Schedule Percent Complete is
calculated as summary Planned Value / summary BAC. The summary
Performance Percent Complete is calculated as summary Earned Value
/ summary BAC.
Base Earned Value Fields

Planned Value Cost, Planned Value Labor Units, Earned Value Cost, Earned Value Labor
Units
The base earned value fields use the BAC and percent complete fields for their calculations,
and are used to complete a variance analysis.
Planned Value, also known as the Budgeted Cost of Work Scheduled (BCWS), is the
budgeted cost of work or the portion of budgeted labor units that is scheduled to be
completed by a specified date, usually the data date. The Planned Value fields are
calculated by multiplying the Schedule Percent Complete with the BAC or BAC Labor Units
to get the Planned Value Cost or Planned Value Labor Units, respectively.
Earned Value, also known as the Budgeted Cost of Work Performed (BCWP), is the
budgeted cost of work or the portion of labor units that has actually been completed by a
specified date, usually the data date. The Earned Value fields are calculated by multiplying
the Performance Percent Complete with the BAC or BAC Labor Units to get the Earned
Value Cost or Earned Value Labor Units, respectively.
Variance Earned Value Fields

Schedule Variance, Schedule Variance Labor Units, Schedule Variance Index, Schedule
Variance Index Labor Units, Schedule Performance Index, Schedule Performance Index
Labor Units, Cost Variance, Cost Variance Labor Units, Cost Variance Index, Cost Variance
Index Labor Units, Cost Performance Index, Cost Performance Index Labor Units
187
Perform a variance analysis of your project to see how activity progress is matching up to the
baseline. There are two types of variance analysis you can do: schedule and cost.
A schedule variance analysis enables you to determine if your activities are on schedule by
analyzing the value of the work that has been completed compared to the value of what
should have been completed. The Schedule Variance field is calculated by subtracting the
Planned Value amount from the Earned Value amount. An amount greater than 0 shows that
you are ahead of schedule. Another field, the Schedule Variance Index, is displayed as a
percentage. A negative percentage indicates the percentage of work yet to be completed to
match the baseline, and a positive percentage indicates the work that has been completed
over and above the schedule cost. The Schedule Variance Index is calculated as the
Schedule Variance divided by the Planned Value. As part of variance analysis, you will also
want to look at the Schedule Performance Index (SPI), also known as the "schedule
efficiency," which reflects the relative amount the project is ahead or behind schedule. The
SPI is calculated as Earned Value divided by the Planned Value. A value equal to 1 indicates
that you are on schedule, a value greater than 1 indicates that you are ahead of schedule,
and a value less than 1 indicates that you are behind schedule.
A schedule variance analysis can also be done with labor units. These fields (Schedule
Variance Labor Units, Schedule Variance Index Labor Units, and SPI Labor Units) compare
the utilized labor units with the amount that was supposed to be used based on the baseline.
A cost variance analysis allows you to assess cost performance—are you over or under
budget, or right on track? The Cost Variance field (Earned Value - Actual Total Cost)
calculates the difference between the amount budgeted for the work performed and the
amount actually spent for the work performed. A negative value indicates that the money
spent so far has exceeded the value of the work performed. The Cost Variance is divided by
Earned Value to calculate the Cost Variance Index, which is also displayed as a percentage.
A positive variance percentage indicates the amount that you are under budget, and a
negative variance percentage indicates how over budget you are. The Cost Performance
Index (CPI), which is Earned Value divided by Actual Total Cost, enables you to determine
the project's cost efficiency and to forecast the cost performance for the remainder of the
work. A value equal to 1 means your budget is right on track, a value less than 1 indicates
that you are spending more than planned, and a value greater than 1 indicates you spent
less than planned.
A cost variance analysis can also be done with labor units by comparing the utilized labor
units with the amount that was supposed to be used as per the baseline. These fields include
Cost Variance Labor Units, Cost Variance Index Labor Units, and CPI Labor Units.
Estimate Earned Value Fields

Estimate to Complete, Estimate to Complete Labor Units, Estimate to Complete
Performance Index, Estimate at Completion, Estimate at Completion Labor Units, Variance
at Completion, Variance at Completion Labor Units
The Estimate Earned Value fields provide you with the capability to analyze the predicted
costs and labor units based on your activity progress so far.
188
Pages
The Estimate to Complete (ETC) and ETC Labor Units tell you the cost and labor units that
are needed to complete the activity. The ETC fields are used to calculate the Estimate at
Completion fields. Estimate at Completion (EAC) and EAC Labor Units are the predicted
total cost and labor units to complete the activity. The EAC equals the sum of the Actual
Total Cost and the ETC, and the EAC Labor Units equals the sum of the Actual Labor Units
and the ETC Labor Units.
You can use the ETC Performance Index, which is calculated as (BAC - Earned Value) /
(EAC - Actual Cost), to monitor the efficiency needed to complete the outstanding work
within the budget set by your baseline. A value greater than 1 indicates that the work is over
budget and more effort will be required to reduce costs or increase earned value. A value
less than 1 indicates the work is under budget and that the current effort is sufficient enough
to meet the BAC.
Complete a final variance analysis using the the Variance at Completion (BAC - EAC) and
Variance at Completion Labor Units (BAC Labor Units - EAC Labor Units) fields to see if the
EAC amounts are on track with the baseline total cost and labor units. A value greater than 1
indicates that you may go over budget or utilize more labor units that planned. A
well-planned project will have an equal EAC and BAC and an equal EAC Labor Units and
BAC Labor Units.
Calculations Cheat Sheet

Use the calculations cheat sheet to keep track of earned value calculations. All of the fields
mentioned in this topic are included in the table below.
Field Name Calculation
Budget at Completion Planned Labor Cost + Planned Nonlabor Cost + Planned

(BAC) Material Cost
Budget at Completion This field equals the Baseline Planned Labor Units
(BAC) Labor Units
Performance Percent This field equals the Activity Percent Complete
Complete
Performance Percent summary Earned Value / summary Budget at Completion
Complete (summary)
Schedule Percent (Data Date - Baseline Start Date) / (Baseline Finish Date -
Complete Baseline Start Date)
Schedule Percent summary Planned Value / summary Budget at Completion
Complete (summary)
Planned Value Cost Schedule Percent Complete * Budget at Completion
Planned Value Labor Units Schedule Percent Complete * Budget at Completion Labor
Units
Earned Value Performance Percent Complete * Budget at Completion
189
Earned Value Labor Units Performance Percent Complete * Budget at Completion

Labor Units
Schedule Variance Earned Value - Planned Value
Schedule Variance Labor Earned Value Labor Units - Planned Value Labor Units
Units
Schedule Variance Index Schedule Variance / Planned Value
Schedule Variance Index Schedule Variance Labor Units / Planned Value Labor
Labor Units Units
Schedule Performance Earned Value / Planned Value
Index (SPI)
Schedule Performance Earned Value Labor Units / Planned Value Labor Units
Index (SPI) Labor Units
Cost Variance Earned Value - Actual Total Cost
Cost Variance Labor Units Earned Value Labor Units - Actual Labor Units
Cost Variance Index Cost Variance / Earned Value
Cost Variance Index Labor Cost Variance Labor Units / Earned Value Labor Units
Units
Cost Performance Index Earned Value / Actual Total Cost
(CPI)
Cost Performance Index Earned Value Labor Units / Actual Labor Units
(CPI) Labor Units
Estimate to Complete This field equals the Remaining Total Cost
(ETC)
Estimate to Complete This field equals the Remaining Labor Units
(ETC) Labor Units
Estimate to Complete (Budget at Completion - Earned Value) / (Estimate at
(ETC) Performance Index Completion - Actual Cost)
Estimate at Completion Actual Total Cost + Estimate to Complete
(EAC)
Estimate at Completion Actual Labor Units + Estimate to Complete Labor Units
(EAC) Labor Units
Variance at Completion Budget at Completion - Estimate at Completion
190
Pages
View Earned Value Metrics

Earned value fields on the Activities page provide a variety of metrics for measuring current
project performance against the project's earned value baseline. Add earned value fields to the
table as columns so that their values can be displayed at the project, WBS, and activity levels.
For a full breakdown of the fields used for earned value management, see Understanding
Earned Value Fields (on page 186).
Before you can view the most up-to-date earned value metrics, you should do each of the
following:
1) Schedule the project (see "Schedule a Project" on page 234) to ensure all dates,
durations, and units are updated. Fields such as Schedule Percent Complete and
Performance Percent Complete will be used in earned value calculations.
2) Recalculate costs (see "Recalculate Activity Costs" on page 201) to ensure all earned
value fields are updated. While many earned value fields are automatically recalculated,
fields such as Budget At Completion and Schedule Percent Complete must be manually
recalculated using the Recalculated Costs service.
3) Configure the earned value baseline (on page 185) so that earned value fields can
reference baseline values in their calculations.
To view earned value metrics:
2) Select the  Open Column Selector icon in the column header or the  Settings icon in
the page toolbar.
3) In the column dropdown or Manage Views panel, on the Columns tab, choose from the
following fields, separated by category, used in earned value calculations:
 Earned Value: All of the fields in this category are used for earned value. You may
choose to include all fields in a single view or create multiple views for different purposes,
such as one view for cost fields and another for labor unit fields.
 Financial: Actual Total Cost
 Percentages: Performance Percent Complete, Schedule Percent Complete
 Units: Actual Labor Units
Tips
 If baselines do not exist for the project, all earned value calculations will equal 0.
 All fields in the Earned Value category are read-only.
 View the activity usage histogram (on page 175) to see certain earned value metrics in a
time-phased view of activity usage.
 At the program level, each project uses its designated earned value baseline to calculate
earned value.
 When working in the current schedule, a baseline, or a scenario, all earned value
calculations will use the data of the schedule, baseline, or scenario that is open.
191
 Activities in the current schedule that do not exist in the earned value baseline, such as
copied activities and activities added after the baseline was set, do not have earned value
data. However, copied activities may maintain Estimate To Complete and Estimate At
Completion values, as these fields represent your remaining work and your at completion
value in the current schedule. You can add activities to the earned value baseline if you have
the necessary privileges.
Global Change Overview

The Global Change tool enables you to make changes to a selection of activities in a project at
the same time. It is similar to find and replace functionality in other software applications but with
more powerful capabilities. The global change process is quicker than manually updating many
individual activities with the same data, especially in larger projects. The ability to save global
change configurations enables you to repeat the processes as necessary.
First, add a global change and define the specific values that you want to identify on activity
fields such as codes, configured fields, dates, or durations. Depending on the field, you can
choose to identify static values, rolling values, or a specific range of values. You can identify
values for multiple fields. Next, specify the actions that should be taken when any or all of those
field values are found. This might be changing all activities of a certain type to another type,
modifying activity calendar assignments, or increasing the duration of activities whose durations
fall within a specific range. Changes are only made to activities that meet your specified
conditions. Multiple actions can be taken from a single global change.
Global change functionality is supported by activities in the current schedule, baselines, and
what-if scenarios. One recommended best practice is to run global changes on a scenario to
preview the changes before they are made to your current schedule. If you are satisfied with the
potential changes, you can set that scenario as the current schedule. Use the Schedule
Comparison tool to compare the scenario with global changes to your current schedule. In
addition to manually creating global changes, you can also copy existing global changes from
another project in the same workspace. Global changes and their parameters are saved to the
project and can be run at any time. By default, individual global changes are only visible to the
user who created them, but they can be made publicly accessible to all users who have access
to the project.
You must have the required security privileges to configure and run global changes. You must
also have the required privileges to edit the activities to which you want to make global changes.
If you are making changes in a baseline, the Baselines - Edit Activity Data privilege must also be
enabled. If your security privileges do not enable you to edit the activities, you will not be able to
commit the changes you make.
After a global change process completes, the Activities page automatically updates with any
new values. A global change log is generated, containing the change's parameters, a list of
updated fields and values, and any errors that were encountered. You can access the log from
the system notification you receive when the process is complete, from the Inbox, or from the
Manage Services page.
192
Pages
Add a Global Change

Add as many global changes as necessary to define different activity update scenarios in your
project. Global changes are automatically saved to your project and can be run at any time. By
default, new global changes are only visible to the user who created them, but they can be made
publicly accessible to all users who have access to the project.
Global change parameters consist of If and Then statements. If statements define the field
values that you want to identify on an activity. When a global change is run, each activity in the
project is evaluated against the conditions in the If statement. Then statements specify the
changes to be made when any or all of the field values are found for the activity. Changes are
only made to activities for which the conditions of the If statement are true. Multiple If and Then
conditions can be defined for a global change.
You must have the required security privileges to add, edit, or delete global changes.
After a global change is added or copied, it can be run on demand at any time. For more
information, see Run a Global Change (on page 195).
To add a global change:
2) On the Actions  menu, select Global Change.
3) In the Global Changes panel, select  Add.
Note: If an existing global change is similar to the one you want to

create, you can select the  Context menu next to the global change,
select Duplicate, and then edit the duplicated global change.
4) For the new global change, complete the following fields:

 Name: Enter a name for the new global change.
 Type: Select Private if you want the global change to only be available to you. Select
Public if you want the global change to be available to all project users.
5) In the Parameters panel, configure the following global change parameters:
a. In the If section:
 Select All of the following or Any of the following to specify which If conditions
must be true.
 Select  Add a condition.
 Select the Field that you want to identify on an activity.
 Select the Operator for the field. The values available are specific to the type of
field selected.
 Enter the Value that you want to identify for the selected field. Depending on the
field and operator selected, you may need to enter a string value, select a
predefined value, or define a range of values.
 (Optional) Add conditions to define more If criteria. Select the  Context menu
next to a condition to delete it.
b. In the Then section:
193
 Select  Add a condition.

 Select a Field, Operator, and Value to define the changes to be made to each
activity that satisfies the conditions of the If statement.
 (Optional) Add conditions to define more Then criteria. Select the  Context
menu next to a condition to delete it.
Tips
 In the Global Changes panel, select  Settings to configure columns, filters, and grouping
options for the list of global changes.
 In the global change list, select the  Context menu to add, duplicate, run, or delete a
global change.
 You can also copy existing global changes from other projects in your workspace. See Copy
a Global Change from Another Project (on page 194) for more information.
Copy a Global Change from Another Project
If you plan to use the same global change parameters across multiple projects, you can save
time by copying one or more existing global changes from another project into your current
project. You can choose to copy public global changes or private global changes if you are the
owner or an application administrator. Global changes can only be copied from projects in the
same workspace as the project you are working in. After a global change is copied, the new
global change can be modified without affecting the original.
To copy a global change from another project, you must have the required security privileges to
add and edit global changes.
After a global change is added or copied, it can be run on demand at any time. For more
information, see Run a Global Change (on page 195).
To copy a global change from another project:
3) In the Global Changes panel, select Get Global Changes.
4) In the Get Global Changes dialog box, do the following:
a. Select the project whose global changes you want to copy. The list contains projects that
belong to the same workspace as your current project.
b. Select Next.
c. Select the check box next to any global changes that you want to copy. Select the 
Preview icon to preview the global change's parameters.
d. Select Copy.
5) The selected global changes are copied to your project.
194
Pages
Run a Global Change

Run a global change to modify the activities identified by the change's parameters. Any activities
that do not meet the conditions of the parameters will not be modified. You can run a global
change against the current schedule, a baseline, or a what-if scenario.
When you run a global change, the application first confirms the validity of your parameters. If
any parameters are invalid, the process will fail and provide an error message. If the parameters
are valid, you will be prompted to confirm that you understand the potential impact to your
current schedule, baseline, or scenario. The global change process has the ability to modify a
large amount of project data at one time, and it may be difficult or impossible to undo all
changes. After you confirm and run the process it will begin, and you will receive a notification
when it completes. You can access the detailed log for a completed global change from the
notifications panel, from the Inbox, or from the Manage Services page.
You must have the required security privileges to run a global change. You must also have the
privileges required to edit the activities to which you want to make global changes. If you are
making changes in a baseline, the Baselines - Edit Activity Data privilege must also be enabled.
If your security privileges do not enable you to edit the activities, you will not be able to commit
the changes you make.
If necessary, you can modify a global change's parameters before you run it. For steps on
modifying the parameters for a global change, see Add a Global Change (on page 193).
To run a global change:
3) In the Global Changes panel, select a global change from the list, and then select Run.
4) If the global change parameters are valid, you will be prompted to confirm that you want to
run the global change. Select the check box, and then select Run. The global change
process will begin. You will receive a notification upon its completion.
Tips
 You can only run one global change at a time.
 In the Global Changes panel, select  Settings configure columns, filters, and grouping
options for the list of global changes.
Global Change Log
The global change log displays the results of a global change process run from the Activities
page. It includes basic details such as start and finish times for the process, the parameters
used for the change, a list of updated fields and their old and new values, and any errors that
were encountered during the process.
The global change log can be accessed from the notifications panel, Inbox, and the Manage
Services page.
Global Change Overview (on page 192)
195
Leveling Overview
When you schedule a project, the schedule is calculated based upon the activity requirements,
not resource or role availability. Consequently, two activities requiring the same role or resource
may be scheduled to occur simultaneously in the project schedule. To resolve this
overallocation, you can level the project. Leveling ensures that roles or resources are not
overallocated for projects by reducing or eliminating overloads for assignments to more than one
activity within a project. During leveling, the role or resource assignments for all scheduled
activities are compared to the role or resource availability at the time of leveling, and an activity
is only scheduled to occur when its resource or role demands can be met. To achieve this, the
system delays activities so that the overallocated roles or resources work on activities
consecutively, instead of simultaneously.
Configure the Leveling Priority

To handle scheduling conflicts that may occur during leveling, you can configure priorities that
specify the order in which activities are delayed in the schedule. Use the Leveling Priority field to
assign a priority to the activities in your project. When you level your project, you can establish a
sort order for the activities based upon their assigned leveling priority. The priority rankings can
be sorted in ascending or descending order, and are used to guide the leveler as to which
activities it should move or not move. The sort order controls which activities are moved around
first in the project schedule during the leveling process.
To configure leveling priorities for project activities:
2) Apply a view that displays the Leveling Priority column, or add the column to the current
view.
3) In the Leveling Priority list, select a priority value.
Tips
 You can also establish leveling priorities using various other project activity fields. When this
is done, the leveling order is created based upon the values assigned to the selected field
and the chosen sort order. For instance, you can sort activities by remaining duration in
descending order so that those activities with the longest remaining duration are the first to
be moved around in the project schedule during the leveling process.
Level a Resource or Role
Leveling is a process that helps you ensure that sufficient roles or resources are available to
perform the activities in your project according to the schedule.
To level a project:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Level.
3) In the Level dialog box, do the following:
 Select a leveling method: Resources or Roles.
196
Pages
 Select Preserve scheduled early and late dates to preserve activity early and late
dates as scheduled rather than adjust them during the leveling process.
 Select Recalculate costs upon completion to automatically recalculate costs after the
leveling process completes.
 Select Display leveling log upon completion to automatically display the leveling log
when the leveling process is complete.
4) Choose whether to level all resources or roles, or specify the ones you want to level by
moving them to the Selected list.
5) To configure leveling priority settings, select the Prioritization tab, and select fields and a
sort order to prioritize activities. Your priorities are used to handle scheduling conflicts that
might occur during leveling, and determine which activity is leveled first.
 Field: Select a field to be considered a leveling priority.
 Sort Order: Specify the order how the field is prioritized.
6) Do one of the following:
 Select Save to save your leveling settings.
 Select Level Now to run the leveler.
Note: Multiple float paths are not recalculated when you run the leveler.
Tips
 The resulting dates represent the optimum positioning for the activities based on current
resource and role assignments. However, if you reschedule the project without using the
leveling option, the dates will return to their original position.
 When you run the leveler, the project is automatically scheduled according to the last
scheduling settings.
 After you level the resources or roles for a project, you can review the log to view data and
statistics about the leveling process. Because the scheduler is also run during the process,
schedule information is included in the log. You can access the log from the Level dialog box
by selecting View Log, from the system notification you receive when the leveling process is
complete, or from the Manage Services page. When the leveler is run, the application
checks for loops, or circular relationships, in the activity relationship logic. If a loop is
detected, then the leveler fails. You can view the error report with the activities in the loop
from the scheduling/leveling log. To resolve the loop, return to the Activities page and view
the relationship trace logic for the activities in the loop and remove a relationship.
197
Scheduling/Leveling Log
The leveling log displays the results of the resources or roles leveling process run from the
Activities page. Because the leveling process automatically schedules the project, the log also
contains the same scheduling results found in the scheduling log. The log includes start and
finish times for the process, a list of the settings selected for both the scheduler and leveler,
project statistics, process results, and any warnings that were encountered during the process
that require attention. The leveling log also displays any errors that cause the leveler to fail. The
leveler might fail if a loop is detected in the activity relationships. A loop, or circular relationship,
is caused by an activity relationship that leads back to an earlier activity in the activity sequence.
If the leveler fails due to a loop, then the scheduling/leveling log lists all activities involved in the
loop, starting at the beginning of the relationship logic. To resolve the loop, return to the
Activities page and view the relationship trace logic for the activities in the loop and remove a
relationship.
The leveling log can be set to display upon completion when run from the Level dialog box on
the Activities page. Select View Log in the dialog box to display the log from the most recently
run process. You can also access leveling logs from the notifications panel or from the Manage
Services page.
Leveling Overview (on page 196)
Program Milestones Overview

Program Milestones is a standard view found on the Activities page. This view enables you to
see a high-level picture of how the projects within your program are progressing based on their
milestones.
You can enable the view by selecting it from the View menu on the Activities page, setting it as
active from the Manage Views panel, or by selecting the Milestone Summary page in the sidebar
at the program level.
View Program Milestones on the Activities Page

Use the Program Milestones view on the Activities page to track the milestone progress of your
program's projects. Milestones mark significant events in a project, such as the beginning of the
project, the start or end of a new phase, and the completion of the project. The status of these
milestones can give a high-level look at how each of your projects is progressing. Milestone
details are shown and can be edited in the grid and detail windows of the Activities page. Enable
the Gantt view to show milestone markers along a timeline.
Program Milestones is a standard view type. Standard views are preconfigured views that come
with Primavera Cloud. You cannot add, edit, or delete standard view options, but you can modify
the view and save the changes as a new view of another type. The Program Milestones view
displays only those project milestones that you have selected to display at the program level.
The view contains columns that pertain to milestones and groups the page by project. A
standard filter, also called Program Milestones, is automatically applied. It displays activities
whose Program Milestone option is selected. See Assign an Activity Type to an Activity (on
198
Pages
If it is applied at the project level, the Program Milestones view will only show the milestones
from a single project. At the program level, the view will show milestones from all of the projects
within the program.
To view program milestones on the Activities page:
2) Enable the Program Milestones view by doing either of the following:
 Select the View menu, and then select Program Milestones under the Standard
grouping.
 Select  Settings. In the Manage Views panel, select the Program Milestones view,
select the  Context menu, and then select Set Active.
3) To display the Gantt view, select the Layout  menu, and then select  Gantt. Markers are
displayed for each project's milestones.
Tips
 If you want to modify the Program Milestones view:
 Modify the view directly on the Activities page. You will be prompted to save your
changes as a new personal or workspace view.
 Modify the view in the Manage Views panel. Apply your changes, and then save them as
a new personal or workspace view.
 Copy the view in the Manage Views panel, and then paste it under the Workspace or
Personal grouping. You can now make changes to the new view.
 Selecting Milestone Summary from the program-level Schedule app in the sidebar will
redirect you to the programs Activities page. The Program Milestones view will be
automatically applied.
Recalculate Costs Overview

As your project progresses and data is modified, some activity and assignment cost values may
become outdated. This may be due to regular schedule updates, changes made to related data
on other pages, or other users also updating the same cost data. Some cost values are updated
automatically, while other values must be updated using the Recalculate Costs service. In some
situations, you may be prompted to recalculate costs before any changes are made.
Cost values might be entered directly in cost fields or by modifying other fields to which they may
be connected. The application recalculates costs by checking to see if any field values that are
connected to cost fields have been updated. The cost fields are then recalculated using these
updated field values. Assignment costs roll up to the activity level, and activity costs are spread
among the activity's assignments. Changes to a field value at the activity or assignment level
may impact cost fields such as Planned, Actual, Remaining, At Completion, or Total fields.
Earned value fields rely on the current schedule and a designated earned value baseline to
perform their calculations. Depending on changes made to activities or assignments in the
current schedule, to the earned value baseline, or to the earned value baseline setting, you may
need to run Recalculate Costs to ensure all earned value fields are up-to-date.
199
When you recalculate costs, you can also choose to recalculate project usage spreads as well.
When this option is enabled, then running the recalculate costs calculates resource assignment
and activity spreads and aggregates the spreads for the project.
When should I run the Recalculate Costs service?

The service should be run whenever changes are made to your project that will affect cost
values in your schedule. Before recalculating, it is recommended that you schedule the project
(see "Schedule a Project" on page 234) to ensure the field values used in the calculations are
up-to-date.
You should recalculate costs (see "Recalculate Activity Costs" on page 201) in the following
situations:
 The project's Default Price/Unit value is changed. Labor and nonlabor costs on activities
without assignments will be recalculated. Milestone costs and material costs on activities
without assignments are entered manually and are not dependent on the Default Price/Unit
value, so they will not be recalculated.
 Scheduling or leveling the project causes a change in assignment dates. Assignments can
have multiple availability periods with different Price/Unit rates. A change in assignment
dates may cause them to be scheduled across different price rate periods. When scheduling
or leveling your project, you can set costs to recalculate automatically after the scheduler or
leveler is run.
 An Effective Start Date or Price/Unit rate is added or changed for a resource or role that is
assigned to an activity. A different availability period or Price/Unit rate may cause activity
costs to change.
 The earned value baseline is modified, replaced, or deleted, or if the earned value baseline
setting is changed. The fields used for earned value management use the values of the
earned value baseline in their calculations.
 Changes are made to resource assignment or activity fields that are used in earned value
calculations. Schedule Percent Complete values are updated after scheduling, while
Planned Values are updated after recalculating costs. These two fields form the basis of
many earned value fields.
When are costs recalculated automatically?

Costs may be automatically recalculated at the activity or assignment level when you do any of
the following:
 Edit an activity's cost, date, duration, percent complete, or unit values.
 Add or replace a resource or role assignment.
 Staff a role with a resource.
 Edit an assignment's cost, dates, duration, percent complete, units, or units/time values.
 Modify an assignment's curve value.
 Delete an assignment.
When am I prompted to recalculate costs?

If updating certain assignment values will cause a change in the assignment's costs or the
activity's costs, you may be prompted to confirm your changes. You can choose to accept the
changes and or cancel the changes and retain the current costs.
200
Pages
You will be prompted when you do any of the following:

 Change an assignment's Rate Source or Rate Type values.
 Directly modify an assignment's Price/Unit value.
 Enable an assignment's Calculate Costs from Units setting.
 Delete all labor or all nonlabor assignments from an activity. You will be prompted to retain
the labor or nonlabor unit and cost values on the activity or reset them to 0.
Recalculate Activity Costs
Cost values on the Activities page may need to be recalculated as the project progresses and
users make changes to the schedule, activities, resource and role assignments, and earned
value baseline. While many cost values are recalculated automatically, some cost calculations
include values from other pages and must be run manually. Recalculating costs ensure the
Activities page shows the most up-to-date cost information. Before recalculating project costs,
you should always schedule the project (see "Schedule a Project" on page 234) to update the
field values used in the calculations.
For more information on cost values that are recalculated automatically and cost values that
must be recalculated using Recalculate Costs, see Recalculate Costs Overview (on page
199).
To recalculate activity costs:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Recalculate Costs.
3) In the Confirm dialog box, select Yes to run the recalculation process.
Tips
 You can recalculate costs for the current schedule, a baseline, or a scenario. Costs are only
recalculated for the schedule, baseline, or scenario that is currently open.
 After you recalculate activity costs, open the recalculate costs log to view some basic data
and statistics about the process, including start and finish date, the project it was run on, and
whether resource assignment costs and activity costs were recalculated. If you enabled
calculating project usage spreads when running recalculate costs, open the project usage
log to view basic data about the process, including start and finish dates, the project it was
run on, and whether the process was a success. You can access the logs from the
notifications panel, Inbox, and the Manage Services page.
 When scheduling your project (see "Schedule a Project" on page 234) or leveling your
resources and roles, you can select the Recalculate costs upon completion option to
automatically recalculate costs after they are run.
Recalculate Costs Log (Activities Page)
After you recalculate costs on the Activities page, this log provides details about the
recalculation service. The log displays the start and finish times for the process, the projects on
which costs were recalculated, and whether costs were recalculated on resource assignments,
activities, or both.
You can access recalculate cost logs from the notifications panel, from the Inbox, or from the
201

Recalculate Activity Costs (on page 201)
Resource and Role Usage Overview

The Activities page provides time-phased views of resource and role usage for the activities in
your project in the form of histograms and spreadsheets. These can be configured to show
resource and role unit and cost data across the timeline of the project.
Resource and role data is displayed in separate tabs in the Project Usage detail window. Each
tab supports a tree to select resources or roles and three distinct views to display their data:
 Not Stacked Histogram: Units or costs can be broken down into planned, actual, and a
variety of remaining early and remaining late field values. In the settings, enable bars and
cumulative curves that aggregate each field's values for the resources or roles selected in
the resource or role tree. For units, toggle the display of a max availability line to show the
allocation limits for the selected resources or roles. Toggle overallocation bars to see where
schedule adjustments or additional assignments may be necessary.
The Not Stacked Histogram displays cumulative usage values in an S-curve style chart. The
planned usage curve plots the progression of planned units or costs over time for the
selected resources or roles. The actual curve tracks actuals up to the latest date they exist,
typically the data date. The remaining early and remaining late curves begin where the actual
curve ends, indicating the remaining work to be performed. It is possible for the remaining
curves to be plotted on the same points in time, in which case the remaining early curve will
be shown on top. In a program, projects with different data dates may show the actual curve
from one project plotted on the same points as a remaining curve of a different project. The
two curves are shown as dashed lines to indicate overlapping values. It is recommended that
all projects in a program are scheduled with the same data date.
 Stacked Histogram: At completion values are shown as stacked bars, with each bar
representing a different resource or role scheduled during that time period. You can also
stack the bars by a specific resource/role code.
Additional options, such as chart legends, sight lines, and bar values are available in the
settings for both histograms. The histograms display the spreads of resources and roles
according to the calendar used by each of their activity assignments. This depends on an
activity's duration type, which controls whether to use the activity's calendar or the calendars
of each of its assignments. Resource and role underallocation and overallocation indications
are determined by their individual resource calendars.
 Spreadsheet: Unit and cost data in the spreadsheet is aggregated to spreadsheet row totals
and distributed across a timescale. Each selected resource or role shows time-phased units
and costs optionally grouped by a summary band containing unit and cost totals. In the
settings, you can select incremental and cumulative fields to display as rows in the
spreadsheet. You can also configure grouping bands to more easily view each resource or
role grouping.
The histograms and spreadsheets display the usage of activity assignments in your current
schedule. Usage data in an open baseline or schedule scenario is not reflected. At the program
level, view resource and role usage for activities in each of the projects within the program.
202
Pages
Understanding Role Availability

You can enter units in time-phased intervals on the timescale as job-hours or as full-time
equivalent (FTE) values. FTE represents the number of full-time employees needed to complete
the work in a specified time period. Planning units using FTE values makes it easy to compare
work requirements across time intervals with different durations (such as months) and manage
multiple roles that may all have different calendar availabilities. Depending on your user
preferences, FTE can be entered as units/duration (whole numbers and decimals) or as
percentages. Use the following guidelines to fill in the FTE value:
 If only one full time employee is needed to complete the work for the time period
specified, enter a value of 1.0 (or 100%) for the FTE.
 If more than one full time employee is needed to complete the work, enter a value that
equals the number of employees needed. For example, if four full time employees are
needed to complete the work, enter a value of 4.0 (or 400%) for the FTE.
 If the work can be done by part time employees or full time employees working less than
the number of hours expected for the time period, you can enter the FTE in decimals to
indicate the percentage of the time period that needs to be worked. For example, if you
only need a part time employee working half of the hours expected for the time period,
you can enter an FTE of 0.5 (or 50%). Or, for example, if the role needs to be done by a
full time employee working full time and an additional part time employee working half of
the hours, then you can enter an FTE of 1.5 (or 150%).
On the Resource or Role Usage Charts, you can toggle on FTE to view the resource or role
units in FTE (your organization might refer to this as "man-days"). FTE values are displayed in
the timescale set for the Gantt chart for the page. The working days and hours represented in
the FTE values are determined by the calendar associated to the resources or role assignments.
Here is an example to understand how to interpret the FTE values on the Resource or Role
Usage histograms. In this example, you have 1 full-time resource assigned to 1 activity; the
activity duration is a year. The calendar assigned to the resource sets a 5 day work week, with 8
hours per work day. When the timescale is set to Week/Day, the FTE is 1 because there is 1
work day with a full-time employee working. When the timescale is set to Month/Week, the FTE
value for the week is 5 to represent the 5 working days of the resource. When the timescale is
set to Quarter/Month, the FTE will be equal to the number of working days in the month (for
example, 22); and so on for the rest of the timescale options. If you have two full-time resources
for the activity, then the values will be doubled, to represent two full-time workers on a work day.
Configure Resource and Role Usage Settings
Configure settings for the usage histograms and spreadsheets on the Activities page. Set
separate stacked and not stacked histogram view options, as well as settings that apply to both
views. Resource and role histogram settings are configured separately, but you can enable an
option to synchronize them so that the same configuration of settings is used for both. For the
resource and role usage spreadsheets, you can select the incremental and cumulative unit or
cost fields that will be used as spreadsheet rows. You can also configure grouping bands for the
spreadsheet. Resource and role histogram and spreadsheet settings are configured separately.
All configuration settings are saved with the view. The resource and role histograms and
spreadsheets can only be viewed from the current schedule.
203
To configure usage settings:

Note: At the program level, this option is named Program Usage.
4) Select the Resource Usage or Role Usage detail window.

5) Select  Settings.
6) In the Settings panel, on the Histogram tab, configure the following sections:
 Not Stacked: This section contains settings for the  Not Stacked Histogram view.
 Bars & Curves option: Select Show Units or Show Costs to display unit or cost
data in either histogram.
 In the chart options table, choose graph bars and cumulative curves to display for
each unit or cost field. Choose a color for each field's bar and curve.
 Display actuals using period values: Displays the Period Actual values for the
resource assignments. When unselected, the histogram displays the Actuals.
 (Show Units only) Overallocation: Displays overallocated hours as a red bar.
 (Show Units only) Max Availability: Displays a line representing the combined
maximum availability of the selected resources or roles.
Note: When FTE is enabled, the Overallocation and Max Availability

settings are hidden.
 Graph: Toggle display options that apply to the unstacked and stacked histogram views.
 Legend: A legend for the histograms' bars and curves.
 Data date line: A line at the project's data date. For a program, the data date line
will be on the earliest data date in the program.
 Horizontal sight lines: A line for each Y-axis interval.
 Vertical sight lines: A line for each X-axis interval.
 Values on bars: The value of each bar is displayed on the bar.
 Values on curves: The value of each curve is displayed on the curve.
 Calendar: The calendar being used by the project is displayed next to the graph.
 Stacked: Configure settings for the  Stacked Histogram view.
 By default, stacked histogram bars are grouped by individual resources or roles.
To group stacked bars according to a specific assigned resource/role code, select
Stack by resource/role code, and then choose a code.
 To display cumulative curves for the stacked histogram, select Show cumulative
curves, and then choose Individual cumulative curves or a single Total
cumulative curve.
 To show the value for each section of the stacked histogram bar, select Show
individual values in bars.
204
Pages
 In the Resource Usage settings, select Use Role Usage Settings to synchronize the
settings between the two histograms. In the Role Usage settings, this option is called
Use Resource Usage Settings. When enabled, settings changes made in one
histogram will be updated in the other. When disabled, you can configure independent
settings for each histogram.
 (Show Units only): Select FTE to show selected resource or role units as FTE values in
the histograms and spreadsheets. When FTE is enabled, the Overallocation and Max
Availability settings are hidden. This toggle is also shown below the usage charts. Cost
values are not affected by the FTE toggle.
7) On the Spreadsheet Rows tab, select the cumulative and incremental unit and cost fields
that you want to apply to the resource usage or role usage spreadsheet.
8) On the Spreadsheet Grouping tab, select the grouping style and color theme that you want
to apply to the resource usage or role usage spreadsheet.
9) Select Apply.
View the Resource and Role Histograms and Spreadsheets
The histograms and spreadsheets on the Activities page enable you to view time-phased unit
and cost data for the resources and roles assigned to activities in your project. Select resources
or roles from the tree in the Project Usage detail window to display their data in the histogram or
spreadsheet. The Not Stacked Histogram shows aggregated planned, actual, and remaining
values. You can also enable max availability and overallocation indicators in the settings. The
Stacked Histogram shows at completion values. It can also be set to stack by a specific
resource/role code. The Spreadsheet can be configured to display a variety of incremental and
cumulative field data. The resource and role histograms and spreadsheets can only be viewed
from the current schedule.
To view the resource or role histogram or spreadsheet:
Note: At the program level, this option is named Program Usage.
4) In the detail window, select the Resource Usage or Role Usage tab.
5) Before viewing your resource or role usage data, configure the usage settings (see
"Configure Resource and Role Usage Settings" on page 203) to ensure the appropriate
information is displayed, such as units or costs, bars and curves, legend details, and
spreadsheet formatting.
6) Select one or more resources or roles from the tree whose data you want to display.
7) To limit the display of activities in the activities table, in the dropdown list in the detail window
toolbar, select one of the following:
 Show all activities above: Show all activities regardless of the current resource or role
selections. This does not include activities hidden by filters.
 Show activities for selected time period: Only show activities whose dates fall within
the time period configured in the From: and To: date fields displayed in the detail window
toolbar.
205
 Show activities for selected resources: Only show activities that have assignments for
any of the selected resources or roles.
8) In the detail window toolbar, select  Not Stacked Histogram or  Stacked Histogram to
switch between histogram views. Select  Spreadsheet to view the spreadsheet data for
your selection.
9) In a histogram, hover over a bar or curve to view its details.
In the spreadsheet, unit or cost values are rolled up for each resource or role and broken
down by individual activity assignments.
10) With units displayed, in a histogram or spreadsheet, select the FTE toggle to show the
selected resource or role units as FTE values. When FTE is enabled, axis labels and units
are updated to show FTE values, and overallocation bars and max availability lines are
hidden. Disable the option to show the FTE values as time units. Cost values are not
affected by the FTE toggle.
Tips
 Resource and role values are spread according to the calendar in use by each of their
activity assignments. This depends on an activity's duration type. In the histogram legend,
the Calendar label indicates which resource calendar is being used to determine the
underallocation and overallocation values of the resources or roles that are selected. If all
selected resources or roles use the same calendar, it will be shown in the Calendar label. If
the selected resources or roles do not all use the same calendar, the project's default
calendar will be shown in the Calendar label.
 The Gantt chart, histogram, and spreadsheet timescales are synchronized, so timescale
range or granularity changes in the Gantt are automatically reflected in the histogram and
spreadsheet. Changes to the histogram or spreadsheet timescales do not automatically
reflect in the Gantt.
 In the context of a program, ensure all projects have the same Data Date. This will align
them in the usage charts along the same time periods.
 You can increase the size of the usage charts by enlarging the detail window panel and by
dragging the vertical divider between the tree and the histogram or spreadsheet. Enlarging
the charts does not increase the amount of data shown, just the size of the currently
displayed data.
 The print layout will only display and print what is currently being shown in the usage panel
based on the resources or roles selected in the tree. Data preceding or succeeding what is
being shown in the panel will not be shown in the print preview and is not printable. Use the
previous tips to configure the usage panel before opening the print options.
 The histograms and spreadsheets display the usage of the activity assignments in your
current schedule. Usage data in an open baseline or schedule scenario is not reflected.
Print Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource Usage Histogram
You can print the Activity Usage, Resource Usage, or Role Usage histograms for a time-phased
view of your activity, resource, or role usage. The data in the histogram is an aggregated display
of usage data for roles, resources, or activities.
To print the Activity Usage, Role Usage, or Resource usage histogram:
1) Navigate to the project Activities page (see page 437)
206
Pages
2) In the Activities page, in the Open menu, select Current Schedule.

3) In the detail window, in the activity details/project usage menu select Project Usage, and
then select the Activity Usage, Resource Usage, or the Role Usage tab.
4) Before viewing your usage data, configure the resource and usage settings (see
"Configure Resource and Role Usage Settings" on page 203) or configure the activity
usage settings (see "Configure Activity Usage Settings" on page 174) to ensure the
appropriate information is displayed, such as units or costs, bars and curves, legend details,
and spreadsheet formatting.
5) When printing Resource Usage or Role Usage data, select one or more resources or roles
from the list whose data you want to display.
6) In the detail window toolbar, select  Not Stacked Histogram or  Stacked Histogram.
Note: The  Stacked Histogram option is only available when

printing Resource or Role Usage histograms.
7) Configure the page view according to your needs, and then select  Print to open the
Print Options panel.
adjust each margin.
each page.
Content :
 In the Settings panel, select the settings that you want to appear in the chart.
for the timescale. When Reporting Period is selected as the timescale interval you can
designate the use of custom labels for the reporting period by selecting Custom label
only.
Note: The Reporting Period timescale is only available in a Project view.
 Select Use rolling dates to configure rolling start and end dates. Enter a value in
Timescale units per page to define the number of timescale units displayed on each
page of the chart.
207
Note: The Edit Content option is only available when printing Activity
Usage.

Revisions dialog box, you can enter text, rearrange and resize columns, and modify the
select Save.
Note: The Revision Box editor is not available for Resource Usage or
Role usage printing.
your needs.
16) To reset your selection to the default settings, select Restore Default Settings.
208
Pages
Tips
Resource-Loaded Scheduling Overview

The topics in this procedure explain the process of configuring and using resource and role
activity assignments in your schedule. Activity assignments enable you to plan your activity units
and costs based on the resources and roles assigned to perform the work on each activity.
Depending on your organization's preferences, you may be working with resource and role units,
costs, or both. Your organization may also choose to not use resource assignments at all and
instead update units and costs directly on each activity. If this describes your organization, you
should consult the individual help topics found in Modify Activity Details (on page 142).
Project planning is not a linear process. You may need to change workspace and project
settings, add new resources, modify the schedule, and adjust resource and role assignments
many times throughout your project's lifecycle. While the recommended sequence of steps is
described below, most of these steps can be performed as many times as necessary and in any
order. You can plan projects individually or use a program to plan a group of related projects.
Prerequisites
Before you begin statusing your activities using resource and role assignments, you should
ensure that the following prerequisites are completed:
 Configure workspace and project settings: Use the Get Started with Schedule section
(Primavera Cloud only) to configure user privileges, dictionaries, object default settings, and
object options. Then, configure project-level settings such as activity defaults and
calculations, auto numbering, project calendars, and more. Topics related to resource and
role configuration are indicated in their descriptions.
 Add resources and roles: Use the Resource List (see "Resource List Overview" on page
272) and Role List (see "Role List Overview" on page 294) pages in the Resources app to
create workspace-level and project-level resources and roles. Depending on your
organization's preferences, you may be using only resources or roles in your projects, or
using resource associations to staff role assignments. Both resources and roles can be
added at the workspace or project levels depending on whether they will be used across
multiple projects in the workspace or just one project. Project resources and roles can be
promoted to the workspace level after they are created.
While these sections discuss the configuration of all resource and role details, ensure that
the resources and roles you will be assigning to your activities have defined calendars, work
availability, and rates. This information is used to calculate when a resource or role can work,
how much work they can perform, and how much the work will cost.
209
 Build your schedule: Define the Work Breakdown Structure (see "Create a WBS" on
page 123) to arrange your activities into hierarchical levels. Create activities (see "Create
an Activity" on page 139) to describe the project work that must be performed. The Modify
Activity Details (on page 142) section contains topics for all activity details that can be
edited, including resource and role assignments, units, and costs. If you will not be
progressing activities using resource or role assignments, you can consult the individual
topics contained in that section. If you will be entering activity details at the assignment level,
follow the series of topics below, which sequences the same assignment, unit, and cost
topics into a recommended order.
Build a Resource-Loaded Schedule

After your schedule takes shape, you can begin to designate resources and roles to work on
your activities. Enter units and costs on each assignment to quantify the labor and cost
requirements of the activity. At any stage of the project lifecycle, including planning and
execution, you can use a variety of tools to monitor your resources and roles for allocation and
staffing issues. When these issues are found, you can take the necessary steps to resolve them.
Follow the steps below to build a resource-loaded schedule:
 Create activity assignments
 Assign a Role to an Activity (on page 152): If you will be adding general job
requirements to each activity during the early planning stages of your project, assign
roles to the activities and later staff them with specific resources. If your project will not
use resource assignments, you can just directly assign roles.
 Staff a Role Assignment (on page 154): Add a resource to an existing role assignment
when you know which resource should be assigned to fulfill the role. You can see all of
the resources associated with the role to help you make the best choice.
 Assign a Resource to an Activity (on page 155): Assign resources directly if you
already know the resource that will perform the work or if your project will not use role
assignments.
 Enter activity units and costs
 Configure Assignment Calculation Options (on page 158): The cost of a resource or
role assignment is determined by its units and its rate. Before you enter units and costs
on an assignment, you should specify the source of the assignment's rate, the type of
rate, and whether the assignment's costs should be calculated in proportion to its units or
independent of them.
 Enter Activity Units (on page 149): Units entered at the activity level are distributed
among its resource and role assignments. Units entered on individual assignments roll up
to the activity level. If cost values are defined for the project or activity assignments,
updating an activity's units may also update its costs.
 Enter Activity Costs (on page 150): Similar to units, an activity's costs are distributed to
its assignments and assignment costs are rolled up to the activity. Depending on your
assignment's calculation options, activity costs can be entered directly or calculated from
units.
210
Pages
Assign a Curve to a Resource or a Role Assignment (on page 159): A curve

determines how an assignment's units are spread across the duration of the assignment.
By default, units are spread evenly using a linear curve, but other curve patterns include
front-loaded, back-loaded, and bell curve. Updating an assignment's units may also
update its costs.
 Recalculate Activity Costs (on page 201): You should frequently recalculate the cost
values on the Activities page to ensure they are up-to-date and accurate.
 Monitor resource and role usage
 Usage Histograms and Spreadsheets (see "Resource and Role Usage Overview" on
page 202): Monitor unit and cost usage data directly from the Activities page for the
resources and roles assigned to activities in to your project. Select individual resources
or roles to view their planned, actual, and remaining data as bars and curves in
time-phased histograms, or customize columns and rows to view data in a spreadsheet
format.
 Assignment List (see "Assignment List Overview" on page 311): Review unit and cost
allocations in a time-phased spreadsheet for the resources assigned to your project. You
can analyze resource data in a variety of ways by customizing the view. View options
include grouping assignments by resource to view each resource's total units and costs
across the project, grouping assignments by activity to view activity unit and cost totals,
or grouping resources by their associated roles to see which roles are still unstaffed. This
page is available in the Resources app for workspace-level and project-level resources.
 Analysis (see "Analysis Overview" on page 324): View separate time-phased
spreadsheets for the resources and roles available to your workspace, project, or
program. For each resource, view max availability units, the number of currently allocated
units, and the number of units by which the resource is underallocated or overallocated.
For each role, view max availability units, the number of staffed remaining units, and the
number of unstaffed remaining units. You can also view the selected resource or role's
units displayed in a histogram.
References
The topics below provide additional information about resource units and costs.
 Understanding Activity Units and Costs (on page 212): This topic introduces the various
reference topics that relate to unit and cost fields.
 Activity Unit and Cost Fields (on page 212): Review the unit and cost fields you can
use to record progress on your activities and resource and role assignments.
 Entering Activity and Assignment Units and Costs (on page 212): A variety of
settings and the presence of resource assignments control when you can add unit and
cost values to the activity and assignment levels.
 Valid Activity Unit and Cost Values (on page 215): Depending on an activity's resource
type and the number of resources or roles assigned to it, you can enter either positive or
negative unit and cost values at the activity and assignment levels.
 Recalculate Costs Overview (on page 199): This topic explains which cost values are
updated automatically, which prompt you to recalculate, and which must be manually
recalculated using the Recalculate Activity Costs service.
211
 Resource Assignment Detail Window Fields (on page 217): Reference the definitions of
fields used when working with activity resource and role assignments.
Understanding Activity Units and Costs
Units and costs in Primavera Cloud are used to measure the effort required to complete your
activities and the price of that effort. Unit and cost fields for each activity are broken down into
types to measure the different possible aspects of activity progress, including planned, actual,
remaining, and at completion.
Activity-level values roll up to the project level to provide an overall measure of project effort and
cost. Depending on how you intend to manage your project, activity-level values may also be
distributed down to the individual resources and roles assigned to perform the activity work. Unit
and cost fields are further broken down according to the type of resource work being performed.
There are specific rules that govern when units and costs can be entered at the activity level or
assignment level, as well as the types of values that can be entered. Use the topics below to
learn more about activity and assignment unit and cost fields, the rules for updating them, and
the types of values that can be entered.
Activity Unit and Cost Fields

The main field types in Primavera Cloud that are used to measure the different aspects of an
activity's progress are Planned, Actual, Remaining, and At Completion. Each of these types
supports unit and cost values. Unit and cost fields can be entered at the activity level or
assignment level based on resource type. Unit values can be added to labor and nonlabor
resources. Cost values can be added to labor, nonlabor, and material resources. Values added
to role assignments are counted as labor values.
Activity-level field names indicate the field type, resource type, and whether the value is a unit or
cost. Some examples of activity-level fields include Planned Labor Units, Planned Nonlabor
Units, Actual Labor Units, Actual Nonlabor Cost, Remaining Material Cost, and At Completion
Material Cost. Activities also support separate Total Cost fields that aggregate all labor,
nonlabor, and material costs for each of the four field types.
Assignment-level field names indicate the field type and whether the value is a unit or cost.
Some examples of assignment-level fields include Planned Units, Actual Units, Remaining Cost,
and At Completion Cost. Values entered at the assignment level roll up to the corresponding
activity field that matches the type of the assignment. For example, Planned Units entered on all
nonlabor resource assignments roll up to the Planned Nonlabor Units field at the activity level.
Remaining Cost values entered on all material resources roll up to the Remaining Material Cost
field at the activity level.
Unit and cost fields are supported in your current schedule, scenarios, and baselines. For
comparison purposes, baselines also support read-only Planned, Actual, and Variance fields for
each baseline type. Baseline variance fields measure the difference between the baseline's
Planned field value and the current schedule's corresponding At Completion value. Examples of
baseline variance fields include Original BL Variance - Labor Units, Original BL Variance -
Nonlabor Cost, and Current BL Variance - Material Cost.
Entering Activity and Assignment Units and Costs

This topic explains the rules for entering unit and cost values at the activity level and resource
assignment level.
212
Pages
Units and costs can be defined directly at the activity level if you do not plan to assign resources
or roles to your schedule. If assignments exist on the activity, units and costs are entered on
individual resource and role assignments. Values entered at the activity level are distributed
among assignments with the same type as the activity field. Values entered at the assignment
level roll up to the corresponding activity fields.
The cost of your activities is determined by multiplying the amount of work performed, measured
in units, and the price of each work unit, measured as a rate. An activity without assignments
uses the Default Price/Unit rate set at the project level (see "Configure Calculation Settings
for a Project" on page 424). An activity with assignments uses the Price/Unit rates of each of
its assignments. Because costs and units are interdependent, it is important to be aware that
modifying units will recalculate costs and modifying costs will recalculate units. The Calculate
Costs from Units setting controls the link between corresponding unit and cost fields. When
enabled, costs and units are linked. When disabled, costs and unit values can be edited
independent of each other. This setting can be set for each resource and role assignment. At the
activity level, the link between costs and units depends on the setting of each of its assignments.
When there are no assignments, cost and unit fields are linked.
Entering Activity Units

Units can be entered in the following ways:
 At the activity level
 You can enter units directly or enter costs to indirectly update units on activities without
resource or role assignments. Cost and unit fields are always linked on activities without
assignments.
 You can also enter units directly on activities with resource or role assignments. Unit
values entered on fields that share the same type (Labor or Nonlabor) as an assignment
will be distributed among those assignments. Unit values on fields that do not share the
same type as an assignment do not get distributed to any assignments. Roles are
counted as Labor type assignments.
 Depending on the activity's duration type, modifying an activity's duration values may
cause one or more assignment units to change. Because assignment units roll up to the
corresponding activity fields, the activity's units may also change. Updated units will roll
up to the corresponding activity fields.
 At the assignment level
 You can modify all unit fields on an assignment. The updated units will roll up to the
corresponding activity fields.
 Depending on the activity's duration type, modifying an assignment's duration or
units/time values may cause the assignment's units to change. The updated units will roll
up to the corresponding activity fields.
Entering Activity Costs

Costs can be entered in the following ways:
 At the activity level
 You can enter costs directly or enter units to indirectly update costs on activities without
resource or role assignments. Cost and unit fields are always linked on activities without
assignments.
213
 On activities with assignments, you can directly modify activity cost fields if they do not
share the same type (Labor, Nonlabor, or Material) as an assignment. Activity cost and
unit fields are linked if the fields do not share the same type as an assignment. Cost
fields that share a type with an assignment must be edited at the assignment level. Roles
are counted as Labor type assignments.
 Modifying unit fields on activities with assignments may indirectly affect activity-level
costs. Units entered on activities with assignments distribute those units to assignments
of the same type as the activity field. Costs are only calculated from these updated units
on assignments where Calculate Costs from Units is enabled. If Calculate Costs from
Units is disabled for an assignment of the same type, then its costs are not affected. All
assignment costs roll up to the corresponding activity cost fields.
 Depending on the activity's duration type, modifying an activity's duration values may
cause one or more assignment units to change. If an assignment's Calculate Costs
from Units setting is enabled, the change in its units will recalculate its costs. The
updated costs will roll up to the corresponding activity fields.
 At the assignment level
 With the Calculate Costs from Units setting enabled, modifying a unit field will affect the
corresponding cost field. If the Rate Source is set to Override, you can also modify the
assignment's Price/Unit value to recalculate all of its costs. The updated cost values will
roll up to the activity level.
 With the Calculate Costs from Units setting disabled, you can modify costs
independent of units. All assignment cost values roll up to the corresponding activity
fields.
 Depending on the activity's duration type, modifying an assignment's duration or
units/time values may cause the assignment's units to change. If the assignment's
Calculate Costs from Units setting is enabled, the change in its units will recalculate its
costs. The updated costs will roll up to the activity level.
214
Pages
Notes:
 You must have a Default Price/Unit value greater than 0 configured
before you can enter costs on an activity with no resource or role
assignments.
 If an assignment's Calculate Costs from Units setting is disabled,
modifying the Price/Unit value will have no effect on the
assignment's unit or cost values. However, if you enable the
Calculate Costs from Units setting, the costs will be recalculated
based on the current Price/Unit and unit values. See Configure
Assignment Calculation Options (on page 158) for more
information on configuring an assignment's various calculation
settings.
Additional Rules:
 If a resource or role is assigned to an activity without existing assignments, and the activity
has existing unit and cost values, the activity values in fields of the same type as the new
assignment will be overwritten by the assignment's corresponding values, which will roll up to
the activity level. All other unit and cost fields will remain the same. For example, assigning a
nonlabor resource will only overwrite the activity's nonlabor unit and cost values.
 Depending on its type, an assigned resource can overwrite labor, nonlabor, or material
values. Assigned roles always overwrite labor values. If a resource staffs a role, the
assignment values will roll up to the activity fields with the same type as the associated
resource.
 Start and Finish Milestones do not support resource or role assignments, but you can enter
lump sum labor, nonlabor, and material cost values directly on the milestone activity.
Valid Activity Unit and Cost Values

This topic describes acceptable unit and cost values that can be entered on activities and
assignments.
When updating your activities and resource or role assignments, you typically will enter values
for the work being performed in terms of time units such as hours, days, weeks, months, and
years. Cost values on activities and assignments will be in terms of base currency or project
currency, depending on your project currency setup and view settings. In most situations, the
values you enter will be positive, but there are times you may find it easier to update units or
costs using negative values. This may be done by users entering negative values in order to
make adjustments to other unit or cost fields.
Negative unit and cost values can be entered as long as other related data remains valid. In
Primavera Cloud, negative duration values are not permitted on activities or assignments.
Duration is one variable in the following equation, used to calculate an assignment's duration
and unit values:
Units = Units/Time x Duration
215
This equation applies to an assignment's corresponding Planned and Remaining fields. When
one value in the equation is modified, the other two may be recalculated. The recalculated value
is controlled by the activity's duration type, which enables you to determine if the duration,
resource availability, or budget (units or costs) is the most important factor in your activity. See
Assign a Duration Type to an Activity (on page 147) for more information. In the equation
above, entering a negative value for Units or Units/Time may cause Duration to become
negative, which is not permitted in the application. To allow a negative Unit or Units/Time value,
the Duration must be fixed so that it cannot become negative. This is possible using a duration
type with a fixed duration. Because Actual fields are not part of the duration type equation, they
can be entered as negative or positive using any duration type.
As described in Entering Activity and Assignment Units and Costs (on page 212), unit or
cost values entered at the activity level are distributed to assignments with the same resource
type as the activity field. This may be Labor or Nonlabor for unit fields, and Labor, Nonlabor, or
Material for cost fields. Unit and cost values entered at the assignment level roll up to
corresponding fields at the activity level. The following rules describe entering positive and
negative values in activity-level unit and cost fields. If a value is valid in an activity-level field, it is
also valid at the corresponding assignment-level field. There are different rules depending on the
activity's duration type, the resource type of the field you are editing, and the number of
resources or roles assigned to the activity.
For Fixed Units or Fixed Units/Time duration type activities:
 If there are no assignments with the same type as the activity field you are editing, you
can enter positive or negative actual units or actual costs in the field. You can also enter
positive planned or remaining costs or units, but not negative.
 If there is one assignment with the same type as the activity field you are editing, you can
enter positive or negative actual units in the field. You can also enter positive planned or
remaining units, but not negative. Values entered at the activity level will be shown in the
corresponding assignment field. Costs must be entered at the assignment level.
 If there are multiple assignments with the same type as the activity field you are editing,
you can enter positive or negative actual units if the actual unit values of the
corresponding assignments are all positive or all negative. You can also enter positive
planned or remaining units, but not negative. Values of zero are also supported. Entered
values will be distributed across the corresponding assignment fields.
For Fixed Duration & Units or Fixed Duration & Units/Time duration type activities:
 If there are no assignments with the same type as the activity field you are editing, you
can enter positive or negative units or costs of any field type (Planned, Actual,
Remaining, or At Completion).
 If there is one assignment with the same type as the activity field you are editing, you can
enter positive or negative units of any field type. Values entered at the activity level will
be shown in the corresponding assignment field. Costs must be entered at the
assignment level.
 If there are multiple assignments with the same type as the activity field you are editing,
you can enter positive or negative units of any field type if the unit values of the
corresponding assignments are all positive or all negative. Values of zero are also
supported. Entered values will be distributed across the corresponding assignment fields.
216
Pages
If you attempt to enter a negative value in one of the scenarios above where it is not permitted,
an error message will appear and the value will not be entered. You may also receive an error if
changing the duration type of an activity causes any values to violate one or more of the rules
above.
Resource Assignment Detail Window Fields

Dates
Actual Finish
The date on which the assignment was completed.
Actual Start
If the activity has started, the date work began on the activity.
Finish
The finish date for the assignment.
Planned Finish
The date the assignment is scheduled to be finished.
Planned Start
The planned start date for the assignment on the activity.
Remaining Early Finish
Remaining Early Start
The date the assignment is scheduled to begin.
Remaining Late Finish
The latest possible date the assignment must be finished to not delay the project finish date.
Remaining Late Start
The latest possible date the assignment must begin to not delay the project finish date.
Start
The start date for the activity assignment.
Timesheet Actual Start
Actual Start Date derived from Timesheet at the time of timesheet approval
Durations
Actual Duration
217
The total working time from the assignment actual start date to the actual finish date for
completed assignments, or the total working time from the actual start date to the data date
for in-progress assignments.
At Completion Duration
The total working time from the assignment's current start date to the current finish date.
Planned Duration
The resource's total working time on the activity from the Planned Start date to the Planned
Finish date.
Planned Lag
The planned time lag between the activity's planned start date and the resource's planned
start date on the activity.
Remaining Duration
The remaining working time for the resource assignment on the activity, from the resource's
remaining start date to the remaining finish date.
Remaining Lag
The time lag between the activity's remaining start date and the resource's remaining start
date on the activity.
Financial
Actual Cost
The actual cost for the resource assignment on the activity.
Actual This Period Cost
The labor, nonlabor, and material costs incurred during the current financial period.
At Completion Cost
The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for the resource assignment on the activity.
Planned Cost
The expected total cost of the item, such as an assignment, expense, or response plan.
Price/Unit
The price per unit of time for the resource or role.
Remaining Cost
The remaining cost for the resource assignment on the activity.
Staffed Remaining Cost
The remaining cost for resource assignments that have a filled role.
Unstaffed Remaining Cost
The remaining cost for resource assignments that do not have a filled role.
218
Pages
General
Calculate Costs from Units
Indicates whether to calculate costs based on units for an assignment.
Curve
The resource's units and costs distributed over the duration of an activity.
Drive Activity Dates
Determines whether new resource or role assignments determine activity dates.
Proficiency
The skill level of the resource an activity is assigned to. The valid values are Master, Expert,
Skilled, Proficient, and Inexperienced.
Rate Source
The value that indicates which Price/Unit will be used to calculate costs for the assignment.
Valid options are Resource, Role, or Override.
Rate Type
Identifies the Resource or Role rate to be used as a default when creating activity resource
assignments.
Resource Type
The resource type. Valid values are Labor, Nonlabor, and Material.
Percentages
Units Percent Complete
The percent complete of units for the resource assignment on the activity.
Units
Actual This Period Units
The labor, nonlabor, and material units used during the current financial period.
Actual Units
The sum of the actual non-overtime and the overtime units worked by the resource on the
activity.
At Completion Units
The sum of the actual units and remaining units for the resource assignment on the activity.
Calculated as Actual Units plus Remaining Units.
Planned Units
The planned units of work for the resource assignment on the activity.
Planned Units/Time
The planned units per time at which the resource is to perform work on the activity.
219
Remaining Units
The remaining units of work to be performed by the resource on the activity.
Calculated as Planned Units minus Actual Units.
Remaining Units/Time
The units per time required for the resource assignment to complete the activity.
Staffed Remaining Units
The remaining units for resource assignments that have filled a role.
Timesheet Actual Units
Timesheet actual hours logged from timesheet for the assignment.
Unstaffed Remaining Units
The remaining units for resource assignments that have not filled a role.
Schedule Health Score Overview

The Schedule Health Score tool enables you to evaluate the quality of your project schedule
against a set of criteria. Using common schedule analysis metrics, the tool can help to ensure
compliance with corporate or industry standards. Use the tool to identify problem areas in your
schedule, and then consider methods to correct the issues that arise. Issues might include
missing relationship logic or unrealistic date constraints that could negatively impact your project
schedule.
The tool evaluates your project schedule using calculated metrics known as checks. Each time
you run the scheduler on your current schedule or a schedule scenario, the tool automatically
analyzes your activities and produces a score for each check. The check score indicates the
level to which your activities are meeting the check's defined criteria. Typically, checks with a
higher score require more immediate attention. Individual check scores contribute to an overall
schedule health score. A higher schedule health score indicates a higher quality schedule.
Use the tool results to identify activities that meet each check's criteria, and then adjust those
activities to generate a more favorable score. Check details, including target values, weighting
values, and check descriptions, can be modified in the project settings. Individual checks can be
enabled or disabled according to your organization's needs.
Configure Schedule Health Score Settings

Schedule Health Score metrics have default descriptions, target threshold values, and weight
calculation values that can be modified in the project settings. You can also modify additional
check criteria where applicable. Individual checks can be enabled or disabled according to your
organization's needs.
To configure settings for the Schedule Health Score tool:
2) Select the Schedule Health Check tab.
3) Select Ignore Completed Activities if you want to exclude completed activities from the
analysis.
220
Pages
4) In the table, select a check, and then configure the following settings:
 Description: Modify the description of the check depending on your organization's
needs.
 Active: Include the selected check in the Schedule Health Score panel. Only active
checks are used in the schedule health score calculation.
 Target: Set the target threshold percentage value for the check. Typically, a check that
exceeds the threshold value is marked red in the Schedule Health Score panel.
 Weighting: Set the numerical weighting of the check. This value is used when
determining the overall schedule health score.
5) In the General detail window, you can view or modify the same check details as in the table.
Some checks have additional metrics that you can modify in the Criteria section of the detail
window.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
View the Schedule Health Score Results
Use the results of the Schedule Health Score tool to identify activities that could negatively
impact the outlook of your project schedule.
Each check provides the following information:
 A count of the number of activities that do not meet its criteria
 The number of activities as a percentage of the whole project
 A red indication if the actual percentage exceeds the target defined in the settings and a
green indication if it is at or below the target
 A list of activities that do not meet the check's criteria
 A description of what should be modified to improve the check score
Typically, checks with higher percentage scores require more immediate attention. Individual
check scores contribute to an overall schedule health score. A higher schedule health score
indicates a higher quality schedule. Schedule checks are run against the current schedule or a
schedule scenario.
Note: Some check scores are calculated after saving your data, while
other scores are calculated after scheduling the project. Before using the
Schedule Health Score tool, you should schedule the project to ensure
you are viewing all the latest results.
To view the schedule health check results:
221

2) Select  Schedule Health Score.
3) In the panel, select a check to view the activities that do not meet the check metric's criteria.
Select an activity to highlight it in the grid.
4) Modify the activity details that relate to the check, and then schedule your project to view
updated check scores.
Tips
 Filtered activities that do not meet a check's criteria are still included in the check score.
Select a check, select  More Info next to any filtered activity, and then select Clear All
Filters to clear all filters applied to the view.
in the Schedule Health Score detail window. A tooltip provides more information about the
filtered activity when you place your cursor above the activity name. Refreshing the page
reapplies all current filters and removes filtered activities from view.
 WBS Summary activities are not factored into the check score.
 Select a check and then select Description to view a description of the check. Descriptions
can be modified in the project settings.
 You can resize the Schedule Health Score panel by selecting the left edge of the panel and
dragging to the desired size.
Schedule Health Score Reference
The Schedule Health Score tool uses descriptions, target threshold values, and weight
calculation values that can be modified in the project settings. Use this topic to refer to the
default values for each check. This topic also describes the formulas used to calculate the
Schedule Health Score value.
Schedule Health Scores
The objective of most of the tool's checks is to minimize the number of activities that meet a
check's criteria. Unless noted, a lower check score is more favorable to the overall Schedule
Health Score value. When a check does not exceed its specified Target value, it is marked
green in the Schedule Health Score panel. If it exceeds the Target value, it is marked red.
Check Name Default Target Value Check Description

Open Ends 0% An activity without a
predecessor or successor
relationship may negatively
affect the quality of your
schedule and should be
avoided.
222
Pages
No Predecessors 0% An activity with no

predecessors could be
scheduled to start
immediately. This can
negatively impact your
project schedule and should
be avoided.
No Successors 0% An activity with no

successor relationships
could be delayed
indefinitely without affecting
project completion. Ensure
all activities have at least
one successor.
Dangling Start 0% An activity with a dangling

start has only SF or FF
predecessors and therefore
could have an unrealistic
start date. To avoid
dangling starts, ensure
each activity has at least
one FS or SS relationship
as its predecessor.
Dangling Finish 0% An activity with a dangling

finish has only SF or SS
successors and therefore
could have an unrealistic
finish date. To avoid
dangling finishes, ensure
each activity has at least
one FS or SS relationship
as its successor.
223
Predecessor Negative Lag 0% The use of negative lags to

overlap activities or adjust
successor dates can affect
the critical path and distort
total float. It can also cause
a successor to start before
a predecessor. Negative
lags can cause activities to
be scheduled in unrealistic
ways and generally should
not be used.
If an event in the
predecessor activity is the
"trigger" to begin the
successor activity, consider
breaking the predecessor
into two activities. For
example, two activities
"Design" and "Build" would
become "Draft Design",
"Finalize Design", and
"Build". "Draft Design"
would then precede both
other activities.
Predecessor Lag 5% or less Lag time between activities

should not be used to
control float or constrain
dates. Consider
representing the delay
between two activities by
adding another activity.
If a lag represents some
effort or activity, consider
replacing it with an activity.
For example, two activities
"Pour Concrete" and "Build
Wall" could have a lag
replaced with an activity
"Concrete Set".
224
Pages
FS Predecessor 90% or greater Finish-to-Start (FS)

relationships are the easiest
to trace and understand.
The majority of your
relationships should be FS.
Note: The FS Predecessor
check is unique in that its
objective is to maximize the
number of activities that
meet its criteria. The
objective of all other checks
is to minimize the number of
activities that meet the
check's criteria. When the
FS Predecessor score
exceeds its Target value,
the check is marked green.
The FS Predecessor check
uses a different formula
when calculating the overall
Schedule Health Score.
SS Predecessor 10% or less Start-to-Start (SS)

relationships are acceptable
to use in moderation.
FF Predecessor 10% or less Finish-to-Finish (FF)

relationships are acceptable
to use in moderation.
SF Predecessor 0% Start-to-Finish (SF)

relationship logic says the
successor occurs before the
predecessor. SF
relationships are a poor
practice and generally
should not be used.
225
Hard Constraint 0% Mandatory Start and

Mandatory Finish are hard
constraints that prevent
activities from being
scheduled according to
logic and prevent delays
from impacting succeeding
activities. The effects of
hard constraints become
more noticeable as the
schedule is progressed, and
they generally should not be
used.
Soft Constraint 5% or less Soft constraints allow the

schedule to be logic driven
but can distort float and
create negative float.
The following constraints
are considered soft
constraints:
 As Late As Possible
 Start On
 Start On Or Before
 Start On Or After
 Finish On
 Finish On Or Before
 Finish On Or After
Invalid Progress Date 0% Progress should be
recorded before the Data
Date, and planned work
should be recorded after.
Activities with invalid dates
can affect the accuracy of
the project schedule.
This check score is
calculated after scheduling
your project.
Late Activity 5% or less Late activities indicate how

well the project is
performing against the
original baseline.
226
Pages
Large Float 0% Large float values may

indicate missing activity
relationships. Provide
activities with reasonable
logic to ensure a more
stable project plan.
Negative Float 0% Negative float usually

indicates an activity
constraint that cannot be
met with the current
schedule or progress has
been made out of
sequence. Corrective action
should be taken to ensure
activity dates are accurate
and achievable.
Large Duration 5% or less Large duration activities are

harder to manage and may
lack sufficient detail.
Consider dividing these
activities into shorter, more
discrete activities, which
provide better insight into
cost and schedule.
No Role or Resource 0% Roles and resources detail

the cost and labor of the
work to be performed. An
activity without roles or
resources may be
insufficiently planned.
Calculating the Schedule Health Score

The Schedule Health Score represents the overall quality of your project schedule according to
the score of the individual checks that are included in the analysis. A higher schedule health
score indicates a higher quality schedule. The weighting value that is set in the project settings
enables you to place higher priority on specific checks during the calculations. Only checks
marked as Active in the project settings are included in the Schedule Health Score.
The following formula is used to calculate the overall Schedule Health Score:
Schedule Health Score = 100% - (Sum of all active [Check Adjusted Percentage * Check
Weighting] values / Sum of all active check weighting values)
227
In most cases, the Check Adjusted Percentage value is the same as the percentage value of an
individual check score. However, the Check Adjusted Percentage value of the FS Predecessor
check, whose characteristics are the inverse of the other checks, is calculated using the
following formula:
Check Adjusted Percentage = 100% - Check Percentage
The Schedule Health Score color is calculated independent of its percentage value. The
Schedule Health Score color is set to red if one or more of the active checks in the calculation
are red. If all active checks are green, the Schedule Health Score color is green. Weighting
value does not impact the score color.
Schedule Scenarios Overview

Schedule scenarios allow you to analyze and adjust a what-if version of your schedule without
affecting your current schedule. With schedule scenarios, you can create and manage multiple
planning schedules, modifying details as you evaluate and anticipate different situations, project
conditions, resource and role requirements, response plans, delays, and other project issues.
You can modify most of the data in a scenario as you would the data in the current schedule.
You can use schedule scenarios to see how a given outcome may affect your project without
making permanent changes to the actual schedule. When creating a scenario, you can set the
source of the scenario's data to be the current schedule, an existing scenario, or an existing
baseline. The data from the source is copied to the new scenario. This enables you to perform
what-if planning on different instances of your project schedule.
The data stored by a scenario is unique to that scenario. For example, actions such as creating
or updating activity data, scheduling activities, leveling resources and roles, and using the
schedule health check tool do not affect the current schedule, other scenarios, or schedule
baselines. If you want changes made in the scenario to replace the data in the current schedule,
you can set the scenario as the current schedule.
Active scenarios that are currently being planned have a status of What-if. Scenarios you
choose to close have a status of Closed. After a current schedule is replaced with a scenario,
the statuses of the previous schedule and the scenario are changed to Retired. You cannot
delete retired scenarios.
Add a Scenario
Add scenarios to your project to simulate alternative scheduling situations. Model different
scheduling decisions and outcomes to determine the most effective solution. When creating a
scenario, you can set the source of the scenario's data to be the current schedule, an existing
baseline, or from a past scenario. This enables you to perform what-if planning on different
instances of your project schedule. The source of a scenario cannot be modified after the
scenario is added.
The default status of a new scenario is What-if. Open a scenario to view or update its data.
Newly created scenarios are opened automatically.
To add a scenario:
2) On the Activities page, select Actions , and then select Add Scenario.
228
Pages
3) In the Add Scenario dialog box, enter the following information:

 Name: The name of the scenario.
 Source: The source of the scenario data. Select Current Schedule, Scenario,
Baseline, or From History.
 If you selected Current Schedule as the source, continue to Step 4.
 If you selected Scenario as the source, use the Scenario list to choose an existing
scenario with data you want to copy.
 If you selected From History as the source, use the Scenario Date picker to
choose the date of the project data captured by the scenario. Select a date in the
time.
5) Select Add.
Tips
 To access your scenarios from the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then
select Manage Scenarios. You can also add scenarios from the Manage Scenarios dialog
box. Scenarios added in this manner automatically set the current schedule as the scenario
source.
 If you do not see a newly added scenario on the Activities page or in the Manage
Scenarios dialog box, select  Refresh.
 Use the Open menu in the Activities page toolbar to switch between scenarios. Select View
All in the list to open the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
 When a new scenario is created, a notification message is displayed, and you can review the
 To delete a scenario on the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, then select
Manage Scenarios. On the Manage Scenarios dialog box, select the  Context menu
beside the scenario that you would like to delete, and then select Delete.
Open a Scenario
Open a scenario to perform project management tasks on a what-if version of your current
schedule. You can modify the data in a scenario as you would the data in the current schedule.
If you want to replace the data in your current schedule with the data from a scenario, you can
set the scenario as the current schedule. See Set a Scenario as the Current Schedule (on
Use the Open menu in the page toolbar to switch between your current schedule, available
scenarios, and available baselines. The list contains scenarios that are set to Visible in the
Manage Scenarios dialog box.
229
When a scenario is open, a banner appears above the page toolbar to inform you that you are
currently making changes to a scenario. This message is to remind you of the object in which
you are currently working and that any changes made to the scenario are not reflected in your
current schedule. The banner can be dismissed for your current session and will reappear when
you reload the page.
To open a scenario:
2) In the Open menu, in the Scenarios section, select a scenario to open.
Tips
 Newly created scenarios are opened automatically.
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Scenario
activities will not automatically appear in existing scenarios. However, if a scenario requires
these activities, you can add them from the current schedule to the scenario. This feature
enables you to update an existing scenario with new activities without having to create a new
scenario that would reflect current progress.
exist in the scenario. The activities that you select in the dialog box will be added to your
scenario. All of an activity's data will also be added, including dates, durations, units, costs,
relationships, resource, role, and scope assignments, risks, stored prior actuals, codes, and
configured fields. Activities in the selection with the same ID as activities already in the scenario
will not be added.
You can add up to 100 activities from the current schedule to a scenario at one time. You must
have the required security privileges to add an activity to a scenario.
To add activities from the current schedule to a scenario:
2) On the Activities page, open a scenario.
4) In the Get Activities dialog box, select one or more activities to add to your scenario.
5) Select Get.
Tips
the Get Activity process.
230
Pages
Manage a Scenario
Use the Manage Scenarios dialog box to add, duplicate, rename, and delete schedule
scenarios. Toggle the visibility of scenarios on the Activities page, and choose a scenario status
of What-if or Closed. The Source column indicates the source of a scenario, which could be the
current schedule, another scenario, or a specific baseline. Retired scenarios are read-only.
To manage scenarios:
2) On the Activities page, select Actions , and then select Manage Scenarios.
3) In the Manage Scenarios dialog box, you can do any the following:
 In the Filter By list, select which scenario statuses you want to display in the table.
 Select  Settings to format the display of columns in the table.

 In the table, select the  Context menu next to a scenario, and then select Add,
Duplicate, or Delete.
 In the Visible column, select the icon to make a scenario visible or hidden in the Open
menu on the Activities page.
 In the Status column, change the status of a scenario between What-if and Closed.
Closed scenarios are automatically hidden.
4) Select Save.
Set a Scenario as the Current Schedule
If you determine that a specific scenario should become the new project schedule, you can set
the scenario as the current schedule. When a scenario is set as the new current schedule,
scenario details such as dates, durations, units, costs, assignments, and relationships overwrite
schedule.
Note: Setting a scenario as the current schedule overwrites all current

in both the current schedule and the scenario, and that are also started
in the scenario. This action cannot be undone. The process runs in the
To set a scenario as the current schedule:

2) On the Activities page, open a scenario.
Tips
231
 When a scenario is set as the current schedule, the scenario is hidden and its status is
changed to Retired. A copy of the previous current schedule is created as a scenario. It is
also hidden and its status is changed to Retired. You can make these scenarios visible in the
Manage Scenarios dialog box. Retired scenarios are read-only, and cannot be deleted.
 Use the Open menu in the Activities page toolbar to switch between scenarios. Select View
All in the list to open the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
Scheduling Overview
Scheduling a project or program aligns all the activities of each project on a common timeline
based on the constraints, relationships, and the date types to which each activity must adhere.
When the scheduler is run, the application applies the Critical Path Method algorithm to assign
activity dates, calculate total float, and determine the project critical path.
Critical Path Method Overview

When you schedule a project or program, the Critical Path Method conducts a forward pass that
calculates the earliest start and finish dates for each activity, based on the start or finish dates of
predecessor activities as well as the duration of the activity itself. It then conducts a backward
pass to calculate the latest start and finish dates for each activity, based on the start or finish
dates of successor activities as well as the duration of the activity itself. From these dates, the
total float is calculated for each activity to determine how much scheduling flexibility each activity
has. Activities that have zero float must start on time to prevent the schedule from slipping.
These are the activities that define the critical path. Identifying the critical path helps the project
management team know where to focus their efforts by knowing which activities are critical to
overall project success.
Multiple Float Paths Overview

In projects, you can calculate multiple float paths when running the scheduler to calculate the
critical path and sub-critical paths. The critical path is the path of activities that will lead to the
earliest possible completion of the project. Calculating the sub-critical paths for a project allows
you to keep track of activities that aren't currently on the critical path but could very easily
become critical and affect your project's progress. Multiple float paths can be recalculated every
time you schedule the project, meaning the values are kept up-to-date to reflect any evolutions
in your project. Calculating multiple float paths does not impact the critical activities defined in
the Scheduler Settings.
The Multiple Float Paths feature allows you to choose an ending activity for your calculations.
This allows you to calculate multiple float paths up to important milestones in your project
instead of only the ending activity.
Primavera Cloud provides the option to calculate multiple float paths using activity free float or
total float. The Free Float option calculates the float path based on driving activities, which also
calculates the schedule's longest path. The Total Float option calculates your critical and
sub-critical paths based on the criticality of the Relationship Total Float for your activities.
How are multiple float paths calculated using free float?
232
Pages
The free float calculation first identifies the activity that has an early finish equal to the latest
calculated early finish for the project or the activity that you identify as the ending activity for
multiple float paths when scheduling your project. From this activity, the application then traces a
backwards path along relationships using the relationship free float values to identify the driving
path of relationships. The activities on this path constitute the critical path.
The application removes the activities that have been assigned to a path, and runs the
calculation again to calculate the sub-critical paths. This is repeated until the number of
sub-critical paths that are set to be calculated is met or there are no more activities to add to
paths.
Note: If you use different calendars for your schedule's activities, the
activities might not end up being calculated as part of the critical path
even if they belong to the longest path.
If the application runs into an instance where there are equal values on the relationships and a
tie breaker is needed, then the application goes through the following list to determine which
activity to use:
a. Activity Free Float
b. Early Finish (latest date)
c. Early Start (earliest date)
d. Activity ID
How are multiple float paths calculated using total float?
First, the application will start with the latest activity relationship that has the most critical
Relationship Total Float, meaning the least amount of Total Float, and will perform a backwards
pass to determine the predecessors with the most critical Relationship Total Float until an open
end on the path is reached. After the open end is reached, the application will then conduct a
forward pass through the successor activities to identify the most critical activities by evaluating
the Total Float of the successors. The forward pass continues until it reaches an open end on
the path. The activities on this path are designated the critical path.
The application removes the activities that have been assigned to a path, and runs the
calculation again to calculate the sub-critical paths. This is repeated until the number of
sub-critical paths that are set to be calculated is met or there are no more activities to add to
paths.
If the application runs into an instance where there are multiple activities with the same
Relationship Total Float, then the application chooses the activities that have an activity type
that is not Level of Effort. If there is a tie among those activities, the application goes through the
following list until one of these values can serve as the tie breaker to determine which activity to
use:
a. Activity Total Float
b. Activity Free Float
c. Early Finish (latest date)
d. Activity ID
How do I view multiple float path results?
233
The multiple float path results can be viewed on the Activities table.
The Float Path column indicates which float path an activity belongs to. Float path numbers are
in order of criticality, with 1 being the critical float path, 2 being the next most critical float path,
and so on. All float paths greater than 1 are considered the sub-critical float paths.
The Float Path Order column indicates the placement of an activity in the float path. This is
based on the activity dates and relationships and goes in chronological order. Float paths do not
include activities that have already been completed.
Schedule a Project
Schedule your project to sequence your activities into a logical order of execution by assigning
dates to all activities. Scheduling your project also determines the project's critical path and
allows you to calculate sub-critical float paths to monitor activities. You can schedule a program
to schedule all of the projects in the program using their own data date or a specific date.
Note: After importing P6 EPPM project data into Primavera Cloud, you
must reschedule the project and recalculate costs before making any
project updates.
To schedule a project:
2) Select  Schedule.
3) In the Schedule dialog box, on the Schedule Project tab, configure your data date options:
 Select one of the following:
 All projects use their own data date: Select this option to use the individual data
date for each open project.
 Apply selected data date to all open projects: Select this option and specify a
data date in the Data Date field.
 Select Display scheduling log upon completion to automatically display the
scheduling log when the scheduling process is complete.
4) Select the Settings tab and configure your scheduling options:
 Use schedule options from: If you are scheduling a program, select the project whose
scheduling options you want to use for the scheduling process.
 Recognize relationships to and from other projects: Select this option to recognize
relationships to other projects while scheduling the project.
 Make open-ended activities critical: Determines whether to designate open-ended
activities as critical during scheduling.
 Use Expected Finish Dates: Select this option to use expected finish dates while
scheduling the project.
 When scheduling progressed activities use: Select an option to determine how
in-progress activities are scheduled.
Retained Logic: The remaining duration of a progressed activity is not scheduled
until all of its predecessors are finished.
234
Pages
Progress Override: The schedule ignores activity relationships and allows the
activity to progress without delay.
Actual Dates: Backward and forward passes are calculated using actual dates.
 Calculate Start-to-Start lag from: Determines when you want the successor to start.
When a start to start relationship exists and the predecessor starts out of sequence, the
scheduler delays the successor activity until the lag expires and all predecessor
relationships have been satisfied. Use this option to specify whether to subtract the lag
from the predecessor's early start date or its actual start date.
Early Start: Calculates the expired lag as the number of work periods between the
actual start and the data date and determines the successor's start date as the
predecessor's remaining early start plus any remaining lag. Select this option
when the successor's start depends on the amount of work that the predecessor
activity accomplishes.
Actual Start: Calculates the successor's start date as the data date plus any
remaining lag. Select this option when you want the successor's start to depend
on the time elapsed from the predecessor's actual start (regardless of the amount
of work that has been accomplished in the predecessor activity).
 Define critical activities as: Specify the criteria to determine whether an activity is
considered critical.
 Calculate float based on finish date of: Select an option to determine how float is
calculated:
Each Project: Float is calculated based on the finish date of each individual
project.
Opened Projects: Float is calculated based on the finish date of all opened
projects scheduled together.
 Compute total float as: Select the method to use to calculate total float for activities.
 Calendar for scheduling relationship lag: Select the calendar to use for calculating
relationship lag.
 (Projects only) Recalculate costs upon completion: Select this option to automatically
recalculate costs after the scheduler is run.
5) (Projects only) Select the Multiple Float Paths tab and configure the following options:
 Calculate Multiple Float Paths: Select this option to calculate multiple float paths for
your schedule.
Note: You must select Calculate Multiple Float Paths to edit the rest of
the fields on this tab.
 Calculate Multiple Paths Using: Choose which method will be used when calculating
the critical and sub-critical float paths:
 Free Float: Calculate float paths based on driving activities. This option starts with
the longest path to begin the calculation.
 Total Float: Calculate multiple float paths based off of activity delays using the
Relationship Total Float.
235
 Select multiple float paths ending activity: In the Select Multiple Float Path Ending
Activity picker, select the activity that will be the last activity in your multiple float path
calculations, and then select Select. Any activities that are successor activities to the one
chosen are not included in the multiple float path calculations. If you leave this field
empty, the multiple float path calculations defaults to the final activity in the project.
 Specify the number of paths to calculate: Specify up to 1,000 float paths to calculate
for your schedule.
6) Select Schedule Now.
Tips
 The scheduler calculates the project schedule using activity requirements only.
Consequently, activities requiring the same roles or resources can be scheduled
simultaneously, creating overallocations. Use the leveling (see "Leveling Overview" on
page 196) feature to resolve role or resource overallocations in your project by adjusting
activity dates according to the availability of all assigned roles or resources.
 If you choose to run the leveler, the project is automatically scheduled before the leveler is
run, according to the last scheduling settings.
 After you schedule the project, you can review the log to view data and statistics about the
scheduling process. You can access the log from the Schedule dialog box by selecting View
Log, from the system notification you receive when the scheduling process is complete, or
from the Manage Services page. When the scheduler is run, the application checks for
loops, or circular relationships, in the activity relationship logic. If a loop is detected, then the
scheduler fails. You can view the error report with the activities in the loop from the
scheduling log. To resolve the loop, return to the Activities page and view the relationship
trace logic for the activities in the loop and remove a relationship.
Scheduling Log
The scheduling log displays the results of the scheduling process run from the Activities page. It
includes start and finish times for the process, a list of settings selected for the process, project
statistics, process results, and any warnings that were encountered during the process that
require attention. The Scheduling Log also displays any errors that cause the scheduler to fail.
The scheduler might fail if a loop is detected in the activity relationships. A loop, or circular
relationship, is caused by an activity relationship that leads back to an earlier activity in the
activity sequence. If the scheduler fails due to a loop, then the scheduling log lists all activities
involved in the loop, starting at the beginning of the relationship logic. To resolve the loop, return
to the Activities page and view the relationship trace logic for the activities in the loop and
remove a relationship.
The scheduling log can be set to display upon completion when run from the Schedule dialog
box on the Activities page. Select View Log in the dialog box to display the log from the most
recently run process. You can also access scheduling logs from the notifications panel or from
the Manage Services page.
Scheduling Overview (on page 232)
236
Pages
Store Period Performance Overview

Primavera Cloud allows you to capture historical records to track actual units and costs to date
using store period performance capabilities in your current schedule. Capturing this data will
allow you to bill for work completed and capture the labor, nonlabor, and material costs and
earned value metrics for analysis.
Store period performance captures period values for reporting cycles. Reporting cycles should
represent your billing cycles; for example, if you will be billing for work done weekly, then the
reporting cycle that you set should also be weekly. The first reporting cycle for your project starts
on or slightly before the earliest Start Date of an activity in the project. At the end of each
reporting cycle, you will update activity actual start dates, percent complete, and costs or units.
You will also schedule the project, advancing the data date to be on or after the reporting cycle
finish date, and recalculate costs. Then, store the period performance to capture the period
values. Earned value metrics can also be captured each period by setting an earned value
baseline when setting up store period performance and updating earned value fields.
The following fields form the basis of store period performance and their calculations:
 Actual This Period Units and Costs: These fields represent the values for the current
reporting cycle being updated and that has not yet been stored. After running store
period performance, these units return to 0 until you update period performance values
for the next reporting cycle.
 Prior Actual Units and Costs: These fields are the accumulations of all totals up to the
last closeout date. This is historical data for an activity. These fields are read-only and
won't be updated when you schedule the project or recalculate project costs. They also
won't be updated if you set a scenario or baseline as the current schedule or if you
update the price per unit for resource assignments (although the updated price per unit
will be reflected in future stored periods).
 Actual Units and Costs: These fields are the total units or costs of all prior periods plus
the current period being updated. The values entered here are spread evenly across all
workdays from the Actual Start date to the Data Date.
To learn more about Earned Value metrics, see Understanding Earned Value Fields (on page
186).
Store period performance values will roll up to the activity. Therefore, you can enter data for the
activity's resource assignments, and the sum for each field will be calculated to represent the
value for the activity as a whole. Similarly, if you enter labor units or costs against an activity with
multiple resource assignments, then the values will be distributed across the resource
assignments of that type. If timesheets are linked to resources, then store period performance
will use the timesheets data to update the hours worked for a resource. You can also add your
units and cost values directly against an activity or milestone. Entering period data against the
activity uses the project rate amount to determine the costs. Although there are several options
for entering period data, it is recommended that you do not change the method you use after
you have started storing period data.
Certain store period values can be tracked over time in the activity usage histogram. See
Activity Usage Overview (on page 174) for more information.
You can delete an activity that has stored period values associated with it. The period values will
also be deleted.
237
Before getting started with store period performance, you should define the reporting cycle and
configure the earned value baseline (on page 185) that you want to use for the project.
Set Up Store Period Performance

Set up store period performance for your schedule to start storing period values. When setting
up store period performance, you will determine the reporting cycle and the earned value
baseline.
The reporting cycle is the period of time that is captured in store period performance and should
coincide with your project's billing cycle. You can define reporting cycles at the workspace-level
Summary & Settings. Because there can only be one reporting cycle per project, if there has
been a Period Closeout in the Scope app of the same schedule, then the reporting cycle used
there is also the one that will be used for store period performance.
An earned value baseline should be set if you want to capture earned value metrics in your
stored periods. Setting the earned value baseline will include earned value calculations, such as
Budget at Completion and Percent Complete amounts, in your stored period data. If you do not
set the earned value baseline, these amounts will remain at zero. If your earned value baseline
does not already exist, you can create it while you set up period performance. You can also
choose to use store period performance without an earned value baseline.
Because you will be working with project settings and schedule data, including costs and
baselines, it is recommended that you have the following privileges in a Project permission set
before you set up store period performance: Project (Edit), Store Period Performance (Enable),
Baselines (Add), Baseline - Set Project Baseline (Enable), Recalculate Project Costs (Enable),
and Project Cost/Financials (Edit).
You will only need to setup store period performance one time. After it has been setup and the
first period has been stored, you can't make any changes to the setup.
To set up store period performance:
2) Select the Actions menu, and then select Set Up Period Performance.
Note: This option will not be available if you have already setup store
period performance for this schedule.
3) In the Set Up Period Performance dialog box, in the Select Reporting Cycle field, select a
reporting cycle to store period performances against.
Note: The Select Reporting Cycle field will be read-only if there has
been a period closeout in the Scope app of the same schedule.
4) Select Next.
5) (Optional) In the Earned Value step, create or select an earned value baseline to include in
your stored periods. You can choose to skip this step if you don't plan on including earned
value metrics with your stored period data.
To create a baseline if one does not already exist:
a. Name: Enter a name for the baseline.
238
Pages
b. Type: Select the type of baseline. Options are Original, Current, and Supplementary.
c. Baseline Date: Select the date that the project data will be captured as the baseline.
d. Description: Enter a description of the baseline.
Note: If a baseline type already exists for the schedule, you will not be
able to create a new baseline of that type. You will be able to select the
existing baseline to use.
To select an existing baseline:

 In the Type field, select the baseline that you would like to use. The Name, Baseline
Date, and Description fields will be read-only for an existing baseline.
6) Select Finish.
Store Period Performance

Store your period performance to capture activity data for the reporting cycle currently being
updated and to closeout the period. The data captured in store period performance includes
period actual units and cost, earned value and planned value amounts, schedule percent
complete, performance percent complete, current CPI, SPI and TCPI values, and current
estimate to complete and estimate at completion values. When you store period performance,
the values captured for the reporting period become historical read-only values that you can
view for billing purposes and to monitor schedule progress. The "Actual This Period" unit and
cost fields are reset to 0 after the period is stored.
Before running the store period performance, you should update activity actual start dates,
percent complete, and costs or units and make sure that your activities have been marked as
started. Activities started after the period closeout date are not included in the period closeout
unless there have been updates to the Planned Value or Earned Value amounts. You should
also schedule the project and ensure that the data date is later than the reporting period finish
date of the period being stored.
To store period performance, it is recommended that you have the Store Period Performance
(Enable) and Project Costs/Financials (Edit) privilege for the project.
To store period performance:
2) Select the Actions menu, and then select Store Period Performance.
Note: This option will not be available if you have not yet set up store
period performance (on page 238) for this schedule.
3) In the Store Period Performance dialog box, select Store.
239
View Stored Period Performance Values

View the stored period performance values for an activity from the Stored Periods detail window.
Stored data can't be edited.
To view stored period performance values:
3) On the Layout menu, select  Activity Details, and then select the Stored Periods detail
window.
Tips
 View the activity usage histogram (on page 175) to see certain store period performance
values in a time-phased view of activity usage.
 Select  Stored Periods Grid Settings to add columns to the Stored Periods detail
window.
Store Period Performance Log
The Store Period Performance log displays details of the store period performance process run
from the Activities page.
In the Item list, select from the following to view more details:
 Projects: View the project that the store period performance was run from.
 Store Period Performance Settings: View the reporting cycle set for the schedule as well
as the last period, the current period, and the data date at period closeout.
 Store Period Performance Results: View the period start and finish dates as well as the
activities and resource assignments included in the period closeout. If any activities were not
included in period closeout, they will be also listed along with the reasons why they weren't
included.
You can access the Store Period Performance log from the notifications panel or from the
Store Period Performance Overview (on page 237)
Activities Fields
Date Fields
Actual Finish
The date when the activity was completed.
Actual Start
The date work on the activity began.
240
Pages
BL Actual Finish
The completion date of the activity in the baseline.
The following baselines have unique names and values for this field: Current, Original,
Supplementary, User 1, User 2, User 3.
BL Actual Start
The start date of the activity in the baseline.
BL Early Finish
The earliest possible finish date of the activity in the baseline.
This date is calculated based on network logic, schedule constraints, and resource
availability.
BL Early Start
The earliest possible start date of the remaining work for the activity in the baseline.
availability.
BL Finish
The current finish date for the activity in the baseline.
BL Late Finish
In the baseline, the latest possible date the activity can finish without delaying the project
finish date.
This date is calculated based on activity relationships, schedule constraints, and resource
availability.
BL Late Start
In the baseline, the latest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin without
delaying the project finish date.
availability.
BL Start
241
The current start date of the activity in the baseline.

For started activities, this is the actual start date. For not started activities, this is the planned
start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, the start date field is set to the
remaining early start date.
Early Finish
The earliest possible date the activity can finish.
availability.
Early Start
The earliest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin.
availability.
Expected Finish
The date you expect work on the activity to finish.
Finish
The current finish date for the activity.
Late Finish
The latest possible date the activity can finish without delaying the project finish date.
availability.
Late Start
The latest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin without delaying the
project finish date.
availability.
Planned Finish
The date the activity is scheduled to finish if the activity has not started.
This date is calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the project
manager. This date is not changed by the project scheduler after the activity has started.
Planned Start
The date the activity is scheduled to start.
This date the activity is scheduled to begin is calculated by the project scheduler but can be
updated manually by the project manager. This date cannot be changed by the project
scheduler after the activity has started.
Pre-Response Optimistic Finish
242
Pages
The calculated activity finish date that corresponds to the defined optimistic percentile on the
risk analysis histogram.
Pre-Response Optimistic Start
The calculated activity start date that corresponds to the defined optimistic percentile on the
risk analysis histogram.
Pre-Response P50 Finish
The calculated activity finish date that corresponds to the median percentile on the risk
analysis histogram.
Pre-Response P50 Start
The calculated activity start date that corresponds to the median percentile on the risk
analysis histogram.
Pre-Response Pessimistic Finish
The calculated project finish date that corresponds to the defined pessimistic percentile.
Pre-Response Pessimistic Start
The calculated activity start date that corresponds to the defined pessimistic percentile on
the risk analysis histogram.
Primary Constraint Date
The constraint date for the activity, if the activity has a constraint.
The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to finish.
If this activity is not started, this date is the planned finish. This date can be updated
manually by the user, but it is overwritten when you schedule the project.
The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to begin.
This date can be updated manually by the user. Before the activity is started, this date is the
same as the planned start.
The latest possible date the activity must finish without delaying the project finish date.
This date is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity relationships, schedule
constraints, and resource availability. When the activity is complete, this field is blank.
The latest possible date the remaining work for the activity must begin without delaying the
project finish date.
This date is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity relationship, schedule
constraints, and resource availability.
Resume Date
The date when a suspended task or activity is resumed.
243
Secondary Constraint Date

The date for the activity's secondary constraint, if the activity has a secondary constraint.
Start
The current start date of the activity.
For started activities, this is the actual start date. For not started activities, this is the planned
start date until the project is scheduled. When scheduled, the start date field is set to the
remaining early start date.
Suspend Date
The date work has temporarily stopped on a given activity.
Duration Fields
Actual Duration
The total working time from the activity Actual Start date to the Actual Finish date for
completed activities, or the total working time from the Actual Start date to the data date for
in-progress activities.
The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.
The total working time from the activity's current start date to the current finish date.
The current start date is the planned start date until the activity is started, and then it is the
actual start date. The current finish date is the activity planned finish date while the activity is
not started, the remaining finish date while the activity is in progress, and the actual finish
date once the activity is completed. The total working time is calculated using the activity's
calendar.
BL Actual Duration
In the baseline, the total working time from the activity BL Actual Start date to the BL Actual
Finish date for completed activities, or the total working time from the BL Actual Start date to
the data date for in-progress activities.
The actual working time is computed using the activity's calendar.
BL Free Float
The amount of time the activity in the baseline can be delayed before delaying the start date
of any successor activity.
BL Planned Duration
The expected amount of time required to complete the activity in the baseline.
The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. The duration is
measured from the activity's planned start date to its planned finish date.
244
Pages
BL Remaining Duration
In the baseline, the total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining
finish date.
BL Total Float
In the baseline, the amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project
finish date. Calculated as BL Late Start minus BL Early Start or as BL Late Finish minus BL
Early Finish.
BL Variance - Duration
The duration difference between the activity At Completion Duration and BL Duration.
BL Variance - Finish
The duration difference between the activity Finish date and BL Finish date.
BL Variance - Start
The duration difference between the activity Start date and BL Start date.
Free Float
The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the start date of any
successor activity.
Maximum Duration
The estimated maximum amount of time required to complete the activity. This field is used
for three-point estimation to indicate activity uncertainty.
Minimum Duration
The estimated least amount of time required to complete the activity. This field is used for
three-point estimation to indicate activity uncertainty.
Most Likely Duration
The estimated most likely amount of time required to complete the activity. This field is used
for three-point estimation to indicate activity uncertainty.
Planned Duration
245
The expected amount of time required to complete an activity.

The planned working time is calculated using the activity's calendar. The duration is
measured from the activity's planned start date to its planned finish date.
Remaining Duration
The total working time from the activity remaining start date to the remaining finish date.
Remaining Float
The amount of time remaining in which the activity can be delayed before delaying the
project finish date. Calculated as Late Finish minus Remaining Finish.
Total Float
The amount of time the activity can be delayed before delaying the project finish date.
Calculated as Late Start minus Early Start or as Late Finish minus Early Finish.
Earned Value Fields

Budget At Completion
The budgeted or planned total cost through activity completion.
Calculated as Planned Labor Cost plus Planned Nonlabor Cost plus Planned Material Cost.
Budget At Completion Labor Units
The planned total labor units through activity completion.
Cost Performance Index (CPI)
The ratio of the approved budget for work performed to what you actually spent for the work
accomplished. The CPI reflects the relative value of work done compared to the amount paid
for it, and is also referred to as the projects cost efficiency. The CPI to date can be used to
project the cost performance for the remainder of the work.
A value greater than 1 indicates you are under budget. A value equal to 1 indicates you are
at budget. A value less than 1 indicates you are over budget.
Calculated as Earned Value divided by Actual Cost.
Cost Performance Index (CPI) Labor Units
Measures the work efficiency on an activity.
A value less than 1 indicates that the actual units have exceeded the planned units.
Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units divided by Actual Labor Units.
Cost Variance
A measure of activity cost performance. The difference between the budgeted cost of work
performed minus the actual cost of work performed.
Indicates how much you are under or over your approved budget. A negative value indicates
that the actual cost has exceeded the planned value.
Calculated as Earned Value minus Actual Total Cost.
Cost Variance Index
The ratio of the cost variance and the earned value of work performed on the activity.
246
Pages
Calculated as Cost Variance divided by Earned Value.

Cost Variance Index Labor Units
The ratio of the cost variance labor units and the earned value labor units for the activity.
Calculated as Cost Variance Labor Units divided by Earned Value Labor Units.
Cost Variance Labor Units
The difference between the earned value labor units and the actual labor units.
A negative value indicates that actual cost has exceeded the value of work performed.
Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units minus Actual Labor Units.
Earned Value Cost
The approved budget for work actually completed by the specified project data date.
Calculated as Budget At Completion multiplied by Performance Percent Complete. The
method for computing performance percent complete depends on the Earned Value
technique defined in the project settings.
Earned Value Labor Units
The portion of baseline labor units that are actually completed as of the project data date.
Calculated as Budget At Completion Labor Units multiplied by Performance Percent
Complete. The performance percent complete will be calculated using the activity percent
complete.
Estimate At Completion (EAC)
The forecasted cost of the project as the project progresses.
Estimate At Completion (EAC) Labor Units
The estimated labor units at completion.
Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Estimate To Complete Labor Units. Estimate To
Complete Labor Units is calculated based off of the Earned Value setting.
Estimate To Complete (ETC)
The estimated cost to complete the activity.
Estimate To Complete (ETC) Labor Units
The estimated quantity to complete the activity, WBS, or project.
Estimate To Complete Performance Index (TCPI)
The cost performance index value that must be achieved in order to complete the remaining
work on budget.
This is a measure of the efficiency required on the future performance of the project. A value
greater than 1 indicates that the work is over budget and more effort will be required to
reduce costs or increase earned value. A value less than 1 indicates the work is under
budget and that the current effort is sufficient enough to meet the budget at completion.
Calculated as (Budget At Completion - Earned Value) / (Estimate At Completion - Actual
Cost).
Period Earned Value Labor Units
247
The incremental value of the portion of baseline labor units that are complete as of the
project data date.
Period Planned Value Cost
The incremental value of the approved budget for the work scheduled to be completed by a
specified date.
Period Planned Value Labor Units
The incremental value of the portion of baseline labor units that are scheduled to be
complete as of the project data date.
Planned Value Cost
The approved budget for the work scheduled to be completed by a specified date.
Calculated as Budget At Completion multiplied by Schedule Percent Complete.
When an activity has assignments, the Planned Value Cost is calculated as Budget At
Completion multiplied by (Data Date of Current Project - Baseline Assignment Start Date)
divided by (Baseline Assignment Finish Date - Baseline Assignment Start Date). Each
assignment is then summed to the activity-level planned value.
Planned Value Labor Units
The portion of baseline labor units that are scheduled to be completed as of the project data
date.
Calculated as Budget At Completion Labor Units multiplied by Schedule Percent Complete.
Planned Value Period Cost
specified date.
Planned Value Period Units
The incremental value of the planned units for the work scheduled to be completed by a
specified project data date.
Planned Value Units
The planned units for the work scheduled to be completed by a specified project data date.
Schedule Performance Index (SPI)
The ratio of the approved budget for the work performed to the approved budget of the work
planned. The SPI reflects the relative amount the project is ahead or behind schedule, and is
also referred to as the project's schedule efficiency.
A value greater than 1 indicates you are ahead of schedule. A value equal to 1 indicates you
are on schedule. A value less than 1 indicates you are behind schedule.
Calculated as Earned Value divided by Planned Value.
Schedule Performance Index (SPI) Labor Units
The ratio of the earned value of labor units to the planned value of labor units.
Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor Units.
Schedule Variance
248
Pages
A measure of activity schedule performance. The difference between the amount budgeted
for the work you actually did and the work you planned to do.
Indicates how much you are ahead or behind schedule. A negative value indicates that less
work was actually performed than was scheduled.
Calculated as Earned Value minus Planned Value.
Schedule Variance Index
The ratio of the schedule variance and the work scheduled to be performed.
Calculated as Schedule Variance divided by Planned Value.
Schedule Variance Index Labor Units
The ratio of schedule variance labor units and the planned value labor units.
Calculated as Schedule Variance Labor Units divided by Planned Value Labor Units.
Schedule Variance Labor Units
The difference between the earned value of work performed and the work scheduled to be
performed.
Calculated as Earned Value Labor Units minus Planned Value Labor Units.
Variance At Completion
The difference between the baseline total cost and the current estimate of total cost. A
negative value indicates an estimated cost overrun.
Calculated as Budget At Completion minus Estimate At Completion.
Variance At Completion Labor Units
The difference between the baseline planned total labor units and the estimate at completion
labor units.
Calculated as Project Baseline Planned Total Labor Units minus Estimate At Completion
Labor Units.
Financial Fields
Actual Labor Cost
The actual costs for all labor resource assignments on the activity.
Actual Material Cost
The actual costs for all material resource assignments on the activity.
Actual Nonlabor Cost
The actual costs for all nonlabor resource assignments on the activity.
Actual Total Cost
The actual total cost for all resource assignments and direct activity costs (expenses) on the
activity.
249
At Completion Labor Cost

The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for all labor resource assignments on the
activity.
At Completion Material Cost
The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for all material resource assignments on
the activity.
At Completion Nonlabor Cost
The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for all nonlabor resource assignments on
the activity.
At Completion Total Cost
The sum of the actual costs plus remaining costs for all resource assignments and direct
activity costs (expenses) on the activity.
BL Actual Labor Cost
The actual cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity as stored in the associated
project baseline.
BL Actual Material Cost
The actual cost for all material resources assigned to the activity as stored in the associated
project baseline.
BL Actual Nonlabor Cost
The actual cost for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity as stored in the associated
project baseline.
BL Actual Total Cost
The actual total cost for all labor, nonlabor and material resources assigned to the activity as
stored in the associated project baseline.
Calculated as BL Actual Labor Cost plus BL Actual Nonlabor Cost plus BL Actual Material
Cost.
BL Planned Labor Cost
The planned cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity as stored in the associated
project baseline.
250
Pages
BL Planned Material Cost

The planned cost for all material resources assigned to the activity as stored in the
associated project baseline.
BL Planned Nonlabor Cost
The planned cost for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity as stored in the
associated project baseline.
BL Planned Total Cost
The planned total cost for all labor, nonlabor, and material resources assigned to the activity
as stored in the associated project baseline.
Calculated as BL Planned Labor Cost plus BL Planned Nonlabor Cost plus BL Planned
Material Cost.
BL Variance - Labor Cost
The difference between the associated project baseline planned labor cost and the current
schedule at completion labor cost.
Calculated as BL Planned Labor Cost minus At Completion Labor Cost.
BL Variance - Nonlabor Cost
The difference between the associated project baseline planned nonlabor cost and the
current schedule at completion nonlabor cost.
Calculated as BL Planned Nonlabor Cost minus At Completion Nonlabor Cost.
BL Variance - Material Cost
The difference between the associated project baseline planned material cost and the
current schedule at completion material cost.
Calculated as BL Planned Material Cost minus At Completion Material Cost.
BL Variance - Total Cost
The difference between the associated project baseline planned labor cost and the current
schedule at completion labor cost.
Calculated as BL Planned Total Cost minus At Completion Total Cost.
251
Planned Labor Cost
The planned cost for all labor resources assigned to the activity.
Planned Material Cost
The planned cost for all material resources assigned to the activity.
Planned Nonlabor Cost
The planned cost for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.
Planned Total Cost
The expected total cost of the activity and includes all resources and direct activity costs
(expenses).
Period Actual Labor Cost
The aggregation of all labor costs incurred during the current financial period.
Period Actual Material Cost
The aggregation of all material costs incurred during the current financial period.
Period Actual Nonlabor Cost
The aggregation of all nonlabor costs incurred during the current financial period.
Period Actual Total Cost
The aggregation of all labor, nonlabor, material and direct activity costs (expenses) incurred
during this financial period.
Period Earned Value Cost
The incremental value of the approved budget for work actually completed by the specified
project data date.
Period Planned Value Cost
specified date.
Prior Actual Labor Cost
The sum of the actual stored period labor costs on the activity.
Prior Actual Material Cost
The sum of the actual stored period material costs on the activity.
Prior Actual Nonlabor Cost
The sum of the actual stored period nonlabor costs on the activity.
Remaining Labor Cost
The remaining cost for all labor resource assignments on the activity.
Remaining Material Cost
252
Pages
The remaining cost for all material resource assignments on the activity.
Remaining Nonlabor Cost
The remaining cost for all nonlabor resource assignments on the activity.
Remaining Total Cost
The remaining cost for all resource assignments and direct activity costs (expenses) on the
activity.
General Fields
Activity Status
Determines the status of the activity. Valid values are Not Started, In Progress, and
Completed.
BL Activity Status
Determines the status of the activity in the baseline. Valid values are Not Started, In
Progress, and Completed.
Calendar
The calendar assigned to the activity.
Critical
Designates an activity as critical. An activity is defined as critical based upon the project
settings configured for the project.
Duration Type
Determines how remaining duration, units, and units/time are calculated when you update an
activity that has resources assigned. The valid values are Fixed Units/Time, Fixed Units,
Fixed Duration & Units, and Fixed Duration & Units/Time.
Float Path
A number calculated by the scheduler which identifies the float path that each activity is on.
The number starts from 1 (where 1 is most critical) to the max number of float paths
identified by the scheduler.
Float Path Order
Order that the activities were processed within each float path.
Leveling Priority
Determines the priority of the activity when performing role leveling.
Longest Path
The sequence of project activities from start to finish where the Total Duration is longer than
any other path.
Owner
253
The user responsible for the activity.

Primary Constraint
The main restriction impacting the activity start or finish date.
Relationship Free Float
For predecessors, the Relationship Free Float is the Free Float on the relationship calculated
using the predecessor activity's calendar as Relationship Successor Early Start minus
Relationship Early Finish. For successors, the Relationship Free Float is the Free Float of
the potential successor activity if the relationship is determined to be the driving relationship
using the successor activity's calendar. Calculated using the successor activity's calendar as
Relationship Successor Early Start minus Relationship Early Finish.
Relationship Total Float
For predecessors, the Relationship Total Float is the Total Float on the relationship
calculated using the predecessor activity's calendar as Relationship Late Start minus
Relationship Early Start. For successors, the Relationship Total Float is the Total Float of the
potential successor activity if the relationship is determined to be the driving relationship
using the successor activity's calendar. Calculated using the successor activity's calendar as
successor activity's Relationship Late Date minus Relationship Successor Early Date.
Resource IDs
The unique identifiers of the resources assigned to the activity.
Resource Names
The names of the resources assigned to the activity.
Role IDs
The unique identifiers of the roles assigned to the activity.
Role Names
The names of the roles assigned to the activity.
Scope Percent Complete Weight Method
The weight is calculated using cost, quantity, hours, or manually entered values. Cost,
Quantity, and Hours are represented as n in the equations that follow.
The n weight is first calculated for each scope assignment in the work package as Revised n
multiplied by the scope assignment Scope Percent Complete.
Scope Percent Complete is calculated as Installed Quantity divided by At Completion
Quantity.
The sum of the scope assignments Revised n and the sum of the scope assignments n
Weight for all scope assignments in the work package are then used to compute the work
package Scope Percent Complete. This is calculated as the n Weight divided by Revised n.
Completed Weight for the Manual option is calculated as Manual Weight multiplied by Scope
Percent Complete.
Scope Percent Complete at the work package level for the manual option is calculated as the
sum of Manual Completed Weight divided by the sum of Manual Weight for all scope
assignments in the work package.
254
Pages
Secondary Constraint
The secondary restriction impacting the activity start or finish date.
Task Count
The number of tasks assigned to an activity.
This is a read-only field.
Task Status - Completion
The current status of the task assigned to the activity. Valid values are New, Pending,
Committed, and Completed.
Task Status - Dates
Indicates the overall date status of the activity's assigned tasks.
Outside Activity: A task's dates are outside of the activity's Start and Finish dates.
Inside Activity: All of the tasks' dates are within the activity's Start and Finish dates.
No Tasks Assigned: No tasks are assigned to the activity.
Task Status - Indicator
Indicates whether any of the activity's assigned tasks have dates or completion statuses that
requires attention.
Type
The type of activity. Valid values are Activity Dependent, Resource Dependent, Level of
Effort, Start Milestone, and Finish Milestone.
Uncertainty Distribution
The probability distribution that best models the three-point estimate durations. The valid
values are Triangular and Uniform.
Percentage Fields
Activity Percent Complete
The percentage of the activity that has been completed.
This value is based on the formula for the selected Percent Complete Type. The Percent
Complete Type can be Physical, Duration, Units, or Scope.
Physical: The user records the percent complete manually.
Duration: Calculated as (Planned Duration minus Remaining Duration) divided by Planned
Duration, multiplied by 100.
Units: Calculated as (Actual Labor Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units) divided by (Actual Labor
Units plus Actual Nonlabor Units plus Remaining Labor Units plus Remaining Nonlabor
Units), multiplied by 100.
Scope: Calculated as Installed Quantity divided by At Completion Quantity, multiplied by 100.
255
BL Activity Percent Complete

In the baseline, the activity percent complete, manually entered by a user.
BL Duration Percent Complete
The duration percent complete for the activity in the baseline. Calculated as Planned
Duration minus Remaining Duration divided by Planned Duration multiplied by 100.
BL Percent Complete Type
Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the activity
in the baseline. Valid values are Physical, Duration, and Units.
BL Units Percent Complete
The percent complete of units for all labor and nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in
the baseline. Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Completion Units multiplied by 100.
Duration Percent Complete
The duration percent complete for the activity. Calculated as Planned Duration minus
Remaining Duration divided by Planned Duration multiplied by 100.
Duration Percent of Planned
The actual duration percent of planned duration for the activity. Calculated as Actual
Duration divided by Original BL Duration multiplied by 100.
Labor Units Percent Complete
The percent complete of units for all labor resources for the activity. Calculated as Actual
Labor Units divided by At Completion Labor Units multiplied by 100.
Nonlabor Units Percent Complete
The percent complete of units for all nonlabor resources for the activity. Calculated as Actual
Nonlabor Units divided by At Completion Nonlabor Units multiplied by 100.
Percent Complete Type
Determines the way in which the application calculates the percent complete for the activity.
Physical: Percent complete is manually entered by a user based on the amount of physical
work completed on the activity.
Duration: Percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining duration.
Units: Percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining units.
Scope: The percent complete for the activity is derived from the scope percent complete of
the linked scope assignments.
256
Pages
Period Actual Labor Units

The number of labor units used during this financial period.
Period Actual Nonlabor Units
The nonlabor units used during this financial period.
Performance Percent Complete
The percentage of the planned work that is currently complete.
Performance Percent Complete is used to calculate earned value and is equal to the activity
percent complete.
Physical Percent Complete
The activity percent complete, manually entered by a user.
Pre-Response Criticality Index
During risk analysis, tasks can join or leave the critical path. The criticality index expresses
as a percentage, how often a particular task was on the critical path during the analysis.
Schedule Percent Complete
The activity schedule percent complete specifies how much of the activity's project baseline
duration is complete so far.
With an earned value baseline selected, the schedule percent complete value is calculated
based on where the current data date falls relative to the activity's project baseline start and
finish dates.
Calculated as (Data Date - Baseline Start Date) / (Baseline Finish Date - Baseline Start
Date).
If the data date is earlier than the baseline start, the schedule percent complete is 0. If the
data date is later than the baseline finish, the schedule percent complete is 100.
Without an earned value baseline selected, the schedule percent complete value will use the
activity planned dates and will be calculated based on where the current data date falls
relative each activity's planned start and finish dates.
Calculated as (Data Date - Planned Start Date) / (Planned Finish Date - Planned Start Date).
If the data date is earlier than the planned start, the schedule percent complete is 0. If the
data date is later than the planned finish, the schedule percent complete is 100.
Scope Percent Complete
The percentage completion of the scope assignments linked to the activity.
Calculated as Installed Quantity divided by At Completion Quantity.
The percent complete of units for all labor and nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.
Calculated as Actual Units divided by At Completion Units multiplied by 100.
Unit Fields
Actual Labor Units
The number of units expended for all labor resources assigned to the activity.
257
Actual Nonlabor Units

The number of nonlabor units that have been expended on the activity.
At Completion Labor Units
The sum of the actual plus remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.
It is the same as the planned labor units if the activity is not started, and the actual labor
units after the activity is completed.
Calculated as Actual Labor Units plus Remaining Labor Units.
At Completion Nonlabor Units
The sum of the actual plus remaining units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.
It is the same as the planned nonlabor units if the activity is not started, and the actual
nonlabor units after the activity is completed.
Calculated as Actual Nonlabor Units plus Remaining Nonlabor Units.
BL Actual Labor Units
The number of units expended for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the baseline.
BL Actual Nonlabor Units
The number of nonlabor units expended for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in
the baseline.
BL Planned Labor Units
The planned units for all labor resources assigned to the activity in the baseline.
BL Planned Nonlabor Units
The planned units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity in the baseline.
BL Variance - Labor Units
The difference between the activity At Completion Labor Units and the BL Planned Labor
Units.
BL Variance - Nonlabor Units
258
Pages
The difference between the activity At Completion Nonlabor Units and the BL Planned
Nonlabor Units.
Budget At Completion Units
The budgeted or planned units through activity completion.
Planned Labor Units
The planned number of units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.
Planned Nonlabor Units
The planned units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activities in the project.
Prior Actual Labor Units
The sum of the actual stored period units for all labor resource assignments on the activity.
Prior Actual Nonlabor Units
The sum of the actual stored period units for all nonlabor resource assignments on the
activity.
Remaining Labor Units
The remaining units for all labor resources assigned to the activity.
The Remaining Labor Units reflect the work remaining to be done for the activity. Before the
activity is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units. After the activity is
completed, the remaining units are zero.
Remaining Nonlabor Units
The remaining units for all nonlabor resources assigned to the activity.
The remaining units reflect the work remaining to be done for the activity. Before the activity
is started, the remaining units are the same as the planned units. After the activity is
completed, there are zero remaining units.
Baselines
Establish baselines throughout the project lifecycle to review the performance of your project
over time.
Baselines Overview
A baseline is a copy of a project's schedule data at a given point in time. As a static
representation of the project plan, it can be used as a benchmark against which to measure
performance as the project progresses. Create multiple baselines to evaluate performance at
different phases of the project lifecycle.
259
When you create a baseline, you can set the baseline date to capture project data at any point
between the project creation date and the current date. This is useful if you want to add a
baseline for project data as it existed on a specific date in the past. If you forgot to add a
baseline on a specific date, select a past baseline date to use the data from that date.
Baselines can be opened on the Activities page to view the project data represented by the
baseline. When a baseline is open, baseline values are used to populate the standard schedule
fields. When the current schedule, a baseline, or a scenario is open, a baseline's values are
used to populate corresponding baseline fields. Baseline fields are used for comparison with the
current schedule or scenario fields. For example, if the original baseline is open, the baseline's
start values populate Start date fields. If the current schedule or a scenario is open, Start date
fields are populated with current schedule or current scenario values, and Original BL Start date
fields are populated with original baseline values. The baseline fields used for comparison in the
current schedule are empty when any baseline is open.
Baselines can also be opened so that they can be updated. While updating baseline data is not
a typical project management practice, there may be situations where minor adjustments to a
baseline need to be made by the project manager or scheduler. You can modify most of the data
in a baseline as you would the data in the current schedule. The data stored by a baseline is
unique to that baseline. For example, actions such as updating activity data, assigning
resources and roles, scheduling activities, leveling resources and roles, and using the schedule
health check tool do not affect the current schedule, other baselines, or schedule scenarios. You
cannot manually add new activities to a baseline, but you can add existing activities from the
current schedule to a baseline and update the data for existing baseline activities. If you need to
replace your current schedule with the data from a baseline, you can set the baseline as the
current schedule. If the changes you make to a baseline need to be undone, you can revert the
baseline back to its original state, as long as that baseline was created in Oracle Primavera
Cloud and not imported from P6. The baseline must be open before it can be updated or
reverted. See Open a Baseline (on page 182) for more information.
Note: Because of differences in how data is managed in P6 and Oracle Primavera Cloud, you cannot revert changes made to a baseline if that
baseline was imported from a P6 XML file.
There are four types of baselines in the application: original, current, supplementary, and
unofficial:
 An original baseline is an official baseline that is typically set when the project has been
approved. It may also be referred to as the Performance Measurement Baseline (PMB).
Setting an original baseline captures values in all original baseline fields. Original scope
values cannot be updated after the original baseline is set.
 A current baseline, also referred to as the active baseline, is an official baseline used to
measure differences between current project values and the original values. You can only
set a current baseline after an original baseline has been set.
 The supplementary baseline is an official baseline that can be used for any purpose. A
supplementary baseline might be created before a major schedule update to capture the
state of the project before the update.
 Unofficial baselines can be created to capture how the project is progressing or they can
come from previous official baselines. For example, a baseline that was previously set as
your official current baseline is not removed when you set a new current baseline. It instead
becomes an unofficial baseline that is retained for future reference.
260
Pages
At any point in time, you can have one original baseline, one current baseline, one
supplementary baseline, and an unlimited number of unofficial baselines. You can change the
types of existing baselines or remove a baseline's type to make it an unofficial baseline. Any
baseline can be opened for viewing or updating.
The distinction between official baselines and unofficial baselines is that official
baselines—original, current, and supplementary—have corresponding baseline fields while
unofficial baselines do not. To view the field values stored in an unofficial baseline, you can
either change its type to an official baseline or set it as a user baseline preference. You can set
up to three existing baselines as user baseline preferences, which typically indicate the
baselines that are most important to you. The baselines set as your preferences are used to
populate the values in user baseline fields. This is useful when you want to measure project
performance against baselines other than the official project baselines. Set on the Activities
page, user baseline preferences apply only to the user who set them. Official or unofficial
baselines can be set as user baselines.
Schedule Management
For schedule management, each baseline captures a complete set of data about the project
schedule, including activity dates, durations, units, costs, float, and percentages. After the
project schedule is developed, an original baseline should be set to establish points of reference
to monitor your schedule as it changes over time. When the current baseline is created, all of the
current baseline fields are updated to reflect the current project values.
To measure schedule performance, configure views that show baseline variance fields to identify
activities that are not progressing as planned. Baseline variance fields measure the differences
between your current project values and your baseline values. You can view variances for your
original, current, supplementary, and user baselines. Variances are useful in identifying the
activities with the greatest impact to your original project plan.
When activity date indicators are enabled, the baseline Start and Finish date fields will display
visual indicators when a constraint is configured for the activity or if an actual start date or actual
finish date is set. See Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
Official and user baselines can also be configured as bars to be displayed in the Gantt chart and
used to monitor activity progress visually on the project timeline.
Earned Value functionality is also supported for schedule management use cases. Designate
one of your existing baselines as the project's earned value baseline. This enables earned value
metrics to be calculated for the activities in your project. Activity earned value data is rolled up to
the WBS and project levels. Earned value metrics track current schedule and budget
performance against the designated baseline. There are a variety of supported fields that you
can use to monitor progress, including planned value, earned value, schedule and cost
variances, schedule and cost performance indexes, estimates to complete, and estimates at
completion. Most earned value metrics can be viewed in terms of costs or labor units. If you
already have a baseline that should be used for earned value, it is recommended that you open
the baseline to schedule it to a data date appropriate for that baseline, and then recalculate its
costs. These actions ensure that the baseline fields referenced in earned value calculations are
accurate and up to date.
261
Scope Management
For scope management, a current baseline is created to capture all approved changes since the
original baseline was created. When the current baseline is created, all the baseline fields are
updated to reflect the current values and are in turn used in certain calculations to measure
progress. The original values are not changed.
For a work package, there are four baseline attributes that the user can refer to after a baseline
has been set: Baseline Cost, Baseline Hours, Baseline Start, and Baseline Finish. For each
scope assignment, there are five baseline attributes: Baseline Start, Baseline Finish, Baseline
Cost, Baseline Hours, and Baseline Quantity. When the original baseline is set, these fields are
populated with the original values. After the original baseline is set, all changes needed for
scope items, work packages, and scope assignments must go through a review process, which
is initiated by submitting change and transfer requests.
Add a Baseline
Adding project baselines enables you to track progress throughout the project lifecycle. If no
baseline exists for a project, the first baseline must be an original or unofficial baseline. Any
subsequent baselines can be original, current, supplementary, or unofficial baselines. You can
also change the type of existing baselines. Only one original, current, and supplementary
baseline can exist at a time, but you can maintain an unlimited number of unofficial baselines.
You can add, edit, and delete project baselines from the Baselines page or Activities page.
To add a project baseline:
1) Navigate to the Baselines page (see page 437).
2) Select  Add.
3) In the Add Baseline dialog box, enter the following information:
 Name: The name of the baseline.
 Source: The source of the baseline data. Select Current Schedule, Scenario, Baseline,
or From History.
 If you selected Current Schedule as the source, continue to type selection.
 If you selected Scenario as the source, use the Scenario list to choose an
existing scenario with data you want to copy.
 If you selected From History as the source, use the Baseline Date picker to
choose the date of the project data captured by the baseline. Select a date in the
time
 Type: The type of baseline. Select Original, Current, Supplementary, or leave the
value blank.
262
Pages
Notes:
 Unofficial baselines do not have a Type. Select the blank row in the
list to add an unofficial baseline.
 The dialog box displays the baseline type selected as the earned
value baseline. This can be changed in the project settings (see
"Configure the Earned Value Baseline" on page 185).
5) Select Add.
Tips
 To access your baselines from the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then
select Manage Baselines. You can also add baselines from the Manage Baselines dialog
box. Baselines added in this manner automatically set the current schedule as the scenario
source.
 To add baselines directly from the Activities page, select the Actions  menu, and then
select Add Baseline.
 If you do not see a newly added baseline on the Activities page or in the Manage
Baselines dialog box, select  Refresh.
 The Data Date field shows the data date value as of the Baseline Date. This is useful when
determining the progress point of your project at the time represented by the baseline.
 The Baseline for Earned Value field shows which baseline is being used as the project's
earned value baseline.
 To delete a baseline, on the Baselines page, in the Manage Baselines dialog box, or on the
Activities page, select the  Context menu, and then select Delete. You cannot delete an
original baseline if a current or supplementary baseline exists. If you delete the baseline
designated as the earned value baseline, all earned value calculations will be reset when
you recalculate costs.
 You cannot remove or change the original baseline if you have any scope changes, installed
or actual scope quantities, or at least one closed reporting period.
 When a new scenario is created, a notification message is displayed and you can review the
Open a Baseline
Open a baseline if you need to view or update the activity data stored by the baseline. When a
baseline is open, baseline values are used to populate the standard schedule fields, and the
designated baseline fields are empty.
While updating a baseline is not a typical project management practice, there may be situations
where minor adjustments to a baseline need to be made by the project manager or scheduler.
You cannot manually add activities in a baseline, but you can update existing activity data. If the
changes you make to a baseline need to be undone, you can revert the baseline back to its
original state. The baseline must be open before it can be updated or reverted.
263
Use the Open menu in the page toolbar to switch between your current schedule, schedule
scenarios, and schedule baselines. The list contains your official baselines, any baselines set as
a user baseline preference, and the open baseline. Each official baseline in the list displays the
name of the baseline and its baseline type.
When a baseline is open, a banner appears above the page toolbar to inform you that you are
currently making changes to a baseline. This message is to remind you of the object in which
you are currently working and that any changes made to the baseline do not directly impact your
current schedule, but are reflected in the corresponding baseline fields visible in your current
schedule. The banner can be dismissed for your current session and will reappear when you
reload the page.
To open a baseline:
2) In the Open menu, in the Baselines section, select a baseline to open.
Tips
 You can open any available baseline from the Manage Baselines dialog box, including
those not listed in the Open menu.
 To revert a baseline, select the Actions  menu, and then select Revert Baseline. This
action cannot be undone.
Add an Activity from the Current Schedule to a Baseline

activities will not automatically appear in existing baselines. However, if a baseline requires
these activities, you can add them from the current schedule to the baseline. This feature
enables you to update an existing baseline with new activities without having to create a new
baseline that would reflect current progress.
exist in the baseline. The activities that you select in the dialog box will be added to your
baseline. All of an activity's data will also be added, including dates, durations, units, costs,
relationships, resource, role, and scope assignments, risks, codes, and configured fields.
Activities in the selection with the same ID as an activity already in the baseline will not be
added. When activity date indicators are enabled, visual indicators are displayed when a
constraint is configured for the activity or if an actual start date or actual finish date is set.
You can add up to 100 activities from the current schedule to a baseline at one time. You must
have the required security privileges to add and edit activity data for a baseline.
To add activities from the current schedule to a baseline:
264
Pages

4) In the Get Activities dialog box, select one or more activities to add to your baseline.
5) Select Get.
Tips
the Get Activities process.
Set a Baseline as the Current Schedule

Baselines capture the progress of your project at a specific point in time. Baselines are created
for a number of reasons, including at the beginning of the project or before a major schedule
update. If you need to replace your current schedule with the data from a baseline, you can set
the baseline as the current schedule. When a baseline is set as the new current schedule,
baseline details such as dates, durations, units, costs, assignments, and relationships overwrite
schedule.
Note: Setting a baseline as the current schedule overwrites all current

in both the current schedule and the baseline, and that are also started
in the baseline. This action cannot be undone. The process runs in the
You must have the required security privileges to set a baseline as the current schedule.
To set a baseline as the current schedule:
Tips
 When a baseline is set as the current schedule, the previous current schedule is converted
to a retired schedule scenario. If needed, you can make the previous schedule visible as a
scenario in the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
 Use the Open menu in the Activities page toolbar to switch between baselines. Select View
All in the list to open the Manage Baselines dialog box.
265
Set User Baseline Preferences

Set up to three baselines as user baseline preferences on the Activities page. User baseline
preferences are typically the baselines that are most important to you. They can be official or
unofficial baselines and can be changed at any time. User baseline fields are populated with the
values stored in the corresponding baseline and can be used as part of your view settings,
including columns, filtering, grouping, and Gantt bars.
Baseline preferences are specific to each user. The baseline preferences you set are only
visible to you. The same baselines can be set as preferences by multiple users.
To set user baseline preferences:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Set User Baseline Preferences.
3) In the Set User Baseline Preferences dialog box, do the following to set your user
baselines:
a. Select Project Baselines to view which baselines are currently set as the current,
original, and supplementary baselines.
b. In the Baseline 1, Baseline 2, and Baseline 3 lists, select the baselines that you want to
set as your user baselines.
c. Select Save.
4) Your user baseline fields are updated with your selections.
Tips
 Deleting a baseline removes it as a baseline preference, but removing a baseline's type does
not remove it as a baseline preference.
Schedule Comparison
Compare two versions of a project schedule, and review the variances between them. You can
compare baselines, scenarios, the current schedule, or a specific point in the project's history.
Track the creation, deletion, and modification of activities, activity values, project values, and
project settings.
Schedule Comparison Overview

The Schedule Comparison page enables you to perform schedule variance analysis, a process
of comparing one version of your project schedule to another and reviewing any changes
between the two. As your project progresses, different stakeholders may add, delete, or edit
information. Not only does this process modify the structure of the original project plan, but each
update increases the potential for accidental errors or incorrect changes to be introduced into
the schedule. Schedule variance analysis enables the schedule owner to ensure the validity and
accuracy of all changes to the project schedule.
266
Pages
The two versions of the schedule being compared can be a baseline, a scenario, the current
schedule, or a specific point in time since the project's creation. Typically, the first schedule
chosen should be an original or earlier version of the project schedule. The second schedule
should be a revised or later version. After running the comparison process, you can view
variance values on items in the project that have been added, deleted, or edited. Items that may
show variances include project fields, activities and activity details, relationships, resource
assignments, and risks. The application uses the internal database ID when comparing two
versions of an activity and its accompanying details. Even if the activity name or ID is changed
on the Activities page, the application will compare the activity versions using the internal
database ID. When calculating the variance between two project or two activity dates, the
application uses the project calendar.
Schedule variance data is displayed in several areas of the page, each with a distinct purpose.
In the table, you can compare original, revised, and variance values for the field columns you
choose to display. In the detail windows, all available variances for a selected activity are broken
down into categories. In the Gantt chart, activity bars for both schedules are displayed along a
timeline. Finally, a Schedule Variance Analysis panel offers a comprehensive view of all items in
the schedule that have been added, deleted, or changed. Some items provide editable
thresholds so you can focus on more significant changes to the schedule.
Except for the configuration of view settings, all data on the Schedule Comparison page is
read-only. The data that is visible depends on your user permissions. If you do not have the
required permissions to view certain data, that data will not display, or it will be replaced with a
 Lock icon. For example, cost data is completely hidden for users who do not have the
required permissions to view that data. See Security Permissions for Schedule for additional
information.
267
Working with the Schedule Comparison Page

Use the Schedule Comparison page to compare the variances between two different versions of
a project schedule. Variance information is displayed in several areas of the page, each with a
distinct configuration and purpose.
Item Description
Comparison Toolbar: Select two versions of the schedule to compare. The
first is typically an original or earlier version of the schedule. The second is
typically a revised or later version of the schedule. For either schedule, you can
1 select the current schedule, a baseline, a scenario, or a previous point in time
since the project was created.
You can chose to export the comparison to a .xlsx file and work with the
comparison data in the spreadsheet program of your choice.
268
Pages
Item Description
2 Activity Table: Each row in the table contains an activity from the two
schedules being compared. Activities that do not exist in the original schedule
but exist in the revised schedule are considered new and are displayed in
green text with an asterisk. Activities that exist in the original schedule but do
not exist in the revised schedule are considered deleted and are displayed with
struck-through text.
Each column you choose to add to the table is separated into three values: the
original value, the revised value, and the variance between the two. When
activity date indicators are enabled, an indicator for actual start dates, actual
finish dates, and constraints are displayed in the Activity Table. Variances for
numerical fields show numerical values. If there is no variance, the cell value is
zero. Variances for non-numerical fields show a check mark. If there is no
variance, the cell is blank. Variance cell values for new or deleted activities are
also blank.
3 Gantt Chart: The Gantt chart shows activity bars for the two schedules being
compared. Each bar represents an activity's start date, finish date, and
duration. Relationship lines are shown for the revised schedule's activities.
4 Schedule Variance Analysis panel: Configure and display added, deleted, or
changed values for all fields across the project. Categories in the panel include
activities, activity-related objects, activity values, project values, and scheduler
settings. The number displayed for each category in the panel represents the
total number of items that meet that category's criteria. Drill down into a
category to view data for individual items. Some items provide editable
thresholds so you can focus on more significant changes to the schedule.
5 Detail Windows: View all modified field values for the selected activity. If a
value in the schedule is not new, deleted, or changed, it will not appear in a
detail window. Detail windows that contain updated values are displayed with
an asterisk in the tab title.
The detail windows are separated into the following categories:
 Entered Values: Values that are manually entered by the user.
 Calculated Values: Values that are calculated based on changes made
to entered values or by tools such as the scheduler or leveler.
 Relationships: Predecessor and successor activity relationships.
 Resource Assignments: Resources assigned to the selected activity.
 Risk Mappings: Risks assigned to the selected activity.
269
Export the Schedule Comparison Page

You can export the schedule comparison data to your preferred spreadsheet application. This
allows you to report key changes made to project activities and further customize the data output
in the spreadsheet application.
To export the schedule comparison page:
1) Navigate to the Schedule Comparison page (see page 438).
2) In the Original list and Revised list, select two versions of the project schedule that you
want to compare.
3) Select Compare to run the comparison analysis.
4) Select Export to export all of data in the Schedule Comparison table and from the
Schedule Variance Analysis panel.
Note: To customize the analysis panel follow the steps in Configure the
Schedule Variance Analysis Panel (on page 270) to determine the
display options.
5) Save or Open the file.
Tips
 The export is created as a .xlsx file.
 The export file contains a list of all activities in the project regardless of grouping and
filtering.
 The export file does not contain content from the Schedule Comparison Gantt chart or the
details panels.
 Cost fields specific to the Activity List, as specified in Column settings, appear empty in the
export file for users who do not have permissions to view cost. All other cost fields and data
are removed from the export file.
 Date fields in the export file are displayed in UTC and formatted as YYYY/MM/DD.
 When you receive a system notification that the export is complete, select Download File in
the notification or view the full message in the Inbox.
Configure the Schedule Variance Analysis Panel

Configure comparison options to determine what is displayed on the Schedule Variance
Analysis panel.
To configure the Schedule Variance Analysis panel tab options:
1) Navigate to the Schedule Comparison page (see page 438)
2) In the Settings panel, select the Comparison Panel tab.
3) To configure the comparison panel, select from the following:
a. In the New section, select the new items to display:
 New Activities
 New Relationships
 New Resources Assignments
270
Pages
 New Risk Mappings

b. In the Deleted section, select the deleted items to display:
 Deleted Activities
 Deleted Relationships
 Deleted Resource Assignments
 Deleted Risk Mappings
c. In the Changed section, select the changed items to display:
 Changed Scheduler Settings
 Changed Project Values
 Changed Entered Values
 Changed Calculated Values
 Changed Relationships
 Changed Resources Assignments
4) Select Apply.
Compare Two Versions of a Project Schedule

Compare an original or earlier version of your project schedule to a revised or later version. A
schedule version can be a baseline, scenario, the current schedule, or a specific point in time
since the project's creation.
The schedule comparison process calculates variances between the original and revised
versions of your schedule and displays the variance data in several areas of the page, each with
a distinct purpose. You can view variances in the table, detail windows, Gantt chart, and
Schedule Variance Analysis panel.
All data on the Schedule Comparison page is read-only. The data that is visible depends on your
user permissions. If you do not have the required permissions to view certain data. If you do not
have the required permissions to view certain data, that data will not display, or it will be
replaced with a  Lock icon. For example, cost data is completely hidden for users who do not
have the required permissions to view that data. See Security Permissions for Schedule for
additional information.
To run a schedule comparison analysis:
1) Navigate to the Schedule Comparison page (see page 438).
2) In the Original list and Revised list, select two versions of the project schedule that you
want to compare.
3) Select Compare to run the comparison analysis.
Note: The selected schedules are not automatically scheduled before

the comparison process is run. For the most accurate comparison of
calculated values, it is recommended that you schedule both schedules
before running the process.
4) After the schedule comparison process completes, the results are displayed on the following
areas of the page:
271
 Activity Table: Displays activities from both schedules, including added and deleted
activities. Each column in the table contains original, revised, and variance values.
Column options are configured in the page settings.
 Gantt Chart: Displays activity bars for the two schedules being compared. Select the 
Gantt icon to display the chart.
 Schedule Variance Analysis: Displays added, deleted, and changed values for all fields
across the project. Drill down into a category to view data for individual items. Analysis
options are configured in the page settings. Select the  Schedule Variance Analysis
icon to display the panel.
 Detail Windows: Displays categorized variances for the selected activity. If a value in the
schedule is not new, deleted, or changed, it will not appear in a detail window.
Note: For more information about each area, see Working with the
Schedule Comparison Page (on page 268).
Tips
 Use quick filters to refine the number of activities displayed on the page. In the  Quick
Filters list, select values on which to filter, and then select Apply. Quick filter selections
apply to activities in either schedule. Apply multiple quick filters to further reduce how many
activities are displayed. Clear a single filter to show more results. Select Clear to clear all
filters.
 Grouping options, configured in the page settings, apply to the revised schedule.
 When activity date indicators are enabled, the Schedule Comparison table displays
indicators for activities with Actual Start dates, Actual Finish dates, and activities with
assigned constraints. When the As Late As Possible constraint is selected, the constraint
indicator is not displayed. See Configure Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable
indicators.
Resource List Overview

A resource is any quantifiable item in limited supply and of sufficient value to justify tracking and
assigning to specific activities for a project. Resources include general or specialized labor,
nonlabor items such as equipment, and material items such as bricks. Labor and nonlabor
resources are always time-based. Material resources, such as consumable items, are based on
a specified unit of measure. Resources can be organized hierarchically for easier management
and organization.
Resources perform roles, if defined. Resources can be indirectly assigned to activities by first
planning the role required, or resources can be directly assigned to activities. These options are
entirely at each organization's discretion. The staffing of role assignments with resources is a
useful technique during the high-level or early planning of a project. Roles are assigned to
activities when the general labor requirements are known, such as foreman, plumber, or painter.
Later, when specific resources are known, they are used to staff the roles. You can plan an
entire project using direct resource or role assignments, or by assigning roles and staffing them
with resources.
272
Pages
Resources can be added to a resource list at the workspace level or the project level. Add
resources at the workspace level when more than one project in the workspace will use the
same resources. Add resources at the project level when the resources are only needed for a
single project. A resource added at the project level can later be promoted to the project's parent
workspace to make it available to other projects in the workspace. When associating roles with
resources, they must be owned by the same workspace or project.
All resources can have multiple availability periods defined to reflect the varying amounts of work
a resource is able to perform. Each availability period supports up to five pay rates, which
represent the cost of the resource in a given work period. Resource rates are used to calculate
the cost of each activity to which the resource is assigned.
Workspace Resource List

Create labor, nonlabor, and material resources at the workspace level so that they can be
available for assignment to the projects in your workspace.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Resource List. In Primavera Professional, this page is
called Resources.
To learn more about resources, see Resource List Overview (on page 272).
Create a Workspace Resource

Create resources at the workspace level if they will be assigned to multiple projects in your
workspace. Resources can be added directly to the workspace, assigned from a parent
workspace, imported from a Microsoft Excel file, or imported from P6 EPPM. Build resource
hierarchies for easier organization of similar resources.
Resources can also be promoted to a higher level, removed from the workspace, or deleted
permanently from the application.
To create a workspace resource, do any of the following:
 Add a Workspace Resource (on page 273)
 Assign a Parent Workspace Resource to a Workspace (on page 274)
 Create a Resource by Import (on page 275)
 Import Resources from P6 EPPM (Primavera Cloud only)
To manage a workspace resource, do any of the following:
 Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Workspace (on page 275)
 Promote a Workspace Resource to the Parent Workspace (on page 276)
 Remove a Resource from a Workspace (on page 277)
 Delete a Workspace Resource (on page 277)
Add a Workspace Resource
Add resources to the workspace resource list if they will be assigned to multiple projects in your
workspace. Workspace resources are generally reused between activities and projects.
273
Resources can be distinguished as either labor, material, or nonlabor. Labor and nonlabor
resources are always time-based. Material resources, such as consumable items, are assigned
a unit of measure to quantify their amounts.
To add a workspace resource:
1) Navigate to the workspace resource page (see page 438).
2) Select  Add.
3) In the new row, complete the following fields:
 Name: Enter a name for the resource.
 ID: Enter an ID for the resource.
 Type: Select the type of resource. The default is Labor.
Tips
 By default, the status of the resource is set to Active. If you do not want the resource to be
available immediately upon creation, in the Status list, select Inactive.
 You can build a hierarchy of resources by adding them as siblings or children to other
resources. Select the  Context menu, and then select Add Sibling or Add Child. Oracle
Primavera Cloud supports resource hierarchies up to 30 levels.
 The Owned By column indicates the workspace or project to which the resource belongs.
Most resource information can only be edited in the workspace or project where it is owned.
Assign a Parent Workspace Resource to a Workspace
Resources that are created in parent workspaces are available to be assigned to immediate
child workspaces. You can assign resources from a parent workspace to a lower-level
workspace to make them available to the child workspaces and projects within that workspace.
This is useful when you need to pull down resources from a higher level before you assign
them to a project (see "Assign a Workspace Resource to a Project" on page 285).
In every workspace and project where a resource is assigned, you can configure separate
availability and rate information. This data can be analyzed at each level to monitor the
resource's allocation. All other resource information can only be edited in the workspace or
project where it is owned.
To assign a parent workspace resource to a workspace:
2) Select Assign.
3) In the Assign Resources dialog box, select one or more resources to use in the current
workspace.
Note: If resources are configured hierarchically, when a resource with

subordinate resources is selected, all resources below are selected.
Expand the resource name to view the additional resources and make
appropriate selections.
4) Select Assign.
274
Pages
Tips
Create a Resource by Import
Creating and updating resources using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside
system which can save you time from manual entry.
Download an Import Template for Importing Resources

Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing resources.
1) Navigate to the workspace or project resources page (see page 439).
2) Select Actions , and then select Download Import Template.
Tips
ResourcesImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of each worksheet are required when importing resources from a
spreadsheet. You can delete unused optional columns, but do not change the data in these
rows.
Import Resource Data from Microsoft Excel
You can import resources into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file. After
downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update resources in the
To import resources from Microsoft Excel:
3) In the Import Resources dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Workspace
Resource hierarchies enable you to group similar resources together for easier organization and
management. Examples of resource hierarchies might be company, organizational structure, or
type of work.
275
Configure hierarchies by adding a child resource or indenting an existing resource beneath

another resource. A workspace resource can only be made a child in its owning workspace.
When resources in a hierarchy are assigned to child workspaces or projects within the
workspace, the hierarchy is retained and the assigned resources cannot be changed. However,
you can add resources from the current workspace to the assigned hierarchy. Oracle Primavera
Cloud supports resource hierarchies up to 30 levels.
To configure a resource hierarchy in a workspace:
2) In the table, select a resource, select the  Context menu, and then do either of the
following:
 To add a new resource, select Add Sibling or Add Child.
 To modify an existing resource, select Move Left or Move Right.
Tips
Promote a Workspace Resource to the Parent Workspace
When a resource is added to a workspace and it is later determined that the resource should be
made available at its parent workspace level, the resource can be promoted to the parent
workspace. Promoted resources are available to be assigned to all of the child workspaces in
the owning workspace. Codes and roles that are assigned to the resource are also promoted,
and the relationships stay intact. You can only promote resources that are owned by the current
workspace.
After a resource is promoted, only its availability and rate data can be edited in the current
workspace. All other resource information must be edited in the owning workspace. At the parent
workspace level, you can modify the resource's availability and rate data without affecting the
current workspace-level values.
To promote a workspace resource to a parent workspace:
2) Select Promote.
3) In the Promote Resources dialog box, select the resources to promote to the parent
workspace, and then select Promote.
Tips
276
Pages
Remove a Resource from a Workspace

Remove a resource from a workspace when it is determined the resource is not needed for
assignment in the workspace. A resource can only be removed if it was assigned from a parent
workspace. Removing a resource removes the resource from the current workspace, but it does
not delete the resource from the owning workspace. If a resource is assigned to an activity, it
cannot be removed.
To remove a resource from a workspace:
2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a resource, and then select Remove.
3) Select Yes.
Tips
Delete a Workspace Resource
Delete a resource from the workspace when it is determined the resource is not needed. A
workspace resource can only be deleted from its owning workspace. A resource cannot be
deleted if it is associated with a role, assigned to a child workspace or project, or assigned to an
activity. You must remove all of these associations before deleting the resource.
To delete a workspace resource:
2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a resource, and then select Delete.
Tips
 If a resource is no longer needed and cannot be deleted, change the Status to Inactive.
Modify Workspace Resource Details

Add important resource information to the resources in your workspace resource list, including
contact details, work availability and price rates, codes, location, and associated roles.
When a user of the application is also a resource in the application, you can associate the user's
account with the resource. This is required for users updating their timesheets to record
progress on activities to which they have been assigned as a resource. Timesheet users must
also be assigned a timesheet approver.
The topics below are optional depending on your organization's preferences and the type of
resource being modified.
To modify workspace resource details:
277
 Add Contact Information for a Workspace Resource (on page 278)

 Associate a User with a Workspace Resource (on page 278)
 Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Workspace Resource (on page 279)
 Assign a Unit of Measure to a Workspace Material Resource (on page 279)
 Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Resource (on page 279)
 Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Resource (on page 280)
 Assign a Code to a Workspace Resource (on page 281)
 Assign a Location to a Workspace Resource (on page 282)
 Associate a Workspace Resource with a Role (on page 283)
Add Contact Information for a Workspace Resource
Add contact information and other details to resources, such as Title, Email, Office Phone, and
Other Phone to enable users to reference and contact resources in the system.
To add contact information for a workspace resource:
2) In the table, select the resource.
3) Fields for resource details are available in the General detail window and as configurable
columns in the resource list. Enter data in the necessary fields.
Tips
Associate a User with a Workspace Resource
progress on activities to which they have been assigned as a resource.
You can only associate users with labor resources. Users can only be associated with one
resource at a time.
If you have the required privileges, you can also add and associate a workspace resource with
an existing user in Global Admin.
To associate an application user with a workspace resource:
Note: You can only associate users with labor resources.
3) Select the General detail window.

4) In the User field, select the username for the resource.
Note: If a user is already associated with the resource, select the

username in the User column of the resource table, and then select
278
Pages
Remove.
Tips
Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Workspace Resource
Assign a timesheet approver to a workspace resource to identify the person responsible for
approving the resource's timesheet. This could be a resource manager, project manager, or
other type of supervisor. A resource must be assigned a timesheet approver to use timesheets.
To assign a timesheet approver to a workspace resource:
4) In the Timesheet Approver field, select a user.
Note: A user must have the Manage Timesheets global permission

enabled to appear in this list.
Tips
Assign a Unit of Measure to a Workspace Material Resource
Units of measure are used for measuring quantities of material resources such as tons of bricks,
linear feet of wood, or cubic yards of concrete. Units of measure are defined in workspace
dictionaries and made available to the workspaces and projects within the workspace. In the
resource list, you can assign a specific unit of measure to each material resource.
To assign a unit of measure to a workspace material resource:
2) In the table, select a material resource.
4) In the Unit of Measure field, select  Select.
5) In the Select Unit of Measure dialog box, select a measurement type, and then select
Select.
Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Resource
Resource calendars determine when a resource is available to work, including their standard
work week, time periods, holidays, and exception time. A resource's Default Units/Time and Max
Units/Time values are measured against the time periods configured in the resource's calendar.
279
Resource calendars are used for leveling resources, scheduling a project, and allocating work
when the activity to which the resource is assigned has a type of Resource Dependent. If the
activity type is not Resource Dependent, the resource's calendar will not be used.
Calendars are added and configured in the Calendars (see "Calendars Overview" on page
357) dictionary.
To assign a calendar to a workspace resource:
4) In the Calendar field, select  Select.
5) In the Select Calendar dialog box, select the calendar, and select OK.
Tips
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Resource
The resources available to your workspace may have a variety of work availability periods and
pay rates. This information is essential when deciding which resources should be assigned to
the activities in your projects based on availability and cost.
You can define multiple availability periods for an individual resource, each with up to five
separate pay rates. For more information on availability and rates, see Understanding
Resource Availability and Rates (on page 294).
Note: When new rates are added, recalculate the schedule and
recalculate costs to ensure all cost values are current.
To assign work availability and rates to a workspace resource:

3) Select the Availability & Rates detail window.
4) Select  Add.
 Effective Start Date: Select the date for the availability period to begin.
 Max Units/Time: Enter the resource's maximum work units per time for this availability
period. Enter these values as units per duration or as a percentage. The value will
automatically convert to your format preference. The default Units/Time value can be set
in the General detail window.
 Price/Unit: Enter up to five different rates for the availability period.
Note: Select  Settings in the page toolbar to modify the currency view
280
Pages
settings.
Tips
 Unit and duration labels, as well as the format for Units/Time, are set in the user
preferences (see "Configure Time Units" on page 66).
 Currency display options are configured in the page view settings. Workspace resource rates
will only be displayed in base currency. If a workspace resource is assigned to a project, its
rates may be displayed in either base or project currency, depending on the view settings for
the page.
Synchronize Resource Availability and Rates
When making changes to and managing resource availability and rates, you can synchronize
availability and rates for resources within your workspace. After making changes in the
Availability & Rates detail panel for an individual resource, you can then sync those changes to
other resources down the workspace hierarchy.
To synchronize workspace resource availability and rates:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Synchronize Availability and Rates.
3) In the Synchronize availability and rates? dialog box, select Synchronize Now. When
Synchronize Now is selected, availability and rates in all child workspaces and projects are
updated with changes made in this workspace.
Tips
 Schedule and recalculate costs within a project to ensure the schedule is updated to reflect
availability and rate changes.
 You must have the edit costs privilege for resources to synchronize availability and rates
from the Resource List page. If you also have the edit costs privilege for roles in the current
workspace, the roles will also be synchronized when Synchronize Now is selected.
 When synchronization is completed successfully, or if synchronization fails, a notification is
displayed, and the full message can be reviewed in the Inbox.
Assign a Code to a Workspace Resource
With potentially hundreds of resources in use across the organization, resource codes provide
an efficient means for tracking and sorting resources for reporting or analysis. You can assign as
many codes as necessary to categorize your resources. Codes can be added and configured in
the Codes (see "Codes Overview" on page 365) dictionary or added during the assignment
process.
To assign a code to a workspace resource:
2) In the table, select a resource.
281

4) Select Assign.
6) Select Select.
Tips
Assign a Location to a Workspace Resource
Assign locations to workspace resources to determine where the resource is available to work
and for reporting purposes. Locations are configured in the Locations (see "Locations
Overview" on page 371) dictionary.
To assign a location to a workspace resource:
3) Select the Location detail window.
Notes:
improve results.
Tips
282
Pages
Associate a Workspace Resource with a Role

The roles you associate with a resource describe the skill capabilities and job titles of the
resource. Role associations enable you to assign roles to activities during the early stages of
project planning before specific resource requirements are known. You can later staff the roles
with an associated resource. This functionality is optional, as you can also choose to directly
assign roles and resources to your project's activities.
Associated workspace-level resources and roles must be owned by the same workspace. You
can only associate labor and nonlabor resources with roles.
To associate a workspace resource with a role:
3) Select the Roles detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Assign Roles dialog box, select one or more roles to associate with the resource, and
then select Assign.
6) (Optional) Designate one of your associated roles as the Primary Role for the resource.
When the resource is assigned to an activity, the primary role will also be assigned.
7) In the Proficiency list, select the resource's experience level with each associated role.
Tips
Project Resource List

Create labor, nonlabor, and material resources at the project level to be available for assignment
to the activities in your project. Project resources can be promoted to the parent workspace if
they should be made available to other projects in the workspace.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Resource List. In Primavera Professional, this page is
called Resources.
To learn more about resources, see Resource List Overview (on page 272).
Create a Project Resource

Create resources at the project level if they will only need to be assigned to activities in the
current project. If you later decide that a project resource should be made available to other
projects in your workspace, you can promote it to the parent workspace. Build resource
hierarchies for easier organization of similar resources.
Resources can be added directly to the project, assigned from the parent workspace, or
imported in bulk from a Microsoft Excel file.
283
If a resource is no longer needed, it can be marked as inactive or deleted permanently.

Workspace resources assigned to the project can be removed from the project.
To create a project resource, do any of the following:
 Add a Project Resource (on page 284)
 Assign a Workspace Resource to a Project (on page 285)
 Create a Resource by Import (on page 275)
To manage a project resource, do any of the following:
 Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Project (on page 286)
 Promote a Project Resource to a Workspace (on page 287)
 Remove a Resource from a Project (on page 287)
 Delete a Project Resource (on page 287)
Add a Project Resource
Add resources to the project resource list if they will only need to be assigned to activities in the
current project. Resources reused across multiple projects should be added as workspace
resources.
Resources can be distinguished as either labor, material, or nonlabor. Labor and nonlabor
resources are always time-based. Material resources, such as consumable items, are assigned
a unit of measure to quantify their amounts.
To add a project resource:
1) Navigate to the project resources page (see page 439).
2) Select  Add.
 Name: Enter a name for the resource.
 ID: Enter an ID for the resource.
 Type: Select the type of resource. The default is Labor.
Tips
 By default, the status of the resource is set to Active. If you do not want the resource to be
available immediately upon creation, in the Status list, select Inactive.
 You can build a hierarchy of resources by adding them as siblings or children to other
resources. Select the  Context menu, and then select Add Sibling or Add Child. Oracle
Primavera Cloud supports resource hierarchies up to 30 levels.
284
Pages
Assign a Workspace Resource to a Project

Resources that are created in a workspace are available to be assigned to all projects within the
workspace. Even though workspace-level resources can be assigned directly to project
activities, assigning them first to the project level enables you to define different availability and
rates for each project they are assigned to. A workspace resource assigned to activities in
multiple projects can be tracked in each project against their project availability and tracked at
the workspace level against their workspace availability. Making workspace resources available
at the project level may also be useful for users who do not have the privileges to view
workspace resources and assign them to activities directly.
When assigning workspace resources to a project, you can only view resources from the parent
workspace. To assign resources from a higher-level workspace, they must be assigned down
the workspace hierarchy one level at a time. See Assign a Parent Workspace Resource to a
Workspace (on page 274) for more information. Assigning workspace resources will also
include their associated roles.
Most resource details can only be edited in the workspace or project where it is owned. You can
modify separate availability and rate settings in each workspace or project where the resource is
assigned.
To assign a workspace resource to a project:
2) Select Assign.
3) In the Assign Resources dialog box, select one or more resources from the parent
workspace to assign to the current project.
Note: If resources are configured hierarchically, when a resource with

subordinate resources is selected, all resources below are selected.
Expand the resource name to view the additional resources.
4) Select Assign.
Tips
 If you assign a workspace resource directly to an activity, the resource and any associated
roles will be automatically made available at the project level with their workspace availability
and rate values, which can then be modified for the project.
Create a Resource by Import
Creating and updating resources using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside
Download an Import Template for Importing Resources

Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing resources.
285

Tips
ResourcesImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of each worksheet are required when importing resources from a
spreadsheet. You can delete unused optional columns, but do not change the data in these
rows.
Import Resource Data from Microsoft Excel
You can import resources into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file. After
downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update resources in the
To import resources from Microsoft Excel:
3) In the Import Resources dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Configure a Resource Hierarchy in a Project
Resource hierarchies enable you to group similar resources together for easier organization and
management. Examples of resource hierarchies might be company, organizational structure, or
type of work.
Configure hierarchies by adding a child resource or indenting an existing resource beneath
another resource. A project resource can only be made a child if it is owned by the current
project. When resources in a hierarchy are assigned to child workspaces or projects within the
workspace, the hierarchy is retained and the assigned resources cannot be changed. However,
you can add resources from the current project to the assigned hierarchy. Oracle Primavera
Cloud supports resource hierarchies up to 30 levels.
To configure a resource hierarchy in a project:
2) In the table, select a resource, select the  Context menu, and then do either of the
following:
 To add a new resource, select Add Sibling or Add Child.
 To modify an existing resource, select Move Left or Move Right.
286
Pages
Tips
Promote a Project Resource to a Workspace
When a resource is added at the project level and it is later determined that the resource should
be made available at the workspace level, the resource can be promoted to the workspace level.
Promoted resources are available to be assigned to all of the projects in the owning workspace.
Codes and roles that are assigned to the resource are also promoted, and the relationships stay
intact. You can only promote resources that are owned by the current project.
After a resource is promoted, only its project-level availability and rate data can be edited in the
current project. All other resource information must be edited in the owning workspace. At the
workspace level, you can modify the resource's availability and rate data without affecting its
project-level values.
To promote a project resource to a workspace:
2) Select Promote.
3) In the Promote Resources dialog box, select the resources to promote to the workspace
level, and then select Promote.
Tips
Remove a Resource from a Project
Remove a resource from a project when it is determined the resource is not needed for
assignment in the project. A resource can only be removed if was assigned from a workspace. If
a resource is assigned to an activity, it cannot be removed.
To remove a resource from a project:
2) Select the  Context menu next to a resource, and then select Remove.
3) Select Yes.
Tips
Delete a Project Resource
Delete a resource from the project when it is determined the resource is not needed. A project
resource can only be deleted from the project where it is owned. A project resource cannot be
deleted if it is associated with a role or assigned to an activity. You must remove all of these
associations before deleting the role.
287
To delete a project resource:

2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a resource, and then select Delete.
Tips
 If a resource is no longer needed and cannot be deleted, change the Status to Inactive.
 If a resource was assigned from the workspace and it is determined the resource is not
needed on the project, you can remove the resource (see "Remove a Resource from a
Project" on page 287) from the project.
Modify Project Resource Details

Add important resource information to the resources in your project resource list, including
contact details, work availability and price rates, codes, location, and associated roles.
progress on activities to which they have been assigned as a resource. Timesheet users must
also be assigned a timesheet approver.
The topics below are optional depending on your organization's preferences and the type of
resource being modified.
To modify project resource details:
 Add Contact Information for a Project Resource (on page 288)
 Associate a User with a Project Resource (on page 289)
 Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Project Resource (on page 289)
 Assign a Unit of Measure to a Project Material Resource (on page 290)
 Assign a Calendar to a Project Resource (on page 290)
 Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Resource (on page 291)
 Assign a Code to a Project Resource (on page 292)
 Assign a Location to a Project Resource (on page 292)
 Associate a Project Resource with a Role (on page 293)
Add Contact Information for a Project Resource
Add contact information and other details to resources, such as Title, Email, Office Phone, and
Other Phone to enable users to reference and contact resources in the system.
To add contact information for a project resource:
3) Fields for resource details are available in the General detail window and as configurable
columns in the resource list. Enter data in the necessary fields.
288
Pages
Tips
Associate a User with a Project Resource
progress on activities to which they have been assigned as a resource.
You can only associate users with labor resources. Users can only be associated with one
resource at a time.
To associate an application user with a project resource:
Note: You can only associate users with labor resources.

4) In the User field, select the username for the resource.
Note: If a user is already associated with the resource, select the

username in the User column of the resource table, and then select
Remove.
Tips
Assign a Timesheet Approver to a Project Resource
Assign a timesheet approver to a project resource to identify the person responsible for
approving the resource's timesheet. This could be a resource manager, project manager, or
other type of supervisor. A resource must be assigned a timesheet approver to use timesheets.
To assign a timesheet approver to a project resource:
4) In the Timesheet Approver field, select a user.
Note: A user must have the Manage Timesheets global permission

enabled to appear in this list.
289
Tips
Assign a Unit of Measure to a Project Material Resource
Units of measure are used for measuring quantities of material resources such as tons of bricks,
linear feet of wood, or cubic yards of concrete. Units of measure are defined in workspace
dictionaries and made available to the workspaces and projects within the workspace. In the
resource list, you can assign a specific unit of measure to each material resource.
To assign a unit of measure to a project material resource:
2) In the table, select a material resource.
4) In the Unit of Measure field, select  Select.
5) In the Select Unit of Measure dialog box, select a measurement type, and then select
Select.
Assign a Calendar to a Project Resource
Resource calendars determine when a resource is available to work, including their standard
work week, time periods, holidays, and exception time. A resource's Default Units/Time and Max
Units/Time values are measured against the time periods configured in the resource's calendar.
Resource calendars are used for leveling resources, scheduling a project, and allocating work
when the activity to which the resource is assigned has a type of Resource Dependent. If the
activity type is not Resource Dependent, the resource's calendar will not be used.
357) dictionary.
To assign a calendar to a project resource:
4) In the Calendar field, select  Select.
available at the project level, or select Workspace to view calendars available at the
workspace level.
6) Select the calendar, and then select OK.
Tips
290
Pages
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Resource

The resources available to your project may have a variety of work availability periods and pay
rates. This information is essential when deciding which resources should be assigned to the
activities in your project based on availability and cost.
You can define multiple availability periods for an individual resource, each with up to five
separate pay rates. For more information on availability and rates, see Understanding
Resource Availability and Rates (on page 294).
Notes:
 When new rates are added, recalculate the schedule and recalculate
costs to ensure all cost values are current.
 If you frequently export and import data, either to Primavera Cloud or
P6 EPPM, a resource or role's availability and rate values should be
identical at the workspace and project levels. Resource and role
values are imported at the workspace level only. If a project-level
resource or role is created as part of the import, it will use the values
that exist at the workspace level. Existing project-level availability
and rate values will not be overwritten. If you want to update
project-level availability and rate values, you should do so manually.
To assign work availability and rates to a project resource:

3) Select the Availability & Rates detail window.
4) Select  Add.
 Max Units/Time: Enter the resource's maximum work units per time for this availability
period. Enter these values as units per duration or as a percentage. The value will
automatically convert to your format preference. The default Units/Time value can be set
in the General detail window.
settings.
Tips
291
 Currency display options are configured in the page view settings. Project resource rates
may be displayed in either base or project currency, depending on the currency and the view
settings for the page. If a project resource is promoted to the parent workspace, its rates will
only be displayed in base currency.
Assign a Code to a Project Resource
With potentially hundreds of resources in use across the organization, resource codes provide
an efficient means for tracking and sorting resources for reporting or analysis. You can assign as
many codes as necessary to categorize your resources. Codes can be added and configured in
the Codes (see "Codes Overview" on page 365) dictionary or added during the assignment
process.
To assign a code to a project resource:
4) Select Assign.
6) Select Select.
Tips
Assign a Location to a Project Resource
Assign locations to project resources to determine where the resource is available to work and
for reporting purposes. Locations are configured in the Locations (see "Locations Overview"
on page 371) dictionary.
To assign a location to a project resource:
3) Select the Location detail window.
292
Pages
Notes:
improve results.
Tips
Associate a Project Resource with a Role
The roles you associate with a resource describe the skill capabilities and job titles of the
resource. Role associations enable you to assign roles to activities during the early stages of
project planning before specific resource requirements are known. You can later staff the roles
with an associated resource. This functionality is optional, as you can also choose to directly
assign roles and resources to your project's activities.
Associated project-level resources and roles must be owned by the same workspace. You can
only associate labor and nonlabor resources with roles.
To associate a project resource with a role:
3) Select the Roles detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Assign Roles dialog box, select one or more roles to associate with the resource, and
then select Assign.
6) (Optional) Designate one of your associated roles as the Primary Role for the resource.
When the resource is assigned to an activity, the primary role will also be assigned.
Tips
293
Understanding Resource Availability and Rates

You can define multiple availability periods and pay rates for individual resources to reflect
realistic variations in a resource's schedule.
An individual resource's availability can vary over time due to factors such as multiple
commitments or seasonal availability. You can specify as many periods as necessary to model
each resource's availability. For each period, enter an effective start date and the maximum
work units the resource can perform within a single work period. For example, a resource
available to work a full day may have a Max Units/Time value of 8h/d, or 100%. A resource with
limited availability may only be able to work 4h/d, or 50%.
Units/Time values are measured against the time periods in the resource's calendar. For
example, if the calendar's Hours/Day setting is 8, and your preferences are set to show unit and
duration labels of hours and days, then entering a max unit/time value of 100% would equate to
8h/d, depending on your units/time format preference. Entering 120% would equate to 10h/d.
Unit and duration labels, as well as the format for Units/Time, are set in the user preferences
(see "Configure Time Units" on page 66). Units/Time values can be entered as a ratio or
percentage and will be automatically converted to your format preference. Labor and nonlabor
resources use time units, while material resources use their specified unit of measure.
Separate resource availability is defined in each workspace and project where the resource is
available. When you assign work availability to a resource at the project level (see "Assign
Work Availability and Rates to a Project Resource" on page 291), the resource's project
usage is measured against its project availability. When you assign work availability to the same
resource at the workspace level (see "Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace
Resource" on page 280), the resource's usage on all projects to which it is assigned rolls up
and is measured against its workspace availability. For example, if a resource has varying levels
of availability at each level, the resource may be overallocated in Project A, 100% allocated in
Project B, but still have availability at the parent workspace level. When entering availability
values, consider if the resource may be assigned to activities in other projects at the same time
and may need to split their availability.
For each availability period you can specify up to five different rate types. While some resources
may have a single standard rate at all times, other resources may have separate standard,
internal, and external rates. A resource's rates are used to compute costs for any activities to
which the resource is assigned. Depending on the resource type, the rate may be the unit price
for labor such as a worker, nonlabor such as equipment, or material such as concrete. Separate
resource rates can be defined in each workspace and project where the resource is available.
The label for each rate type can be customized in the Resource/Role object settings.
Role List Overview

Roles represent personnel job titles or skills needed to execute projects. Examples of roles
include architect, general laborer, quality assurance tester, and engineer. You can establish an
unlimited number of roles and organize them in a hierarchy for easier management and
organization.
294
Pages
You can associate roles with individual resources that fulfill the role's skill requirements. For
example, you may have three people that can perform the role of carpenter. After associating
these three resources with the carpenter role, you can indicate each resource's proficiency level
and whether this is their primary role. A primary role is the main role the resource is currently
performing and will be assigned to an activity at the same time the resource is assigned. The
proficiency level describes the resource's skill level in that role. When you are ready to assign
roles to perform work on project activities, you can review their proficiencies to decide who
should be assigned.
Roles can be directly assigned to perform the work on activities, or they can be used in
conjunction with their associated resources. During the early stages of a project, you may only
know the general work requirements of each activity. You can assign the roles that each activity
may need, such as foreman, plumber, or painter. Later, when you know which specific resources
can be assigned to work on the activity, you can staff each role with an associated resource.
Any combination of direct assignment and staffing roles with resources is supported.
Roles can be added to a role list at the workspace level or the project level. Add roles at the
workspace level when more than one project in the workspace will use the same roles. Add roles
at the project level when the roles are only needed for a single project. A role added at the
project level can later be promoted to the project's parent workspace to make it available to
other projects in the workspace. When associating roles with resources, they must be owned by
the same workspace or project.
All roles can have multiple availability periods defined to reflect the varying amounts of work a
role is able to perform. Each availability period supports up to five pay rates, which represent the
cost of the role in a given work period. See Understanding Role Availability and Rates (on
Portfolio Resource Planning

Resource planning at the portfolio level is performed by reviewing the labor requirements of the
workspace roles assigned to the projects in the portfolio, choosing the best project selection
scenario that maximizes the portfolio's value, and committing labor units to the projects selected
for execution. The objective of resource planning is to select projects that maximize portfolio
value without overallocating the resources assigned to perform the project work.
Before you can begin portfolio resource planning, you should create workspace roles (see
"Create a Workspace Role" on page 296), assign them to the Resource Demand page, and
specify the labor units for each project.
Workspace Role List

Create a standard set of roles at the workspace level so that you can associate them with labor
and nonlabor workspace resources and assign them to activities on any of the projects in your
workspace.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Role List. In Primavera Professional, this page is called
Roles.
To learn more about roles, see Role List Overview (on page 294).
295
Create a Workspace Role

Create roles at the workspace level if they will be assigned to multiple projects in your
workspace. Roles can be used solely for activity assignments or in conjunction with labor and
nonlabor resources. Workspace roles are also required when performing demand planning.
Roles can be added directly to the workspace, assigned from the parent workspace, imported
from a Microsoft Excel file, or imported from P6 EPPM. You can build role hierarchies for easier
organization of similar roles.
Roles can also be promoted to a higher level, removed from the workspace, or deleted
permanently from the application.
To create a workspace role, do any of the following:
 Add a Workspace Role (on page 296)
 Assign a Parent Workspace Role to a Workspace (on page 297)
 Create a Role by Import (on page 297)
 Import Roles from P6 EPPM (Primavera Cloud only)
To manage a workspace role, do any of the following:
 Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Workspace (on page 298)
 Promote a Workspace Role to a Parent Workspace (on page 298)
 Remove a Role from a Workspace (on page 299)
 Delete a Workspace Role (on page 299)
Add a Workspace Role
Add roles to the workspace role list if they will be assigned to multiple projects in your
workspace. Workspace roles are generally reused between activities and projects. Roles owned
at the workspace level can be associated with labor and nonlabor resources from the same
workspace.
To add a workspace role:
1) Navigate to the workspace role page (see page 439).
2) Select  Add.
 Name: Enter a name for the role.
 ID: Enter an ID for the role.
Tips
 By default, the status of the role is set to Active. If you do not want to role to be available
immediately upon creation, in the Status list, select Inactive.
 You can build a hierarchy of roles by adding them as siblings or children to other roles.
Select the  Context menu, and then select Add Sibling or Add Child. Oracle Primavera
Cloud supports role hierarchies up to 30 levels.
 The Owned By column indicates the workspace or project to which the role belongs. Most
role information can only be edited in the workspace or project where it is owned.
296
Pages
Assign a Parent Workspace Role to a Workspace

Roles that are created in parent workspaces are available to be assigned to immediate child
workspaces. You can assign roles from a parent workspace to a lower-level workspace to make
them available to the child workspaces and projects within that workspace. This is useful when
you need to pull down roles from a higher level before you assign them to a project (see
"Assign a Workspace Role to a Project" on page 304).
In every workspace and project where a role is assigned, you can configure separate availability
and rate information. This data can be analyzed at each level to monitor the role's allocation. All
other role details can only be edited in the workspace or project where it is owned.
To assign a parent workspace role to a workspace:
2) Select Assign.
3) In the Assign Roles dialog box, select one or more roles to use in the current workspace.
Note: If roles are configured hierarchically, when a role with subordinate

roles is selected, all roles below are selected. Expand the role name to
view the additional roles.
4) Select Assign.
Tips
Create a Role by Import
Creating and updating roles using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside
Download an Import Template for Importing Roles

Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing roles.
1) Navigate to the workspace or project roles page (see page 440).
Tips
RolesImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of each worksheet are required when importing roles from a spreadsheet.
297
Import Role Data from Microsoft Excel

You can import roles into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file. After
downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update roles in the
To import roles from Microsoft Excel:
3) In the Import Roles dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Workspace
Role hierarchies enable you to group similar roles together for easier organization and
management. Examples of role hierarchies might be industry or job title.
Configure hierarchies by adding a child role or indenting an existing role beneath another role. A
workspace role can only be made a child in its owning workspace. When roles in a hierarchy are
assigned to child workspaces or projects within the workspace, the hierarchy is retained and the
assigned roles cannot be changed. However, you can add roles from the current workspace to
the assigned hierarchy. Oracle Primavera Cloud supports role hierarchies up to 30 levels.
To configure a workspace role hierarchy:
2) In the table, select a role, select the  Context menu, and then do either of the following:
 To add a new role, select Add Sibling or Add Child.
 To modify an existing role, select Move Left or Move Right.
Tips
Promote a Workspace Role to a Parent Workspace
When a role is added to a workspace and it is later determined that the role should be made
available at its parent workspace level, the role can be promoted to the parent workspace.
Promoted roles are available to be assigned to all of the child workspaces in the owning
workspace. Codes and resources that are assigned to the role are also promoted, and the
relationships stay intact. You can only promote roles that are owned by the current workspace.
After a roles is promoted, only its availability and rate data can be edited in the current
workspace. All other role information must be edited in the owning workspace. At the parent
workspace level, you can modify the role's availability and rate data without affecting the current
workspace-level values.
To promote a workspace role to a parent workspace:
298
Pages

2) Select Promote.
3) In the Promote Roles dialog box, select the roles to promote to the parent workspace level,
and then select Promote.
Tips
Remove a Role from a Workspace
Remove a role from a workspace when it is determined the role is not needed for assignment in
the workspace. A role can only be removed if it was assigned from a parent workspace.
Removing a role removes the role from the current workspace, but it does not delete the role
from the owning workspace. If a role is assigned to an activity, it cannot be removed.
To remove a role from a workspace:
2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a role, and then, and select Remove.
3) Select Yes.
Tips
Delete a Workspace Role
Delete a role from the workspace when it is determined the role is not needed. A workspace role
can only be deleted from its owning workspace. A role cannot be deleted if it is associated with a
resource, assigned to a child workspace or project, or assigned to an activity. You must remove
all of these associations before deleting the role.
To delete a workspace role:
2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a role, and then select Delete.
Tips
 If a role is no longer needed and cannot be deleted, change the Status to Inactive.
Modify Workspace Role Details

Add important role information to the roles in your workspace role list, including calendar
assignment, work availability and price rates, codes, and associated resources.
299
The topics below are optional depending on your organization's preferences.

To modify workspace role details:
 Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Role (on page 300)
 Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Role (on page 300)
 Assign a Code to a Workspace Role (on page 302)
 Associate a Workspace Role with a Resource (on page 302)
Assign a Calendar to a Workspace Role
Role calendars determine when a role is available to work, including their standard work week,
time periods, holidays, and exception time. A role's Default Units/Time and Max Units/Time
values are measured against the time periods configured in the role's calendar.
Role calendars are used for leveling roles, scheduling a project, and allocating work when the
activity to which role resource is assigned has a type of Resource Dependent. If the activity type
is not Resource Dependent, the role's calendar will not be used.
357) dictionary.
To assign a calendar to a workspace role:
2) In the table, select the role.
3) In the Calendar column, select a calendar to assign to the role.
Note: If the Calendar column is not displayed, select  Settings to add

it to the view.
Tips
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Role
The roles available to your workspace may have a variety of work availability periods and pay
rates. This information is essential when deciding which roles should be assigned to the
activities in your projects based on availability and cost. If you are using roles for high-level
project planning before assigning specific resources, you can use role rates to estimate costs for
different job types and skill levels. The specific resources you associate with each role may have
more accurate availability and rate data.
You can define multiple availability periods for an individual role, each with up to five separate
pay rates. For more information on availability and rates, see Understanding Role Availability
and Rates (on page 310).
300
Pages
Note: When new rates are added, recalculate the schedule and
recalculate costs to ensure all cost values are current.
To assign work availability and rates to a workspace role:

2) In the table, select the role, and then select the Availability & Rates detail window.
3) Select  Add.
 Max Units/Time: Enter the role's maximum work units per time for this availability period.
Enter these values as units per duration or as a percentage. The value will automatically
convert to your format preference. The Default Units/Time value can be set in the table.
settings.
Tips
 Currency display options are configured in the Role List page view settings. Workspace role
rates will only be displayed in base currency. If a workspace resource is assigned to a
project, its rates may be displayed in either base or project currency, depending on the view
settings for the page.
Synchronize Role Availability and Rates
When making changes to and managing role availability and rates, you can synchronize
availability and rates for roles within your workspace. After making changes in the Availability &
Rates detail panel for an individual role, you can then sync those changes to other instances of
the role down the workspace hierarchy.
To synchronize workspace role availability and rates:
2) Select the Actions  menu, and then select Synchronize Availability and Rates.
3) In the Synchronize availability and rates? dialog box, select Synchronize Now. When
Synchronize Now is selected, the role availability and rates in all child workspaces and
projects are updated with changes made in this workspace.
301
Tips
 Schedule and recalculate costs within a project to ensure the schedule is updated to reflect
availability and rate changes.
 You must have the edit costs privilege for roles to synchronize availability and rates from the
Role List page.
 When the synchronization has either completed successfully or failed, a notification is
displayed, and the full message can be reviewed in the Inbox.
Assign a Code to a Workspace Role
With potentially hundreds of resources in use across the organization, role codes provide an
efficient means for tracking and sorting roles for reporting or analysis. You can assign as many
codes as necessary to categorize your roles. Codes can be added and configured in the Codes
(see "Codes Overview" on page 365) dictionary or added during the assignment process.
To assign a code to a workspace role:
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Select Code dialog box, expand the code, and then select the code value.
6) Select Select.
Tips
Associate a Workspace Role with a Resource
The resources you associate with a role define the specific people or equipment available to
perform the work represented by a role. A resource's association with a role makes it easy to
assign roles to activities during early project planning and later staff the role with a specific
resource. You can associate multiple resources with the same role to manage resources with
different availability periods, price rates, and proficiency levels. The same resource can be
associated with multiple roles if it performs multiple jobs.
Associated workspace-level resources and roles must be owned by the same workspace. You
can only associate labor and nonlabor resources with roles.
To associate a workspace role with a resource:
3) Select the Resources detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Assign Resources dialog box, select one or more resources to associate with the
role, and then select Assign.
302
Pages
Tips
Project Role List

Create a standard set of roles that you can associate with labor and nonlabor resources and
assign to activities in your project. Project roles can be promoted to the parent workspace if they
should be made available to other projects in the workspace.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Role List. In Primavera Professional, this page is called
Roles.
To learn more about roles, see Role List Overview (on page 294).
Create a Project Role

Create roles at the project level if they will only need to be assigned to activities in the current
project. If you later decide that a project role should be made available to other projects in your
workspace, you can promote it to the parent workspace. Roles can be used solely for activity
assignments or in conjunction with labor and nonlabor resources.
Roles can be added directly to the project, assigned from the parent workspace, or imported in
bulk from a Microsoft Excel file. You can build role hierarchies for easier organization of similar
roles.
If a role is no longer needed, it can be marked as inactive or deleted permanently. Workspace
roels assigned to the project can be removed from the project.
To create a project role, do any of the following:
 Add a Project Role (on page 303)
 Assign a Workspace Role to a Project (on page 304)
 Create a Role by Import (on page 297)
To manage a project role, do any of the following:
 Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Project (on page 305)
 Promote a Project Role to a Workspace (on page 306)
 Remove a Role from a Project (on page 306)
 Delete a Project Role (on page 307)
Add a Project Role
Add roles to the project role list if they will only need to be assigned to activities in the current
project. Roles reused across multiple projects should be added as workspace roles. Roles
owned at the project level can be associated with labor and nonlabor roles from the same
workspace.
To add a project role:
303
1) Navigate to the project roles page (see page 439).

2) Select  Add.
 Name: Enter a name for the role.
 ID: Enter an ID for the role.
Tips
 By default, the status of the role is set to Active. If you do not want to role to be available
immediately upon creation, in the Status list, select Inactive.
 You can build a hierarchy of roles by adding them as siblings or children to other roles.
Select the  Context menu, and then select Add Sibling or Add Child. Oracle Primavera
Cloud supports role hierarchies up to 30 levels.
Assign a Workspace Role to a Project
Roles that are created in a workspace are available to be assigned to all projects within the
workspace. Even though workspace-level roles can be assigned directly to project activities,
assigning them first to the project level enables you to define different availability and rates for
each project they are assigned to. A workspace role assigned to activities in multiple projects
can be tracked in each project against their project availability and tracked at the workspace
level against their workspace availability. Making workspace roles available at the project level
may also be useful for users who do not have the privileges to view workspace roles and assign
them to activities directly.
When assigning workspace roles to a project, you can only view roles from the parent
workspace. To assign roles from a higher-level workspace, they must be assigned down the
workspace hierarchy one level at a time. See Assign a Parent Workspace Role to a
Workspace (on page 297) for more information. Assigning workspace roles will also include
their associated resources.
Most role details can only be edited in the workspace or project where it is owned. You can
modify separate availability and rate settings in each workspace or project where the role is
assigned.
To assign a workspace role to a project:
2) Select Assign.
3) In the Assign Roles dialog box, select one or more roles from the parent workspace to
assign to the current project.
Note: If roles are configured hierarchically, when a role with subordinate

roles is selected, all roles below are selected. Expand the role name to
view the additional roles.
4) Select Assign.
304
Pages
Tips
 If you assign a workspace role directly to an activity, the role and any associated resources
will be automatically made available at the project level with their workspace availability and
rate values, which can then be modified for the project.
Create a Role by Import
Creating and updating roles using Microsoft Excel enables you to use data from an outside
Download an Import Template for Importing Roles

Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing roles.
Tips
RolesImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of each worksheet are required when importing roles from a spreadsheet.
Import Role Data from Microsoft Excel
You can import roles into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file. After
downloading the import template, follow the instructions to create or update roles in the
To import roles from Microsoft Excel:
3) In the Import Roles dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
Configure a Role Hierarchy in a Project
Role hierarchies enable you to group similar roles together for easier organization and
management. Examples of role hierarchies might be industry or job title.
305
Configure hierarchies by adding a child role or indenting an existing role beneath another role. A
project role can only be made a child if it is owned by the current project. When roles in a
hierarchy are assigned to child workspaces or projects within the workspace, the hierarchy is
retained and the assigned roles cannot be changed. However, you can add roles from the
current project to the assigned hierarchy. Oracle Primavera Cloud supports role hierarchies up
to 30 levels.
To configure a role hierarchy:
2) In the table, select a role, select  Context the menu, and then do either of the following:
 To add a new role, select Add Sibling or Add Child.
 To modify an existing role, select Move Left or Move Right.
Tips
Promote a Project Role to a Workspace
When a role is added at the project level and it is later determined that the role should be made
available at the workspace level, the role can be promoted to the workspace level. Promoted
roles are available to be assigned to all of the projects in the owning workspace. Codes and
resources that are assigned to the role are also promoted, and the relationships stay intact. You
can only promote roles that are owned by the current project.
After a role is promoted, only its project-level availability and rate data can be edited in the
current project. All other role information must be edited in the owning workspace. At the
workspace level, you can modify the role's availability and rate data without affecting its
project-level values.
To promote a project role to a workspace:
2) Select Promote.
3) In the Promote Roles dialog box, select the roles to promote to the workspace level, and
then select Promote.
Tips
Remove a Role from a Project
Remove a role from a project when it is determined the role is not needed for assignment in the
project. A role can only be removed if was assigned from a workspace. If a role is assigned to an
activity, it cannot be removed.
To remove a role from a project:
306
Pages

2) Select the  Context menu next to a role, and then select Remove.
3) Select Yes.
Tips
Delete a Project Role
Delete a role from the project when it is determined the role is not needed. A project role can
only be deleted from the project where it is owned. A project role cannot be deleted if it is
associated with a resource or assigned to an activity. You must remove all of these associations
before deleting the role.
To delete a project role:
2) In the table, select the  Context menu next to a role, and then select Delete.
Tips
 If a role is no longer needed and cannot be deleted, change the Status to Inactive.
 If a role was assigned from the workspace and it is determined the role is not needed on the
project, you can remove the role (see "Remove a Role from a Project" on page 306) from
the project.
Modify Project Role Details

Add important role information to the roles in your project role list, including calendar
assignment, work availability and price rates, codes, and associated resources.
The topics below are optional depending on your organization's preferences.
To modify project role details:
 Assign a Calendar to a Project Role (on page 308)
 Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Role (on page 308)
 Assign a Code to a Project Role (on page 309)
 Associate a Project Role with a Resource (on page 310)
307
Assign a Calendar to a Project Role

Role calendars determine when a role is available to work, including their standard work week,
time periods, holidays, and exception time. A role's Default Units/Time and Max Units/Time
values are measured against the time periods configured in the role's calendar.
Role calendars are used for leveling roles, scheduling a project, and allocating work when the
activity to which role resource is assigned has a type of Resource Dependent. If the activity type
is not Resource Dependent, the role's calendar will not be used.
357) dictionary.
To assign a calendar to a project role:
3) In the Calendar column, select Select.
available at the project level, or select Workspace to view calendars available at the
workspace level.
5) Select a calendar, and then select OK.
Note: If the Calendar column is not displayed, select  Settings to add

it to the view.
Tips
Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Project Role
The roles available to your project may have a variety of work availability periods and pay rates.
This information is essential when deciding which roles should be assigned to the activities in
your project based on availability and cost. If you are using roles for high-level project planning
before assigning specific resources, you can use role rates to estimate costs for different job
types and skill levels. The specific resources you associate with each role may have more
accurate availability and rate data.
You can define multiple availability periods for an individual role, each with up to five separate
pay rates. For more information on availability and rates, see Understanding Role Availability
and Rates (on page 310).
Notes:
 When new rates are added, recalculate the schedule and recalculate
costs to ensure all cost values are current.
 If you frequently export and import data, either to Primavera Cloud or
P6 EPPM, a resource or role's availability and rate values should be
308
Pages
identical at the workspace and project levels. Resource and role

values are imported at the workspace level only. If a project-level
resource or role is created as part of the import, it will use the values
that exist at the workspace level. Existing project-level availability
and rate values will not be overwritten. If you want to update
project-level availability and rate values, you should do so manually.
To assign work availability and rates to a project role:

2) In the table, select a role, and then select the Availability & Rates detail window.
3) Select  Add.
 Max Units/Time: Enter the role's maximum work units per time for this availability period.
Enter these values as units per duration or as a percentage. The value will automatically
convert to your format preference. The Default Units/Time value can be set in the table.
settings.
Tips
 Currency display options are configured in the page view settings. Project role rates may be
displayed in either base or project currency, depending on the currency and the view settings
for the page. If a project role is promoted to the parent workspace, its rates will only be
displayed in base currency.
Assign a Code to a Project Role
With potentially hundreds of resources in use across the organization, role codes provide an
efficient means for tracking and sorting roles for reporting or analysis. You can assign as many
codes as necessary to categorize your roles. Codes can be added and configured in the Codes
(see "Codes Overview" on page 365) dictionary or added during the assignment process.
To assign a code to a project role:
2) In the table, select a role.
4) Select Assign.
309
6) Select Select.
Tips
Associate a Project Role with a Resource
The resources you associate with a role define the specific people or equipment available to
perform the work represented by a role. A resource's association with a role makes it easy to
assign roles to activities during early project planning and later staff the role with a specific
resource. You can associate multiple resources with the same role to manage resources with
different availability periods, price rates, and proficiency levels. The same resource can be
associated with multiple roles if it performs multiple jobs.
Associated project-level resources and roles must be owned by the same project. You can only
associate labor and nonlabor resources with roles.
To associate a project role with a resource:
2) In the table, select a role.
3) Select the Resources detail window.
4) Select Assign.
5) In the Assign Resources dialog box, select one or more resources to associate with the
role, and then select Assign.
6) In the Proficiency list, select the associated resource's experience level with each
associated role.
Tips
Understanding Role Availability and Rates

You can define multiple availability periods and pay rates for individual roles to reflect realistic
variations in a role's schedule. If you are using roles for high-level project planning before
assigning specific resources, you can use role rates to estimate costs for different job types and
skill levels. The specific resources you associate with each role may have more accurate
availability and rate data.
An individual role's availability can vary over time due to factors such as multiple commitments
or seasonal availability. You can specify as many periods as necessary to model each role's
availability. For each period, enter an effective start date and the maximum work units the role
can perform within a single work period. For example, a role available to work a full day may
have a Max Units/Time value of 8h/d, or 100%. A role with limited availability may only be able to
work 4h/d, or 50%.
310
Pages
Units/Time values are measured against the time periods in the role's calendar. For example, if
the calendar's Hours/Day setting is 8, and your preferences are set to show unit and duration
labels of hours and days, then entering a max unit/time value of 100% would equate to 8h/d,
depending on your units/time format preference. Entering 120% would equate to 10h/d. Unit and
duration labels, as well as the format for Units/Time, are set in the user preferences (see
"Configure Time Units" on page 66). Units/Time values can be entered as a ratio or percentage
and will be automatically converted to your format preference.
Separate role availability is defined in each workspace and project where the role is available.
When you assign work availability to a role at the project level (see "Assign Work Availability
and Rates to a Project Role" on page 308), the role's project usage is measured against its
project availability. When you assign work availability to the same role at the workspace level
(see "Assign Work Availability and Rates to a Workspace Role" on page 300), the role's
usage on all projects to which it is assigned rolls up and is measured against its workspace
availability. For example, if a role has varying levels of availability at each level, the role may be
overallocated in Project A, 100% allocated in Project B, but still have availability at the parent
workspace level. When entering availability values, consider if the role may be assigned to
activities in other projects at the same time and may need to split their availability.
When a role availability or rate is assigned and then modified, you have the option to keep the
modified availability and rate separate or Synchronize Role Availability and Rates (on page
301) with other roles which are further down the workspace hierarchy. This type of
synchronization is done directly from the Roles List page or at the Synchronize All Resource and
Role Availability and Rates by an application administrator.
For each availability period you can specify up to five different rate types. While some roles may
have a single standard rate at all times, other roles may have separate standard, internal, and
external rates. A role's rates are used to compute costs for any activities to which the role is
assigned. Separate role rates can be defined in each workspace and project where the resource
is available. The label for each rate type can be customized in the Resource/Role object
settings.
Because roles can be used as placeholders for specific resources, you can use role rates to
estimate the cost of a particular role assignment. When a role is staffed with a resource, the
assignment can be adjusted to either use the role's pay rate or the resource's pay rate.
Resource and role rates are used to calculate the cost of each activity to which they are
assigned.
Assignment List Overview

Resource assignments can be viewed on the Assignment List page at the workspace, project,
and program levels, enabling resource and project managers to review resource allocation for
planning and analysis.
At the workspace and program levels, you can view all resources that are assigned to the
projects in the workspace (and its child workspaces) or program. At the project level, you can
view all resources that are assigned to the project.
The Assignment List page can be used by resource and project managers to:
311
 Review time-phased unit, cost, and other details for the resources assigned to your projects.
 Group resource assignments by code, activity, associated role, project, and more.
 Track unstaffed roles by their units, costs, or lack of assigned resource.
 Ensure the right resources are working on the right assignments and are adequately
allocated.
 Monitor resource and role cost usage.
 Delete assignments directly from the page.
Configure the Table from the List Page

You can add, sort, align, group by, hide, pin, adjust to fit the content in columns, and rename a
column directly from the list table without opening the view settings. Each column in the table
supports a menu with several options that vary depending on the column. Pinned columns are
located in a section at the beginning of the table. They do not move when the rest of the table is
scrolled horizontally. This makes it easier to see the most important fields, such as Name or ID,
when a large number of columns are displayed.
Columns that support grouping can be grouped from the menu. Additional grouping options,
such as grouping interval and sort order, or codes, for example, must be modified from the
Manage Views panel. All of the column configured header options, except for the adjust to fit
and alignment options, will be saved to the Named View currently set for the page.
The column menu also supports find and replace functionality, which is described in Use Find
and Replace on the List Page (on page 134).
You can configure a list table from the following pages:
 Activities
 Assignments
To configure a table from a list page:
2) To add columns to the table:
a. Select the  Open Column Selector icon.
b. In the column selector dropdown, beside a column name, select  View to add or 
Hide to remove the column from the table.
3) To configure an existing column, right-click a column title or select  Open Column Menu,
and then select any of the following:
 Sort: Hover over the Sort option and then select to sort the column by Ascending or
Descending. Use Ctrl + click to add the column to an existing sort sequence.
 Align Column: Hover over Align Column and then select from Align Left, Align
Center, and Align Right to determine the alignment of the content in your columns.
 Group By Column: Group activities by the selected column. You can also group by
multiple columns or turn off a column grouping. This option is only available for fields that
support grouping.
 Hide Column: Remove the column from the table.
312
Pages
 Adjust to fit content: Expand or shrink the width of the column to fit its contents. You
can also double-click a column's right edge to adjust it.
 Find and Replace: Displays the Find and Replace popover. If the column is read-only,
then only Find is displayed. This option is only available for string fields.
 Pin Column: Adds the column to the pinned section of the Activities table. You can also
click and drag columns between the pinned and unpinned sections.
 Rename Column: Displays the Rename a Column popover. If a new column name is
not entered in the Rename Column popover and Rename is selected, the column name
field will be blank. After a column is renamed, the custom name can be reset to the
original name by selecting Reset in the Rename Column popover. Any changes to the
column name are saved to your current view.
Tips
 Select  Settings to manage all page view settings. See Configure View Settings (on
 The Name and ID fields can be unpinned, but they cannot be hidden.
 Click and drag a column title to change the column order.
Use Find and Replace on the List Page

The Find and Replace tool enables you to perform a search in a table column and optionally
replace the highlighted result with a new value. You can also replace all instances of the result
at the same time. This tool is useful if you want to search for a term in a column, replace a value
in a single cell, or replace many values at the same time, such as names, code values, or
configured field values.
You can use the Find and Replace tool to search any field for a specific value, but you cannot
replace the results in fields that are read-only. For read-only fields, the popover becomes the
Find tool.
You can use Find and Replace on the following pages:
 Activities
 Assignments
To use Find and Replace:
2) In the table, right-click a column title or select  Open Column Menu.
3) In the column menu, select Find and Replace. If the column is read-only, the  Find icon is
displayed.
4) In the popover menu for the Find and Replace tool, do the following:
a. Find:
1. In the Find what? field, enter your search term.
2. (Optional) In the Options section, select search options:
313
 Match whole word: When enabled, only returns whole words that match the
search term. If the search term is part of a larger string, it will not be included in
the results.
 Match case: When enabled, results must match the exact case of the search
term.
3. Select Find or press Enter to search for the entered value.
Note: The Find button is only displayed in the Find popover.
b. Replace:
1. In the Replace with field, enter the string that will replace the search term.
2. Select Replace to replace the currently selected result, or select Replace All to
replace all results.
Tips
 You can also access Find and Replace using the following keyboard shortcuts:
 In the table, select a field, and then press Ctrl + F to open the Find popover. Press Ctrl +
H or Ctrl + R to open the Find and Replace popover.
 Enter a search value in the Find what? field. Press Enter or the Up and Down Arrows
to highlight the next result.
 Enter a search value in the Replace field. Press Alt + R to replace the currently selected
result. Press Ctrl + Alt + Enter to replace all results.
 Press Esc to close the tool.
Workspace Assignment List

Review usage data for the resources assigned to the projects in the workspace.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Assignment List. In Primavera Professional, this page is
called Resource Assignments.
Review Resource Assignments in a Workspace

The Assignment List page at the workspace level displays all of the resources assigned to
projects within the workspace.
You can view resource assignments and their data in two different layouts: Grid or Spreadsheet.
Grid
Use the standard Grid layout for a view of total values for your resource assignments and their
data. The data is displayed in customizable columns and grouping criteria depending on your
needs. Because the Grid layout doesn't include a breakdown of the data over time, you can use
this view to report high-level data to stakeholders.
314
Pages
Spreadsheet
Use the Spreadsheet layout to view resource assignments and their data in a customizable table
format with a breakdown of values along the timescale configured for the page. Add vertical
columns to view general information, dates and durations, and rolled up unit and cost fields for
each resource. The same unit and cost fields can be displayed in horizontal spreadsheet rows
so that their values can be analyzed along a timescale. Time-phased values for each row roll up
to a corresponding Total column.
The first column of the table shows each resource assignment's name. Resources can be
grouped by their activity assignments, associated roles, projects, codes, and more. These same
fields can also be shown as columns. If a resource is grouped by a role or has an associated
role listed in a column, it means that the role is staffed by the resource. If a resource is grouped
by a role with a grouping band value of None, or if the associated role column is blank, it means
that the resource is directly assigned to the project and has no associated role. If a resource
name field is blank, it means that an unstaffed role is assigned to the project. You may need to
add a column for role name or ID or group by roles to see which roles are staffed or unstaffed.
You can save your page layouts as named views. Create as many named views as necessary
for different displays of your data.
To review resource assignments in a workspace:
1) Navigate to the workspace resource assignments page (see page 440).
2) On the Layout menu, select Grid or Spreadsheet.
3) Select  Settings in the toolbar to configure view options such as columns, filters, grouping,
timescale, spreadsheet rows, and currency.
4) Use columns to view resource details and rolled up values.
5) (Spreadsheet layout only) Use spreadsheet rows to view time-phased unit and cost values.
To start the spreadsheet timescale at a specific date, in the Go to field, select a date.
6) Use the Search field to search for keywords in the table.
Tips
 You can adjust column settings directly from the table using the  Open Column Menu for
any column header. See Configure the Table from the List Page (on page 133).
 You can quickly delete activity resource assignments directly from this page. Select one or
more resource rows, select the  Context menu, and then select Delete. To delete large
groups of related assignments, group by Resource ID, Role ID, or Activity ID, select the 
Context menu in a grouping band, and then select Delete.
 If all labor or nonlabor assignments have been deleted from an activity, you will be prompted
to retain or delete all unit and cost values of that assignment type. Select Yes to reset all
activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values to 0. Select No to retain the activity labor or
nonlabor unit and cost values. After all material resources have been removed, all activity
material costs will be reset to 0.
315
Assignment List Fields

Dates
Actual Finish
Actual Start
Finish
Planned Finish
Planned Start
Start
Durations
Actual Duration
316
Pages
Planned Duration
Finish date.
Planned Lag
Remaining Duration
Remaining Lag
Financial
Actual Cost
At Completion Cost
Planned Cost
Price/Unit
Remaining Cost
General
Calendar
317
Curve
Rate Source
Rate Type
assignments.
Resource Type
Proficiency
Percentages
Units
Actual Units
activity.
At Completion Units
Planned Units
Planned Units/Time
Remaining Units
318
Pages

Project Assignment List

Review usage data for the resources assigned to the project.
You can also open this page in the context of a program to review the resources assigned to the
projects within the program.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Assignment List. In Primavera Professional, this page is
called Resource Assignments.
Review Resource Assignments in a Project or Program

The Assignment List page at the project level displays all of the resources assigned to the
project. This page is also available at the program level for resources assigned to the projects
within the program.
You can view resource assignments and their data in two different layouts: Grid or Spreadsheet.
Grid
Use the standard Grid layout for a view of total values for your resource assignments and their
data. The data is displayed in customizable columns and grouping criteria depending on your
needs. Because the Grid layout doesn't include a breakdown of the data over time, you can use
this view to report high-level data to stakeholders. Some cells can be updated by selecting the
cell and entering a new value or selecting a value from the drop-down options available. Multiple
cells can be updated with the same value by selecting the highlighted corner of the cell and
clicking-and-dragging the cell up or down to fill-up or fill-down the rows in that column with the
selected cell value. You can also use Shift + Click to highlight multiple cells or use Ctrl + Click to
select multiple cells, and then use the right-click Fill Down menu option.
Spreadsheet
Use the Spreadsheet layout to view resource assignments and their data in a customizable table
format with a breakdown of values along the timescale configured for the page. Add vertical
columns to view general information, dates and durations, and rolled up unit and cost fields for
each resource. The same unit and cost fields can be displayed in horizontal spreadsheet rows
so that their values can be analyzed along a timescale. Time-phased values for each row roll up
to a corresponding Total column.
319
The first column of the table shows each resource assignment's name. Resources can be
grouped by their activity assignments, associated roles, projects, codes, and more. These same
fields can also be shown as columns. If a resource is grouped by a role or has an associated
role listed in a column, it means that the role is staffed by the resource. If a resource is grouped
by a role with a grouping band value of None, or if the associated role column is blank, it means
that the resource is directly assigned to the project and has no associated role. If a resource
name field is blank, it means that an unstaffed role is assigned to the project. You may need to
add a column for role name or ID or group by roles to see which roles are staffed or unstaffed.
Some cells can be updated by selecting the cell and entering a new value or selecting a value
from the drop-down options available. Multiple cells can be updated with the same value by
selecting the highlighted corner of the cell and clicking-and-dragging the cell up or down to fill-up
or fill-down the rows in that column with the selected cell value. You can also use Shift + Click to
highlight multiple cells or use Ctrl + Click to select multiple cells, and then use the right-click Fill
Down menu option.
You can save your page layouts as named views. Create as many named views as necessary
for different displays of your data.
To review resource assignments in a project or program:
1) Navigate to the project or program resource assignments page (see page 440).
2) On the Layout  menu, select Grid or Spreadsheet.
3) Select  Settings in the toolbar to configure view options such as columns, filters, grouping,
timescale, spreadsheet rows, and currency.
4) Use columns to view resource details and rolled up values.
5) (Spreadsheet layout only) Use spreadsheet rows to view time-phased unit and cost values.
To start the spreadsheet timescale at a specific date, in the Go to field, select a date.
6) Use the Search field to search for keywords in the table.
7) Update the value in a cell by selecting the cell and entering a new value or selecting a value
from the options available. Not all cells can be edited from the assignments page.
8) Update multiple cells in a column with an existing cell value in one of the following ways:
 Select the cell and then click-and-drag the corner of the cell box up or down to fill-up or
fill-down those rows with the selected value.
 Select a cell and then Shift + Click a cell in the same column to highlight multiple cells.
Right click a highlighted cell and select Fill Down. The cells are updated with the value
from the first cell you selected.
 Select a cell and then Ctrl + Click multiple cells in the same column. Right click a
highlighted cell and select Fill Down. The cells are updated with the value from the first
cell you selected.
Tips
 You can adjust column settings directly from the table using the  Open Column Menu of
any column header. See Configure the Table from the List Page (on page 133).
320
Pages
 You can quickly delete activity resource assignments directly from this page. Select one or
more resource rows, select the  Context menu, and then select Delete. To delete large
groups of related assignments, group by Resource ID, Role ID, or Activity ID, select the 
Context menu in a grouping band, and then select Delete.
 If all labor or nonlabor assignments have been deleted from an activity, you will be prompted
to retain or delete all unit and cost values of that assignment type. Select Yes to reset all
activity labor or nonlabor unit and cost values to 0. Select No to retain the activity labor or
nonlabor unit and cost values. After all material resources have been removed, all activity
material costs will be reset to 0.
 When an activity is set to Completed, you cannot use fill-down or fill-up with some date
values from an In Progress or Not Started activity. If you do attempt to use fill-down or
fill-up with data from a Not Started or In Progress activity, a warning icon is displayed, and
the cell value is not changed. To remove the warning icon select the cell.
 When performing fill-down of fill-up in the Rate Source column, the resource or role rate
must match what is assigned to the activity.
 To quickly view the details of the activity associated with the resource, select  Activity
Details. The Activity Details panel displays important information such as Project name,
WBS name, Start date with indicators for Actual Start date, Finish date with indicators for
Actual Finish date, Status, Constraint indicators, and Percent Complete. See Configure
Activity Date Indicators (on page 68) to enable indicators.
Assignment List Fields

Dates
Actual Finish
Actual Start
Finish
Planned Finish
Planned Start
321

Start
Durations
Actual Duration
Planned Duration
Finish date.
Planned Lag
Remaining Duration
Remaining Lag
Financial
Actual Cost
At Completion Cost
322
Pages
Planned Cost
Price/Unit
Remaining Cost
General
Calendar
Curve
Rate Source
Rate Type
assignments.
Resource Type
Proficiency
Percentages
323
Units
Actual Units
activity.
At Completion Units
Planned Units
Planned Units/Time
Remaining Units
Analysis Overview
The Analysis page is used to monitor the current time-phased unit allocations of your resources
and roles. For resources, actual and remaining units are measured against the resource's
maximum availability. For roles, staffed and unstaffed remaining units are measured against the
role's maximum availability.
The page shows all of the resources and roles available to the current object whether they are
assigned to activities or not. At the workspace level, you can view all of the workspace resources
and roles that are available to the workspace. At the project and program levels, you can view all
of the workspace and project resources and roles that are available to the project or program.
324
Pages
You can use the page to see where a resource may be overallocated or underallocated or where
a role may be staffed or unstaffed. Overallocated resources are scheduled for more work than
their availability allows. To resolve overallocations, you can respread units, adjust availability,
allow the resource to work overtime, or assign additional resources to redistribute the
assignment units. Resources that are underallocated can be scheduled for more work because
their current allocation of units does not exceed their availability. Unstaffed roles are role
assignments that lack an associated resource assignment. If you are planning your entire project
using only roles, unstaffed role values can be ignored. If you plan your project by staffing roles
with associated resources, then unstaffed role values indicate that a specific resource
assignment is needed.
Resources and roles on the Analysis page are shown in separate views. Each resource or role
in the view is displayed on its own line in a table. Resources and roles display time-phased units
aggregated from their activity assignments. At the workspace and program levels, resources and
roles assigned to multiple projects will appear once per project, and the units for each project will
be aggregated only from the activities within the project. The sections below explain the different
interface options available on the Analysis page and the calculations that may be used.
Spreadsheet Rows
For each resource in the Resources view, the following spreadsheet rows are displayed:
 Max Availability: The maximum amount of units the resource is available to work during the
time period. This value is set for workspace and project resources in the Resource List (see
"Resource List Overview" on page 272). Each resource entry uses the availability values
set at the project level.
 Under/Over: This value is calculated from each time period's availability and allocation
values. A resource is overallocated for a time period if its allocation units exceed its max
availability. If the allocation units are less then the max availability, then the resource is
underallocated and is available to perform more work during the time period. The
Under/Over field indicates the number of units by which the resource is underallocated or
overallocated. If the value is blank, then the resource's allocation matches its availability.
 Allocation: The number of actual and remaining units the resource has been scheduled to
work during the given period. Each period's allocation value is an aggregation of all of the
resource's activity assignment units during the period. If an allocation value is blank, then the
resource has no units allocated for the time period.
For each role in the Roles view, the following spreadsheet rows are displayed:
 Max Availability: The maximum amount of units the role is available to work during the time
period. This value is set for workspace and project roles in the Role List (see "Role List
Overview" on page 294). Each role entry uses the availability values set at the project level.
 Staffed Remaining Early Units: This value reflects the number of remaining units that exist
in the time period for assignments where the role is staffed by a resource. This number is an
aggregation of all of the role's staffed activity assignment remaining units during the period.
 Unstaffed Remaining Early Units: This value reflects the number of remaining units that
exist in the time period for assignments where the role is not staffed by a resource. This
number is an aggregation of all of the role's unstaffed activity assignment remaining units
during the period.
325
A role may display both staffed and unstaffed units if it has staffed and unstaffed activity
assignments.
Grouping Bands
Resources and roles on the Analysis page can be ungrouped and displayed in a flat list, or they
can be grouped by common attribute.
At the workspace, project, and program levels, individual resources and roles can be grouped by
code or by resource/role. The workspace and program levels also support grouping by project.
For all grouping options, resource allocation values and role remaining values roll up to the
grouping band level to show total units for the group. When grouping by resource/role at the
workspace and program levels, additional aggregated values are available for workspace-level
resources and roles. While all individual resource and role entries use project-level availability
values, the Max Availability field at the grouping band level uses the resource or role's
workspace-level availability values. This enables you to view a workspace resource or role's
allocation across a single project at the individual level and across all projects in the workspace
in the grouping band. Because workspace resources and roles can have separate availability
values defined at the workspace and project levels, a resource may be overallocated in one of
its projects but still underallocated or evenly allocated at the workspace level. The separate
availabilities enable you to review such a scenario.
Histogram
The Analysis page also shows allocation units as vertical bars in a time-phased histogram when
a resource or role is selected in the table. For resources, each time period in the histogram may
show a stacked set of bars that includes actual units, remaining units, and overallocated units.
For roles, the histogram may show actual units, staffed remaining units, unstaffed remaining
units, and overallocated units. In either view, you can toggle the display of horizontal lines, a
chart legend, and the max availability line.
At the workspace and program levels, grouping band totals can also be shown in the histogram.
When a code, project ID, or resource/role grouping band is selected, you can view actual,
remaining, and allocation bars broken down by project. When a resource/role grouping band is
selected, you can also view the total usage of all resources or roles within the grouping band
broken down by stacked actual, remaining, and overallocated unit bars. When a resource or role
grouping band is selected, the max availability line in the histogram uses the workspace-level
availability values of the resource or role.
Workspace Analysis
Analyze the resources and roles available to the workspace to identify resources that are
overallocated or underallocated and roles that are understaffed and staffed. When grouping by
resource or role, max availability values reflect workspace-level resource or role availability
values.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Analysis. In Primavera Professional, this page is called
Resource Analysis.
326
Pages
Analyze Resource and Role Allocation in a Workspace

Review time-phased allocation values for all of the workspace resources and roles that are
available to the workspace. The resources and roles in the table are listed according to the
projects they are available to. If a resource or role has no project listed, it has not been made
available to any projects. If a resource or role appears multiple times, it is available to multiple
projects.
The spreadsheet in the table shows time-phased max availability and allocated units for the
selected resource or role. Resource allocation values contain actual and remaining units. Role
allocation values are divided into staffed and unstaffed remaining early units. Availability values
are shown if availability periods have been configured for the resource or role. Allocation values
are shown if a resource or role is assigned to at least one activity. A role may have only
unstaffed units, only staffed units, or a combination of both. If no allocation values exist for an
entry, the resource or role has not been assigned to any activities.
You can analyze resource and role allocations using the spreadsheet, grouping bands, and the
histogram. See Analysis Overview (on page 324) for more information on these interface
options and availability and allocation calculations.
To analyze resource and role allocation in a workspace:
1) Navigate to the workspace resource analysis page (see page 440).
2) In the page toolbar:
 Select the  Resources or  Roles view.
 In the Quick Filters section of the page toolbar, configure the following quick filters:
 All Resources: Choose to display all resources in the table or a selection of
resources.
 All Assignments: Choose to display all resources regardless of their
assignments, only resources with activity assignments, or only resources without
activity assignments.
Note: In the Roles view, the quick filter options are called All Roles and
All Assignments.
 Select  Settings to configure filtering, grouping, and timescale view options.

 To start the spreadsheet timescale at a specific date, in the Go to field, select a date.
3) In the Resources view, review the resource's time-phased Max Availability, Under/Over,
and Allocation values. If allocation is less than availability, the resource is underallocated
for that time period. If allocation exceeds availability, the resource is overallocated. If a
resource is overallocated for a time period, an icon () will be shown in the Under/Over
field.
In the Roles view, review the role's time-phased Max Availability, Staffed Remaining Early
Units, and Unstaffed Remaining Early Units values. Staffed units indicate the role has
been staffed with a resource assignment. Unstaffed units indicate that a specific resource
assignment is needed to staff the role.
327
4) In the Resource Name or Role Name column, select the  Details icon to view the
activities that the resource or role is assigned. Allocation values in the spreadsheet are
aggregated from these activity assignments.
5) To view allocation values in the histogram, select a resource, role, or grouping band, and
then do the following:
 In the histogram panel, select  Dock Bottom or  Dock Right to position the
histogram on the page.
 Select  Settings to toggle the display of the legend, the max availability line, and
horizontal sight lines.
 If a grouping band is selected, use the first View list to display aggregated allocations by
Total Usage (Resource/Role groupings) or by By Project (Code, Project ID, or
Resource/Role groupings). If you are viewing the histogram by project, use the second
view list to show Allocation, Actual, or Remaining unit bars for resources or Total
Allocation, Actual, Staffed, or Unstaffed unit bars for roles.
 Hover over a bar to view its details.
Tips
 When grouping by Resource/Role, workspace resource and role values are rolled up and
measured against the availability set for the resource or role at the workspace level.
Workspace availability values are shown in the grouping band and in the histogram when a
grouping band is selected.
 Depending on the granularity of the spreadsheet timescale, a resource may appear
underallocated at a higher level, such as month, but may be overallocated at a lower level,
such as week or day. You may need to adjust the timescale to see these overallocated
periods.
 Use the arrows in the spreadsheet timescale or histogram timescale to move the dates left or
right.
Project Analysis
Analyze the workspace and project resources and roles that are available to the project to
identify resources that are overallocated or underallocated and roles that are understaffed and
staffed.
You can also open this page in the context of a program to analyze the resources and roles
available to the projects within the program.
In Primavera Cloud, this page is called Analysis. In Primavera Professional, this page is called
Resource Analysis.
Analyze Resource and Role Allocation in a Project or Program

Review time-phased allocation values for all of the workspace and project resources and roles
that are available to the project or program.
328
Pages
At the program level, the resources and roles in the table are listed according to the projects
they are available to. If a resource or role has no project listed, it has not been made available to
any projects. If a resource or role appears multiple times, it is available to multiple projects.
The spreadsheet in the table shows time-phased max availability and allocated units for the
selected resource or role. Resource allocation values contain actual and remaining units. Role
allocation values are divided into staffed and unstaffed remaining early units. Availability values
are shown if availability periods have been configured for the resource or role. Allocation values
are shown if a resource or role is assigned to at least one activity. A role may have only
unstaffed units, only staffed units, or a combination of both. If no allocation values exist for an
entry, the resource or role has not been assigned to any activities.
You can analyze resource and role allocations using the spreadsheet, grouping bands, and the
histogram. See Analysis Overview (on page 324) for more information on these interface
options and availability and allocation calculations.
To analyze resource and role allocation in a project or program:
1) Navigate to the project or program resource analysis page (see page 441).
2) In the page toolbar:
 Select the  Resources or  Roles view.
 In the Quick Filters section of the page toolbar, configure the following quick filters:
 All Resources: Choose to display all resources in the table or a selection of
resources.
 All Assignments: Choose to display all resources regardless of their
assignments, only resources with activity assignments, or only resources without
activity assignments.
Note: In the Roles view, the quick filter options are called All Roles and
All Assignments.
 Select  Settings to configure filtering, grouping, and timescale view options.

 To start the spreadsheet timescale at a specific date, in the Go to field, select a date.
3) In the Resources view, review the resource's time-phased Max Availability, Under/Over,
and Allocation values. If allocation is less than availability, the resource is underallocated
for that time period. If allocation exceeds availability, the resource is overallocated. If a
resource is overallocated for a time period, an icon () will be shown in the Under/Over
field.
In the Roles view, review the role's time-phased Max Availability, Staffed Remaining Early
Units, and Unstaffed Remaining Early Units values. Staffed units indicate the role has
been staffed with a resource assignment. Unstaffed units indicate that a specific resource
assignment is needed to staff the role.
4) In the Resource Name or Role Name column, select the  Details icon to view the
activities that the resource or role is assigned. Allocation values in the spreadsheet are
aggregated from these activity assignments.
5) To view allocation values in the histogram, select a resource, role, or grouping band, and
then do the following:
329
 In the histogram panel, select  Dock Bottom or  Dock Right to position the
histogram on the page.
 Select  Settings to toggle the display of the legend, the max availability line, and
horizontal sight lines.
 (Program level only) If a grouping band is selected, use the first View list to display
aggregated allocations by Total Usage (Resource/Role groupings) or by By Project
(Code, Project ID, or Resource/Role groupings). If you are viewing the histogram by
project, use the second view list to show Allocation, Actual, or Remaining unit bars for
resources or Total Allocation, Actual, Staffed, or Unstaffed unit bars for roles.
 Hover over a bar to view its details.
Tips
 At the program level, when grouping by Resource/Role, workspace resource and role
values are rolled up and measured against the availability set for the resource or role at the
workspace level. Workspace availability values are shown in the grouping band and in the
histogram when a grouping band is selected.
 Depending on the granularity of the spreadsheet timescale, a resource may appear
underallocated at a higher level, such as month, but may be overallocated at a lower level,
such as week or day. You may need to adjust the timescale to see these overallocated
periods.
 Use the arrows in the spreadsheet timescale or histogram timescale to move the dates left or
right.
Files Overview
A file is a document or work product that you create and add to your work environment. You and
your team can add, edit, maintain, annotate, discuss, and delete files based on your application
privilege settings. Create standard folder structures and files across your organization using the
folder template feature. You can upload files in over 500 supported file types including video and
audio.
With files functionality, you can check in and check out files to avoid version conflicts, track file
version history, preview files without downloading them, and download files for use offline.
Built-in virus scanning functionality automatically scans your files during upload and check in. If
an issue is detected with a file, you are notified and the contents of the file are deleted from the
database. You can upload another version of the file that is not corrupted. Files that are still
pending virus scan can be downloaded or checked out. The application will ask you to confirm
before you download or check out an unscanned file.
Accessing Files
You can access files from a variety of areas within the application, including projects, portfolios,
programs, and ideas. The File List pages and Files detail windows provide file control
functionality such as uploading, downloading, organizing, previewing, and checking out files.
330
Pages
Access the File List Page

Access, preview, add, delete, check in, and check out files within your projects, portfolios,
programs, and ideas.
Use the detail windows on the File List page to assign file access, view file version information
and file fields, specify file locations, and add annotations to your files.
In Primavera Professional, this page is called Files.
To access the projects, portfolios, programs, or ideas File List page:
 Navigate to the files page:
In Primavera Cloud:
a. In the object selector, select a project, portfolio, program, or idea.
b. In the sidebar, hover over  Files, and select File List.
c. On the Project or Program menu, select Files.
Tips
 When files are added to Field objects, system folders are created in the project File List
folder structure to organize these files. System folders and Field object files cannot be
modified or deleted.
Access a Files Detail Window

Use the Files detail window to access, preview, add, link, unlink, check in, and check out the
files associated with your data. Files detail windows can be found on pages whose objects
support files.
Attachments.

 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
331
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 WBSs
 Work Packages
File List
Upload and manage files related to your projects, portfolios, programs, and ideas. You can add,
delete, preview, check in, and check out files. Keep track of your files and maintain a single
portal where your team can find the latest versions of your files.
Adding Files
You can add files from a variety of areas within the application. The File List pages enable you
to add files and folders to projects, portfolios, programs, and ideas. Use Files detail windows to
add or link files to a variety of objects.
Use the Summary & Settings panel to add files to certain Field objects. The maximum file size
that you can add is 2 GB.
Add a File to the File List

Add relevant files, such as costing spreadsheets, contracts, specifications, and audio and video
files, to your projects, portfolios, programs, or ideas to support your organization's data.
To add a file to the File List:
1) Navigate to the files page (see page 441).
2) In the table, select a folder, and then select  Add File.
3) In the Upload File dialog box, select one or more files, and then select OK.
Tips
 You can also drag and drop a file to the File List page.
 When files are grouped by codes or when you drag and drop a file to the File List page, you
can select the destination folder in the Upload File dialog box.
332
Pages

 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 WBSs
 Work Packages
Attachments.

6) Select Upload.
Tips
page.
333
Link a File to an Object
You can link existing files to objects contained within a project instead of adding them to each
object. Linking ensures the same version of a file is used everywhere that it is linked. The
application enables you to associate files in the Files detail window of the object. The files are
still available from the File List page at the project level.
 Activities
 CBS
 Funds
 Fund Sources
 Logs
 PBSs
 Portfolio Funds
 Projects
 Project Funds
 Risks
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
 WBSs
 Work Packages
To link a file to an object:
Attachments.
3) In the Files detail window, select  Link.

4) In the Link File dialog box, select a file, and select  Add from Available.
You can select one or more files to link.
5) Select OK.
334
Pages
Tips
 To remove a linked file, select the file, select the  Context menu, and select Unlink.
Add a Folder
Establish an organizational hierarchy for your files by creating folders. Each folder hierarchy can
have a maximum of 30 folders. Folders can be added on the File List page.
To add a folder:
2) On the File List page, select  Add Folder.
3) In the Add Folder dialog box, enter a name for the folder and select Add.
Tips
 You cannot delete or rename the root folder.
Cut and Paste a Folder or File

Cut and paste folders and files to move them to and from folders. Cutting and pasting a folder
also moves any child folders and files. To cut and paste a file from one folder to another, you
need the Delete privilege for the source folder and the Add privilege for the destination folder in
a Files permission set.
To cut and paste a folder or file on the File List page:
2) In the table, select the folder or file.
3) Select the  Context menu, and select Cut.
4) Select a new folder row.
5) Select the  Context menu, and select Paste.
 In Primavera Cloud, select Save.
 In Primavera Professional, select  Save.
Tips
 You cannot modify system folders or files added to Field objects.
 You cannot cut files that are checked out.
Apply a Folder Template

Apply folder templates to project, portfolio, program, or idea folders to copy a folder structure
and file set. You can delete any files or folders that are not applicable without affecting the
template.
335
To apply a folder template:

2) On the File List page, select a folder, select the  Context menu, and then select Apply
Template.
3) In the Apply Template to Selected Folder dialog box, select a template, and select OK.
You will receive a notification when the template application is complete.
Tips
 Folder templates are added in the workspace settings or in the Files app at the workspace
level.
Preview a File
Preview a file in the application before deciding if you want to check out and edit the file. You
can preview a file from anywhere in the application by selecting the name of the file.
Tips
 Oracle Primavera Cloud supports the preview of .mp4 and .ogg video file types and .mp3
and .wav audio file types. You must download other video and audio file types to preview
them.
 Virus scanning is completed on all files uploaded or checked in to the application. You can't
Check Out a File

Because files are shared, you are required to check them out and in to make updates to them.
Checking out a file enables you to download it to your local machine where you can make edits
and create a new version of the file. When you are finished updating the file, you can check it in
so the new version of the file is saved to the project, portfolio, program, or idea library and
available to other team members. You can check out a file from the File List page or a Files
detail window.
To check out a file:
 In a file row, select the  Context menu, and then select Check Out.
Tips
 Files are downloaded or opened depending on the file opening procedures of your browser.
Files that are still pending virus scan can be downloaded or checked out. The application will
ask you to confirm before you download or check out an unscanned file.
 All users may view a checked out file, but only the user who has checked out the file may
modify it until it is either checked in or check out is canceled.
 When files are checked out,  Checked Out displays next to the filename.
 The person who checked out a file or the project-level File Administrator can cancel a check
out. When a check out is canceled, the file will reflect no changes. To cancel a file check out,
select the  Context menu and select Cancel Check Out.
336
Pages
Check In a File
After you have finished editing a checked-out file, you must check it in to save the new version
of the file to the project, portfolio, program, or idea library. You can check in a file from the File
List page or a Files detail window.
To check in a file:
1) In a file row, select the  Context menu, and then select Check In.
2) In the Check In dialog box, select  Browse, select the file, and then select Upload.
Tips
 You can add comments about the file in the Check In dialog box from the File List page. For
example, you may want to record the changes you made to the file.
 After you check in a file, you can view previous versions of it in the Versions detail window
on the File List page.
preview the most recent version of the file until virus scanning is completed and you refresh
the page.
Download a File
Download files from the application to work with them offline. Changes that you make to
downloaded files that are not checked out will not be reflected in the application. You can
download a file from the File List page or a Files detail window.
Note: Files that are still pending virus scan can be downloaded or
checked out. The application will ask you to confirm before you
download or check out an unscanned file.
To download a single file:
 In a file row, select the  Context menu, and then select Download.
To download one or more files in a zip file:
1) Use Ctrl + Click to select one or more file rows. If you want to download a folder and its
contents, select the folder row.
2) On one of the selected rows, select the  Context menu and then select Download as .zip.
Assign a User or User Group Access to Folders and Files

Users can be assigned to folders and files individually or through user groups. Assign users to
folders and files to provide security privileges.
To assign access to folders and files from the File List page:
337
1) Navigate to the project or portfolio files page (see page 442).

2) In the table, select a folder or file row, and then select the Security detail window.
3) In the Security detail window, select Assign , and then select User or Group.
4) Select the name of the user or group, and select Next .
5) In the Permission Set column, choose a permission set, and then select OK.
Note: If you assigned a user group that is configured with a default

permission set, you can keep the default or choose another if necessary.
6) Select Assign.
Tips
 There are two permission sets provided by the application that you can assign to users and
user groups:
 The Administrator (System) permission set has all privileges assigned. It grants all
functionality for an object as well as access to all of the object's data. It also grants the
ability to edit the user and user group security for that object.
 The View Only (System) permission set provides read-only access to objects and their
data.
 The Search feature searches the entire list of users for matches. During that initial search, it
will stop after finding 500 results, then filter out those who have already been assigned. For
this reason, your maximum number of search results might vary. To limit the number of
results, be as specific as possible when entering a name in the search field. For example,
enter the first and last name of the user.
View a File Version

You can use the Versions detail window on the File List page to keep track of the changes made
to a file and access previous versions. The Versions detail window is not accessible from a Files
detail window.
To view a file version:
2) In the table, select a file row, and then select the Versions detail window.
3) In the Versions detail window, in the Version column, select a version number to view the
selected version of the file.
Assign a Location to a File

Assign locations to files so you can later produce reports based on geographical location and
filter views by location.
To assign a location to a file:
338
Pages

2) In the table, select a file row, and then select the Location detail window.
Notes:
improve results.
Annotating Files
Annotations are graphic markers and review remarks that you can add to a file preview. They
provide a way for team members to communicate information that is specific to a part of a file
without impacting version changes. Multiple team members can mock up a file at the same time
using the drawing toolbar. If you are the file owner, you will receive a notification when a user
annotates your file or replies to an annotation on your file.
Annotations are specific to the file preview and do not appear on downloaded or printed files.
You can manage annotations from the Annotations detail window or in the file preview. You can
filter annotations by username, or jump to any page of the file that has an annotation.
You cannot annotate audio or video files.
Add a File Annotation

Add annotations to specific sections of a file to highlight discussion areas. For example, you can
add a pushpin marker and enter a comment about the file where the pushpin is placed.
Note: Users with View Only (System) permission set for files can also
add an annotation to a file. They can delete the annotation if it was
339
created by them and if it has no additional comments.
To add an annotation:
2) In the table, select the name of a file.
3) On the drawing toolbar, select the  Color Selector and choose a color for the annotation.
4) On the drawing toolbar, select one of the following drawing tools:
a.  Pin: Use the Pin to post an annotation to a pinpointed location.
b.  Rectangle: Use the Rectangle tool to draw a rectangle.
c.  Ellipse: Use the Ellipse tool to draw an ellipse.
d.  Highlight: Use the Highlighter tool to create a free-form highlight.
e. Polygon: Use the Polygon tool to create a free form polygon shape. You must create
at least three points.
5) Enter a name.
Tips
 Select the annotation on the file to enter comments in the annotation Discussion panel.
 When using the pin to annotate a file, click the location you want to annotate.
 When using drawing tools to annotate a file, click and drag them to surround or highlight the
area you want to annotate. Drawing tools include the highlighter, the rectangle, and the
ellipse.
View a File Annotation
You can keep track of file mark ups and key discussion points using the Annotations detail
window, which provides a list of the annotations in the file. You can view the discussion panel
from the list or select an annotation to go to it in the file.
To view a file annotation:
2) In the table, select a file row, and then select the Annotations detail window.
3) Do one of the following:
 Select  Discuss to view the Discussion panel.
 Select the name of the annotation to view the file and discussion.
 Select the name of the annotation and add additional annotations to the file. Enter a new
name in the Name field to save the file as a new annotation.
340
Settings
View a File Reference

You can use the References detail window on the File List page to view objects where a file has
been added or linked.
To view where a file is referenced from the File List page:
1) Navigate to the project files page (see page 441).
2) In the table, select a file row, and then select the References detail window.
Assign a Code to a File

Assign codes to files to help track them based on attributes they share.
To assign a code to a file:
2) In the table, select a file row, and then select the Codes detail window.
3) Select Assign.
4) In the Select Code dialog box, in the Available section, select codes and select Add from
Available to add them to the Selected section.
5) Select Select.
Tips
 You can also assign codes to files by adding code columns to the page from the Settings
panel and selecting a code value for the file row.
Settings
Configure workspace-level dictionaries, project-level dictionaries, object defaults, project-level
settings, and program-level settings in Primavera Professional.
Shared Data Overview

Workspaces provide a way to customize sets of data for the workspaces and projects contained
within that structure. You can share data from higher level workspaces and create additional
custom data within a specific workspace. Data that is required for the entire organization should
be associated at the root level workspace and use an Automatic sharing method so it is pushed
down to child workspaces. Data that does not need to be automatically pushed down to child
workspaces should use the default Manual sharing method.
341
Shared data prevents the need to re-enter data. It is locked for editing by the owning workspace,
prohibiting unauthorized changes in other workspaces and projects. You must have the required
security privileges to add, edit, and delete shared data. If your data ownership needs change,
you can update the owning workspace. You cannot delete or move shared data if it is actively
used by a child workspace or project.
Most shared data is accessible from the workspace-level Summary & Settings panel. Some
shared data is owned in several workspace-level apps. A limited subset of shared data is also
available in the project context. You can manage various configuration and security data types
including:
 Dictionaries
 Analysis Views
 Calendars
 Codes
 Cost Categories
 Currencies
 Curve Profiles
 Custom Log Types
 Evaluation Categories
 Locations
 Measures
 Reasons
 Reporting Cycles
 Risk Matrix Templates
 Risk Threshold Templates
 Rules of Credit
 Strategy Types
 Units of Measure
 Defaults & Options
 Configured Fields
 Permissions
 Permission Sets
 Security
 User Groups
 Workspace-Level App Data
 Charts
 Dashboards
 Folder Templates
 Forms
 Reports
 Workflow Designs
342
Settings
 Workflow Configurations
Edit the Dictionary Sharing Method

If your data sharing methods change, you can update the sharing method of the data object. Any
changes will affect new child workspaces. For example, if you change a data object to be shared
automatically, all new child workspaces will automatically inherit this data. If you would like to
use the data in pre-existing workspaces, you must use the Assign button to inherit the data.
The data sharing method must be changed in the owning workspace.
To edit the sharing method:
1) Navigate to a dictionary page (see page 443).
2) On the dictionary item page, select a dictionary entry.
3) In the Sharing Method list, specify how the data is shared between parent and child
workspaces:
 Manual: The data can be pulled down by child workspaces individually, using the Assign
button in each child workspace. This is the default option.
 Automatic: The data is pushed down to child workspaces automatically.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Files
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
343
 Workflows and Forms
Manage Shared Dictionaries

A child workspace can inherit dictionary data with a Manual sharing method from a parent
workspace by using the Assign feature. Child workspaces can select which data to inherit
instead of receiving all data by default. This method of data sharing prevents irrelevant data from
being added to the workspace.
To pull down data from a parent workspace:
2) On the dictionary item page, select Assign.
3) In the Assign dialog box, select additional dictionary items, and select Assign.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Update the Owning Workspace of Dictionary Items

Update the owning workspace to move a dictionary item to another workspace that you are
assigned. If you move the item higher in the workspace hierarchy, it will be available to more
workspaces. If you move it to a higher workspace, all child workspaces can access the
dictionary item.
To update the owning workspace of a dictionary item:
2) On the dictionary item page, select a dictionary entry.
3) Select the  Context menu, and then select Change Owning Workspace.
4) In the Select Workspace dialog box, select the new owning workspace, and select Select.
344
Settings

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 You can also perform this task from context-specific pages in a workspace.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Files
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Update the Owning Workspace of a Code

Update the owning workspace of a code to move it to another workspace that you are assigned.
If you move the code to a workspace that is higher in the workspace hierarchy, it will be
available to more workspaces.
To update the owning workspace of a code:
1) Navigate to an object configuration page (see page 446).
2) On the object page, select the Codes tab.
3) On the Codes tab, select a code.
In Primavera Cloud:
345
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Dashboards
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Update the Owning Workspace of a Calendar

Update the owning workspace of a calendar to move it to another workspace that you are
assigned. If you move a calendar to a workspace that is higher in the workspace hierarchy, it will
be available to more workspaces.
To update the owning workspace of a calendar:
1) Navigate to the Calendars dictionary page (see page 443)
2) Select a calendar.
5) Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
346
Settings
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Update the Owning Workspace of a Currency

Update the owning workspace of a currency to move it to another workspace that you are
assigned. If you move a currency to a workspace that is higher in the workspace hierarchy, it will
To update the owning workspace of a currency:
1) Navigate to the Currencies dictionary page (see page 445).
2) On the Currencies page, in the table, select a currency.
5) Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Dictionaries (Project)
Project-level dictionaries contain items that are only available to a single project.
Calendars (Project-level)
Calendars in the project Calendars dictionary are available to be assigned as the default project
calendar or to individual activities, resources, and roles in the project. Project-specific calendars
are useful when there are calendars that only need to be available to a single project. When
assigning a calendar to the project, activity, resource, or role, you can choose from project-level
or workspace-level calendars. If a project-level calendar should be made available to more
projects, you can promote it to the parent workspace.
347
For more information about calendars, see Calendars Overview (on page 357).
Add a Holiday List to a Project-level Calendar

Add a holiday list to include any public or company holidays observed by the organization that
should be reflected in the project schedule. An existing list can be assigned to a calendar during
the calendar's creation, or you can assign a calendar's holiday list later. One holiday list can be
selected per calendar.
Holiday lists are available to be used throughout the workspace hierarchy. You must have the
security privileges required to add and edit calendars in the parent workspace to add and edit a
holiday list.
To add a holiday list to a project-level calendar:
1) Navigate to the project Calendars dictionary page (see page 445).
2) Select Holidays.
3) In the Manage Holiday Lists dialog box, select  Add, and then enter a name for the
holiday list. You can also select an existing list.
4) Select Edit Holiday List.
5) Select  Add to create a new holiday for the list. Enter a name for the holiday. You can also
select an existing holiday.
6) Choose when the holiday occurs:
 Once on: Select if this holiday is a onetime occurrence.
 Repeat every: Select if this holiday occurs on the same date every year.
Note: You can select on a calendar when holidays are recognized as

part of the standard work week.
 Repeat the: Select if this holiday occurs on a different date each year, but always occurs
on the same day and week each year.
7) Continue to enter dates as needed.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
348
Settings
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Project-level Calendar

Add a project-level calendar if it only needs to be available to a particular project. Calendars at
the project level can be assigned as the default project calendar or to activities in the project.
They cannot be assigned to resources or roles in the project. You can promote project-level
calendars to the parent workspace if they should be made available to other projects in the
workspace or to resources/roles.
To add a project-level calendar:
2) Select  Add.
3) In the Add Calendar wizard, complete the following steps:
a. Name: Enter a Name and ID for the calendar. Select Next.
b. Create Work Week: Specify the standard number of work hours per day by manually
entering the number of hours or by selecting the time period on the calendar. Change the
time periods on the calendar by dragging the entire block of time or by expanding or
reducing the block of time. Select Next.
c. Add Holidays: Choose a holiday list to assign to the calendar. The holidays in the
selected list are displayed.
 Select the If a holiday falls on standard nonwork time, move option if your
calendar has holidays that fall on standard nonwork time and should be marked as
holiday time during standard work time. Select where on the calendar the holiday
should be reflected.
Notes:
 This setting affects the placement of activities during scheduling and
leveling. Changes to a holiday's placement on the calendar are not
reflected on the Calendar tab of the Calendars dictionary page.
 This setting applies to holidays being placed on nonwork time during
the standard work week. It is unaffected by unavailable time created
by an exception.
 Select Finish.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
349
Tips
 To promote a calendar to the parent workspace Calendars dictionary, select a calendar,
select the  Context menu, and then select Promote to Workspace.
 You can also create a calendar by duplicating an existing calendar. Select the  Context
menu next to the calendar, and then select Duplicate.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Configure Project-level Calendar Time Period Settings

A calendar's time period settings specify the default number of hours in each work period. The
standard time period hours defined in the Application Settings are displayed by default, but can
be changed after the calendar is created. Time period settings are separate from the calendar's
standard work week values, which specify the working hours for each day of the week.
The application calculates and stores time unit values in hourly increments, but you can
configure your user preferences (see "Configure Time Units" on page 66) to display time
units in other increments, such as days or weeks. The values specified for Time Periods are
used to convert hours to other time increments for display, and to convert all non-hourly time
increments to hours for storage in the database.
To configure a project-level calendar's time period settings:
3) Select the Summary tab.
4) In the Time Periods section, enter the default number of hours in a day, week, month, and
year.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
350
Settings
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Specify Project-level Calendar Availability for Assignment

Before calendars can be assigned, they must be made available to supporting objects. Each
project-level calendar can be made available for assignment to the project or to project
resources and roles.
Making project-level calendars available to the project enables you to set it as the default project
calendar or to individual activities in the project. The option is selected by default when a
calendar is created.
To specify project-level calendar availability:
4) In the Available To section, select Project, Resource/Role, or both.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 If you assign a project-level calendar to a project-level resource or role, then the resource or
role can't be promoted to the workspace unless you remove the calendar assignment or
promote the project calendar to the workspace.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
351
Set Project-level Calendar Exception Time

Exception time is set by selecting periods of time on a calendar that are exceptions to the
calendar's standard working hours. You can set exception time for individual dates or in bulk for
a range of dates. Select a period of time on a particular date to specify the new working time for
that date, or use the Manage Exceptions button to specify the exception time for a date range.
For example, your organization may decide to give employees a half day of vacation time the
day before a scheduled holiday. In this case, the first half of the standard work day would be
selected, thereby designating it as exception time. You can also set an entire day as
unavailable, indicating that the day cannot be worked at all or available, indicating that the day
can be worked without the restriction of standard work hours. Remove changes by setting
individual days back to standard working time or using the Remove option in the Manage
Exceptions dialog box to remove exceptions for a range of dates.
The calendar's Day and Week views enable you to add exception time, but only the Week view
supports setting an entire day as unavailable or available. The Month and Year views enable
you to see the different working time types at a high level. A legend below the calendar indicates
whether each time period displayed is standard, exception, unavailable, or holiday time.
Set Exception Time for a Range of Dates

To set project-level calendar exception time for a date range:
1) Navigate to the Calendars dictionary page (see page 443).
3) Select the Summary or Calendar tab.
4) Select the Manage Exceptions button.
5) In the Manage Exceptions dialog box:
1. In the Select Exception Dates section, from the Exception Type drop-down list, select
Unavailable or Available.
For Unavailable Exception Type:
 In the From and To fields, select the dates for which you want to add the
Unavailable exception.
Notes:
 You can select Unavailable exception time for full days only. If you
selected Unavailable exception type, then the Full Day check box
will be selected by default.
 Only the working days of a standard work week are marked as
unavailable. For example, if Saturday and Sunday are non-working
days for your standard work week, then the Unavailable exception
will not be added to any Saturdays and Sundays within your selected
date range.
For Available Exception Type:
a. In the From and To fields, select the dates for which you want to add the Available
exception.
352
Settings
b. (Optional) Select the Full Day check box to make full days within your selected date
range as available.
c. In the Start Time and End Time fields specify the time when the Available exception
time starts and ends for your selected date range.
Notes:
 The Start Time and End Time fields will not be available if you
selected the Full Day check box.
 Available exception time is added for both working and non-working
days of the standard work week.
2. Select Add Exception.
3. In the Exception Dates section, view your specified exception time.
4. (Optional) Repeat the above steps to add additional exception time for a new set of
dates.
5. Select Apply to apply the exceptions to the selected calendar.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
7) Select  Save.
Set Exception Time for Individual Dates

To set project-level calendar exception time for individual dates:
3) Select the Calendar tab.
4) Navigate to a time period in the calendar when exception time should be added.
5) In the Day or Week view, make any of the following adjustments to the calendar:
 To change the work hours for a day, select a period of time on a specific day. Change the
exception time on the calendar by dragging the entire block of time or by expanding or
reducing the block of time. The block of time indicates the new work hours for the day.
 To set an entire day as nonworking time, select the date menu, and then select
Unavailable.
 To set a holiday as a work day, select the date  menu, and select Available. Adjust the
exception time for the new work day by dragging, expanding, and reducing the block of
time.
 To revert any changes you made to a day, select the date menu, and then select Set
to Standard. You can also remove individual blocks of exception time by select the X
within a block.
353

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
7) Exceptions are displayed on the Summary tab.
Tips
 Any day can be set as unavailable, available, or with a range of exception time within the
day. This includes days set as holidays.
 To remove an already defined exception, in the Exception Dates section of the Manage
Exceptions dialog box, select Remove, and then select Apply.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Promote a Project-level Calendar to the Parent Workspace

If a project-level calendar should be made available to other projects in the workspace, you can
promote it to the parent workspace. If the promoted calendar's ID is not unique throughout the
parent workspace's hierarchy, the promotion will fail. If this occurs, modify the ID and try again.
After the calendar is promoted, it is removed from the project-level Calendars dictionary.
You must have the required security privileges to add a calendar in the parent workspace.
To promote a project-level calendar to the workspace:
2) In the calendar list, select a calendar, select the  Context menu, and then select Promote
to Workspace.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
354
Settings
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Codes (Project-level)
In the project Codes dictionary, codes are available to be assigned to activities within the
project. Project-specific codes are useful when there are codes that only need to be available to
a single project. You can use codes to help you categorize your data based on shared
characteristics. Codes can be added as columns, grouping bands, sorting options, filters, and
more. If a project-level code should be made available to more areas of your application, you
can promote it to the parent workspace.
Add a Project-level Code

Codes enable you to categorize and track objects based on attributes they share. Add codes to
the project Codes dictionary if they should only be available to a specific project. You can
promote project-level codes if they should be made available to other objects in the project's
parent workspace.
You can apply project-level codes to the activities within the project.
To add a project-level code:
1) Navigate to the project Codes dictionary page (see page 445).
2) In the table, select  Add Code .
3) In the new row, in the Name and ID columns, enter a name and ID for the new code.
4) In the Applies to panel, Activities is selected by default, making it available for assignment
to activities in the project. Clear the Activities option if you do not want the code to be
available for assignment.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Individual activity code values can be associated with a color, which can then be used to
color activity bars in the Gantt chart on the Activities page.
 To promote a code and its values to the parent workspace Codes dictionary, select a code in
the table, select the  Context menu, and then select Promote to Workspace. Select
Save.
355
Add a Value to a Project-level Code

Add values to codes so that you can group, sort, and filter objects based on their code values. At
the project level, you can add values to project-specific activity codes. Individual activity code
values can be associated with a color, which can then be used to color activity bars in the Gantt
chart on the Activities page.
To add a code value to a project-level code:
1) Navigate to the project Codes dictionary page (see page 445).
2) In the table, select a code or code value.
3) Do either of the following:
 In the toolbar, select the  Add Code  menu, and then select Add Code Value. A new
value is added beneath the selection.
 In the table, select the  Context menu, and then select Add Code Value.
4) In the Name and ID columns, enter a name and ID for the code value.
5) (Optional) In the Color column, select a color for the code value. Code value colors are used
on the Activities page to color activity bars in the Gantt chart according to each activity's
assigned codes and code values.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Code values can be configured hierarchically to further enhance your object organization.
Select the  Context menu next to a code value, and then choose to move the value up,
down, left, or right.
Dictionaries (Workspace)
Workspace-level dictionaries are repositories of items that can be used across the application,
without having to create the same items for each object. Workspace-level dictionary items can
be used in the projects, portfolios, programs, ideas, and child workspaces within the workspace.
Dictionaries provide for efficient reuse of organizational data. For example, you can create
multiple calendars or codes in a workspace and then apply them across activities in multiple
projects in that workspace.
Calendars
In the workspace Calendars dictionary, create calendars to identify work and nonwork days and
hours for projects, resources, and roles within the workspace.
356
Settings
Shared Data Overview (on page 341)
Calendars Overview
Calendars enable you to define available workdays and work hours in a day, observe national
and recognized holidays, and add exceptions to the standard work time. Assign calendars to
projects, resources, roles, and activities to specify their time constraints in a uniform way.
Calendar assignments are used for scheduling, leveling, risk analysis, and other processes
throughout the application.
You can create an unlimited number of calendars to accommodate different work patterns. For
example, if some activities require a five-day workweek, while others can only be performed
part-time (such as Monday, Wednesday, and Friday), you can create different calendars and
assign them to the activities and resources in your projects. An activity's Type setting determines
whether the activity will use the calendars from its assigned resources and roles or from the
project when scheduling its dates.
workspace-level calendar can be made available to projects, resources/roles, or both. This
ensures calendars intended for projects or resources/roles are only available to those types of
objects. The calendar marked as the default calendar is automatically made available to
projects, resources, and roles within the workspace and is automatically assigned to new
projects, resources, and roles when they are created. The calendar assigned to a project also
controls the default calendar for new activities within the project. There is one default calendar
per workspace. Any calendar in the workspace can be assigned as the default calendar.
You can also create Calendars (Project-level) (on page 347) if they only need to be available
to a single project. Project-specific calendars are available for assignment to the project and
project activities, resources, and roles. When assigning a calendar to a project, activity,
resource, or role, you can choose from a workspace-level or project-level calendar. If a
project-level calendar should be made available to more projects, you can promote it to the
parent workspace.
The default workspace calendar designation and calendar assignments on individual objects can
be changed at any time. Each project, resource, role, and activity must always have a calendar
assigned.
Add a Holiday List

Add a holiday list to include any public or company holidays observed by the organization that
should be reflected in project and resource schedules. An existing list can be assigned to a
calendar during the calendar's creation, or you can assign a calendar's holiday list later. One
holiday list can be selected per calendar.
Holiday lists are available to be used throughout the workspace hierarchy. You must have the
security privileges required to add and edit calendars in the workspace to add and edit a holiday
list.
To add a holiday list:
2) Select Holidays.
357
3) In the Manage Holiday Lists dialog box, select  Add, and then enter a name for the
holiday list. You can also select an existing list.
4) Select Edit Holiday List.
5) Select  Add to create a new holiday for the list. Enter a name for the holiday. You can also
select an existing holiday.
6) Choose when the holiday occurs:
 Once on: Select if this holiday is a onetime occurrence.
 Repeat every: Select if this holiday occurs on the same date every year.
Note: You can select on a calendar when holidays are recognized as

part of the standard work week.
 Repeat the: Select if this holiday occurs on a different date each year, but always occurs
on the same day and week each year.
7) Continue to enter dates as needed.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Calendar
Add calendars to a workspace so they can be available for assignment to projects, resources,
and roles within the workspace.
To add a calendar:
2) Select  Add.
3) In the Add Calendar wizard, complete the following steps:
a. Name: Enter a Name and ID for the calendar. Select Next.
358
Settings
b. Create Work Week: Specify the standard number of work hours per day by manually
entering the number of hours or by selecting the time period on the calendar. Change the
time periods on the calendar by dragging the entire block of time or by expanding or
reducing the block of time. Select Next.
c. Add Holidays: Choose a holiday list to assign to the calendar. The holidays in the
selected list are displayed.
 Select the If a holiday falls on standard nonwork time, move option if your
calendar has holidays that fall on standard nonwork time and should be marked as
holiday time during standard work time. Select where on the calendar the holiday
should be reflected.
Notes:
 This setting affects the placement of activities and resources/roles
during scheduling and leveling. Changes to a holiday's placement on
the calendar are not reflected in the Calendar tab of the Calendars
dictionary page.
 This setting applies to holidays being placed on nonwork time during
the standard work week. It is unaffected by unavailable time created
by an exception.
 Select Finish.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 You can assign a calendar from a higher-level workspace by selecting Assign. You can only
modify a calendar from its owning workspace.
 To duplicate an existing calendar, select the  Context menu next to the calendar, and then
select Duplicate. This is useful if you want to modify a calendar assigned from a different
workspace.
 You can modify a calendar's name and ID values in the calendar list, its standard hours on
the Standard Work Week tab, and its holiday list on the Summary tab.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
359
 Scope
 Tasks
Configure Calendar Time Period Settings

A calendar's time period settings specify the default number of hours in each work period. The
standard time period hours defined in the Application Settings are displayed by default, but can
be changed after the calendar is created. Time period settings are separate from the calendar's
standard work week values, which specify the working hours for each day of the week.
The application calculates and stores time unit values in hourly increments, but you can
configure your user preferences (see "Configure Time Units" on page 66) to display time
units in other increments, such as days or weeks. The values specified for Time Periods are
used to convert hours to other time increments for display, and to convert all non-hourly time
increments to hours for storage in the database.
To configure a workspace-level calendar's time period settings:
4) In the Time Periods section, enter the default number of hours in a day, week, month, and
year.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Specify Calendar Availability for Assignment

workspace-level calendar can be made available to projects, resources/roles, or both. Both
options as selected by default when a calendar is created. If a calendar is not available to one of
these objects, it will not appear as an option when assigning calendars to that type of object.
360
Settings
The calendar set as the default calendar is automatically made available to projects, resources,
and roles. This can only be changed if you set a different calendar as the default.
To specify calendar availability:
4) In the Available To section, select Project, Resource/Role, or both.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Set Calendar Exception Time

Exception time is set by selecting periods of time on a calendar that are exceptions to the
calendar's standard working hours. You can set exception time for individual dates or in bulk for
a range of dates. Select a period of time on a particular date to specify the new working time for
that date or use the Manage Exceptions button to specify the exception time for date range. For
example, your organization may decide to give employees a half day of vacation time the day
before a scheduled holiday. In this case, the first half of the standard work day would be
selected, thereby designating it as exception time. You can also set an entire day or date range
as unavailable, indicating that the day or the date range cannot be worked at all. Or, you can set
the entire day or date range as available, indicating that the day or date range can be worked
without the restrictions of standard work hours. Remove the changes by setting individual days
back to standard working time or using the Remove option in the Manage Exceptions dialog box.
The calendar's Day and Week views enable you to add exception time, but only the Week view
supports setting an entire day as unavailable or available. The Month and Year views enable
you to see the different working time types at a high level. A legend below the calendar indicates
whether each time period displayed is standard, exception, unavailable, or holiday time.
361
Set Exception Time for a Range of Dates

To set calendar exception time for a date range:
3) Select the Summary or Calendar tab.
4) Select the Manage Exceptions button.
5) In the Manage Exceptions dialog box:
1. In the Select Exception Dates section, from the Exception Type drop-down list, select
Unavailable or Available.
For Unavailable Exception Type:
 In the From and To fields, select the dates for which you want to add the
Unavailable exception.
Notes:
 You can select Unavailable exception time for full days only. If you
selected Unavailable exception type, then the Full Day check box
will be selected by default.
 Only the working days of a standard work week are marked as
unavailable. For example, if Saturday and Sunday are non-working
days for your standard work week, then the Unavailable exception
will not be added to any Saturdays and Sundays within your selected
date range.
For Available Exception Type:
a. In the From and To fields, select the dates for which you want to add the Available
exception.
b. (Optional) Select the Full Day check box to make full days within your selected date
range as available.
c. In the Start Time and End Time fields, specify the time when the Available exception
time starts and ends for your selected date range.
Notes:
 The Start Time and End Time fields will not be available if you
selected the Full Day check box.
 Available exception time is added for both working and non-working
days of the standard work week.
2. Select Add Exception.
3. In the Exception Dates section, view your specified exception time.
4. (Optional) Repeat the above steps to add additional exception time for a new set of
dates.
5. Select Apply to apply the exceptions to the selected calendar.
In Primavera Cloud:
362
Settings
a. Select Save.
Note: You can view your added exception time in the Exceptions
section on the Summary tab. The Exceptions section displays the
exceptions as individual dates.
Set Exception Time for Individual Dates

To set calendar exception time for individual dates:
3) Select the Calendar tab.
4) Navigate to a time period in the calendar when exception time should be added.
5) In the Day or Week view, make any of the following adjustments to the calendar:
 To change the work hours for a day, select a period of time on a specific day. Change the
exception time on the calendar by dragging the entire block of time or by expanding or
reducing the block of time. The block of time indicates the new work hours for the day.
 To set an entire day as nonworking time, select the date menu, and then select
Unavailable.
 To set an entire day as working time, select the date menu, and then select Available.
 To revert any changes you made to a day, select the date menu, and then select Set
to Standard. You can also remove individual blocks of exception time by select the X
within a block.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Select  Save.
7) Exceptions are displayed on the Summary tab.
Tips
 Any day can be set as unavailable, available, or with a range of exception time within the
day. This includes days set as holidays.
 To remove an already defined exception, in the Exception Dates section of the Manage
Exceptions dialog box, select Remove, and then select Apply.
363

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Set the Default Calendar

There is one default calendar per workspace. The calendar set as the default calendar in the
workspace-level Calendars dictionary is automatically assigned to new projects, resources, and
roles when they are created. The calendars of existing projects, resources, or roles are not
affected. Any calendar in the workspace can be assigned as the default calendar. One calendar
must always be defined as the default.
The default calendar is automatically made available to projects, resources, and roles. This can
only be changed if you set a different calendar as the default. The application has a built-in
default calendar. The settings in this calendar cannot be changed. After another calendar has
been assigned as the default, this calendar can be deleted.
You can also set the default calendar on the Project page in the workspace Defaults & Options.
Choose from a list of calendars that are available to the Project object. This will also make the
calendar available to resources and roles.
To set the default workspace calendar:
2) In the list of calendars, select the Default option for a calendar.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 If the calendar you selected was only available to Project or Resource/Role, then both
options are automatically selected when you select a new default calendar.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
364
Settings
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Codes
Create and configure codes to help you categorize and track different objects based on
characteristics they share. In the workspace Codes dictionary, codes are available to be
assigned to a variety of objects in the workspace.
Codes Overview
Codes help you categorize your data objects based on characteristics that they share. If you
have many instances of an object, codes help you group and filter potentially vast amounts of
information spanning different areas of the organization. You can also use codes to arrange
objects hierarchically. The application supports an almost unlimited number of codes and values;
therefore, you can establish as many as you need to meet the filtering, sorting, and reporting
requirements of your organization.
At the workspace level, codes can be created and associated with a wide variety of objects
available within the workspace. At the project level, you can create activity codes that will only
be available to a single project.
Workspace-level codes can be created for the following objects:
 Activities
 Commitments
 Contracts
 Custom Logs
 Files
 Funds
 Ideas
 Portfolios
 Programs
 Projects
 RFIs
 Reports
 Resources/Roles
 Risks
 Scope Items
 Strategies
 Submittals
 Tasks
365
 WBSs
 Work Packages
Add a Code
Create codes to help categorize and track objects based on attributes they share.
You can apply workspace-level codes to one or more of the following objects: Activities, Custom
Logs, Files, Funds, Ideas, Portfolios, Programs, Projects, Reports, Resources/Roles, Risks,
Scope Assignments, Scope Items, Strategies, Task Constraints, Tasks, WBSs, and Work
Packages.
To add a code to one or more objects:
1) Navigate to the Codes dictionary page (see page 444).
2) In the table, select  Add Code .
3) In the new row, in the Name and ID columns, enter a name and ID for the new code.
4) In the Applies to panel, select one or more objects to apply the code.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
You can also perform this task on a single object from the Summary & Settings panel in
Primavera Cloud:
1) In the object selector, select a workspace.
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options.
4) Select the object, and then select the Codes tab.
Note: To add a code to this object that exists in the current or parent
workspace, select Assign. Codes that display for the current workspace
are the codes assigned to other objects in the workspace. Codes that
display from the parent workspace are only the codes that are assigned
to the same object type.
Tips
 Individual activity code values can be associated with a color, which can then be used to
color activity bars in the Gantt chart on the Activities page.
 The color associated with code values can be displayed on the Portfolio Scorecard page.

 Cost and Funds
366
Settings
 Custom Logs
 Dashboards
 Files
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Value to a Code

Add values to codes so that you can group, sort, and filter objects based on their code values.
To add a code value:
1) Navigate to the Codes dictionary page (see page 444).
2) In the table, select a code or code value.
3) Do either of the following:
 In the toolbar, select the  Add Code  menu, and then select Add Code Value. A new
value is beneath the selection.
 In the table, select the  Context menu, and select Add Code Value.
4) In the Name and ID columns, enter a name and ID for the code value.
5) (Optional) In the Color column, select a color for the code value.
 Code value colors are used on the Activities and the Task List page to color activity
bars in the Gantt chart according to each activity's or task's assigned codes and code
values.
 The color associated with code values can be displayed on the Portfolio Scorecard
page.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
367
You can also perform this task on a single object from the Summary & Settings panel in
Primavera Cloud:
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options.
4) Select the object, and then select the Codes tab.

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Dashboards
 Files
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Curve Profiles
Create and modify curves that can be applied to scope assignments, resource assignments for
time phase distribution, or budgets.
Curve Profiles Overview

Curve profiles enable you to specify the allocation of scope assignment costs, quantities, and
hours over the duration of an activity; resource or role hours spread over the duration of an
activity; and budget quantities over their durations.
Amounts are distributed evenly throughout an activity unless a nonlinear distribution is specified
using a curve profile. Scope assignments can use curve profiles regardless of whether they are
linked to activities.
368
Settings
Interpreting Curve Profiles

After you navigate to the Curve Profiles dictionary page, you can view all of the default and
custom curve profiles available to you. Select a curve profile to view a graph that represents how
it works. The x-axis, labeled at the top of the graph, represents the percentage of the object's
duration. The y-axis, labeled along the left side of the graph, represents the percentage of the
object that has been allocated to th e duration percentages. The numbers along the bottom of
the graph indicate what percentage of the is allocated at each increment of the duration.
Among the simplest built-in curve profiles is the Linear profile. Select it to view its graph. By
default, the Linear curve profile evenly distributes 5.00% of the total quantity to every 5%
increment in the item's duration, rounding as necessary.
Here is a list of all the built-in curve profiles:
 Bell
 Double Bell
 Delayed Double Bell
 Offset Triangular
 Triangular Decrease
 Triangular Increase
 Front Loaded
 Three Step
 Linear
 Back Loaded
 Trapezoidal
 Triangular
Define a Curve Profile

Define curve profiles to specify how scope assignment costs, quantities, and hours spread over
the duration of an activity; resource or role hours spread over the duration of an activity; and
budget quantities over budget durations. There are some default curve profiles defined in the
application. You can add a new curve, which is based on the default linear curve, or copy and
modify one of the existing curves.
To define a curve profile:
1) Navigate to the Curve Profiles dictionary page (see page 444).
2) To copy an existing curve, select the  Context menu next to the curve to copy, and select
Duplicate.
To create a curve, select the  Context menu for a curve, and select Add.
3) Enter a Curve Name.
4) Modify the curve value percentages to create a curve that indicates how your costs and
quantities should distribute over time. Curves are defined by 21 points (5% intervals from 0
to 100 is the default for a new curve).
5) Select Prorate to make the total of the distribution values equal to 100% while maintaining
the shape you specified.
369

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Units of Measure
Define a standardized set of unit measurements. These measurements can be assigned to
material resources, scope items, and actuals line items to evaluate quantity.
Units of Measure Overview

A unit of measure is a standardized way to define how materials or products are measured.
Assigning the unit of measure provides a means to identify how the quantity is evaluated. Units
of measure can be defined for material resources, scope items, and actuals line items.
Add a Unit of Measure

Add units of measure labels to assign to material resources, scope items, and actuals line items.
To add a unit of measure:
1) Navigate to the Units of Measure dictionary page (see page 444).
2) In the Abbreviation field, enter a short name or code for the unit of measure.
3) In the Name field, enter the name for the unit of measure.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
370
Settings

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Locations
Locations enable you to categorize and report on projects, resources, and risks based on
geographical location. For example, you can filter the Projects inventory panel by location to
allow managers to focus on the projects in their region. You can also use location as a filter
condition when creating portfolios.
Locations Overview
A location is a geographical reference defined by a pair of coordinates; longitude and latitude.
To create a location, you can enter its coordinates directly or enter a street address and allow
the application to find the longitude and latitude for you.
Assign locations to projects, resources, or risks to produce reports based on geographical
location. You can also group and filter lists of objects that support locations. Locations are
created and stored in the Locations dictionary at the workspace level. They can also be created
and stored at the project, resource, or risk level and optionally saved to the Locations dictionary
for future use. When choosing projects for a portfolio, location data can be used as a filter
condition.
Note: Oracle Primavera Cloud uses Oracle Map Cloud service for
location data. (http://elocation.oracle.com
(http://elocation.oracle.com))
Add a Location
Create locations to assign to projects, resources, or risks so that you can report, search, and
filter by location.
To create a location:
1) Navigate to the Locations dictionary page (see page 445).
2) On the Locations page, select  Add.
3) In the Add Location dialog box:
b. In the ID field, enter a unique identifier for the location.
c. (Optional) In the Description field, enter a description of the location
371
d. Enter either a street address or the latitude and longitude.
Notes:
improve results.
e. Select Locate.
f. Select Add.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 You can also import locations from a worksheet. Select Import , and then select
Download Import Template to generate a template to help you format the data correctly.
 Locations can be created on the Details Summary & Settings page for a project, on the
Resource List page for a resource, or in the project or program Risk Register for a risk. By
default, the locations created for a project, resource, or risk are stored with the object, but
you can optionally save the location to the Locations dictionary for future use.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Download an Import Template for Importing Locations

Download a Microsoft Excel template to use when importing location data.
2) On the Locations page, select Import , and then select Download Import Template.
372
Settings

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
LocationImportTemplate.
 The top two rows of the worksheet are required when importing data locations from a
worksheet. Do not change the data in these rows.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Import Locations
You can import new locations into the application from a Microsoft Excel (.xls or .xlsx) file.
To import locations:
2) On the Locations page, select Import.
3) In the Import Locations dialog box, select  Browse, select a file, and select Import.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
373
Tips
 Select Download Import Template to download a template file ready for you to populate
with data.
 Input longitude and latitude in the format that is appropriate for your geolocation service.
Enter longitude and latitude in decimal degrees or directional designators.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Currencies
Define currencies used at workspace and project level.
Currencies Overview
Configure currencies in the application to track the cost of your projects in their native currency.
For example, if the base currency of your organization is Euros, but your project is located in the
United States, you may want to set your project currency to United States Dollars. On pages that
support costs, you can view costs in workspace or base currency. You cannot change the
currency of a workspace or project once cost data exists.
Base Currency
The base currency is set at the root workspace during company provisioning. The base currency
you select should be the currency that the majority of the workspaces and projects will use.
Workspace Currency
Set a workspace currency for any workspace that will not use the base currency. The workspace
currency is the currency of record for the workspace, and when cost data is entered it will be in
this currency. The workspace currency exchange rate follows the most recent exchange rate
defined in the workspace. If workspace currency is selected but is not supported, cost data will
display in the base currency. For a currency to be available to use as a workspace currency, an
exchange rate must be defined and the sharing method set to Automatic. For more information,
see Workspace Currency Overview.
Project Currency
374
Settings
Set project currencies for any projects that will not use the base currency. The project currency
exchange rate follows the most recent exchange rates defined in the workspace. On pages that
support project costs, you can view costs in the project, workspace, or base currency.
Add a Currency
Add currencies to workspaces to make them available to projects in the workspace. All
currencies added to the root workspace are inherited in child workspaces. Changes to these
currencies must be made in the owning workspace. Add any other currencies that projects may
need by selecting them from the preexisting list.
To add a currency:
2) On the Currencies page, select  Add.
3) In the Select Currency dialog box, select currencies, and select Select.
4) Modify other currency settings as needed.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 The Decimal Places setting enables you to select how many decimal places to show when
viewing costs in the application. The database stores values for up to 6 decimals for cost
fields, regardless of the number of decimal places set to display.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Custom Currency

You can create custom currencies if the default currencies do not meet the needs of your
organization.
375
To add a custom currency:

2) On the Currencies page, in a new row, complete the following fields:
 Name: Enter a unique name for the currency.
 Currency Code: Enter a unique currency code with fewer than 3 characters.
 Currency Symbol: Enter a currency symbol. The currency symbol is displayed next to
monetary amounts in the application for users who chose to display currency symbols.
 Decimal Places: Enter the amount of decimal places to display. The application shows
up to 5 decimal places.
 Sharing Method: Specify how the currency is shared between parent and child
workspaces:
 Manual: The currency can be pulled down by child workspaces individually, using
the Assign button in each child workspace. This is the default option.
 Automatic: The currency is pushed down to child workspaces automatically.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add an Exchange Rate

Add exchange rates to currencies to keep cost calculations up-to-date. Exchange rates added to
workspace currencies will apply to project currencies. A workspace currency must have an
exchange rate defined to appear in the list of currencies available to the project. You can add
past exchange rates to retain a historical record before the currency is in use, or you can enter
the current exchange rate. You cannot enter future exchange rates. You cannot delete or edit
historical exchange rates. All exchange rates must be added to the currency in the owning
workspace.
376
Settings
For workspaces with workspace currency, all cost data will be recalculated and exchange rates
updated based on the latest exchange rate of the workspace currency.
To add an exchange rate to a currency:
2) On the Currencies page, in the table, select a currency.
3) In the Exchange Rates detail window, enter an Effective Date and Exchange Rate.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Configuration
The Configuration section specifies the default configuration of settings for each object in a
workspace. Each new instance of a particular object in the workspace will inherit the attributes
set in Configuration. Settings for each object include autonumbering defaults, standard and
configured fields, object codes, custom workflows, custom forms, and any other default settings
applicable to the object. The available configuration options vary by object.
Common Object Settings

Configure common settings, such as standard field labels, configured fields, and defaults
options, across objects.
377
Field Labels Overview

Standard fields are the default fields found in Oracle Primavera Cloud. Fields can be used to
store data, provide details, and accept user input. On many pages, fields can be added as
columns in a table, used to sort or group data, or used as filters to reduce the number of items
displayed on a page. They can also be found in dialog boxes, detail windows, and settings
pages. Fields may be associated with a specific object. For example, the activity object is
associated with various activity-related fields, such as Start, Finish, and Duration. These fields
can be used on pages that support activities.
The Field Labels tab in the Defaults & Options section of the workspace Summary & Settings
provides the default column name, column label, data type, and description of each field
associated with an object. Labels are the field names displayed throughout the application.
Default field labels may not reflect the terminology of your organization or industry. You can
customize labels to meet the needs of your organization in any of the twelve supported
languages.
Oracle Primavera Cloud and Primavera Professional documentation uses default field labels. If
you change a field label in the application, it will no longer match the label used in
documentation. Modified field labels can be reset back to their defaults.
Access a Standard Field Description

You can view the default column name, column label, data type, and description of any standard
field in the application. The column label of each field can be modified to match the terminology
used by your organization. Fields are associated with objects and can be used in pages that
support that object.
To view the details of a standard field:
2) On the object page, select the Field Labels tab, and view the Column Name, Column
Label, Data Type, and Description columns.

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
378
Settings
Change a Standard Field Label

You can update standard field labels in your native language or update labels in the Localization
detail window to customize the field label in other languages. In the table of standard fields, the
Column Name field specifies the original field name. The Column Label field specifies the
custom label, entered by the user. By default it matches the original field name.
Note: Oracle Primavera Cloud documentation uses default field labels. If

you follow these steps to change a field label in the application, it will no
longer match the label used in documentation.
To change a standard field label:

2) On the object page, select the Field Labels tab.
3) In the table, select a field.
4) In the Column Label field, enter a new label.
5) In the Localization detail window, select the Column Label field of the language, and enter
a new label.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 You can restore the default label of a standard field by selecting the  Context menu and
then selecting Reset Label.
 New child workspaces inherit the field labels set in the parent workspace. To apply field
labels to all existing child workspaces, select one or more fields, select the  Context
menu, and then select Apply Label to Child Workspace.

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
379
 Tasks
Configured Fields Overview

Configured fields are user-created fields that allow you to define and maintain data specific to
your organization. For example, you can track information such as Strategic Importance or Main
Stakeholder.
Configured fields are created in the context of an object and can be used in views on pages that
support that object. For example, you can create an Activity configured field and use it on the
Activities page as a column, grouping band, sorting option, or filter criterion. Configured fields
are global, so they can be used across all workspaces, projects, portfolios, programs, and ideas.
Oracle Primavera Cloud fields are categorized by data type, including: Boolean, cost, date,
integer, list, number, or text. Multi-currency is supported only for data type cost for formula
configured fields. For configured fields of data type cost, you can select the Currency tab in 
Settings to choose which currency to view cost data. For some types of data, you can define a
formula or statement to calculate values for a field. For a configured field of data type cost, the
cost formula calculation is performed and saved in base currency then converted to project
currency. For configured fields that are data type number and integer, using cost fields as part of
formulas will only produce one value. This value is always calculated and displayed in base
currency. For more information on creating or using custom formulas, consult the Oracle
Primavera Cloud Expression Language Guide on Oracle Help Center.
Documentation on adding a configured field to a specific object can be found under that object.
Change a Configured Field Label

You can update configured field labels in your native language or update labels in the
Localization detail window to customize the field label in other languages. In the table of
configured fields, the View Column Name field specifies the original field name. The Column
Label field specifies the custom label, entered by the user. By default it matches the original field
name.
To change a configured field label:
2) On the object page, select the Configured Fields tab.
3) In the table, select a field.
4) In the Column Label field, enter a new label.
5) In the Localization section, select the Column Label field of the language, and enter a new
label.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
380
Settings
Tips
 You can restore the default label of a configured field by selecting the  Context menu and
then selecting Reset Label.
 New child workspaces inherit the field labels set in the parent workspace. To apply field
labels to all existing child workspaces, select one or more fields, select the  Context
menu, and then select Apply Label to Child Workspace.

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Formula-Based Configured Field: Example
This example demonstrates how to create a configured field to calculate and store the Estimated
Final Cost of a project.
Note: For information on creating advanced formulas for measures, refer

to the Oracle Primavera Cloud Expression Language Guide on Oracle
Help Center.
Let us assume that you will define the Estimated Final Cost of a project as Approved Budget
plus Proposed Budget.
Creating a Configured Field

1) Navigate to the Project configuration page (see page 447).
2) On the Project page, select Configured Fields.
3) In the table, complete the following fields:
a. In the Column Label column, enter Estimated Final Cost.
b. In the View Column Name column, enter EST_FINAL_COST.
c. In the Data Type column, select Cost.
d. In the Type column, select Formula.
e. In the Summary Calculation column, select Sum.
381
Defining a Formula
1) In the Formula detail window, in the Field list, select Approved Budget, and select Insert
Field.
2) Select +.
3) In the Field list, select Proposed Budget, and select Insert Field.
4) Select Validate Formula.
5) In the Formula validation passed dialog box, select OK.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Note: Multi-currency is supported only for data type cost for formula
configured fields. For a configured field of data type cost, the cost
formula calculation is performed and saved in base currency then
converted to project currency. For configured fields that are data type
number and integer, using cost fields as part of formulas will only
produce one value. This value is always calculated and displayed in
base currency.
Tips
 To delete a configured field, select the field, select  Context, and then select Delete. You
cannot delete a configured field if it is used in a form, workflow, or field mapping.
Update the Owning Workspace of a Configured Field
Update the owning workspace of a configured field to move it to another workspace that you are
assigned. If you move the field to a workspace that is higher in the workspace hierarchy, it will
To update the owning workspace of a configured field:
2) On the object page, select the Configured Fields tab.
3) On the Configured Fields tab, select Manage Shared Data.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
382
Settings

 Cost and Funds
 Custom Logs
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Activity
Create and customize field labels, set activity defaults, and create codes to assign to activities
and other objects.
Access a Standard Field Description (on page 378)
Change a Standard Field Label (on page 379)
Add a Formula-Based Configured Field: Example (on page 381)
Update the Owning Workspace of a Configured Field (on page 382)
Change a Configured Field Label (on page 380)
Add a Code (on page 366)
Add a Value to a Code (on page 367)
Update the Owning Workspace of a Code (on page 345)
Configure Default Activity Settings for a Workspace

You can configure default system behavior for activities in a workspace.
To configure default activity settings for a workspace:
1) Navigate to the Activity configuration page (see page 446).
2) Select the Defaults tab.
3) In the New Activities section, configure default behavior for new activities:
 Duration Type: Determines how remaining duration, units, and units/time are calculated
when you update an activity that has resources assigned.
 Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the activity
duration or units are changed. Use this duration type when an activity has fixed
resources with fixed productivity output per time period.
383
 Fixed Units: The activity units are constant when the duration or resource units
per time are changed. Use this duration type when the total amount of work is
fixed, and increasing the resources can decrease the activity duration.
 Fixed Duration & Units: The duration and units remain constant as the units/time
is changed. Use this duration type when the activity must be completed within a
fixed time period and the total amount of work is fixed.
 Fixed Duration & Units/Time: The activity duration is constant as the units or
resource units per time are changed. Use this duration type when the activity must
be completed within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.
 Percent Complete Type: Determines the way in which the application calculates the
percent complete for the activity. The type can be Physical, Duration, Units, or Scope.
 Physical: The user will enter the percent complete for the activity.
 Duration: The percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining
duration.
 Units: The percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining units.
 Scope: The percent complete for the activity is derived from the scope percent
complete of the linked scope assignment.
 Activity Type: Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for the
activity.
 Activity Dependent: This type of activity indicates that assigned resources should
be scheduled based on the activity's calendar, rather than the calendars of the
resources.
 Resource Dependent: This type of activity indicates that resources should be
scheduled based on their assigned calendars. Use this type when the activity
duration may be affected by resource availability.
 Level of Effort: This type of activity indicates that it is ongoing with a duration
determined by its dependent activities. The duration is calculated based on the
schedule dates of its predecessors and successors. Administrative activities are
typically designated as Level of Effort.
 Start Milestone: This type of activity indicates the beginning of an important
project phase. Activities of this type have a duration of zero (0) with no resource
assignments.
 WBS Summary: This type of activity comprises a group of activities that share a
common WBS level. The duration is calculated based on its assigned calendar
(the earliest and latest dates summarized from its activities).
 Default duration for new activities: Enter the default time duration, in hours, for new
activities.
 Increment Activity ID based on selected activity: When disabled, new activity IDs
follow the activity auto numbering rules set in the project settings. When enabled, new
activity IDs are numbered based on the ID of the activities selected when the new
activities are added. See Add an Activity (on page 139) for more information.
4) In the New Assignments section, configure default behavior for new activity assignments:
 Drive activity dates by default: Determines whether new resource or role assignments
drive activity dates by default.
384
Settings
 Resource can be assigned to same activity more than once: Determines whether
activities can be assigned to the same resource multiple times.
 When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on activities: Select an
option to determine application behavior when activity resource assignments are
adjusted:
 Preserve the Units, Duration and Units/Time for existing assignments: Select
this option for units, durations, and units/time to remain constant when additional
resources are assigned to any activity.
 Recalculate the Units, Duration and Units/Time for existing assignments
based on the activity Duration Type: Select this option to calculate a resource
assignment's remaining values based on the activity's duration type.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for an Activity

Unique IDs are required for objects in the application. The IDs are automatically generated
based on the default values set for prefix, starting number, and increment. You can use the
defaults set in the application or enter values that represent your numbering system. Setting
these at the workspace level will apply the defaults to all projects or programs within the
workspace. Defaults can be updated at the project or program level.
To set the auto numbering defaults:
3) In the Auto Numbering section, define the auto numbering default values.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
385

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Configure Default Activity Calculation Settings for a Workspace

You can configure default activity calculation settings for workspaces to specify how the
application computes values for activities within that workspace.
To configure default activity calculation settings for workspaces:
2) Select the Defaults tab, and then review the sections under Calculations.
3) In the Activities section, configure calculation settings for project activities:
 When changing an activity to not started: Determines how units and duration are
handled if activity progress is removed.
 Reset planned duration and units to remaining: Select this option to reset
planned unit spreads to match the remaining units.
 Reset remaining duration and units to planned: Select this option to reset
remaining unit spreads to match the planned units.
 Link planned and remaining/at completion for not started activities: When enabled,
ensures that the planned and at completion values remain in sync when changes are
made to activities that have not started. When disabled, each field's values are calculated
independently.
 Define critical activities as: Select a method to identify critical activities:
 Total Float less than or equal to: Select this option to identify critical activities
based on the lack of flexibility in their scheduled dates. Enter a minimum float
duration. When the project is scheduled, activities with total float values less than
or equal to this value are marked critical.
 Longest Path: Select this option to define critical activities based on the sequence
of driving activities that determine the project end date.
4) In the Units and Costs section, configure calculation settings for units and costs:
 When updating actual units or cost: Determines how the application handles changes
to the actual units or actual costs on an activity or activity assignment.
 Add actual to remaining: Select this option to calculate a new at completion
value when the remaining units or actual units change.
 Subtract actual from at completion: Select this option to calculate a new
remaining units value when the at completion or actual units change.
 Recalculate actual units and costs when Duration Percent Complete changes:
Select this option to recalculate actual units and costs when the duration percent
complete is updated.
386
Settings
5) In the Scope Items section, select a default method for calculating scope completion
percentages. Scope completion percentage can be calculated using cost, quantity, hours, or
manually entered values.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Add an Activity Field

Add custom activity fields to enable users to enter or view information which is important to your
organization.
Note: On pages that support auto-save, configured field formulas will be

automatically recalculated when a change is made that impacts the
value of a configured field formula. However, there may be times where
the recalculation is not updated in the user interface. When this occurs,
refresh the page to see the recalculated value.
Note: New and updated configured field formulas are only recalculated
in the current schedule or the open scenario. Run the scheduler in
baselines or other scenarios to recalculate configured fields.
To add an activity field:

2) Select the Configured Fields tab.
3) In the table, select  Add.
a. In the Column Label column, enter a name for the new field.
b. In the View Column Name column, enter a name for the field as it will be seen in the
database when creating reports.
c. In the Data Type column, select the type for the new field. The choices are: Boolean,
Cost, Date, Integer, List, Number, or Text.
d. In the Type column, select Manual if this field will hold data entered by a user or
Formula if the data it holds will be calculated on the basis of a formula.
387
e. (Optional) In the Summary Calculation field, specify how the app calculates summary
rollup values for the field.
In most tables where you can view a list of similar objects, you can also view the totals for
the various values of these objects. For example, on the Activities table for a project, you
can view rollup totals for numerical values like Planned Duration and Planned Labor Units
at the top of the table.
The Summary Calculation field enables you to specify how totals are determined for
configured fields.
If you selected Cost, Date, Integer, or Number as the Data Type, in the Summary
Calculation column, select a simple calculation like Sum or Average, if applicable.
Alternatively, if you set the Type field to Formula, you can set the Summary Calculation
field to Use Formula. With this option selected, the app will use the formula defined in the
Formula field to determine how the total rollup value is calculated for the field.
f. (Optional) If you selected Text as the Data Type, in the Field Length column, enter the
maximum number of characters that can be used in the field.
g. If you selected Formula, configure the Formula section. Note: When adding a null check
to a formula, you must specify the null check at the beginning of the if condition
statement.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 To choose which currency to view cost in configured fields of data type cost, select the
Currency tab in  Settings.
 Multi-currency is supported only in data type cost for formula configured fields.
 For a configured field of data type cost, the cost formula calculation is performed and saved
in base currency then converted to project currency.
 For configured fields that are data type number and integer, using cost fields as part of
currency.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
388
Settings
Activity Relationship
Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your organization.
Localize names and column labels for supported languages.
File
Create new configured fields to meet the needs of your organization. Localize names and
column labels for supported languages.
Add a File Field

Add custom file fields to enable users to enter or view information which is important to your
organization.
To add a file field:
1) Navigate to the File configuration page (see page 446).
d. (Optional) If you selected Text as the Data Type, in the Field Length column, enter the
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
389

 Cost and Funds
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Project
Set project defaults including calendars, update progress, and auto numbering. Customize field
labels, add configured fields, create project measures, add project codes, and assign custom
workflows and forms.
Assign a Custom Workflow at the Workspace Level (on page 401)
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Scope Change Request

3) In the Auto Numbering section, define the auto numbering default values for Change
Request and Change Item.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
390
Settings

Tips
 Users can manually overwrite the default values when adding these objects in the
application.

 Scope
Set the Default My Activities Settings

You can configure default My Activities settings for a workspace to determine how web and
mobile users update their project activities for any project in that workspace by default.
To configure default My Activities settings for a workspace:
3) In the Team members are assigned to activities as section, select a method for how team
members are assigned to activities.
 Resource Assignments: Each user who is assigned a resource assignment can view
that assignment and update its progress.
 Activity Owners: Each user who is assigned to an activity as its Owner can view the
activity and update its progress.
 Both: Resource assignments can view and update their assignments, and activity
owners can view and update their activities. Users who have activities and resource
assignments will see entries for both.
4) In the Select the fields team members can update section, add the fields you want team
members to view and use to update their progress.
 Assignment Fields: Add the fields you want team members assigned as resource
assignments to use to status their activities.
 Activity Fields: Add the fields you want team members assigned as activity owners to
use to status their activities. If a team member who owns an activity also has a resource
assignment for that activity, then the team member will be able to view and update both
the assignment and the activity.
 Codes and Configured Fields: Add codes and configured fields that you want activity
owners or resource assignment performers to view or use to update their activities. To
make any code or configured field read-only, select Read Only by the field. In order for a
user to update Cost-type codes or configured fields, the user needs the Project
Costs/Financials privilege on the project.
 (Optional) Select Team member can update progress of other resource assignments
on activity if you want activity owners to be able to update the progress of all resource
assignments for their activities.
391

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Add a Project Field

Add custom project fields to enable users to enter or view information which is important to your
organization.

To add a project field:

392
Settings
configured fields.
statement.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
currency.

 Cost and Funds
 Files
 Resources
 Risk
393
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Measures Overview
Measures are user-defined metrics for quantitatively monitoring the health and performance of
your data. You can create separate measures for portfolios or strategies, programs (see "Add a
Program Measure" on page 405), and projects (see "Add a Project Measure" on page 395).
For example, you can create measures to capture the number of on-time projects in your
portfolio or program, the return on investment of individual strategies, or the percentage of
critical activities in a project. Measures can be added as part of the view on a variety of pages
Depending on the context, different object types are available to be used as the measure's
aggregation source, whose data is captured, aggregated, and displayed as the measure's value.
The value can be a cost, number, or percentage. Measures have two dimensions: actual and
target. The actual value is required and indicates the current value of the data the measure is
defined to track. The target value is optional and can be used when comparing the measure
against a defined threshold that you want to meet. Establish thresholds and indicators to visually
represent the status of a measure. Actual and target values can be calculated using a formula or
they can be set for manual entry. When defining formulas for the actual or target value, choose
whether the expression is based on attributes of the measure's aggregation source object or
based on existing measures. Attributes and existing measures cannot be used in the same
expression for a measure.
Measures are created at the workspace level and are available to the owning workspace's
hierarchy depending on their sharing method. To use a measure for a particular portfolio or
strategy within a workspace, the measure must first be associated with that portfolio or strategy.
Program and project measures do not need to be associated before they can be used in
workspaces where they are available. Use the following table to determine where different
measure types are configured, the pages where they are available to be used, and the objects
that can be used as an aggregation source.
Configuring Measures
Measure Type Configuration Available To Aggregation Source

Location
Portfolio Workspace  Portfolios Project
Measures Dictionary Inventory
 Portfolio:
Scorecard
 Workspace:
Summary
Scorecard
394
Settings
Strategy Workspace  Workspace: Project

Measures Dictionary Strategy List,
Strategy
Scorecard
Program Program Defaults &  Programs Project, Program
Options Inventory
Project Project Defaults &  Projects Activity, Risk,

Options Inventory Program, Project
 Portfolio: Budget
Planning,
Selection
Analysis,
Scenario
Comparison,
Scorecard
Measure tracking is also supported by Primavera Cloud's reporting and dashboard functionality.
Add a Project Measure

Project measures are configured at the workspace level and used to monitor activity and risk
attributes on projects in that workspace. You can view project measures as columns in the
projects inventory panel or by adding them to page views throughout the application. For more
information about measures, see Measures Overview (on page 394).
Measures use expressions to quantitatively monitor data important to you. A measure's
aggregation source indicates the object type whose data is being captured. Project measures
support activities, risks, and programs as an aggregation source and capture data from the
activities and risks within a project and from programs to which the project belongs.
The target and actual values used for measures can be configured for manual entry or using a
formula. Manual values are entered on pages where the measures appear. Formulas are
defined by creating expressions using activity, risk, or program attributes or using existing
project measures. Measures that use existing measures are called measure-based measures.
Measure-based measure expressions can use one or more of the available project measures.
When choosing a measure, you can select its target or actual expression. Attributes and
measure-based measures cannot be used in the same expression.
For information on creating advanced formulas for measures, refer to the Oracle Primavera
Cloud Expression Language Guide on Oracle Help Center.
To add a project measure:
2) On the Measures tab, select  Add.
 Name: The name of the measure.
 (Optional) Description: Details about the measure.
395
 Data Type: The type of data that the measure generates. Options include Cost, Number,
and Percentage.
 Target Type: Determines whether the Target value of the measure is manually entered
or calculated using a formula. Entering a target value is not required.
 Actual Type: Determines whether the Actual value of the measure is manually entered
or calculated using a formula.
 Measure Based: Determines whether the measure is created using existing measures.
This option is available when either Target Type or Actual Type is set to Formula.
 Tracking Frequency: Determines how frequently you want to monitor the measure. For
example, if a formula-based measure's tracking frequency is set to Weekly, it is
computed every week. If it is a manual measure with Weekly tracking frequency, you can
enter measure values in weekly buckets.
 Aggregation Source: Determines whether you are capturing activities, risks, projects, or
programs data in the measure.
Note: You can recalculate project measures on demand in the projects

inventory panel.
4) If Target Type or Actual Type is set to Formula, select the Data Source detail window to
configure their formulas.
Note: The Data Source detail window is not displayed if both types are
set to Manual.
5) In the Data Source detail window, select any of the following sections, if applicable:
 Actual: Formula that calculates the current values for the measure.
 (Optional) Target: Formula that calculates a value that can be used when setting
thresholds to measure against. See Set a Threshold for a Project Measure (on page
 Base Expression: The base expression for the Actual or Target formulas when
Percentage is the selected Data Type.
6) In the selected section, enter a formula manually or using a formula template.
a. To enter a formula manually:
1. Select the Field list to locate the field to use in the calculation.
When the Measure Based option is selected, the Field list will only show
measures available to use in the formula.
2. Select Insert.
3. Select the mathematical symbols for the expression.
4. Add any other fields or symbols needed for the expression.
b. To use a formula template:
1. In the Aggregation Type list, select the calculation needed for the formula. The list is
not enabled when Measure Based or Project is selected.
2. Select Insert. The formula template appears.
396
Settings
3. To use the template, highlight or delete Field or Filter, including the angle brackets,
select a field from the Field list, and select Insert. Repeat for any additional fields or
fields to filter by.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Assign a project measure from a parent workspace to make it available to the current
workspace. Update the owning workspace of a measure to make it available to a greater
number of workspaces.
 Select the  Context menu next to an existing measure, and then select Duplicate to
duplicate the measure.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Reports
 Resources
Set a Threshold for a Project Measure
Set thresholds for project measures to see the status of measures using visual indicators when
monitoring activity attributes in a project.
To set a threshold for a project measure:
2) On the Measures tab, in the table, select a measure.
3) Select the Thresholds detail window.
4) Select  Add.
5) In the Operator field, select a parameter to use in the threshold calculation.
6) In the Value field, enter a threshold value to use in the calculation.
7) In the High Value field, enter the top of the range when the operator is set to Within Range
or Not Within Range.
8) In the Indicator Color field, select a color to visually represent status when the threshold is
met.
397
9) In the Indicator Icon field, select an icon to visually represent status when the threshold is
met.
10) In the Goal list, select whether a high or low value indicates a positive change in the
measure.
11) In the Threshold Computation Method, select how thresholds are calculated using Actual
and Target values.
 Actual Value: The current value. This is the value as calculated by the expression for
Actual on the Data Source tab.
 Percent of Target: The percentage of the actual value compared to the target value.
12) Add as many thresholds as necessary for the measure.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Reports
 Resources
Configure Project Field Mappings

Field mappings specify correspondences between the fields of different types of objects. For
example, a field mapping between projects and ideas establishes relationships between idea
and project fields that can be used in workflows for various tasks, such as creating a project
proposal using idea data.
2) Select the Field Mapping tab.
3) On the Field Mapping tab, in the table, select  Add Field Mapping, and then complete
the following fields:
 Name: The name of the field mapping.
 ID: A unique identifier for the field mapping.
 Source Object: The object that project fields will be mapped against. The field mapping
specifies correspondences between project fields and the available fields of the selected
object.
398
Settings
4) In the detail window, in the table, select  Add to specify a field mapping between projects
and the selected source object.
5) In the Project Field column, select a project field.
6) In the Source Field column, select an available field from the source object.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Select Assign to assign a set of field mappings available for the object as a field mapping for
objects of that type contained in the workspace.
Set the Add Project Proposal Form

When users create project proposals, a form appears that enables them to enter all of the
required information. You can replace the default Add Project Proposal form with a form that you
create in the Workflows and Forms app.
Prerequisites
Before you can set a custom Add Project Proposal form, it must meet the following criteria:
Access: You must have access to the form.
Context type: The form must have a Context Type value of Project.
Required fields: The form must include the following fields:
 ID
 Name
 Project Currency
 Status
 Workspace
All of these fields must be editable. This means the fields and the form itself must have the
Editable data option selected.
Invalid elements: The form must not include the following form elements:
 Document grids
 Cover images
 Evaluation tables
 Cost UDFs
When you have a valid form, follow these steps to use it in place of the default Add Project
Proposal form:
399

2) Select the Forms tab.
3) In the Add Project Proposal row, in the Form field, select the form that you want to use
instead of the default Add Project Proposal form.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Now, when a user adds a project proposal, the custom form that you selected will be used in
place of the default proposal form.
Note: When a form has certain conditions for Content Type: Project, the
form cannot be used to create a project or proposal. These conditions
are:
 Mandatory fields are missing in the form.
 All fields are individually set as read-only.
 The form is set to read-only (even if fields are editable).
 The following fields are added to the form: Document Grid, Image,
Evaluation Table, or Cost UDFs.
Set the Details Page for Projects

By default, the Details page shows basic information about the project. But you can replace the
default Details page for all projects in a workspace with a custom form designed in the Form
Editor.
Before you can set a custom Details page, you must have access to a published form that has a
Context Type value of Project.
To choose a form as the Details page for all projects in a workspace:
3) In the Project Details Form row, in the Form field, select the form that you want to use
instead of the default Details page.
4) Select Save.
5) In the Inherit Form Mapping dialog box, select Yes or No.
If the current form is already assigned in child workspaces, select Yes if you want to replace
it with the new one. Otherwise, select No.
400
Settings
Now users who open the Details page for any project in this workspace will see the form you
chose here, not the default Details page.
Assign a Custom Workflow at the Workspace Level

In the Workflows and Forms app, you can create custom workflows that let you specify exactly
how these objects are managed:
 Budgets
 Budget changes
 Budget transfers
 Changes
 Change orders
 Commitments
 Contracts
 Ideas
 Potential Change Orders
 Projects
 Project Risks
 Submittals
After you have created a custom workflow, you can assign it to an object and action at the
workspace level to have your custom workflow run every time the action occurs in a project
within the workspace.
Note: In order for workspace-level workflow assignments to take effect in

projects, you must have the privileges required to edit the projects.
Similarly, in order for workspace-level workflow assignments to take
effect in child workspaces, the corresponding workflows must be shared
with the child workspaces.
To assign a custom workflow at the workspace level:

2) On the Workflow Actions tab, find the row that represents the action to which you want to
assign the custom workflow.
3) In the corresponding Workflow field, choose a custom workflow.
Only forms with the relevant Context Type value are available here. For example, you can
only assign a Risk workflow to manage risks.

5) In the Confirm dialog box, select Yes if you want all workspaces, projects, and programs
within the workspace to inherit the selected workflow, if applicable.
6) In Primavera Cloud, in the Summary & Settings panel, select  Close.
401
Program
Set auto numbering defaults, create and customize field labels, create new codes, assign
custom program forms, and create program measures.
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for Programs

these at the workspace level will apply the defaults to all programs within the workspace.
Defaults can be updated at the program level.
To set the auto numbering defaults for programs:
1) Navigate to the Program configuration page (see page 447).
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Set the Add and Edit Program Forms

By default, Oracle Primavera Cloud provides the forms that users use to add or edit programs. In
the Workflows and Forms app, you can create forms to replace these default forms. After that,
you can choose which forms appear when users add or edit programs.
To specify which forms appear when users add or edit programs:
This tab shows a list of forms used at various stages in a program's lifecycle.
 Add: The form to use when users add a program to this workspace. Users must
complete this form in order to add a new program to the workspace.
402
Settings
 Edit: The form to use when users modify or view program details. This form will be
displayed on the Details tab under program Summary & Settings.
Forms that are appended with "(System)" are default forms.
3) In the row that represents the form that you want to replace, specify the custom form.
Note: Only published forms with a Context Type of Program can be

configured for use with the programs. Forms must also contain all
required fields for the action they are associated with, and they must be
valid.

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Add a Program Field

Add custom program fields to enable users to enter or view information that is important to your
organization.
To add a program field:
d. (Optional) If you selected Text as the Data Type, in the Field Length column, enter the
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
403
Tips
currency.
Measures Overview
Measures are user-defined metrics for quantitatively monitoring the health and performance of
your data. You can create separate measures for portfolios or strategies, programs (see "Add a
Program Measure" on page 405), and projects (see "Add a Project Measure" on page 395).
For example, you can create measures to capture the number of on-time projects in your
portfolio or program, the return on investment of individual strategies, or the percentage of
critical activities in a project. Measures can be added as part of the view on a variety of pages
Depending on the context, different object types are available to be used as the measure's
aggregation source, whose data is captured, aggregated, and displayed as the measure's value.
The value can be a cost, number, or percentage. Measures have two dimensions: actual and
target. The actual value is required and indicates the current value of the data the measure is
defined to track. The target value is optional and can be used when comparing the measure
against a defined threshold that you want to meet. Establish thresholds and indicators to visually
represent the status of a measure. Actual and target values can be calculated using a formula or
they can be set for manual entry. When defining formulas for the actual or target value, choose
whether the expression is based on attributes of the measure's aggregation source object or
based on existing measures. Attributes and existing measures cannot be used in the same
expression for a measure.
Measures are created at the workspace level and are available to the owning workspace's
hierarchy depending on their sharing method. To use a measure for a particular portfolio or
strategy within a workspace, the measure must first be associated with that portfolio or strategy.
Program and project measures do not need to be associated before they can be used in
workspaces where they are available. Use the following table to determine where different
measure types are configured, the pages where they are available to be used, and the objects
that can be used as an aggregation source.
404
Settings
Configuring Measures
Measure Type Configuration Available To Aggregation Source

Location
Portfolio Workspace  Portfolios Project
Measures Dictionary Inventory
 Portfolio:
Scorecard
 Workspace:
Summary
Scorecard
Strategy Workspace  Workspace: Project
Measures Dictionary Strategy List,
Strategy
Scorecard
Program Program Defaults &  Programs Project, Program
Options Inventory
Project Project Defaults &  Projects Activity, Risk,

Options Inventory Program, Project
 Portfolio: Budget
Planning,
Selection
Analysis,
Scenario
Comparison,
Scorecard
Measure tracking is also supported by Primavera Cloud's reporting and dashboard functionality.
Add a Program Measure

Program measures are configured at the workspace level and used to monitor project attributes
on projects within a program. You can view program measures as columns in the programs
inventory panel. For more information about measures, see Measures Overview (on page 394).
Measures use expressions to quantitatively monitor data important to you. A measure's
aggregation source indicates the object type whose data is being captured. Program measures
support projects and programs as aggregation sources and capture data from the projects or
programs.
The target and actual values used for measures can be configured for manual entry or using a
formula. Manual values are entered on pages where the measures appear. Formulas are
defined by creating expressions using project or program attributes or using existing program
measures. The project and program attributes include project or program-level fields and project
or program measures that exist in the workspace. Measures that use existing measures are
called measure-based measures. Measure-based measure expressions can use one or more of
the available program measures. When choosing a measure, you can select its target or actual
expression. Attributes and measure-based measures cannot be used in the same expression.
405
For information on creating advanced formulas for measures, refer to the Oracle Primavera
Cloud Expression Language Guide on Oracle Help Center.
To add a program measure:
2) On the Measures tab, select  Add.
 Name: The name of the measure.
 (Optional) Description: Details about the measure.
 Data Type: The type of data that the measure generates. Options include Cost, Number,
and Percentage.
 Target Type: Determines whether the Target value of the measure is manually entered
or calculated using a formula. Entering a target value is not required.
 Actual Type: Determines whether the Actual value of the measure is manually entered
or calculated using a formula.
 Measure Based: Determines whether the measure is created using existing measures.
This option is available when either Target Type or Actual Type is set to Formula.
 Tracking Frequency: Determines how frequently you want to monitor the measure. For
example, if a formula-based measure's tracking frequency is set to Weekly, it is
computed every week. If it is a manual measure with Weekly tracking frequency, you can
enter measure values in weekly buckets.
 Aggregation Source: Determines whether you are capturing projects or programs data
in the measure.
Note: You can recalculate program measures on demand in the

programs inventory panel.
4) If Target Type or Actual Type is set to Formula, select the Data Source detail window to
configure their formulas.
Note: The Data Source detail window is not displayed if both types are
set to Manual.
5) In the Data Source detail window, select any of the following sections, if applicable:
 Actual: Formula that calculates the current values for the measure.
 (Optional) Target: Formula that calculates a value that can be used when setting
thresholds to measure against. See Set a Threshold for a Program Measure (on page
 Base Expression: The base expression for the Actual or Target formulas when
Percentage is the selected Data Type.
6) In the selected section, enter a formula manually or using a formula template.
a. To enter a formula manually:
1. Select the Field list to locate the field to use in the calculation.
When the Measure Based option is selected, the Field list will only show
measures available to use in the formula.
406
Settings
2. Select Insert.
3. Select the mathematical symbols for the expression.
b. To use a formula template:
1. In the Aggregation Type list, select the calculation needed for the formula. The list is
only enabled when Measure Based is not selected.
2. Select Insert. The formula template appears.
3. To use the template, highlight or delete Field or Filter, including the angle brackets,
select a field from the Field list, and select Insert. Repeat for any additional fields or
fields to filter by.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Select the  Context menu next to an existing measure, and then select Duplicate to
duplicate the measure.

 Dashboards
 Reports
Set a Threshold for a Program Measure
Set thresholds for program measures to see the status of measures using visual indicators when
monitoring project or program attributes in a program.
To set a threshold for a program measure:
2) On the Measures tab, in the table, select a measure.
3) Select the Thresholds detail window.
4) Select  Add.
5) In the Operator field, select a parameter to use in the threshold calculation.
6) In the Value field, enter a threshold value to use in the calculation.
7) In the High Value field, enter the top of the range when the operator is set to Within Range
or Not Within Range.
407
8) In the Indicator Color field, select a color to visually represent status when the threshold is
met.
9) In the Indicator Icon field, select an icon to visually represent status when the threshold is
met.
10) In the Goal list, select whether a high or low value indicates a positive change in the
measure.
11) In the Threshold Computation Method, select how thresholds are calculated using Actual
and Target values.
 Actual Value: The current value. This is the value as calculated by the expression for
Actual on the Data Source tab.
 Percent of Target: The percentage of the actual value compared to the target value.
12) Add as many thresholds as necessary for the measure.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Dashboards
 Reports
Resource/Role
Relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your organization, localize names and column
labels for supported languages, and create new codes.
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Resource or Role

1) Navigate to the Resource/Role configuration page (see page 447).
408
Settings
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Resources
Resource Assignment
Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your organization.
Localize names and column labels for supported languages.
Add a Resource Assignment Field

Add custom resource assignment fields to enable users to enter or view information which is
important to your organization.

To add a resource assignment field:

1) Navigate to the Resource Assignment configuration page (see page 448).
409
configured fields.
statement.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
currency.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
410
Settings
WBS
Create new configured fields and relabel standard fields to meet the needs of your organization,
localize names and column labels for supported languages, and create new codes.
Add a WBS Field

Add custom WBS fields to enable users to enter or view information which is important to your
organization.

To add a WBS field:

1) Navigate to the WBS configuration page (see page 448).
configured fields.
411
statement.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
currency.

 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
Project
Configure settings at the project level.
Details
Add or update project details.
412
Settings
Add an Image to a Project

A project image is shown in some areas of the application, such as the Project Home page. You
can upload your own image or choose from existing images. You cannot upload an image with a
CMYK color format.
To add an image to a project:
2) Select  Select Image.
3) In the Select Image for Project dialog box, choose one of the following:
 Under the Upload New Image section, in the Image field, select  Browse, and then
select an image.
 Under the Choose from Existing section, select Gallery or Uploaded, and then select
an existing image.
4) Select Select.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 To restore the default project image, select Reset to Default in the Select Image for
Project dialog box.
Change the Status of a Project

The current status of a project determines how the project is handled within the application.
Project status can be set manually or through a workflow, depending on the status type. A new
project is set to Active by default.
To change the status of a project:
2) In the Details section, in the Status list, select the appropriate status:
 Proposal: The project is a project proposal and has not been extensively planned nor
accrued any costs. A project proposal can only be created using a workflow and a
change in status must also be performed through a workflow.
 Rejected: The project proposal has been rejected and will not be executed as a project.
A project can only be marked as Rejected through the use of a workflow.
 Planned: The project is currently planned for execution. Project managers input expected
project costs and other project data during this stage. A change in status can be
413
 Active: The project is currently active and being executed. A change in status can be
 Inactive: The project has been rendered inactive and will temporarily accrue no costs. A
change in status can be performed manually or through a workflow.
 Complete: The project has been successfully completed and will no longer accrue costs.
A change in status can be performed manually or through a workflow.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Assign a Manager to a Project

Assign managers to projects to identify the project manager or person responsible for managing
the project.
The user who created the project is automatically assigned as the manager.
To assign a manager to a project:
2) In the Details section, in the Manager field, select a manager.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
2) In the table, select a project, and then add a manger in the Manager field.

 Cost and Funds
414
Settings
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Assign a Project Calendar

Each project must have a calendar assigned. The project calendar determines valid work and
nonwork times during the project. The project calendar is automatically assigned to all new
activities within the project. Existing activity calendar assignments are not affected. An activity's
calendar can be updated at any time.
The default calendar in the parent workspace is automatically assigned as the project calendar
when the project is created, but this can be changed to suit the needs of the project. When
assigning a project calendar, you can select workspace-level or project-level calendars that have
been made available to the project object.
To assign a project calendar:
2) In the Details section, in the Calendar field, select a calendar.
level.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Set the Data Date for a Project

The data date is the progress point, or "as-of date," for activities in the project. Project status is
up-to-date as of the data date.
The data date is also used for updating the dates of scope assignments and work packages
when they are not linked to activities.
415
Note: Dates will not change after the Data Date is updated for activities
or scope assignments unless you run the Scheduler or Modify Dates
feature, respectively.
To set the project data date:

2) In the Details section, in the Data Date field, select the date.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Cost and Funds
 Dashboards
 Reports
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Set the Reporting Cycle for a Project

Set the reporting cycle to be used in your project. Reporting cycles are used to enable users to
plan, status, and report project status on scope assignments or to store period performance of
activities.
Note: If a default reporting cycle is set for the workspace, all new
projects will inherit this reporting cycle. You can change or remove the
default reporting cycle.
To set a reporting cycle:

2) In the Details section, in the Reporting Cycle field, select the reporting cycle.
3) In the Frequency for Resetting Period Names list, choose when period names are reset.
The options available are based on the selection for Reporting Cycle. The standard calendar
start and end dates are used as boundaries for resetting periods.
416
Settings
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
 Scope
View the Construction Value

You can review construction values to projects to help track the total cost of a project over the
construction period. Construction values can include the cost of materials, subcontractor totals,
overhead costs, general conditions, and taxes.
To view a construction value to a project:
2) In the Details section, in the Construction Value field, review the total cost for the project.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Assign a Location to a Project

You can assign locations to projects to produce reports based on geographical location, and to
group and filter projects by a variety of location details. Locations are also used in the spatial
search feature and required to configure companies. Locations can be chosen from an existing
entry in the Locations dictionary at the workspace level or created and stored directly at the
object level. When creating a new location at the object level, you can optionally save it to the
Locations dictionary for future use.
To assign a location to a project:
2) In the Location section, complete the following fields:
417

Notes:
improve results.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Configure Schedule Settings for a Project

Configure project schedule settings to set planned project start and finish dates, as well as a
date by which the project must finish. These dates are also used to drive the project scheduler
during the scheduling process.
To configure schedule settings for your project:
2) In the Schedule section, in the Project Planned Start field, select the start date.
3) In the Project Planned Finish field, select a planned finish date.
4) In the Schedule Must Finish By Date field, select the date the project must finish by.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Resources
418
Settings
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
Modify a Project Currency

Projects inherit the base or workspace currency by default, but you can set a custom project
currency. A workspace currency must have an exchange rate defined to appear in the list of
currencies available to the project. A project can be viewed in the project, workspace, or the
base currency. For information on pages that support workspace currency, see Workspace
Currency Overview.
The currency exchange rate will be set for the life of the project at the project creation date. For
example, if the project is created on Jan 5, 2022, the project exchange rate will be set to the
exchange rate for that date and will not reflect changes to the workspace exchange rate. The
exchange rate can be modified on the project (under project details), but only if no cost data has
been entered.
The project currency cannot be changed if costs exist for a project.
To modify a project currency:
2) In the Currency section, in the Project Currency field, select the project currency.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
The Exchange Rate field is automatically populated with the exchange rate defined at the
workspace level. You can change it if costs are not already defined for the project.

 Cost and Funds
 Resources
 Risk
 Schedule
 Scope
 Tasks
419
Settings
Configure settings depending on your needs for schedule management, scope management,
tasks, payment applications, timesheets, or more.
Configure Activity Defaults for a Project

You can configure default system behavior for new activities and resource assignments for your
project.
Note: Although you can configure default values for activity type,
duration type, and percent complete type, you can also manually adjust
these values for individual activities.
To configure default settings for new activities and resource assignments:

2) Select the Activity Defaults tab.
3) In the New Activities section, configure default behavior for new activities:
 Duration Type: Determines how remaining duration, units, and units/time are calculated
when you update an activity that has resources assigned.
 Fixed Units/Time: The resource units per time are constant when the activity
duration or units are changed. Use this duration type when an activity has fixed
resources with fixed productivity output per time period.
 Fixed Units: The activity units are constant when the duration or resource units
per time are changed. Use this duration type when the total amount of work is
fixed, and increasing the resources can decrease the activity duration.
 Fixed Duration & Units: The duration and units remain constant as the units/time
is changed. Use this duration type when the activity must be completed within a
fixed time period and the total amount of work is fixed.
 Fixed Duration & Units/Time: The activity duration is constant as the units or
resource units per time are changed. Use this duration type when the activity must
be completed within a fixed time period regardless of the resources assigned.
 Percent Complete Type: Determines the way in which the application calculates the
percent complete for the activity. The type can be Physical, Duration, Units, or Scope.
 Physical: The user will enter the percent complete for the activity.
 Duration: The percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining
duration.
 Units: The percent complete is calculated from the actual and remaining units.
 Scope: The percent complete for the activity is derived from the scope percent
complete of the linked scope assignment.
 Activity Type: Determines how duration and schedule dates are calculated for the
activity.
 Activity Dependent: This type of activity indicates that assigned resources should
be scheduled based on the activity's calendar, rather than the calendars of the
resources.
420
Settings
 Resource Dependent: This type of activity indicates that resources should be

scheduled based on their assigned calendars. Use this type when the activity
duration may be affected by resource availability.
 Level of Effort: This type of activity indicates that it is ongoing with a duration
determined by its dependent activities. The duration is calculated based on the
schedule dates of its predecessors and successors. Administrative activities are
typically designated as Level of Effort.
 Start Milestone: This type of activity indicates the beginning of an important
project phase. Activities of this type have a duration of zero (0) with no resource
assignments.
 WBS Summary: This type of activity comprises a group of activities that share a
common WBS level. The duration is calculated based on its assigned calendar
(the earliest and latest dates summarized from its activities).
 Default duration for new activities: Enter the default time duration, in hours, for new
activities.
 Increment Activity ID based on selected activity: When disabled, new activity IDs
follow the activity auto numbering rules set in the project settings. When enabled, new
activity IDs are numbered based on the ID of the activities selected when the new
activities are added. See Add an Activity (on page 139) for more information.
4) In the New Assignments section, configure default behavior for new activity assignments:
 Drive activity dates by default: Determines whether new resource or role assignments
drive activity dates by default.
 Resource can be assigned to same activity more than once: Determines whether
activities can be assigned to the same resource multiple times.
 When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on activities: Select an
option to determine application behavior when activity resource assignments are
adjusted:
 Preserve the Units, Duration and Units/Time for existing assignments: Select
this option for units, durations, and units/time to remain constant when additional
resources are assigned to any activity.
 Recalculate the Units, Duration and Units/Time for existing assignments
based on the activity Duration Type: Select this option to calculate a resource
assignment's remaining values based on the activity's duration type.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
421
Configure the Task Time Zone Setting

The Task Time Zone setting determines which time zone to use when marking tasks as overdue
or due this week. This is especially important when users and companies are located in different
time zones and the accuracy of your project performance is critical to project success. The
check for overdue tasks and tasks due this week is run each time a task is edited and daily at
midnight for the selected time zone. The default value is (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time. The
chosen time zone also determines the latest date that can be selected for a task's Completed
Date.
To configure the time zone setting:
2) Select the Tasks tab.
3) In the Task Time Zone field, select the time zone that will be used to check for tasks that are
overdue or due this week.
4) Select Yes to confirm your selection.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Tasks
Configure Task Summary Settings

The Task Summary tool consists of checks that monitor various project metrics. Each check can
be enabled or disabled in the project settings. Some checks also have minimum criteria values
that can be modified. Individual checks can be enabled or disabled according to your
organization's needs. Completed tasks are not included in any of the check results.
To configure settings for the Task Summary tool:
2) Select the Tasks tab.
3) In the Task Summary Settings section, configure the following settings:
 For each check, select the Active option to include the selected check in the Task
Summary panel.
 For each check that supports minimum criteria values, in the Minimum Criteria field,
enter a new value.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
422
Settings

Tips
 If you are accessing the Tasks tab for the first time, you may be prompted to run the Task
Summary checks. Select Run to run the checks.

 Tasks
Configure Task Color at the Project-level

The Color Tasks by setting determines the attribute used to color task cards and tasks bars. At
the project-level tasks colors can be changed to any value regardless of the workspace setting.
To configure task colors:
1) Navigate to the project settings page (see page 442)
2) Select the Task Color tab.
3) In the Task Color section, in the Color Tasks by list, select one of the following:
 Company: Individual company color are specified at the project level only. At a
workspace level, a list of all project companies with randomized colors are displayed.
Color associations are read-only. To edit workspace level settings go to Configure Task
Color Defaults for a Task.
 Workspace level activity codes: Code value colors specified at the workspace level.
 Workspace level task codes: Code value colors specified at the workspace level.
Note: Only workspace codes enabled for both the Activity and Task are
available for selection in the Color Tasks by list.
4) Use the color picker to select a new color for the Company.
1. You can set color associations or add more code values for workspace level codes. Code
values are set in the Defaults & Options: Task page in the workspace.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
6) Select  Save.
  Tasks
423
Configure Calculation Settings for a Project

Configure project calculation settings to define how the application computes values concerning
activities and units at the project level.
To configure project calculation settings:
2) Select the Calculations tab.
3) In the Activities section, configure calculation settings for project activities:
 When changing an activity to not started: Determines how units and duration are
handled if activity progress is removed.
 Reset planned duration and units to remaining: Select this option to reset
planned unit spreads to match the remaining units.
 Reset remaining duration and units to planned: Select this option to reset
remaining unit spreads to match the planned units.
 Link planned and remaining/at completion for not started activities: When enabled,
ensures that the planned and at completion values remain in sync when changes are
made to activities that have not started. When disabled, each field's values are calculated
independently.
 Define critical activities as: Select a method to identify critical activities:
 Total Float less than or equal to: Select this option to identify critical activities
based on the lack of flexibility in their scheduled dates. Enter a minimum float
duration. When the project is scheduled, activities with total float values less than
or equal to this value are marked critical.
 Longest Path: Select this option to define critical activities based on the sequence
of driving activities that determine the project end date.
4) In the Units and Costs section, configure calculation settings for units and costs:
 When updating actual units or cost: Determines how the application handles changes
to the actual units or actual costs on an activity or activity assignment.
 Add actual to remaining: Select this option to calculate a new at completion
value when the remaining units or actual units change.
 Subtract actual from at completion: Select this option to calculate a new
remaining units value when the at completion or actual units change.
 Recalculate actual units and costs when Duration Percent Complete changes:
Select this option to recalculate actual units and costs when the duration percent
complete is updated.
 Link actual to date and actual this period units and costs: When enabled, actual and
actual this period unit and cost field values for an activity or resource assignment are
recalculated when one of these values is updated.
 Calculate costs from units: When enabled, modifying a resource or role assignment's
units automatically updates its costs, and cost fields for the assignment are read-only.
When disabled, assignment cost fields are directly editable. All new assignments inherit
this setting, but its status can be modified per assignment.
424
Settings
 Default Price/Unit for activities without resource or role Price/Unit: Enter a price/unit
value to be used in cost calculations on activities without resource or role assignments or
when a new assignment does not have any availability periods defined.
Notes:
 A Default Price/Unit value greater than 0 must be set if you will be
entering labor or nonlabor costs on activities that have no resource
or role assignments.
 A change in this value only applies to new activity and resource
assignment values. You must recalculate costs (see "Recalculate
Activity Costs" on page 201) on the Activities page to update
current activity and resource assignment values.
 Specify the default Rate Type for new resource and role assignments: Choose the
default rate type to be used when a resource or role is assigned to an activity. This can
be modified per assignment.
 Calculate project usage spreads when running Recalculate Costs: When enabled,
Project Usage spreads are calculated when running the Recalculate Costs for the current
schedule. This setting does not apply to scenarios or baselines.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Risk
 Schedule
Configure the Earned Value Baseline

The earned value baseline is used to calculate the numerous fields used for earned value
management. Before you can view earned value data, you must designate an existing original,
current, or supplementary baseline as the earned value baseline. Designating a particular
baseline as the baseline used in earned value calculations enables you to measure project
progress against other baselines without affecting your existing earned value data.
The original baseline is selected as the default earned value baseline, but this can be changed
at any time. If the selected baseline does not exist in the project, all earned value fields will be
set to 0. It is recommended that you reschedule your project and recalculate project costs on the
Activities page any time you designate a new earned value baseline, update the current earned
value baseline, or create a new baseline with the same type as the current earned value
baseline. This ensures all earned value fields are up-to-date. If you delete the earned value
baseline, all earned value calculations will be reset when you recalculate costs.
425
To configure the earned value baseline:

2) Select the Earned Value tab.
3) In the Analyze Earned Value Using list, select Original Baseline, Current Baseline, or
Supplementary Baseline.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Configure My Activities Settings for a Project

Configure My Activities settings for your project to enable users to view and edit the fields
required for updating activities using the My Activities page or the Primavera Cloud apps.
To configure My Activities settings:
2) Select the My Activities tab.
3) In the Team members are assigned to activities as section, select a method for how team
members are assigned to activities.
 Resource Assignments: Each user who is assigned a resource assignment can view
that assignment and update its progress.
 Activity Owners: Each user who is assigned to an activity as its Owner can view the
activity and update its progress.
 Both: Resource assignments can view and update their assignments, and activity
owners can view and update their activities. Users who have activities and resource
assignments will see entries for both.
4) In the Select the fields team members can update section, add the fields you want team
members to view and use to update their progress.
 Assignment Fields: Add the fields you want team members assigned as resource
assignments to use to status their activities.
 Activity Fields: Add the fields you want team members assigned as activity owners to
use to status their activities. If a team member who owns an activity also has a resource
assignment for that activity, then the team member will be able to view and update both
the assignment and the activity.
 Codes and Configured Fields: Add codes and configured fields that you want activity
owners or resource assignment performers to view or use to update their activities. To
make any code or configured field read-only, select Read Only by the field. In order for a
user to update Cost-type codes or configured fields, the user needs the Project
Costs/Financials privilege on the project.
426
Settings
 (Optional) Select Team member can update progress of other resource assignments
on activity if you want activity owners to be able to update the progress of all resource
assignments for their activities.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
Project Activity Prerequisites
Project activities are not always visible to their performers or owners on the My Activities page.
Before an activity owner or assignment performer can view or update an activity on the My
Activities page, these conditions must be satisfied:
 The project to which the activity belongs must be set to Active. See Change the Status of a
Project (on page 106).
 For activity owners, Activity Owners or Both must be selected on the My Activities tab of
the project Settings page, under Team members are assigned to activities as. See
Configure My Activities Settings for a Project (on page 426).
 For resource assignments, Resource Assignments or Both must be selected on the My
Activities tab of the project Settings page, under Team members are assigned to activities
as. See Configure My Activities Settings for a Project (on page 426).
 For resource assignments, resources must be associated with the appropriate Primavera
Cloud users. See Associate a User with a Project Resource (on page 289).
Configure the Auto Numbering Defaults for a Project

Unique IDs are required for a number of objects in the application. For example, in the Scope
app, auto numbering defaults can be set for scope items, work packages, scope assignments,
change requests, and change items. The IDs are automatically generated for each new object
based on the default values set at the workspace level for prefix, suffix, and increment. You can
use the defaults or enter values that represent the numbering system used for your project.
2) Select the Auto Numbering tab.
3) Define the auto numbering defaults for the objects used in the following areas.
 Cost: Actuals, Budget Change, and Budget Transfer
 Files: Custom Logs
 Ideas: Idea
 Tasks: Tasks, Task Constraint
427
 Resources: Resource/Role
 Risk: Risk
 Schedule: Activity, Schedule Scenario, WBS
 Scope: Scope Item, Work Package, Scope Assignment, Change Request, Change
Item, and WBS
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 Users can manually overwrite the default values when adding these objects in the
application.
 When importing scope items or scope assignments, if the ID column in the import template is
left blank, the Scope Item ID or Scope Assignment ID columns are populated with the auto
numbering defaults.
Configure Payment Application Settings for Projects (Deprecated)

Configure Payment Application settings for your project to enable users to specify default Period
To and Retainage percentage values for payments in the project.
To configure payment application settings:
2) Select the Payment Applications tab.
3) In the Period To field, enter the default billing period for new payment applications.
4) In the Retainage field, enter the default amount to be withheld on line items until the work is
completed.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Configure the Submittal Settings for a Project (Deprecated)

Configure Submittal settings for your project to enable users to specify default Coordinator and
Approver roles.
428
Settings
To configure submittal settings:

2) Select the Documents tab.
3) In the Coordinator field, select the user who you want to coordinate submittals and monitor
their progress.
4) In the Approver field, select the user who you want to give final approval for submittals.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Assign a Custom Workflow at the Project Level

In the Workflows and Forms app, you can create custom workflows that let you specify exactly
how these objects are managed:
 Budgets
 Budget changes
 Budget transfers
 Changes
 Change orders
 Commitments
 Contracts
 Ideas
 Potential Change Orders
 Projects
 Project Risks
 Submittals
After you have created a custom workflow, you can assign it to an object and action at the
project level to have your custom workflow run every time the action occurs in a project.
To assign custom workflows at the project level:
2) On the Workflow Actions tab, select the object to which you want to assign a custom
workflow.
3) In the table, select the action to which you want to assign a custom workflow.
The actions available here correspond to the selected object.
4) In the corresponding Workflow field, choose a custom workflow.
429
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Now, whenever the chosen action occurs for the chosen project, your custom workflow runs
instead of the default workflow.
Set the Default Print Layout for a Workspace or Project (Deprecated)

Before you can print a print layout report, you must set a default print layout for your object at
the workspace or project level. Setting a default print layout at the workspace level affects all
child workspaces and projects that do not have a default. Default print layouts set at a child
workspace or project level will not be overwritten if changes are made at a higher level. Each of
the objects compatible with print layouts can be assigned a different print layout.
The following objects support print layouts:
 Change Orders
 Commitments
 Contracts
 Payment Applications
 Submittals
To set a default print layout for a workspace (Primavera Cloud only):
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select an object.
5) In the Print Layout section, in the Default field, select a print layout.
6) Select Save.
To set a default print layout for a project:
2) Select the Print Layouts tab.

 Reports
430
Settings
Assign a Custom Risk Form at the Project Level

At the project level, you can determine which form users fill out when they create risk proposals
for a project. This can be the default risk proposal form, which includes basic information, or a
custom risk proposal form created in the Form Editor.
To assign a custom form at the project level:
2) On the Forms tab, select Risk.
3) In the Propose row, in the Form field, choose a custom form.
4) This is the form users will fill out when they propose a new risk for a project.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Now, whenever the action in the Action Name field occurs for the chosen object, the application
will present the specified custom form instead of the default form.
Configure Schedule Health Score Settings

Schedule Health Score metrics have default descriptions, target threshold values, and weight
calculation values that can be modified in the project settings. You can also modify additional
check criteria where applicable. Individual checks can be enabled or disabled according to your
organization's needs.
To configure settings for the Schedule Health Score tool:
2) Select the Schedule Health Check tab.
3) Select Ignore Completed Activities if you want to exclude completed activities from the
analysis.
4) In the table, select a check, and then configure the following settings:
 Description: Modify the description of the check depending on your organization's
needs.
 Active: Include the selected check in the Schedule Health Score panel. Only active
checks are used in the schedule health score calculation.
 Target: Set the target threshold percentage value for the check. Typically, a check that
exceeds the threshold value is marked red in the Schedule Health Score panel.
 Weighting: Set the numerical weighting of the check. This value is used when
determining the overall schedule health score.
5) In the General detail window, you can view or modify the same check details as in the table.
Some checks have additional metrics that you can modify in the Criteria section of the detail
window.
431

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.

 Schedule
Assign a Timesheet Supervisor to a Project

Configure timesheet settings for a project to assign a timesheet supervisor to the project.
To configure timesheet supervisor:
2) Select the Timesheets tab.
3) In the Timesheet Supervisors section, select  Add .
4) In the Add Supervisors dialog box, select a supervisor, select  Move Right to move it to
the selected list, and then select Select.
5) Select the Default option to select one of the supervisors as the default timesheet
supervisor.
Notes:
 A project user must have the Supervise Timesheets global
permission enabled to be assigned as a timesheet supervisor.
 A project can have multiple timesheet supervisors, but only one can
be selected as the default supervisor.
 To delete a timesheet supervisor, select a supervisor, select the 
Context menu, and then select Delete. The default timesheet
supervisor cannot be deleted.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
432
Settings
Link Timesheet Actual Hours and Assignment Actual Units

Linking timesheet actual hours to assignment actual units copies the timesheet actual hours to
resource assignment actual units and timesheet actual start to the resource assignment actual
start.
To link timesheet actual hours to assignment actual units:
2) In the Timesheet Actual Hours section, select the Link Timesheet Actual Hours and
Assignment Actual Units option to link approved timesheet hours and assignment actual
units and dates.
Note: Additionally, the timesheet actual hours are copied to the

Timesheet Actual Units row on the Assignment List page.

In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Allow Resources to Assign Themselves to Activities

You can determine, at the project level, whether users have the ability to add activities that they
have not been assigned to when they are adding hours to their timesheet. If a user adds an
activity that they have not been assigned to to their timesheet, then they will be automatically
assigned to that activity after the timesheet is approved.
To allow resources to assign themselves to activities:
2) In the Resource Assignment section, select the Allow resources to assign themselves
to activities option.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Program
Configure settings at the program level.
433
Details
Add or update program details.
Configure Auto Numbering Defaults for a Program

Unique IDs are required for objects in the application. The IDs are automatically generated for
each new object based on the default values set at the workspace level for prefix, starting
number, and increment. You can use the defaults or enter values that represent the numbering
system used for your program.
1) Navigate to the program settings page (see page 442).
2) Select the Auto Numbering tab.
3) Define the auto numbering defaults for the program.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
Tips
 You can manually overwrite the default values when adding a program in the application.
Assign a Custom Risk Form at the Program Level

At the program level, you can determine which form users fill out when they create risk
proposals for a program. This can be the default risk proposal form, which includes basic
information, or a custom risk proposal form created in the Form Editor.
To assign a custom form at the program level:
1) Navigate to the program settings page (see page 442).
2) On the Forms tab, select Risk.
3) In the Propose row, in the Form field, choose a custom form.
This is the form users will fill out when they propose a new risk for a program.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
434
Settings
Codes
Assign codes to the program to track specific information about a program. Using codes enables
you to group and filter on the program codes in other areas of the application.
Assign a Code to a Program

Assign codes to a program to help track programs based on attributes they share. When
managing a large number of programs, program codes enable you to filter and group information
across the organization.
To add a code to a program:
1) Navigate to the program codes page (see page 443).
2) Select Assign.
4) Select OK.
In Primavera Cloud:
a. Select Save.
435
Appendix of Referenced Navigation Steps
Navigate to the WBS page
In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a project.
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Schedule or  Scope, and select WBS.
a) On the File menu, select Open.
b) In the Open dialog box, select the Projects tab, select a project, and then select Open.
c) On the Project menu, select WBS.
Navigate to the Activities page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a project or program.
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Schedule, and select Activities.
b) In the Open dialog box, select the Projects or Programs tab, select a project or program,
and then select Open.
c) On the Project or Program menu, select Activities.
Navigate to the project Activities page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Schedule, and select Activities.
c) On the Project menu, select Activities.
Navigate to the Baselines page

In Primavera Cloud:
437
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Scope or  Schedule, and select Baselines.

c) On the Project menu, select Baselines.
Navigate to the Baselines or Activities page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Scope , and select Baselines or hover over  Schedule,
and select Baselines or Activities.
c) On the Project menu, select Baselines or Activities.
Navigate to the Schedule Comparison page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Schedule, and select Schedule Comparison.
c) On the Project menu, select Schedule Comparison.
Navigate to the workspace resource page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a workspace.
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources, and select Resource List.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Resources.
438
Navigate to the project resources page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Project menu, select Resources.
Navigate to the workspace or project resources page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a workspace or project.
c) On the Workspace or Project menu, select Resources.
Navigate to the workspace role page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources, and select Role List.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Roles.
Navigate to the project roles page

In Primavera Cloud:
439

c) On the Project menu, select Roles.
Navigate to the workspace or project roles page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a workspace or project.
c) On the Workspace or Project menu, select Roles.
Navigate to the workspace resource assignments page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources, and select Assignment List.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Resource Assignments.
Navigate to the project or program resource assignments page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources or  Schedule, and select Assignment List.
c) On the Project or Program menu, select Resource Assignments.
Navigate to the workspace resource analysis page

In Primavera Cloud:
440

b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources, and select Analysis.
c) In the Workspace menu, select Resource Analysis.
Navigate to the project or program resource analysis page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Resources, and select Analysis.
c) On the Project or Program menu, select Resource Analysis.
Navigate to the files page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a project, portfolio, program, or idea.
b) In the sidebar, hover over  Files, and select File List.
c) On the Project or Program menu, select Files.
Navigate to the project files page

In Primavera Cloud:
441
c) On the Project menu, select Files.
Navigate to the project or portfolio files page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the object selector, select a project or portfolio.
c) On the Project menu, select Files.
Navigate to the project Details page

In Primavera Cloud:
b) In the sidebar, select  Summary & Settings.
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Details.
c) On the Project menu, select Details.
Navigate to the project settings page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Settings.
c) On the Project menu, select Project Settings.
Navigate to the program settings page

In Primavera Cloud:
442
a) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Settings.

b) In the Open dialog box, select the Programs tab, select a program, and then select Open.
c) On the Program menu, select Details.
Navigate to the program codes page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the sidebar, select  Summary & Settings.
b) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Codes.
b) In the Open dialog box, select the Programs tab, select a program, and then select Open.
c) On the Program menu, select Program Codes.
Navigate to a dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select a dictionary item.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select a dictionary item.
Navigate to the Calendars dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Calendars.
443
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Calendars.
Navigate to the Codes dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Codes.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Codes.
Navigate to the Curve Profiles dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
3) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Curve Profiles.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Curve Profiles.
Navigate to the Units of Measure dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Units of Measure.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Units of Measure.
444
Navigate to the Locations dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Locations.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Locations.
Navigate to the Currencies dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Currencies.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Workspace, and then select Currencies.
Navigate to the project Calendars dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Calendars.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Project, and then select Calendars.
Navigate to the project Codes dictionary page

In Primavera Cloud:
445

c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Dictionaries, and then select Codes.
c) On the Dictionaries menu, select Project, and then select Codes.
Navigate to an object configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select an object.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select an object.
Navigate to the Activity configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select Activity.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Activity.
Navigate to the File configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select File.
446

c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Files.
Navigate to the Project configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select Project.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Project.
Navigate to the Program configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select Program.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Program.
Navigate to the Resource/Role configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select
Resource/Role.
447
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Resource/Role.
Navigate to the Resource Assignment configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select Resource
Assignment.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select Resource Assignment.
Navigate to the WBS configuration page

In Primavera Cloud:
c) On the Summary & Settings menu, select Defaults & Options, and then select WBS.
c) On the Workspace menu, select Configuration, and then select WBS.
Navigate to the Manage Services page

In Primavera Cloud:
a) In the header, select your username.
b) On the User menu, select Manage Services.
 On the User menu, select Manage Services.
Navigate to the Preferences page

In Primavera Cloud:
448
a) In the header, select your username.

b) On the User menu, select Preferences.
 On the User menu, select Preferences.
449
Copyright
Oracle Primavera Cloud Professional User Guide
Copyright © 2014, 2023, Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Oracle®, Java, and MySQL are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other
names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Inside are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC
trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC
International, Inc. AMD, Epyc, and the AMD logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing
restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as
expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy,
reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or
display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or
decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be
error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone
licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system,
integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to
U.S. Government end users are “commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use,
duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating
system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation,
shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other
rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management
applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications,
including applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or
hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate
failsafe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation
and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or
hardware in dangerous applications.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content,
products and services from third-parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible
for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products,
and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or
damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.
450

Primavera Pro User

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera Pro User

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera Pro User

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracle

Configure Network Settings ............................................................................................... 48

Add a Project Template ...................................................................................................... 86

Assign a Curve to a Resource or a Role Assignment ...................................................... 159

Resource and Role Usage Overview ................................................................................ 202

Add a Workspace Resource ............................................................................................. 273

Assign a Parent Workspace Role to a Workspace .......................................................... 297

Files Overview .....................................................................................................................................330

Calendars Overview .......................................................................................................... 357

Configure the Submittal Settings for a Project (Deprecated) ........................................ 428

Navigate to the Locations dictionary page .......................................................................................445

Oracle Primavera Professional Overview

Download and Install Primavera Professional

About Consent Notices in Primavera Professional

Viewing Your PI Data in Primavera Professional

Cookies Policy in Oracle Primavera Cloud

About Your Login Credentials

Note: The following requirements are suggested default options. The

Note: If you are added to an instance of Primavera Cloud hosted in the

Product Accessibility in Primavera Professional

 Undo Changes in Primavera Professional (on page 29)

Common Symbols, Icons, and Tabs: What to Expect

Navigation Overview (Primavera Professional)

Working with Navigation (Primavera Professional)

Table of Screen Highlights

Get Started with Primavera Professional

Access Primavera Cloud Training Center

Working with the Help Panel

Dictionaries Menu (Project):

Dictionaries Menu (Workspace):

Workspace Menu (Configuration):

Undo Changes in Primavera Professional

 Selecting the Activity Network view

Switch a Company Instance in Primavera Professional

Customize a Detail Window

1) In the detail window section, select the  Show/Hide Tabs menu.

1) Select  Settings, and add or remove columns.

5) Save or open the file.

1) Select  Run Report.

 Select  Discuss to open the Discussion panel.

Note: If no comments have been posted to the Discussion panel, the 

To post a new comment:

Print a Page to PDF

To print a page to a PDF:

 Page Layout: Choose the print order of the pages.

Select Return to Preview to exit the edit mode.

1) Select  Share this page.

Configure View Settings

refreshed using the Safari browser.

1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

To configure a saved filter:

1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

4) Enter a name for the new filter.

To apply a saved filter:

1) Navigate to a page, and then select the  Settings icon.

6) Apply the view:

To configure and apply filtering options: